Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Requirements

QCS 2014 Section 09: Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Page 1
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Scope 2
1.1.2 Related Works 2
1.1.3 References 2
1.1.4 Submittals 3
1.1.5 Quality Standards 10
1.1.6 Manufacturer‟s Experience 11
1.1.7 Factory Inspection 11
1.1.8 Factory Tests and Test Certificates 11
14
1.1.9 Shipment, Storage and Handling 11
1.1.10 Adaptation of Equipment 12
20
1.1.11 Guarantee 12
1.1.12 Job Conditions 12
1.1.13 Approved Manufacturers and Subcontractors 12
s
1.1.14 Hydraulic Sump Model Testing 13
rd
1.1.15 Sewage Characteristics 13
da
1.2.1 Materials 14
1.2.2 Workmanship an 15
1.2.3 Tropicalisation 15
1.2.4 De-rating Due to Climate Conditions 15
1.2.5 Steel 15
St
1.2.6 Equipment Bases and Bedplates 16

1.2.7 Anchors and Sleeves 16
n
1.2.8 Safety Guards 16

io
1.2.9 Drive Units 16

ct
1.2.10 Bearings 17
1.2.11 Lubrication 17
ru
1.2.12 Electric Motors 18

st
1.2.13 Pressure Gauges 18

1.2.14 Nameplates and Data Plates 18
on
1.2.15 Painting and Protective Coatings 19

1.2.16 Noise Levels and Vibration 19
C
1.2.17 Metal Plating 19

1.2.18 MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA‟s) 20
ar
1.1 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING .................................................... 20

at
1.2.19 Co-ordination 20
Q
1.2.20 Inspection During Installation 20

1.2.21 Preparation of Installation Areas 20
1.2.22 Manufacturers‟ Installation Supervision 20
1.2.23 Installation 21
1.2.24 Testing and Commissioning 21
1.2.25 Instruction and Training of the Employer‟s Personnel 23
1.2.26 In-Service Checks 23
1.2.27 Specialised Training Programme for Employer‟s Personnel 24
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the General Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Requirements, which
apply to all mechanical, and electrical systems and equipment and are a part of each and all
of the separate Sections of the Specification. The Contractor shall direct the attention of all
14
manufacturers and suppliers of mechanical and electrical equipment and related
appurtenances for the works to the provisions in the Contract Documents and this Section
20
and also to the extreme climatic conditions.
1.1.2 Related Works
s
Section 1, General
rd
Section 8, Sewerage
Section 10, Instrumentation, Control and Automation
da
Section 16 Structural Metal work
Section 17 Metal work
an
Section 21, Electrical Works
St
1.1.3 References
1 The following standards or revised/updated versions are referred to in this Part:

n
BS 88,.........................Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000 Va.c. and 1500
io
Vd.c
ct
BS 89,.........................(IEC 51) Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring

instruments and their accessories
ru
BS 142,.......................Electrical protection relays

st
BS 159,.......................High voltage busbars and connections

on
BS 162,.......................Electrical power switchgear and associated apparatus

BS 381C, ....................Colours for identification, coding and special purposes
C
BS 449,.......................The use of structural steel in building

BS 729, ......................(ISO 1459,1460,1461) Hot dip galvanised coatings
ar
BS 970, ......................(ISO 683) Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering
at
purposes
Q
BS EN 1561, .............(ISO 185) Flake graphite cast iron

BS 1780,.....................Bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges
BS 2048,.....................Dimensions of fractional horse power motors
BS EN 1563, .............(ISO 1083) Spheroidal graphite or nodular graphite cast iron
BS 3100,.....................Steel castings for general engineering purposes
BS 3643,..................... ISO metric screw threads. Principles and basic data
BS 3790, ....................(ISO 155, 254, 1813, 4183, 4184, 5292) Endless wedge belt drives
and endless
V-belt drives
Part 01: General
BS 4142, ....................(ISO 1996/2/3) Method of rating industrial noise affecting mixed

residential and
industrial areas
BS 4196, ....................(ISO 3740-3745) Sound power levels of noise sources
BS 4794, ....................Pt. 2 (IEC 337-2), Control switches
BS 4800, ....................Paint colours for building purposes
BS 4884,.....................Technical manuals
BS 4921,.....................Sheradised coatings on iron and steel
BS 4999,..................... General requirements for rotating machines
14
BS 5000,.....................Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular
applications
20
BS 5304,.....................Code of practice for the safety of machinery
BS 5472,.....................Low voltage switchgear and control-gear
s
BS 5685,.....................(IEC 521), Electricity meters
rd
BS 5950,.....................Structural use of steel work in building
BS 6231,.....................PVC insulated cables for switchgear
da
BS 7626,.....................(IEC 185), Current transformers
an
BS 7671,.....................Requirements for electrical installations
BS 8233,.....................Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings
St
BS EN ISO 9000, ......Quality management and quality assurance standards

n
BS EN 60439, ............Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies

io
BS EN 60947, ............Low voltage switchgear and control gear

ct
BS EN 10084, ............Case hardening steels. Technical delivery conditions

ru
BS ISO 10816, Part 1,

Part 3 and Part 7, ......Mechanical vibration in rotating and reciprocating machinery.
st
on
AWS D1.1, ................Steel structure welding code

C
List of „Approved Suppliers‟ prepared by the Public Works Authority

ar
1.1.4 Submittals
at
1 General
Q
(a) in addition to the requirements of Sections 1, 8, 10 and 21 the Contractor shall submit
the following information as described in the below paragraphs
(b) the Contractor shall note that submittals will not be approved unless submitted in
order. All submittals shall be clearly marked with the name of the manufacturers, sub-
contractors and Contractor‟s contract number such that they can be clearly identified
and are unique to the Contract
(c) all drawings shall be on ISO standard sized paper A1 unless specified otherwise.
Each drawing shall be marked with the Contractor‟s and manufacturers names and
references, project title drawing number, drawing title, scale, the date of completion
and a full description and date of all amendments. A clear space 100m x 160 mm shall
be left at the bottom right hand corner of each drawing for the Engineer‟s approval and
disclaim stamps
Part 01: General
(d) any work commenced or materials ordered before receipt of the Engineer‟s approval
shall be entirely at the Contractor‟s risk. Modifications required to comply with
approved submittals shall be at the Contractor‟s expense.
2 Submittal Schedule
(a) general. The Contractor shall submit a programme for all the submittals, with dates, for
the Engineer‟s approval. Adequate time shall be left in this programme for approval
(b) submittal times. Table 1.1 shows a Table of times for submittals and approvals. These
times may be varied in the Project Specification depending on the scope and
complexity of the Works. The Contractor should also note that the times for approval
are dependent on the above, and drawings being submitted in an orderly fashion.
14
Submittals of many drawings and information at any one time will delay the approval
process. If the Engineer has to extend the approval time he will notify the Contractor
within 7 calendar days of receipt of the submittal of the date on which he will grant
20
approval or otherwise.
(c) copies: numbers of submittals are as required in Table 1.1 below. In addition to the
s
requirements of Table 1.1 the Contractor shall submit all record drawings,
rd
photographic records, test records and operation and maintenance manuals in
electronic format on the latest form of digital record such as a CD.
da
Table 1.1
an
Submittals and Approvals
Time for
St
Submittal type
Time to be submitted comments/approva
Submittal stage Number of copies in
(calendar days) l
brackets
(calendar days)
n
14 days after Contract

io
Programme (4) 7 days

start
ct

Design data (4) 21 days
start
ru
Manufacturing programme 30 days before start of

21 days
(4) manufacture
st
Shipping and delivery

schedules 30 days before shipping 21 days
on
Material and (4)

products data Materials and product data 60 days after Contract
21 days
C
(4) start
Fabrication and assembly
ar
drawings 21 days
start
(4)
at
30 days after approval

Working drawings
of materials and product 21 days
Q
(4)
Shop drawings submittals
Co-ordination drawings 30 days after approval
21 days
(4) of working drawings
Record drawings 14 days after notification
21 days
(4) of change
Records
Photographic records 7 days after date of
14 days
(3) photograph
30 days before
Plan and procedures
commencement of 14 days
Testing and (4)
testing
commissioning
Test records
7 days after tests 21 days
(4)
Part 01: General
Time for
Submittal type
Time to be submitted comments/approva
Submittal stage Number of copies in
(calendar days) l
brackets
(calendar days)
Operation and
60 days before *
maintenance manuals and
commencement of 30 days
instructions
testing
Operation and (5)
maintenance As erection progresses,
As-built drawings but all drawings within
40 days
(5) 90 days of Practical
Completion Certificate
14
* Draft only. Final version to be submitted before issue of Practical Completion Certificate (PCC) or
similar.
20
3 Design Data
(a) this shall include data and supporting calculations which is required for the following:
s
(i) justification for the overall design, sizing of process units, levels and layout
rd
(ii) to show compliance with standards used. This may include quality manuals and
da
procedures
(iii) as required in the particular and general project specification
an
(b) design data shall be derived from standard methods of calculations. Computer
generated data will only be accepted if it is produced by software with a proven record
St
of use in the field in which it is supplied
(c) any calculations which do not follow recognised standards or norms shall have full
n
supporting justifications, with technical references.

io
4 Material and Product Data

ct
(a) programme. When required by the Engineer a critical path type programme shall be
ru
submitted showing all the manufacturing activities with the critical path clearly
identified.
st
(b) shipping and delivery schedules. These shall include the following:
on
(i) date of shipping, arrival at port and on site

(ii) details of packing methods. Any unique packing, shipping, handling and
C
unloading requirements shall be stated.

(c) materials and product data
ar
(i) approval of materials and equipment shall be based on latest manufacturer‟s

at
published data
Q
(ii) complete and detailed information of all materials and equipment to be

incorporated in the Works shall be submitted. Detailed descriptions and
specifications, catalogue cut outs, installation data, diagrams, dimensions,
controls, and any other data required to demonstrate compliance with the
Project Specification shall be submitted. Each item submitted shall be
referenced to the applicable paragraph in the specification.
(iii) materials of construction of materials, equipment or components shall be stated.
At the request of the Engineer, a sample of these shall be submitted for further
study before approval. Where samples are required by the Engineer, the period
required to obtain the sample will be taken into account when scheduling
approvals.
Part 01: General
(d) materials and product specification data forms shall be submitted for each item of
equipment. These shall summarise the specification features as called for in these
specifications, and including such other necessary data, as would provide a complete
and adequate specification, for reordering an exact duplicate of the original item from
the manufacturer at some future date. The assigned tag numbers and manufacturer‟s
part numbers shall be included, but will not be considered as a substitute for any of the
required statement of specifications. More than one tag numbered item may be
included on a sheet.
(e) fabrication and assembly drawings. These shall be supplied for any fabrication or
assembly of equipment which is to be carried out in the factory or on site. Sectional
drawings shall be provided for equipment such as pumps, clearly showing the
materials and individual components.
14
(f) test certificates. Manufacturer‟s test certificates, type test certificates, third party test
certificates and quality control test certificates shall be submitted as required in the
20
general and particular Project Specification. Certificates shall be originals or
certificated copies.
s
5 Shop Drawings
rd
These shall include the following:
da
(a) working drawings. These shall include layout drawings. They are drawings, diagrams,
illustrations and schedules specifically prepared by the Contractor for each part or area
of the works. They shall include general arrangements of the equipment and
an
appurtenances in relation to the buildings and structures. Standard or specialised
procedures for installation work recommended by the manufacturer‟s of materials or
St
equipment and method statements for installation work shall be submitted. They shall
include drawings of any templates required for the installation work.
n
(b) co-ordination drawings. These shall be prepared by the Contractor to show how
multiple system and interdisciplinary work will be co-ordinated. The location, size and
io
details of fixings, box-outs, apertures, ducts, holes, cable routes, access doors/covers
ct
and plinths shall be shown on detailed layout drawings which are coordinated with the
building and civil structural drawings. Drawings shall illustrate clearances for lifting
ru
equipment, maintenance, access requirements and loadings due to equipment

heights.
st
(c) electrical drawings. These shall include single line diagrams, load schedules, cable
on
schedules, cable schedules, loop diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagrams,

panel layouts and circuit diagrams
C
6 Record Submittals
ar
(a) record drawings. These shall be prepared as work proceeds. They shall provide a
record of any modifications to materials and equipment, and to the layout,
at
arrangement and installation of the works.

(b) photographic records shall also be made, as specified in Section 8, and as required in
Q
the Project Specification.
7 Testing and Commissioning Submittals
(a) test procedures plan. At least 30 days before testing and commissioning is to be
performed, a detailed and comprehensive procedure plan shall be submitted for the
performance of each separate test. Each procedure plan shall describe and itemise
the involved system including associated electrical equipment, and shall include
evidence of an organised step-by-step procedure, properly co-ordinating the efforts of
the various trades and manufacturers‟ representatives involved, and of the operations
of the facilities. Procedures shall include an estimated duration and date for each
procedure and the personnel and equipment required.
(b) procedure plan information. Each procedure plan shall include the following
information, as applicable:
Part 01: General
(i) description of temporary procedure facilities, including drawings and sketches

as required to fully illustrate the facilities
(ii) list of test materials and estimated quantities
(iii) list of instruments, measuring and recording devices, and other test equipment,
whether a part of the equipment or furnished separately for temporary use.
Copies of calibration certificates shall be submitted for any test equipment.
(iv) names of supervising and inspecting manufacturers, where applicable
(v) complete listing of all functional parameters to be served and recorded
(vi) recording intervals.
14
(c) record materials. Samples shall be submitted of the forms, charts, and other materials
to be used in recording demonstration and validation test results. Wherever possible,
standard forms shall be used.
20
(d) test recording. Neat and comprehensive records of each test shall be maintained by
the Contractor. Each portion of the test procedure shall be described with all
s
components itemised. Records shall be prepared on forms in a step-by-step fashion
rd
paralleling the approved procedure plans. Forms shall list for each test or check the
following:
da
(i) check/list taken
(ii) result anticipated
an
(iii) result obtained
St
(iv) if incorrect, corrective action taken
(v) re-test/check result
n
(vi) step (iv) and (v) shall be repeated until all systems operate as required.
io
Instruments, gauges, and other sensors and display devices forming a part of
ct
the various systems shall be employed for data acquisition where applicable.
The Contractor shall furnish all other instruments, gauges, recorders, and test
ru
devices as required, types conforming to the approved procedure plans. All

applicable data such as, but not limited to, water and other liquid levels, flows,
st
pressures, head differentials, duration of runs, instrument readings, voltage

settings, drive speeds, motor running currents, torque, voltages and related
on
information, as applicable, and in accordance with approved test procedures

shall be recorded at the start and finish of each operational demonstration and
C
at 30 minute intervals during system validation tests, unless other intervals are
specified or agreed with the Engineer.
ar
(e) when a repeat of the same demonstration or validation test is required to verify the
results, the repeat procedure shall be indicated on the recorded data by numerical
at
indication, data and time.

Q
8 Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions - General
(a) the Contractor shall provide fully detailed manuals covering all mechanical, electrical
and electronic equipment. The manuals shall be in English
(b) two copies of the draft manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and
approval, before the programmed commencement of commissioning works
(c) the remaining three copies of the manuals shall be provided to the Engineer, before
the commencement of the maintenance period. They shall include all revisions and
comments made by the Engineer and any revisions or corrections necessitated by
changes made during installation and testing
(d) manuals shall be contract specific, and be fully indexed and sectioned, for allocation
and distribution to the specialist staff involved on the particular plant and equipment
Part 01: General
(e) where several sub-contractors and manufacturers have supplied equipment the
Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer provide a complete integrated manual
which clearly demonstrates the inter-relation of the equipment
(f) manuals shall be provided in durable hard cover backed A4 sized loose-leaf four ring
binders. Lever arch binders are not acceptable. The full project title shall appear on the
cover and spine
(g) the manuals shall enable the client to safely operate, maintain, dismantle, reassemble
and adjust all parts of the works
(h) Original copies of leaflets and instructions provided by the specialist manufacturers
shall be provided. Superfluous information shall be clearly deleted and relevant
information referred to separately in the text
14
(i) all instructions and manuals shall be written in accordance with BS 4884, IEC 278, and
in accordance with other recognised guidelines on technical manual writing.
20
9 Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals shall confirm to Section 1, Clause
7.12.2.
s
rd
10 Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals‟ Contents shall also confirm to the
following listed items or otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
da
(a) these shall comprise a number of volumes, dependent on the amount and technical
content of the equipment installed. The operating instructions shall always form a
an
separate volume. Manuals shall include sections containing information as described
in the following paragraphs
St
(b) introduction. The names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers of the Site, Employer,
Consultant, Contractor, sub-contractors, manufacturers and agents. The date the
n
Contract commenced, and the date of the Practical Completion Certificate. This item is
to be completed when the date is established. A brief description of the equipment
io
provided and the contractual scope of the work, with descriptions of any work
ct
subcontracted
(c) general equipment description
ru
(i) general process description. This shall provide a general description of the
st
treatment processes based on process P&I drawings included with the manual
on
(ii) process design parameters. This shall provide information on the performance
of the process systems
C
(iii) general description of the mechanical equipment. This shall provide a brief
description of all mechanical equipment provided
ar
(iv) general description of the electrical equipment. This shall provide a brief
description of the equipment provided, listing individual control panel
at
compartments and the remote controls

Q
(d) detailed equipment description

(i) mechanical equipment. This shall provide details of all the mechanical
equipment including type, rating, duties, characteristic curves and
manufacturers, and full component schedules, with serial numbers
(ii) electrical equipment. This shall provide details of all electrical equipment and
cables including detailed information on the control panel(s), listing the display
and controls available for each compartment and stating the rating,
manufacturer and supplier of main components, and full component schedules
with serial numbers. This section shall include a schedule of input and output
signals, detailing number, signal type, polarity, digital open or closed state and
analogue range, and detailed calibration routine
Part 01: General
(e) operating instructions. These shall provide details of how each component of
equipment is controlled and operated in both automatic and hand modes, including the
control philosophy and its interrelationship with other interdependent equipment.
Details of equipment operation under non-routine conditions and details of start-up and
shut-down procedures with any associated safety checks shall be provided. (see note
below)
(f) inspection and maintenance instructions. This shall provide schedules and time
intervals for routine inspection, maintenance and lubrication tasks, referring to
individual manufacturer‟s instruction manuals for full details. They shall describe briefly
to more complex tasks that will be needed from time to time (see note below)
(g) fault finding and correction. This shall provide a guide to first line checks that can be
14
undertaken in the event of equipment failure, without the need for reference to the
detailed instructions. A detailed guide of more complex checks shall be provided as
below
20
Note: section (f), (g) and (h) should, in addition to the routine operating and
maintenance tasks, identify the following:
s
(i) more complex tasks, involved with plant shut-downs, fault rectification to
rd
component level, fault diagnostics, overhauls, etc.
da
specific hazards associated with operating and maintaining the equipment, e.g. auto
starting, high voltage, noise levels
an
(ii) highlight any particular complex or critical tasks over the above normal
requirements
St
(iii) measurements and guidance on limits of acceptable wear for all items subject to
wear.
n
(h) spare parts

io
(i) The Contractor shall assess and recommend the consumable and strategic
spares requirements of all equipment supplied under the Contract. They shall be
ct
listed in the manuals. These and any other recommended spares shall also be
identified in sufficient detail for the Employer to select and purchase spares, and
ru
shall be provided with drawings or annotated diagrams showing the spare parts
st
(ii) consumable spares are for those components which are scheduled for routine
replacement during annual or more frequent service
on
(iii) strategic spares are for those components or items of equipment (e.g. gear box)
not duplicated by standby equipment, which are expected to operate for not less
C
than 5 years under normal operating conditions, but whose premature failure
would cause the process to fail
ar
(iv) the Contractor shall indicate which spares are available ex-stock.
at
(v) the Contractor shall provide all the above necessary spares during the
maintenance period and in addition shall provide sufficient spares for 2 years of
Q
operation on issue of the PCC.

(i) special tools. A list of the special tools supplied for the maintenance of all equipment
included in the Contract shall be provided
(j) test certificates. Certificates and documents of equipment tests shall be provided (e.g.
pressure vessels, lifting equipment, etc.). Performance test certificates and
characteristic details shall be provided. Set points for timers, overloads, pressure
switches, relief valves, etc. shall be provided
(k) inventory of as-fitted equipment. A schedule of this shall be provided
(l) drawings list. A list of the as-built drawings shall be provided
Part 01: General
11 As built drawings
(a) after erection has been completed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies
of the following “As-built” drawings for approval, including:-
(i) piping and instrumentation diagrams
(ii) site layouts showing main works operational features
(iii) equipment layout
(iv) general arrangement drawings
(v) mechanical details
14
(vi) electrical power circuit diagrams
(vii) control schematic diagrams
20
(viii) HV and LV distribution single line diagrams
(ix) HV and LV cable routes
s
(x) PLC or computer programs
rd
one master copy of the proprietary software package shall be provided to the
da
Engineer within one week of the issue of the PCC. All software licences and/or
registration requirements must be forwarded promptly to the Engineer for
subsequent registration with the manufacturer. Sole rights to all software
an
developed and written on all schemes financed by Employer will be retained by
the Employer
St
(xi) assembly drawings shall clearly show the construction details and be in
sufficient detail to facilitate dismantling and re-assembly
n
(xii) parts lists shall be included for identification of replacement items

io
(xiii) cable schedules shall include cable reference numbers and core reference
ct
numbers relating to power circuit diagrams

(xiv) diagrams where necessary shall be in colour to identify different components,
ru
networks, systems etc.

st
(b) the above are to be supplied to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
provide the Employer prints of each on thick paper and one ISO size A1 (594 x 420)
on
negative of each. All drawings shall be prepared on a CAD system and printed on ISO
standard sized paper A3 unless specifically requested otherwise. One set of drawings
C
shall also be submitted in Windows based AutoCAD System, software version and
storage media shall be as approved by the Engineer. Each drawing shall be marked
with the Employer‟s, Consultant‟s, Contractor‟s and manufacturer‟s names and
ar
references, drawing number, title, scales, date of completion and a full description and
date of all amendments, and shall be certified „as-built‟. The project title shall be
at
included in a box at the bottom right hand corner of each drawing.

Q
1.1.5 Quality Standards
1 All equipment furnished shall be new, and where feasible, shall be a standard product of an
approved or experienced manufacturer, and assembled from standard components readily
available.
2 Equipment shall conform to the requirements of the Project Specifications and reference
standards.
3 Manufacturers shall operate an ISO 9000 approved quality system, or equivalent in-house
quality system. If requested, details of the quality system shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Part 01: General
1.1.6 Manufacturer’s Experience
1 Manufacturer‟s shall be from the approved list in the Project Specification and shall have
furnished equipment of the type and equal or larger size than specified, which has been
installed, and demonstrated successful operation for at least 5 years and at least 5
installations in the Gulf countries, or in countries with similar weather conditions. User
certificates will be required to be submitted.
1.1.7 Factory Inspection
1 The Engineer or his representative may inspect the equipment at the factory. The Contractor
shall notify the Engineer of the manufacturing schedule 30 days before commencement in
14
order that the factory inspection can be arranged. Factory inspections will be made at any
reasonable time during manufacturing, testing or after the completion of testing and prior to
20
shipment. Approval of equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the
equipment to the Site and does not constitute final acceptance. Where specified, the
Contractor shall include in the Contract Price for all the costs of the Engineer or his
representative.
s
rd
1.1.8 Factory Tests and Test Certificates
da
1 Factory tests shall be carried out as specified in the Project Specification, and as required by
international standards and industry norms.
an
2 The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer provides all labour, materials, electricity,
St
fuel, stores, apparatus and all instruments as are requisite and as may reasonably be
required to carry out the test efficiently. The Engineer or his representative may witness the
tests. Where specified the Contractor shall include in the Contract Price for all the costs of
n
the Engineer or his representative.

io
3 The Contractor shall submit from the equipment manufacturer, or his authorised
ct
representative, a certified written test certificate in accordance with the requirements of the
relevant test procedure.
ru
4 If after examining or testing any equipment the Engineer, or his representative, shall decide
st
that such equipment or any part thereof is defective or, not in accordance with the
on
specification, he may reject the said equipment or part thereof. He shall notify the Contractor
in writing within 7 calendar days of the rejection, stating the grounds on which the rejection is
based.
C
5 Wherever possible Site conditions shall be simulated, or the tests shall be extended to allow
ar
for Site conditions.

at
1.1.9 Shipment, Storage and Handling

Q
1 All equipment shall be boxed, crated or otherwise enclosed and protected for shipment,
handling, and storage. Electrical materials shall be delivered in manufacturer‟s original
cartons or containers with seals intact as applicable. Large multicomponent assemblies shall
be delivered in sections that facilitate site handling and installation.
2 All equipment shall be kept dry, off the ground and covered from exposure to weather prior to
installation. Pumps, motors, electrical equipment and equipment having anti-friction or sleeve
bearings shall be stored in weather proof storage facilities. Where possible, heaters provided
in equipment shall be connected and operated until the equipment is placed in operation. The
Contractor shall prevent corrosion, contamination or deterioration of stored equipment.
Storage shall be covered and the temperature and humidity maintained according to the
manufacturer‟s requirements.
Part 01: General
3 Equipment and materials shall be handled in accordance with manufacturer‟s

recommendations. Large or heavy items shall only be lifted by the designated points.
Padded slings and hooks shall be used for lifting to prevent damage.
4 All equipment shall be fully protected until final acceptance and all factory surfaces shall be
protected from impact, abrasion, discoloration and other damage. All damaged equipment
shall be repaired or replaced before final acceptance.
1.1.10 Adaptation of Equipment
1 Any alteration of the structure or building shown on the Contract Drawings to accommodate
substitute equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Equipment which requires
14
alteration of the structures or buildings will be considered only if the Contractor assumes all
responsibility for making and co-ordinating all necessary alterations, at no additional cost to
20
the Employer. All modifications to structures, mechanical, electrical, or other work made
necessary by such substitution shall require the approval of the Engineer. The cost of this
work shall be made at the Contractor‟s expense.
s
2 Following approval of the mechanical and electrical drawings the Contractor shall prepare
rd
and submit to the Engineer the revised drawings showing any necessary modifications to the
proposed buildings and civil structures. The location, size and details of box-outs and fixings
da
for mechanical and electrical and other equipment shall be shown on the revised Drawings
and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing in the civil structures the correct location
an
and size of the box-outs and fixings shown on the approved mechanical and electrical
drawings. The Contractor shall prepare at his own cost the necessary revised civil drawings
and detailed structural and other design calculations and submit them to the Engineer for
St
approval. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for completion for any
delays from the preparation of such revised drawings.
n
io
1.1.11 Guarantee
ct
1 The Contractor shall provide a guarantee during the maintenance period for all the equipment
in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract. In addition to the general guarantee
ru
requirements, equipment warranty shall cover:

st
(a) faulty or inadequate design

on
(b) improper assembly or erection

(c) defective workmanship or materials
C
1.1.12 Job Conditions

ar
1 The Contract Drawings indicate the general arrangement, layout and locations of equipment,
valves, inserts, anchors, motors, panels, pull boxes, cables, conduits, stub-ups, lighting
at
fixtures, power and convenience outlets, and exterior lighting units, and may not be exact.
Q
The Contractor shall conform to the Drawings as closely as possible, exercising care to
secure approved headroom and clearances, to overcome structural interference and to verify
scaled dimensions, field dimensions and conditions at the place of work.
1.1.13 Approved Manufacturers and Subcontractors
1 The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment shall be supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned by subcontractors recommended by the equipment manufacturer and
approved by Engineer. Large complex units, shall be installed, tested and commissioned by
the manufacturers representatives as specified. Installation procedures shall be supplied
and authorised by the equipment manufacturer.
Part 01: General
1.1.14 Hydraulic Sump Model Testing
1 Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specification hydraulic sump model tests shall be
performed by the pump manufacturer or an approved specialist hydraulic testing laboratory.
2 Physical hydraulic model tests shall be carried out to study the hydraulic performance of the
sump and behaviour of flows in the wet well for all possible combinations of pump operation.
3 Models shall be designed and constructed to a scale approved by the Engineer as necessary
to properly assess the wet well performance.
4 The model tests shall investigate the effects of the pump performance on sump operation
14
and provide information on the following as a minimum:
(a) hydraulic conditions in the pumping station inlet and wet wells under varying flows and
20
pump combinations
(b) formation of air entraining vortices in the sumps
(c) formation of swirl at the suction pipework of the pumps
s
(d) velocity distribution in the suction pipework of each pump
rd
(e) hydraulic surge effects in the pumping station inlet and wet wells caused by starting or
stopping of one or more pumps
da
(f) start/stop levels for the pumps
(g) grit and solids deposition in the wet well.
(h) videos and coloured photographs with time and date stamping shall be produced to
an
show the model test and important features. Commentaries shall be added to videos
to describe the events recorded.
St
5 The model tests and study shall make recommendations on any modifications to the
pumping station inlet and wet wells considered necessary to overcome adverse hydraulic
n
conditions, and the provision of any flow splitters, diverters and benching required to improve
the hydraulic conditions.
io
ct
6 Model Requirements:
ru
(a) the model shall be constructed to an approved scale based on an appropriate Froude
number and the pumping station general arrangement drawings
st
(b) the walls of the wet well and inlet arrangement shall be constructed from transparent
on
material to allow the flows to be viewed. The top of the model shall be open to allow
viewing of the flows. A viewing platform above the model shall be provided for
inspection and measurement
C
(c) the method of construction shall be such that the dimensions of the wet well may be
adjusted to vary the hydraulic distribution and identify the optimum shape
ar
(d) the Contractor shall submit four copies of drawings showing the general arrangement
at
and details of the models for approval by the Engineer. The drawings shall also show
details of all ancillary equipment forming part of the testing
Q
(e) after completion of the testing the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer 4 copies of
the Model Test report, including all documentation, photographs and videos.
1.1.15 Sewage Characteristics
1 Sewage characteristics are typical of an arid climate municipal area with a sewerage system
comprising gravity sewers and rising mains. Hydrogen Sulphide is present in varying levels
throughout the sewerage system and the levels given in the Project Specification must be
used for materials selection.
Part 01: General
2 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract documents, typical Qatar sewage characteristic
shall be taken as:
(a) Temp °C 25 - 45
(b) PH 7.0 - 7.5
(c) BOD mg/l 200 - 220
(d) SS mg/l 150 - 200
(e) Alkalinity (caco3) 225 - 245
(f) Chloride mg/l 400 - 500
14
(g) Sulphide mg/l 10 – 16
(h) TDS 1500 - 2000
20
1.2 PRODUCTS
s
1.2.1 Materials
rd
1 All materials used in the manufacture of equipment shall be new, and guaranteed free from
da
defects, and shall be capable of resisting corrosion from sewage. The Contractor shall
ensure that the manufacturer ascertains the conditions and service under which materials
and equipment are to operate and warrants that operation under those conditions shall be
an
successful. Equipment and materials provided shall be suitable for the service conditions and
for meeting the specifications. All structural members shall be considered as subject to shock
St
or vibratory loads.
2 All equipment and materials shall be designed to sustain all stresses that are likely to occur
n
during fabrication, handling, transportation, erection, and intermittent or continuous operation.

io
3 Iron castings shall be tough, close-grained grey iron free from blow-holes, flaws, or excessive
ct
shrinkage and shall conform to BS EN 1561 Grade 250 and to BS EN 1563 Grade 250 for
ductile iron unless otherwise specified.
ru
st
4 Structural steel shall be as specified in Section 8, 16 and 17.

on
5 Stainless steel shall be BS 970 Grade 316 S31 unless otherwise specified. All references to
BS 970 Grade 316 shall include the statement „(partially replaced by BS EN 10084) after
„Grade 316‟.
C
6 Bolts, nuts, washers and anchor plates, shall be of stainless steel Grade 316 S31, to BS 970-
ar
1, and shall remain unpainted. At lest two washers shall be provided with each nut and bolt
set. PTFE or nylon washers and spacers shall be fitted beneath stainless steel washers for
at
both bolt head and nut when used to fix dissimilar metals.
Q
7 All nuts and bolts shall be threaded in accordance with BS 3643 "ISO metric screw threads"
Part 2 "Specification for selected limits of size" and fitted with 3mm thick washers beneath
bolt and nut.
8 All exposed bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal and the length of all bolts shall be such
that when fitted with a nut and washers and tightened down, the threaded portion shall fill the
nut and not protrude from the face thereof by more than half the diameter of the bolt.
However, two complete threads must be visible as a minimum.
9 Safety guards shall be of stainless steel of Grade 316S31 to BS 970-1.

Part 01: General
1.2.2 Workmanship
1 All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best
modern engineering practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and
gauges so that repair parts, are readily available and where practicable can be replaced on
site. Corresponding parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable.
1.2.3 Tropicalisation
1 The equipment shall be suitable for installation in tropical areas. Tropical grade materials
shall be used wherever practicable. Some relaxation of these provisions may be permitted
where equipment is hermetically sealed.
14
2 Iron and steel are to be painted or galvanised unless specified otherwise. Indoor parts may
20
alternatively be chromium or copper-nickel plated or other approved protective finish. Small
iron and steel parts (other than stainless steel) of all instruments and electrical equipment,
the cores of electro-magnets, and the metal parts of relays and mechanisms shall be treated
s
in an approved manner to prevent rusting. Cores which are built up of laminations or cannot
be anti-rust treated shall have all exposed parts thoroughly cleaned and heavily enamelled,
rd
lacquered or compounded.
da
3 Iron and steel shall not be used in instruments and relays. Where used, steel screws shall
be zinc, cadmium or chrome plated or, where plating is not possible due to tolerance
an
limitations, shall be dull nickel plated brass or be of other approved finish. Instrument screws
except those forming part of a magnetic circuit shall be brass or bronze. Springs shall be of
non-rusting material. Pivots and other parts for which non-ferrous material is unsuitable shall
St
be of an approved stainless steel.

n
4 Fabrics, corks, paper and similar materials, which are not subsequently to be treated by
io
impregnation, shall be adequately treated with an approved fungicide. Sleeving and fabrics
treated with linseed oil varnishes shall not be used.
ct
5 Wood shall not be used in equipment unless absolutely necessary. Where used, woodwork
ru
shall be of thoroughly seasoned teak or other approved wood which is resistant to fungal
decay and free from shakes and warp, sap and wane, knots, faults and other blemishes. All
st
woodwork shall be suitably treated to protect it from the ingress of moisture and the growth of
fungus and termite attack. All joints in woodwork shall be dove-tailed or tongued and pinned.
on
Where used, metal fittings shall be of non-ferrous material.

C
6 Adhesives shall be impervious to moisture, resistant to mould growth and not subject to the
ravages of insects. For jointing woodwork only synthetic resin cement shall be used.
ar
1.2.4 De-rating Due to Climate Conditions

at
1 The De-rating requirements for the climate conditions for all materials and equipments shall
Q
be in accordance with Section 21 unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
1.2.5 Steel
1 Fabrication of structural steel shall conform to BS 449 and BS 5950 AWS D1.1 unless
otherwise indicated or specified. All fabrications shall be designed for dynamic and vibratory
loadings. Welding shall conform to Sections 16 and 17. All steelworks shall be galvanised
after fabrication unless otherwise specified. Galvanised bolts and fasteners shall be used
with galvanised assemblies.
2 If practicable, steel plate and members shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 6 mm
Part 01: General
3 Wrought steels shall be selected from the appropriate steel grade of BS 970 and shall be
free from blemishes, shot or hammer marks. The steel grade used shall be subject to the
Engineer‟s approval.
4 Cast molybdenum steel shall be to BS 3100 Grade B unless otherwise specified.
1.2.6 Equipment Bases and Bedplates
1 Equipment assemblies shall be mounted on a single heavy cast iron or welded steel bedplate
unless otherwise shown or specified. Bases and bedplates shall be provided with machined
support pads, tapered dowels for alignment or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings
to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits. Seams and contact edges between
14
steel plates and shapes shall be continuously welded, and welds ground smooth. Machinery
or piping shall not be supported on bedplates other than that which is factory installed.
20
Jacking screws shall be provided in equipment bases and bedplates to aid in levelling prior to
grouting. Plates of minimum thickness of 6 mm shall be provided. Pump bedplates shall
include a drip lip and provisions for directing gland leakage to a single disposal point.
s
1.2.7 Anchors and Sleeves
rd
1 Each equipment manufacturer shall supply the required anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and
da
sleeves of adequate design for securing the bases and bedplates to concrete plinths. They
shall be stainless steel or, hot-dip galvanised as specified. Sleeves shall be at least
an
1.5 times anchor bolt diameter. Anchor bolts shall be provided of sufficient length to allow for
maximum of 40 mm of grout under baseplates and adequate anchorage into structural
concrete.
St
2 All anchors used in wet areas or areas containing sewage or sewage gases shall be resin
n
anchors of BS 970 grade 316 S31 approved stainless steel. Fixing anchors shall be sealed
io
with material appropriate to and recommended by the manufacturers of the concrete

protection material.
ct
3 Steel work shall normally be bolted to the concrete, with grout added as necessary. G.R.P.
ru
lamination or other lining material shall be terminated on the equipment secured.

Consideration shall be given to subsequent removal of equipment, using additional brackets
st
or bolts which can be demounted without affecting the lining material.

on
1.2.8 Safety Guards

C
1 Belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, exposed shafts and other moving or rotating parts
shall be covered on all sides with safety guards to BS 5304. Safety guards shall be free of all
ar
sharp edges and corners. Safety guards shall be fabricated from a minimum of either 2 mm
thick, galvanised or aluminium-clad steel, or 12 mm mesh galvanised expanded metal.
at
Guards shall also be of sufficient strength to contain rotating parts in the event of a
catastrophic failure. Guards shall be designed for easy installation and removal. Necessary
Q
supports, accessories, and fasteners shall be provided, of hot-dip galvanised steel or

stainless steel. Guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent entrance of sand.
Hinged access doors shall be provided for routine maintenance. Microswitches shall be
provided on guards to prevent the main drive from starting, if specified.
1.2.9 Drive Units
1 The requirements for the design, manufacture, construction installation, testing and
commissioning of drive units shall be in accordance with Section 21 unless otherwise agreed
with the Engineer.
Part 01: General
1.2.10 Bearings
1 The Contractor shall select the most appropriate type of bearing for the equipment being
supplied.
2 Equipment with vertical shafts shall have thrust and guide bearings.
3 Sealed for life units are to subject the Engineer‟s approval and shall have a minimum design
life of 50,000 hours operation at maximum loading.
4 Bearings fitted to gearboxes shall have a minimum design life of 100,000 hours at maximum
loading.
14
5 Plant which may be subject to vibration whilst stationary shall be provided with bearings
20
designed to withstand damage from such a cause.
6 Single journal plain bearings shall have phosphor bronze or synthetic lubrication impregnated
s
bushes with carbon or stainless steel journals respectively. Synthetic bearings shall only be
used where bearing conditions can readily be inspected.
rd
da
7 Plain type bearings shall be self-lubricating by either grease, forced oil or impregnation.
8 Ball and Roller type bearings shall be adequately lubricated by oil or grease and sealed to
an
prevent leakage of lubricant along the shaft or the ingress of dust and water.
St
9 Bearings not integral with a casting shall be mounted in substantial Plummer blocks.
10 Bearings shall be sized and rated for the temperatures encountered in service conditions.
n
Additional cooling shall be provided if necessary.

io
1.2.11 Lubrication
ct
1 Suitable lubrication shall be provided to ensure smooth operation, heat removal and freedom
ru
from undue wear. Plant selected shall require minimum lubrication attendance and down
time for lubricant change.
st
on
2 The Contractor shall supply the first fill of oil and grease from approved lubricant suppliers
prior to completion, testing, and final acceptance. In addition sufficient approved lubricants
for two years normal operation shall be provided.
C
3 All grease nipples, oil cups and dip sticks shall be readily accessible, being piped to a point
ar
as near as practicable to the lubrication point.

at
4 Gearboxes and oil baths shall be provided with adequately sized filling and draining plugs
and suitable means of oil level indication.
Q
5 Roller chain drives shall have a constant feed of lubricant, when in operation (viz oil bath or
autolube system).
6 Drain points shall be located or piped to a position such that an adequately sized container
can be placed beneath them. Where a large quantity of oil is involved or drainage to a
container difficult, a drain valve and plug shall be provided at the point of discharge.
7 Bearings equipped with forced fed oil lubrication shall be automatically charged prior to
machinery starting up, and pressure monitored during operation, with automatic shutdown of
machinery and alarm on low oil pressure.
8 Access, without the use of portable ladders, to lubrication systems shall be such as to permit
maintenance, draining and re-filling, without contamination of the charged lubricant.
Part 01: General
9 The design of breathers shall take into account the humidity and atmospheric contamination
at the vent point and measures shall be incorporated to prevent contamination of the
lubricant.
10 Grease application shall be by steel lubrication nipples manufactured in accordance with B.S.
1486, Part 1 and 4.
11 Anti friction bearings requiring infrequent charging shall be fitted with hydraulic type nipples.
12 Plain bearings requiring frequent charging shall be fitted with button head pattern nipples.
13 A separate nipple shall be provided to serve each lubrication point. Where a number of
14
nipples supply remote lubricating points they shall be grouped together on a conveniently
placed battery plate, with spacing in accordance with the recommendations of B.S. 1486,
20
Part I, Table 9 and 10.
14 The type, grade and amount of lubricant shall be clearly marked on a label adjacent to the
equipment.
s
rd
15 Lubricants shall be suitable for the temperatures encountered in service conditions.
Additional cooling of lubricant shall be provided if necessary.
da
16 Lubrication of equipment shall ensure constant presence of lubricant on all wearing surfaces.
an
Lubricant fill and drain openings shall be readily accessible. Easy means for checking the
lubricant level shall be provided. Prior to testing and/or operation, the equipment shall
St
receive the prescribed amount and type of lubricant as required by the equipment
manufacturer. Equipment lubrication systems shall require no more than weekly attention
during continuous operation, shall not require attention during start-up or shut down, and
n
shall not waste lubricants.

io
1.2.12 Electric Motors

ct
1 The requirements for the design, manufacture, construction installation, testing and
ru
commissioning of motors shall be in accordance with Section 21 unless otherwise agreed

with the Engineer.
st
on
1.2.13 Pressure Gauges
1 Gauges shall be connected to the suction (where applicable) and discharge pipework of each
C
pump, compressor and blower. The gauges shall be 150 mm diameter and in accordance
with BS 1780 and Section 10 and shall include a petcock between the pump/blower and the
ar
gauge. A non-corrosive diaphragm gauge isolator shall be provided for solids-bearing or

corrosive fluids. Suction gauges shall be of the compound type and shall have a range of + 1
at
bar. Discharge gauge ranges shall be a standard commercially available range with the
maximum reading 1.2 times greater than the pump‟s rated shut-off pressure. Discharge
Q
gauges shall also read to –1.0 bar. All gauge mountings shall be free of vibration.
2 The pressure readings shall be recorded on the MCC/SCADA system using pressure
transmitters.
3 Pressure gauges shall be always kept calibrated as QCS Section 10 requirements.
1.2.14 Nameplates and Data Plates
1 Nameplates and data plates shall be stainless steel of ample size with embossed, stamped
or etched lettering in English, fastened to the equipment in a prominent place with corrosion-
resisting pins. The manufacturer, serial number, date of manufacture, model number and
essential operating characteristics shall be displayed on nameplates, which shall be to the
approval of the Engineer. Data plates shall be inscribed with specific or directed information.
Part 01: General
1.2.15 Painting and Protective Coatings
1 Protection of Finish. The Contractor shall provide adequate means for fully protecting all
finished parts of the materials and equipment against damage, from whatever cause, during
the progress of the work, and until final completion. All materials and equipment in storage
and during erection shall be protected in such a manner that no finished surfaces shall be
damaged or marred, and all moving parts shall be kept perfectly clean and dry. Painting and
protective coatings shall conform to applicable requirements of colours. They shall be to the
approval of the Engineer, and the following requirements, unless modified or otherwise
specified elsewhere. Painting systems shall be as specified in Section 8 Part 8.
2 Factory Painting. On mechanical equipment, drives, starters, control panels and other similar
14
self-contained or enclosed components, a factory primer and high-quality oil-resistant baked
industrial enamel finish shall be applied. Surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly shall
be painted or otherwise protected by a method which provides protection for the life of the
20
equipment.
3 Shop Priming. Two shop coats of metal primer shall be applied on surfaces to be finish
s
painted at the site, the coating thickness to protect surfaces until finished. Primers specified
rd
for the required field applied paint systems as in Section 8 shall be used. The Contractor
shall submit for approval the coating systems intended for use. Shop primers for affected
da
items of equipment shall consist of only those approved for the intended protective coating
system. Working drawings indicating compliance with this requirement shall be submitted.
an
4 Rust Prevention. Machined, polished, other ferrous surfaces, and non-ferrous surfaces which
are not to be painted shall be coated with an approved rust preventive compound, and, in the
St
case of aluminium be anodised. Structural galvanised steel and stainless steel need not be
coated.
n
io
1.2.16 Noise Levels and Vibration

ct
1 Noise levels: With the envisaged maximum number of items of equipment operating „on load‟
(including existing equipment), the sound level outside an envelope of 1 metre radius from
ru
any items of equipment, shall not exceed 85 dB (A). The Contractor shall include for suitable
sound attenuation to achieve this level, generally in accordance with BS 8233. This will apply
st
in the audible frequency range 20 Hz - 20k Hz. Above 20k Hz, the Contractor must state
whether any fundamental frequencies are generated in the ultrasonic region. Noise levels
on
shall be assessed in accordance with BS 4196, taking into account the actual or proposed
site conditions. Noise levels shall be limited to the values specified for designated
C
equipment.
ar
2 Vibration Levels : The Contractor shall ensure that the stiffness of the floors/buildings and
supporting structures must be meet the requirements of vibration and resonance respect to
at
frequencies. Vibration levels shall be within the limits and comply with BS ISO 10816, Part 1,
3 and 7.
Q
1.2.17 Metal Plating
1 Chromium plating shall be to BS 1224.
2 Sheradising shall only be used in internal air conditioned environments, and shall be to
BS 4921.
3 Galvanising shall be hot-dip, to BS 729. Whenever possible steel in a wet or external

environment shall be galvanised.
Part 01: General
1.2.18 MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s)
1 The requirements for the design, manufacture, construction, installation testing and
commissioning of all labour, materials and accessories for the MV Cubicle Switchboards,
Main Switchboards, Submain Switchboards, Motor Control Centres, MCCB panel boards,
distribution boards etc shall be in accordance with Section 21 unless otherwise agreed with
the Engineer.
1.1 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
1.2.19 Co-ordination
14
1 The Contract Drawings show in a general arrangement form the arrangements desired for
the principal equipment, piping, and similar appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely
20
as possible. Proper judgement shall be exercised in carrying out the work to secure the best
possible headroom and space conditions throughout, to secure neat arrangement of all
equipment, and accessories, and to overcome local difficulties and interference of structural
s
conditions wherever encountered.
rd
2 The Contractor shall take all measurements for his work at the installation sites, verify all
da
dimensions and conditions at the place of installation, verify the Sub-contractor‟s drawings
and be responsible for the proper installation, within the available space of the equipment
specified and shown on the Drawings. Written details and reasons for proposed deviations
an
from Drawing and Specifications shall be submitted. The Engineer‟s approval for any
variations shall be obtained before making any changes.
St
1.2.20 Inspection During Installation

n
1 For the tests on the Site the Contractor shall provide at his own expense unless specified
io
otherwise, such labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores and apparatus and instruments as
may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such tests efficiently.
ct
2 If after inspecting, examining, or testing any equipment the Engineer shall decide that such
ru
equipment or any part thereof is defective, or not in accordance with the Contract, he may
st
reject the said equipment or part thereof, by giving the Contractor written notice within 7
calendar days of such rejection, stating therein the grounds upon which the decision is
on
based.
1.2.21 Preparation of Installation Areas

C
1 Prior to installing the equipment, the Contractor shall ensure that installation areas are clean,
ar
free of dust intrusion and that concrete or masonry operations are completed. The
installation areas shall be maintained in broom-clean condition during installation operations.
at
All buildings where permanent doors and windows have not been installed shall be provided
with temporary protection to prevent dust ingress and any other damage to equipment, all to
Q
the approval of the Engineer.
1.2.22 Manufacturers’ Installation Supervision
1 Where specified in the Project Specification, the Contractor shall ensure that each equipment
manufacturer furnishes the services of an authorised representative especially trained and
experienced in the installation of his equipment to:
(a) supervise the equipment installation in accordance with the approved instruction
manual
(b) be present when the equipment is first put into operation
(c) inspect, check and adjust until all trouble or defects are corrected and the equipment
installation and operation are acceptable
Part 01: General
(d) witness and supervise operational demonstrations and system validation tests to the
extent specified.
(e) prepare and submit certified test report.
2 All costs for manufacturers‟ representatives services shall be included in the Contract Price.
1.2.23 Installation
1 General. Prior to installation the equipment shall be cleaned, conditioned, and serviced in
accordance with the approved instruction manuals.
2 Equipment. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with approved instruction manuals by
14
an approved specialist sub-contractor. The Contractor shall employ skilled craftsmen
experienced in installation of the types of equipment specified, and shall use specialised tools
20
and equipment, such as precision machinist levels, dial indicators, gauges, and micrometers,
as applicable.
s
3 Anchor Bolts. The Contractor shall provide bolts with templates or setting drawings and
rd
verify that bolts are correctly located before structural concrete is placed.
da
4 Base and Bedplate Grouting. Grouting shall not be carried out until initial fitting and
alignment of connected piping is completed and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall level and align equipment on concrete foundations using suitable steel and brass
an
shimming, then entirely fill the space under base or bedplates with non shrink grout.
Exposed grout shall be bevelled at a 45  angle, except that exposed grout at horizontal
St
surfaces shall be rounded for drainage. Exposed grout shall be trowelled or pointed to a
smooth dense finish and damp cured with burlap for three days. After the grout has fully
hardened, the Contractor shall remove jacking screws and tighten nuts on anchor bolts. The
n
Contractor shall check the installation for alignment and level, and perform approved
io
corrective work as required to conform to the tolerances given in the instruction manual.
ct
1.2.24 Testing and Commissioning

ru
1 General
st
(a) operational demonstrations and system validation tests are required for all mechanical
on
and electrical equipment, and systems specified including all associated and related
electrical systems and control devices specified in this Section, Sections 10 and 21,
and the Project Specification
C
(b) all costs for these shall be included in the Contract Price
ar
(c) materials, potable water, chemicals and electrical power for testing and commissioning
and validation shall be supplied by the Contractor. Temporary facilities, storage, and
at
similar facilities necessary for these shall be supplied by the Contractor. Testing and
commissioning shall be performed under continuous inspection by the Engineer. The
Q
Contractor shall provide sufficient experienced skilled staff to carry out the testing and
commissioning. Various equipment manufacturers shall be present, if specified.
(d) all defects and malfunctions found by testing and commissioning shall be corrected
immediately, using approved methods and new materials for repairs as required.
Interruption time necessary for corrective work may, at the Engineer‟s discretion, be
added to the specified testing and commissioning periods
(e) satisfactory completion and approval of required commissioning and testing is one of
the conditions precedent to the Engineer‟s acceptance of the work, but does not
constitute final acceptance
(f) testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with the Project Specification, the
QCS, the relevant International Standards, QGEWC requirements, industry norms and
to the Engineer‟s approval.
Part 01: General
2 Test Procedures
(a) testing shall be carried out in stages as follows:-

(i) primary tests and checks
(ii) unit testing
(iii) system validation tests
(iv) commissioning and setting to work
(b) the Contractor shall not proceed from one stage to the next without the Engineer‟s
written approval
14
(c) consolidation of demonstration, testing, and instruction requirements. Unit and system
validation testing, commissioning and instruction of the Employer‟s personnel may be
performed simultaneously.
20
3 Primary Checks and Tests
s
(a) all component units and complete systems shall conform to the Specifications,
rd
Drawings and the approved working drawings, samples, construction manuals,
material lists, and other approved submittals
da
(b) all specified components and complete systems shall have been installed satisfactorily
and are operable an
(c) all installations shall be safe to use. Temporary access, covers etc. will only be
permitted if approved by the Engineer
St
(d) all cleaning work shall be completed

(e) equipment shall be free from physical damage due to mechanical force, exposure to
n
the elements, incorrect connection, etc.

io
4 Unit Testing
ct
(a) unit testing is defined as tests on individual equipment such as pumps, compressors,
ru
blowers, fans conveyors and all similar equipment item. Tests may be performed
simultaneously on groups of identical equipment, items, and groups of items supplied
st
by one manufacturer, if practicable

on
(b) potable water shall be used to fill tanks, wells piping and systems that contain water,
sewage, or sludge in normal operation. Where necessary specified chemicals shall be
used for chemical systems but shall not exceed in-service concentrations
C
(c) tests shall show that all component units operate with the quantities, efficiency,
ar
repeatability, and accuracy specified

(d) tests shall be carried out continuously for a minimum period of 8 hours, unless other
at
periods are specified.

Q
5 System validation tests
(a) system validation tests shall not commence until unit tests have been satisfactorily
completed
(b) this is defined as testing of complete systems that perform a discrete process function
such as pumping systems, emergency power systems and similar systems. Each
system shall include associated structures, tanks, piping, utilities, instrumentation and
controls, and like related items. Two or more separate systems shall be validation
tested simultaneously when necessary to validate an entire specific function
(c) potable water shall be used for system validation tests if it is possible to carry them out
satisfactorily with this medium. If the tests require use of the medium used in service,
then this shall be used
Part 01: General
(d) each system validation tests shall be carried out for minimum of 24 hours, unless
longer is needed to prove the performance of the system.
6 Commissioning and Setting to Work
(a) commissioning is defined as testing all the equipment and systems together under
actual operating conditions using all the mediums used in actual operating conditions.
Setting to work follows consecutively from this. Once the equipment and systems are
operating satisfactory they are left to work
(b) each system shall be tested, including standby equipment, by continuous operation
under the “in-service” condition for not less than 7 consecutive days unless required
14
otherwise by the Engineer, with no interruptions except for normal maintenance or
corrective work. Where the in-service condition is an automatically controlled repeat
cycle with on/off intervals, it shall be so operated
20
(c) systems shall be operated continuously under constant inspection of trained operators.
System operation shall be cycled from full load to light load and back to full load each
s
24 h. Variable speed equipment shall cycle through the applicable speed range at a
rd
steady rate of change. Simulated alarm and failure operating conditions shall be
induced. Test controls and protective devices shall be tested for correct operation in
da
adjusting system functions or causing system shutdown
(d) failure of an item of equipment or a system during the stated periods will result in
an
termination of the test. The test will only recommence when the Engineer is satisfied
with the remedial work. The test shall then recommence for a further 24 hours
St
(e) subject to Contractor‟s request and Engineer‟s approval in each specific case, the
Contractor may be permitted to simulate certain operating conditions relating to flow
rates, water levels, and malfunctions. Permission for simulations will be granted only
n
where it is unwise or impossible to obtain the conditions covered by the capability of

io
ranges or equipment. The simulation methods shall reflect reasonable anticipated

operating conditions.
ct
1.2.25 Instruction and Training of the Employer’s Personnel

ru
1 After the equipment has been installed, tested, adjusted and placed in satisfactory operation
st
the Contractor shall provide the services of qualified staff approved by the Engineer, or if
specified in the Project Specification, of the manufacturer‟s representatives, to instruct and
on
train the Employer‟s operating personnel in the use and maintenance of the key items of
equipment as specified. An instruction and training programme shall be conducted for up to
C
six operators designated by the Employer. The Contractor shall give the Employer at least
one month‟s written notice of the proposed instruction and training programme. Instruction
ar
and training covering basic system operation theory, routine maintenance and repair, and
“hands on” operation of equipment shall be included. The duration of the programme shall
at
be based on the complexity of equipment involved, and the Engineer‟s approval of instruction
adequacy obtained before terminating the programme. Instruction and training periods shall
Q
be acceptable to the Engineer and Employer.
1.2.26 In-Service Checks
1 General. In-service checks of all systems and equipment shall be carried out by the
Contractor twice during the Contract maintenance period by the Contractor with qualified
technical representatives of the various system manufacturers, including manufacturers of
equipment components within systems, if specified. Checks shall be detailed and complete
and shall be performed under the observation and to the satisfaction of the Employer. All
costs for in-service checks shall be included in the Contract Price.
2 Notification. The Employer shall be notified in writing at least 10 days before carrying out of
in-service checks and the Employer‟s approval shall be obtained prior to commencing work.
Part 01: General
3 Consultation. During the in-service checks, the manufacturer‟s technical representatives shall
consult with the Employer to review the instruction manuals and the pertinent operational and
maintenance problems encountered, and shall furnish technical advice and
recommendations to the Employer.
4 Programme. Initial in-service checks shall be performed approximately 6 months after final
acceptance. The last in-service checks shall be performed 30 days prior to the end of the
Contract maintenance period.
5 Reports. A written report on each in-service check, signed by the appropriate manufacturer
or his representative, shall be delivered to the Employer within 10 days following the checks.
The report shall describe the checking procedures in detail, and shall state all advice and
14
recommendations given to the Employer.
6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals. These shall be altered to take into account any
20
modifications to equipment, drawings or operating procedures. Replacement drawings and
pages, marked as revisions, shall be supplied with sufficient copies to allow all the operation
and maintenance manuals to be updated.
s
rd
1.2.27 Specialised Training Programme for Employer’s Personnel
da
1 Where designated in the Project Specification the Contractor shall provide a specialised
training programme and manual for the Employer‟s key personnel in the equipment, electrical
an
systems and instrumentation systems, to be conducted by the supplier/manufacturer and
held at locations outside Qatar. The training programme and manual shall be submitted to
the Employer for approval and shall be designed to:
St
(a) provide in depth information and familiarisation of the equipment installed in the
n
Project
io
(b) receive specialised training in the design, proper operation, maintenance and
replacement of the equipment and components
ct
2 The Contractor shall provide whatever assistance is requested by the Employer to develop
ru
meaningful itineraries for the training programme. The Contractor shall provide hotel
accommodation, travelling expenses by air, land transport and per diem allowance as per the
st
Ministry of Education guidelines.

on
END OF PART
C
ar
at
Q
Part 06: Surge Control System
6 SURGE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................ 2
6.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

6.1.1 Scope 2
6.1.2 References 2
6.1.3 System Description 2
6.1.4 Submittals 3
6.1.5 Quality Assurance 3
6.1.6 Warranty 4
14
6.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 4
6.2.1 Design Conditions and Performance Characteristics 4
20
6.2.2 Materials 4
6.2.3 Fabrication 5
s
6.2.4 Factory Inspection and Testing 6
rd
6.2.5 Spare Parts and Tools 7
da
6.3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING ...................................................... 7
an
6.3.2 Site Inspection and Testing 7
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
6 SURGE CONTROL SYSTEM

6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 The Part specifies the requirements for the design, manufacture, construction, installation,
testing and commissioning of complete surge protection systems, including flywheels, surge
vessels, compressors, air valves and necessary accessory items.
2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows:
14
This Section
Part 1, General
20
Part 2, Submersible Pumps
Part 3, Centrifugal Pumps
s
rd
Section 1, General
Section 8, Drainage Works
da
Section 10, Instrumentation, Control and Automation
Section 21, Electrical Works an
6.1.2 References
St
1 The following standards or revised/updated versions and documents of other organisations
are referred to in this Part:
n
BS 449, ......................The use of structural steel in building

io
BS 729 (ISO 1459, 1460, 1461) Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
ct
BS 970 (ISO 683) .......Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes
BS 1387 (ISO 65) .......Screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars and for plain end
tru
tubes suitable for welding or screwing to BS 21 pipe threads

BS 1571 (ISO 1217) ...Testing of positive displacement compressors and exhausters
s
BS 2872,.....................Copper and alloy stock and forgings

on
BS 3601 (ISO 2604) ...Specification for carbon steel pipes and tubes with specified room
C
temperature properties for pressure purposes

BS EN 1092,..............Circular flanges for pipe, valves and fittings
ar
BS 5304,.....................Code of practice for the safety of machinery

at
ASME VIII Div. 1, ........Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Design and Fabrication of Pressure
Q
Vessels
6.1.3 System Description
1 Hydraulic Design. Surge control devices are to be provided where necessary at all pumping
stations. The Contractor shall assume no inertia assistance from any air valves fitted. Air
valves will not be accepted as a primary means of surge suppression. Flywheels may be
used. In the case of multiple pumping mains separate surge suppression systems shall be
provided for each main. The design shall include for the worst case i.e. surge conditions
existing when the system is pumping at maximum rate and a power failure occurs. Surge
analysis shall be based on the friction factor used for new pipelines. Pump manufacturer
shall carry out surge analysis for the whole system including the pipe work within the
pumping station.
2 System Design. The following types of system may be used for surge protection:
(a) flywheels. These shall be used where there is sufficient reserve capacity of liquid in
the wet well or surge tower {see (b)} at all times to allow the flywheel to continuously
recharge the main with liquid
(b) surge towers. Their use is only applicable when the total head developed by the
pump is low
(c) hydropneumatic atmospheric surge vessels. Their use is only applicable when the
static head in the rising main is low. They shall incorporate a dip tube and a float air
valve which allows air in and out of the vessel depending on the liquid level in the
vessel.
14
(d) bladder type pressure vessels. Their use is only applicable when no negative
pressures occur in the main in either a surge condition or normal operation
20
(e) hydropneumatic surge vessels with compressors. Their use is only applicable where
there is a substantial static head in the rising main
s
3 Air Valves. Air valves shall be installed on the rising main as specified or required to optimise
rd
the hydraulic efficiency of the main. They shall comply with Section 8 Part 5.
da
6.1.4 Submittals
1 In addition to the submittal requirements of Part 1 of this Section, the Contractor shall submit
an
data and information as the following paragraphs.
St
2 Design Data:
(a) Hydraulic Calculations. The Contractor shall submit a complete computer

n
based hydraulic transient analysis showing the performance of the surge control
io
system under various model scenarios. Normal operating modes and the sudden
shut down of the pump following a power failure shall be simulated. The program
ct
shall have the facility to model the characteristic of the different manufacturer’s air
and reflux valves, and any other proprietary equipment
tru
(b) structural calculations. Structural calculations for the design of the pressure vessel
and its supports shall be provided.
s
on
3 Shop drawings: Shop drawings shall be provided for the fabrication and erection of the whole
system, including air compressors, air valves, surge vessels. Layout drawings, pressure
vessel calculations, schematic drawings and electrical drawings shall be provided.
C
Catalogue pages, manufacturers’ detail instructions, templates and installation methods shall
be provided.
ar
4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions. The Contractor shall include all the
at
documentation required by Part 1 of this Section on the surge protection system in the
operation and maintenance manuals. A copy of the surge analysis and site tests as
Q
described below shall also be included. Documentation for the compressors in accordance
with BS 1571 shall be provided
6.1.5 Quality Assurance
1 Both the Company carrying out the surge analysis and the software used for the computer
transient analysis shall have a proven record in surge analysis. Software used shall be a
recognised water industry standard.
2 The Contractor shall employ Third Party Agency (TPA) to oversee the design, fabrication and
testing of pressure vessels as defined in PD5500. The independent testing authority shall
report direct to the Engineer.
6.1.6 Warranty
1 In addition to the guarantee requirements of Part 1 of this Section, the Contractor shall
ensure that the Company carrying out the surge analysis provides a warranty of the
performance of the entire surge protection system. This shall not in any way relieve the
Contractor of his contractual obligations.
6.2 PRODUCTS
6.2.1 Design Conditions and Performance Characteristics
1 Unless specified otherwise in the particular Project Specification, transient surge pressures
14
shall be limited as the following paragraphs.
20
2 Positive (over) pressure - Positive surge pressures shall not exceed the design pressure of
the pipeline, taking into account any de-rating for temperature. The rating of pipeline
restraints and thrust blocks shall be considered in limiting the positive pressure.
s
rd
3 Negative (under) pressure - Negative surge pressures shall not exceed the following:
da
(a) GRP, asbestos cement, and cement lined ductile/cast iron and steel-limit 1 metre of
vacuum (-1 metre) an
(b) Bitumen lined ductile/cast iron and steel-limit 3 metres of vacuum (-3 metres)
(c) uPVC, ABS, HDPE, MDPE - limit 3 metres of vacuum (-3 metres).
St
4 Stress cycling. Certain types of plastic pipeline can fail prematurely due to duty cycling.
Where the pump start/stop cycling is likely to be high this should be considered.
n
5 Pipeline Manufacturer’s Recommendations. In all instances the recommendations of the

io
pipeline manufacturer with respect to positive and negative pressures and stress cycling
ct
must be followed. Pipeline seals must be included in these recommendations.

tru
6 Surge Vessels. These must be designed, inspected and tested in accordance with PD 5500
Code 2 with a 2.0 mm corrosion allowance Design pressure ratings shall be 1.25 times the
greatest pressure the vessel will be subject to. Vertical vessels shall be used wherever
s
possible for sewage. Any supports or plinths shall designed for the vessel to be completely
on
full of liquid.
C
7 Surge protection equipment shall be chosen in the following order of preference:
(a) flywheel – to be used in all cases where high head is involved to protect against valve
ar
slamming,
at
(b) surge vessel

Q
(c) combination of flywheel and surge vessel
6.2.2 Materials
1 Surge Towers. If these are constructed in concrete, then Section 8 shall apply. If in the
same material as the pipeline, then the specifications applying to the pipeline shall apply.
2 Surge vessels. These shall be constructed from steel in accordance with PD 5500.
3 Coatings. Surge vessels shall be coated internally with an epoxy paint system of minimum
thickness 300 microns. The system shall be proven in use in this application. The external
coating system shall be in accordance with paint system in Section 8 Part 8.
6.2.3 Fabrication
1 Flywheels. These shall comply with the requirements of Part 3.
2 Surge Towers (stand pipes). These may be constructed in concrete, G.R.P or steel. The top
of the tower shall be vented back to the wet well or through a suitable de-odouriser. An
emergency overflow shall be provided, routed to a drain. They shall be capable of
withstanding the maximum pressure generated by the pumps or surge transients, assuming
the tower is full of liquid. Means shall be provided for draining the tower and cleaning it out.
3 Hydropneumatic Atmospheric Surge Vessels. These shall be constructed in steel as

specified above for surge vessels. They shall include the following features:
14
(a) facility for draining the vessel. If possible, this shall be using the pressure pipeline
20
(b) manway access if the vessel is large enough to accommodate this, or inspection
hatch for cleaning the vessel out
(c) air/float valve on top of the vessel. This shall be readily accessible for cleaning and
s
maintenance
rd
(d) vent back to the wet well or a suitable drain for the above valve
da
(e) pressure gauge with isolating cock to measure the maximum and minimum pressures
(f) flanges shall be to BS EN 1092 PN 16.
an
4 Bladder Type Pressure Vessels. These shall be constructed in steel as specified above for
St
surge vessels. They shall include the features (a) (b) (e) and (f) described in 3 above and in
addition the following:
n
(a) food grade iso-butyl rubber bladder. This shall have a guaranteed life of three years
in contact with the liquid pumped and at the specified temperatures
io
(b) bladder pressurisation valve and gauge. This is for recharging the bladder. Access
ct
ladders/platforms shall be provided as necessary.

tru
5 Hydropneumatic Surge Vessels with compressors. The vessel shall be constructed in steel
as specified above. The vessel shall include the features (a) (b) (e) and (f) described in 3
s
above and in addition the following:

on
(a) liquid level gauges

(i) tubular glass, liquid-level gauges with 20 mm tube outside diameter shall be
C
provided. The minimum viewing length shall be 600 mm per gauge. Sufficient
gauges shall be provided to view the entire operating range of water levels in
ar
the pressure vessel. Threaded 20 mm connections shall be provided. Isolation

valves with ball checks shall be provided to prevent loss of liquid upon gauge
at
breakage. Valves shall be of an offset pattern with integral bonnet. Valve

bodies shall be bronze. A drain cock shall be provided on the lower valve.
Q
Valves shall have pressure ratings of 1.5 times the maximum surge pressure
anticipated, or NP 16, whichever is greater
(ii) flanges shall be provided, NP 16 for the maximum and minimum level probe
locations, respectively.
(b) safety relief valves. These shall comply with the PD 5500 and shall be
capable of passing air and water. Valves shall have a bottom inlet and side outlet.
The inlet shall incorporate a calibrated spring set to allow the valve to open at the
vessel design pressure.
(c) air pipework. Air piping shall be galvanised to BS 729 and conform to BS 1387 or
BS 3601, of a minimum of 25 mm diameter. A brass ball valve shall be
provided as a block valve at the pressure vessel. Brass check valves shall be
provided in the air line. All shall be rated for 16 bar.
(d) air compressor assembly

(i) the compressor unit shall be self-contained and consist of a single-acting, two-
(ii) stage, if necessary, air-cooled, reciprocating-type compressor motor with V-belt
drive and regulation, on a fabricated steel skid. Valves shall be of stainless
steel and shall be easily removed or inspected without use of special
tools.
(iii) the compressor shall be driven by an electric motor which shall comply with
Section 21
(iv) the air inlet filter silencer shall be of the dry replaceable cartridge type
(v) the compressor shall shut down at unsafe oil level and shall not restart without
14
adding oil
(vi) if necessary, the compressor shall be provided with finned tube, air-cooled
20
intercooler to remove the heat of compression. The compressor shall have an
automatic centrifugal starting unloader valve which will cause the pressure in
the compressor cylinders to be vented to atmosphere upon compressor
s
stopping, thereby allowing the compressor to start against minimum load
rd
(vii) rotating parts shall be guarded in conformance with BS 5304
da
(viii) the oil sump on each compressor shall be fitted with a valve and drain
extension pipe of sufficient length to enable the oil to be drained without spilling
an
over the base. Sumps containing 1.0 or less may be fitted with a capped pipe.
(e) automatic air volume control system
St
(i) the automatic air volume control system, in conjunction with pressure vessel-
mounted sensor probes and the air compressor unit, shall control the air/water
n
ratio in the hydropneumatic pressure vessel and maintain the air/water ratio
within a range compatible with the surge control system design and established
io
system static and maximum operating pressures

ct
(ii) contacts shall be provided for remote indication of excessive high or low water
level in the vessel. Capacitance type level probes with a probe well
tru
plumbed to the side of the hydropneumatic vessel shall be provided as

Section 10. A control panel with all necessary controls, relays and time delay
s
circuits to actuate the air add/vent solenoid valves, and signal a high or low
on
tank water level shall be provided.

(f) Solenoid Valves
C
(i) solenoid valves of sizes 5 mm through 40 mm for air service shall have forged
bronze bodies to BS 2872 with Teflon seats. Internal plunger, core tube,
ar
plunger spring, and cage assembly shall be stainless steel BS 970 Part 1
316S12. Solenoid enclosures shall be IP 68. Valve actuators shall be 240Va.c.
at
Seals shall be Teflon. Valves shall have a maximum operating pressure and a
maximum differential pressure of 16 bar. Solenoid valves shall be energised to
Q
open.
6.2.4 Factory Inspection and Testing
1 The Contractor shall secure from the pump manufacturer certification that the following
inspections and tests have been conducted at the factory and submit to the Engineer prior to
shipment.
2 Surge Vessels. These shall be inspected and tested in accordance with ASME VIII Div.1
sewer class (Welding, Non Destructive Testing (NDT), Hydro test, etc.)
3 Compressors. These shall be inspected and tested in accordance with BS 1571.
4 Motors and control panels. These shall be inspected and tested as described in Section 21.
5 Control System. This shall be inspected and tested as described in Section 10.
6.2.5 Spare Parts and Tools
1 The Contractor shall provide from the specialist manufacturers of the surge equipment all the
spares and tools required during the commissioning and maintenance periods as specified in
Part 1, including those required below.
2 Special tools, if required for normal operation/or maintenance of any component of the surge
control system, shall be supplied with the equipment.
3 Air Valves. A complete seal/gasket set shall be provided for each air valve installed.
14
4 Control panels and control systems.
20
5 Compressors.
s
6.3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
rd
6.3.1 Installation
da
1 All equipment shall be installed and commissioning in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and under the supervision of the surge control system supplier’s factory
an
trained personnel.
St
6.3.2 Site Inspection and Testing
1 Surge protection system performance shall be verified by field tests at pumping rates
n
specified for each pressure main and for power failure at the maximum pumping rate. The
io
surge control system supplier shall provide a chart recorder and pressure transducer system
to develop a permanent record for each pressure main test.
ct
tru
END OF PART
s
on
C
ar
at
Q
QCS 2014 Section 11: Health and Safety Page 1
Part 2.3.04: Electricity at Work
2 SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION MANAGEMENT /

ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ------------------------------------------- 1
2.3 SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ---------------------- 1
2.3.4 ELECTRICITY AT WORK ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
14
2.3.4.1 Responsibilities ........................................................................................................... 4
20
2.3.4.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................... 4
2.3.4.3 Actions Required to implement This Procedure .......................................................... 5
s
2.3.4.4 Appendices ................................................................................................................. 7
rd
2.3.4.5 Reference documents............................................................................................... 10
da
2.3.4.6 Author ....................................................................................................................... 10
2.3.4.7 Approvals ................................................................................................................. 10
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
a rC
at
Q
is appointed

Process Map - Control of Electrical Operations

Services Co- Locator of
Project Manager Supervisor/Engineer SHE Advisor
ordinator Service
Appoint an Control the

Issue current version Authorised Person Permit of Work
Appoint an Electrical
of RES to Project for electrical works System and issue
Duty Holder for the
Managements/Electric for the location the appropriate
Company/Region
al Contractors 3.3 permits
3.2
3.1 3.2
14
Display the
20
appointment on the
Appoint an Authorised person for the Permanent
location notice
and Temporary Works
Board
3.2 3.3
s
rd
da
Audit the electrical Appoint a Obtain and update a
installation/equipme Permanent Works drawing showing
nt Electrical Duty the locations
3.2 Holder Temporary Electrical
3.5
an System
3.3
St
n
Ensure the Schedule

io
tests are carried out
3.3
ct
ru
st
on
a rC
at
Q
Key: Activity
Guidance
PURPOSE
1 The purpose of this procedure is to assign responsibilities and establish a safe system of
work in relation to the design, installation, maintenance, and examination and testing of
electrical systems/equipment.
SCOPE
14
1 This procedure covers all COMPANY Projects and locations under the control of
COMPANY. A COMPANY is defined as the organization with responsibility for management
20
of safety at a construction site.
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
arC
at
Q
2.3.4.1 Responsibilities
SHE DIRECTOR
1 The SHE Director shall approve this procedure
MANAGING DIRECTOR
2 The Managing Director shall appoint in writing an Electrical Duty Holder (EDH) for the
Company/Region who shall be a qualified Electrical Engineer or appoint an Electrical
14
Consultant to manage the EDH duties
20
PROJECT/SITE MANAGER
3 Ensure any applicable sections of this procedure are established, and complied with.
s
rd
4 The responsibility for electrical safety of the permanent works under construction shall
remain with the operational line management.
da
5 The appointment of a Permanent Works Electrical Duty Holder shall be the responsibility of Site
an
Manager with reference to the EDH.
St
ELECTRICAL DUTY HOLDER (EDH)
6 It is the responsibility of the EDH to implement this procedure and monitor that all portable
n
electrical appliances provided by COMPANY for use by COMPANY personnel or others

io
comply with it.

ct
7 The EDH shall be responsible for electrical safety with respect to the whole or defined parts
ru
of the Company’s electrical systems and/or equipment, ensuring compliance with the Rules
for Electrical Safety and, with regard to installations, planned preventative maintenance.
st
8 The vetting/approval of temporary electrical sub-contractors shall be the responsibility of the

on
EDH or the Operational/Area Director following consultation with his/her SHE Adviser in
circumstances where the EDH duties are delegated to an approved electrical contractor.
rC
9 It is acknowledged that different arrangements exist in respect of site set ups, some being
under the control of the client/external partners. In circumstances where deemed
a
necessary the EDH shall endeavour to influence the client/external partners to adopt
at
COMPANY standards.
Q
2.3.4.2 Definitions
1 A full set of definitions are contained in the COMPANY Rules for Electrical Safety.
DESIGNATED PERSONS
ELECTRICAL DUTY HOLDER
2 An Electrical Engineer appointed by the Managing Director in writing to be responsible for

ensuring electrical safety with respect to the whole or defined parts of the Company's
electrical system and/or equipment.
AUTHORISED PERSON
3 An electrical contractor or electrically qualified Engineer or Technician appointed by the

Electrical Duty Holder in writing, to carry out specified duties on the electrical system or
equipment and to take control of any danger that is to be avoided and who is competent to
accept such responsibility.
SUB CONTRACTOR'S AUTHORISED PERSON
4 An electrically qualified Engineer or Technician appointed by the by the Sub-Contractor in

writing, to carry out specified duties on the electrical system or equipment and to take control
14
of any danger that is to be avoided and who is competent to accept such responsibility.
20
SITE ELECTRICAL CO-ORDINATOR
1 The Site/Location Manager will be the Site Electrical Co-ordinator for the site/location under
s
that person's control, unless the position is otherwise delegated in, writing and that person is
approved by the Electrical Duty Holder in writing.
rd
2.3.4.3 Actions Required to implement This Procedure
da
an
St
MANAGING DIRECTOR
1 The MD for the Company/Region shall appoint in writing an Electrical Duty Holder for their
n
area of responsibility.
io
ct
ELECTRICAL DUTY HOLDER

ru
2 The Electrical Duty Holder shall :

(a) Ensure ALL work is carried out in accordance with the COMPANY Rules for Electrical
st
Safety.
on
(b) Assess and approve all temporary electrical contractors prior to their appointment.
(c) In conjunction with the Site/Project Manager appoint in writing an Authorised Person
rC
for each location.

(d) Take reasonable steps to ensure that the Site Electrical Co-ordinator has the
a
competency to undertake the role.

at
(e) Ensure that all projects and appropriate contractors have a copy of the latest Rules for
Electrical Safety.
Q
(f) Undertake independent inspection/audit of site electrical installation/equipment under

COMPANY UK control.
(g) During inspection/audit of the temporary electrical installation shall also consider the
electrical safety controls in place for the permanent works.
3 The minimum frequency of inspection/audits shall be carried out at a frequency as deemed

necessary by the EDH in agreement with the Area Director responsible for the site.
SITE ELECTRICAL CO-ORDINATOR
4 The Site Electrical Co-ordinator shall :

Safety.
(b) After consultation with the EDH, appoint in writing an Authorised person for the
location he is responsible for.
(c) Display the appointment of the Site Electrical Co-ordinator and Authorised Person on
the location notice board and electrical switch gear.
(d) Keep an up-to-date drawing showing the electrical circuits for the location’s temporary
electrical system.
(e) Ensure schedule tests are carried out on installations and equipment.
14
AUTHORISED PERSON
20
5 The Authorised Person shall :
(a) Control the permit to work system and issue permits as required.
s
rd
SITE/PROJECT MANAGER
da
6 The Site/Project Manager shall :
an
Safety.
(b) After consultation with the EDH appoint in writing a permanent works Electrical Duty
St
Holder.
(c) Ensure that the specification for the temporary site electrics is communicated to the
n
temporary electrical contractor.

io
(d) Undertake the duties of the Site Electrical Co-ordinator or appoint appropriate person
ct
to undertake those duties.

ru
st
on
a rC
at
Q
20
s
d
ar
nd
2.3.4.4 Appendices
a
APPENDIX 1 –
St
SUGGESTED INSPECTION AND TEST FREQUENCIES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
n
Equipment/Environment Formal Visual Inspection Combined Inspection and Testing
io
ct
Battery operated: (less than 20 volts) No No
ru
Extra low voltage: (less than 50 volts AC)
No No
st
e.g. telephone equipment, low voltage desk lights
on
Information technology: No if double insulated

Yes, 2-4 years
e.g. desktop computers, VDU screens – otherwise up to 5 years
C
No if double insulated
Photocopiers, fax machines: NOT hand-held Rarely moved Yes, 2-4 years
– otherwise up to 5 years
ar
at
Double insulated equipment: NOT hand-held. Moved occasionally,

Yes, 2-4 years No
e.g. fans, table lamps, slide projectors
Q
Double insulated equipment: HAND-HELD

Yes, 6 months – 1 year No
e.g. some floor cleaners
Earthed equipment (Class 1):
Yes, 6 months – 1 year Yes, 1-2 years
e.g. electric kettles, some floor cleaners
Yes, 6 months – 4 years

Cables (leads) and plugs connected to the above. Yes, 1-5 years depending on the
depending on the type of
Extension leads (mains voltage) type of equipment it is connected to
equipment it is connected to
20
s
d
ar
OFFICES AND OTHER LOW RISK ENVIRONMENTS ONLY CONSTRUCTION SITES
nd
Formal Visual Combined
Equipment/Application Voltage
a
Inspection Inspection and Test
St
Battery operated power tools and torches Less than 25 volts No No
n
25V portable hand lamps (confined or damp 25 volt secondary winding from
io
No No
situations) transformer
ct
Secondary winding centre tapped to earth
50V portable hand lamps
ru (25 volt)
No Yearly
st
110V portable and hand-held tools, extension leads,
Secondary winding centre tapped to earth Before first use on site and
site lighting, moveable wiring systems and associated Monthly
on
(55 volt) then 3 monthly

switchgear
C
230V portable and hand-held tools extension leads Before first use on site and
230 volt mains supply through 30mA RCD Weekly
and portable floodlighting then monthly
ar
230V equipment such as lifts, hoists and fixed Before first use on site and
230V supply fuses or MCBs Monthly
at
floodlighting then 3 monthly

Q
*Before first use on site and

RCDs Fixed** Weekly
then 3 monthly
Before first use on site and
Equipment in site offices 230 volt office equipment 6 monthly
then yearly
*Note:
RCDs need a different range of tests to other portable equipment, and equipment designed to carry out appropriate tests on RCDs will need to be
used.
** It is recommended that portable RCDs are tested monthly.
20
s
d
ar
APPENDIX 2 - VISUAL INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
nd
THIS IS A SIMPLE INSPECTION REQUIRING THE MINIMUM OF TRAINING. THE FOLLOWING CHECKLIST COVERS THE
REQUIREMENTS.
a
St
Plug No damage, cracks or bent pins, cable sheath secured. Inspection of the inside of
the plug to check correct fusing/wiring in place can also be part of the visual
n
inspection.
io
Cable
ct
No damage, significant abrasions, cuts, taped joints
Appliance Casing
ru No damage, loose parts or screws missing
st
General
on
No evidence of overheating (discoloured/hot areas), air intakes not choked, appliance

is dry (where appropriate) appliance is dry (where appropriate) appliance is within its
C
test period (check tag)
N.B. Use the right tool for the job in the right place – don’t improvise. UNPLUG
ar
APPLIANCES WHILST INSPECTING. IF APPLIANCE IS DEFECTIVE DON’T USE IT –

at
REPORT IT!
Q
2.3.4.5 Reference documents
1 Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) RD1.5
2 COMPANY Rules for Electrical Safety (RES) (Qatar General Electricity & Water
Company to Supply)
14
2.3.4.6 Author
20
POSITION IN
SECTION NAME CONTACT DETAILS
s
COMPANY
rd
da
SHE Manager
an
St
2.3.4.7 Approvals
n
POSITION IN
NAME SIGNATURE & DATE
COMPANY
io
ct
ru
Approved by: SHEQ Director

st
on
rC
END OF DOCUMENT
a
at
Q
QCS 2014 Section 21: Electrical Works Page 1
Part 01: General Provisions for Electrical Installation
1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION .................... 2
1.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

1.1.1 Scope 2
1.1.2 Regulations 2
1.1.3 Existing Services 3
1.1.4 Contract Drawings 3
1.1.5 Shop Drawings 4
1.1.6 Progress Drawings 5
14
1.1.7 As built drawings 5
1.1.8 Builders Work 6
20
1.1.9 Programme 6
1.1.10 Equipment and Materials Approval 6
1.1.11 Fire and Safety Precautions 7
s
1.1.12 Protection 8
rd
1.1.13 Quality of Staff/Personnel 8
1.1.14 Climatic Conditions 9
da
1.1.15 Samples 9
1.1.16 Quality of Materials 9
an
1.1.17 Equipment Duties and Ratings 10
1.1.18 Workmanship 10
St
1.1.19 Labels/Circuit Lists/Cable Identification 11

1.1.20 Segregation of Services 12
n
1.1.21 Electricity Supply 13

io
1.1.22 Polarity 14
ct
1.1.23 Safety Interlocks 14

1.1.24 Spare Parts 14
tru
1.1.25 Protection of Excavation 16

1.1.26 Supply of materials 16
s
1.1.27 Special Requirements 16

on
C
ar
at
Q
1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Scope
1 The Electrical Installation Contractor, herein referred to as the 'Contractor' within this part and
all other Section 21 parts of this specifications shall carry out all electrical works complete in
accordance with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
2 The scope of work shall include but not be limited to:
14
(a) (The supply and installation of all services, equipment, components, accessories and
20
fittings required for the operation of the facility to the extent specified and detailed on
the Drawings and Specifications including 400 days maintenance or as stipulated in
the contract specification and all extended warranties after provisional handover
s
(b) Builder's work in connection with the Electrical Installations, including supply,
rd
necessary inserts sleeves and making good.
(c) Any work which can be reasonably inferred as necessary for the safe, satisfactory
da
operation of each system, whether such work is specified or shown on drawings or not
(d) The supply and installation of cables, conduits, boxes and termination points, for the
an
motors, starters, controls and the like for the Process Equipment, Heating, Ventilation
and Air-conditioning and Plumbing services
St
(e) (Arranging for installation of permanent Electrical supply by the Qatar General
Electricity and Water Corporation (QGEWC), including submission of all necessary
n
documents to the QGEWC, and carrying all necessary approvals and obtaining
io
consumption meters Moreover, the Contractor shall allow in his tender and be
responsible for the payment of all charges by way of examination, certification,
ct
depositing or connection fee to any Statutory Authority. (I.e. Electricity, Water,

Drainage, Telephone, Fire, etc).
tru
(f) Supply and installation of permanent electrical supply equipment and cables in
compliance with QGEWC requirements and approvals. The electrical equipment is
s
required for the implementation of the of the new facilities as well for the supply of new
on
loads,. The supply includes EHV cables, HV/MV substations, HV and MV cables and
accessories, consumption meters, and all related civil works, and including submission
of all necessary documents to QGEWC, and carrying all necessary approvals
C
(g) Coordinating with QGEWC regarding outage schedule, attending upon the Supply
ar
Authority installing mains power supply and carrying out primary and secondary
injection tests and any other tests as directed by QGEWC.
at
(h) Arranging and carrying out all necessary approvals with Telecom Provider for the
Telephone System
Q
(i) Arranging and carrying out all necessary approvals with the Qatar Civil Defence
Department for the Fire Alarm System, extinguishing and protection systems.
1.1.2 Regulations
1 All supplies and services offered in response to this specification shall conform to the latest
standards.
2 The design, equipment and installation requirements shall comply with the standards and
recommendations laid down by the following :
(a) Regulations for Electrical Installations as issued by the Qatar General Electricity and
Water Corporation (QGEWC) Qatar
(b) Regulations for Electrical Installations as issued by the Institution of Electrical

Engineers (I.E.E.), London (for points not included in QGEWC Regulations)
(c) Recommendations for Lighting Installations as issued by QGEWC and the Chartered
Institute of Building Services, London
(d) Standards relating to Electrical Installations and equipment as issued by
International Electrotechnical Commission (I.E.C.) and British Standards Institute
(BSI)
(e) Regulations for telephone system installation as issued by Q-TEL
(f) National Electrical Code issued by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA),
Boston, U.S.A
14
(g) Rules of the Qatar Civil Defence Department for Fire Alarm Installations.
20
3 Where two or more applicable standards and/or the Specifications are in conflict, the most
stringent shall apply.
s
1.1.3 Existing Services
rd
1 The Contractor is deemed to have visited and inspected the site to familiarise himself with
da
the existing site conditions and services at tender stage.
2 The Contractor shall obtain the existing services record drawings from QGEWC and various
an
utility services departments (i.e. Q-TEL, CDD etc).
St
3 Co-ordination between shop drawings, work on site and existing services shall be carried out
by the Contractor.
n
4 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damages to the existing services including
io
repairs, and penalties imposed by the concerned parties etc and for removing any site
obstacles such as underground cables, pipes, civil works etc. which is obstructing his work
ct
on site.
tru
5 The Contractor shall also be responsible for liaison with QGEWC, Q-TEL and all other
government utility departments to disconnect or divert the existing services supply to the
s
existing site prior to demolishing.

on
1.1.4 Contract Drawings

C
1 The indication and/or description in any of the Contracts documents, unless otherwise
specifically stated, implies an instruction to supply and fix such items.
ar
2 Notes on Drawings referring to individual items of work take precedence over the
at
Specification.
Q
3 Drawings show the general run of cables, raceways, etc. and the approximate location of
equipment and utilities; symbols and schematic diagrams are of no dimensional significance.
Obtain from the Engineer dimensions not shown on, or which cannot be determined from
Drawings. Do not scale drawings to obtain locations.
4 Notify the Engineer of conflicting requirements. Where departures from the drawings are
deemed necessary, details of such departure and reasons thereupon shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
5 No such departure shall be made without prior written approval of the Engineer.
6 The design specifications and criteria shall not relieve the Contractor from continuously
following up with the respective authorities to obtain up-to-date requirements and
instructions.
1.1.5 Shop Drawings
1 The term 'shop drawings' includes fabrication, erection, layout and setting out drawings;
manufacturer's standard drawings, schedules; descriptive literature, illustrations, catalogues
and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams and other drawings
and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, raceway systems, control systems
and methods of construction as required to show that materials, equipment and systems and
position thereof, conform to the Contract Documents. The term 'manufactured' applies to
14
standard units usually mass produced. The term 'fabricated' means items specifically
assembled or made out of selected materials to meet individual design requirements.
20
2 Shop drawings shall establish actual detail of all manufactured or fabricated items, indicate
proper relation to adjoining work, amplify design details of electrical equipment in proper
relation to physical spaces in the structure, and incorporate minor changes of design or
s
construction to suit actual conditions.
rd
3 The Contractor shall submit for approval, and obtain in due time to conform to the Contract
da
Program, all shop and installation drawings based on the design drawings approved by the
QGEWC and all other relevant Municipality and Government Authorities.
an
4 The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the said Contract, shall prepare and submit
shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be submitted with such promptness as to cause no
St
delay in his own work nor to any other Contractor. No extensions of time will be granted
because of failure to have shop drawings submitted in ample time to allow for processing, in
n
accordance with the submittals schedule outlined in Section 9, Part 1, Clause 1.1.4.
io
5 Provide shop drawings, to a scale not smaller than the corresponding layout drawings,
ct
showing the following and obtain approval before commencing work:

tru
(a) exact runs and sizes of conduits, ducts, cables, cable trays and trunking
(b) layout drawings for each separate electrical installation showing the actual locations
s
of points, suitably identified, the locations of switchgears, switchboards, motor control

on
centres and distribution boards, details and types of fittings

(c) plans showing the equipment assembly, space requirements, clearances and
C
locations for cable entrances and anchor bolts

(d) elevations showing all parts, devices, components and nameplates, positions and
ar
arrangements of the equipment. Show as many elevations as necessary to clearly

depict component and device arrangements
at
(e) schedules of points, indicating how the various outlets are connected to the
Q
distribution boards, size of circuit wiring, the rating of the protective device and the
type and size of appliance of fitting
(f) schematic diagram of connections of distribution boards, and equipment to main
switchboards showing sizes of feeders, etc
(g) schematic and elementary wiring diagrams, of each unit of each equipment, showing
numbered terminal points, numbered wires and numbered interconnections to other
equipment and remote devices
(h) connection wiring diagrams, of each unit of each equipment, showing numbered
terminal points, numbered wires and numbered interconnections to other equipment
and remote devices
(i) complete catalogue information of all parts and components of electrical equipment
(j) all cable routings and layouts for the different electrical services, feeders and branch
circuits showing routes, sizes and types of cables
(k) any other data necessary for the proper maintenance of the installations.
6 Drawings shall be ISO standard size A1. Lettering shall be stencilled. Shop drawings and
samples shall be properly identified with the name of the Project, the Contractor, the Sub-
Contractor and the date, and signed by Contractors Authorised Engineers.
7 Final co-ordination of electrical works with mechanical, structural and architectural work shall
be carried out from complete shop drawings and sufficient time shall be allowed for co-
ordination and checking of shop drawings and calculations after shop drawings are
submitted.
14
8 Individual shop drawings shall be submitted following the distribution of the co-ordination
20
drawings and shall bear a stamp indicating that the work has been co-ordinated with other
trades.
s
9 The Engineer's review and approval of shop drawings submitted by and approved by the
rd
Contractor is for general conformance with the design concept and information given in the
Contract Documents and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any
da
deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Engineer's review and
approval shall not be construed as a complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for error of any sort in shop drawings or schedules, or from the necessity of
an
furnishing any work required by the Contract Documents which may have been omitted on
the shop drawings. The Engineer's review and approval of a component item shall not
St
indicate review and approval of the complete assembly in which it functions.
10 The Engineer or the supervising consultant shall forward electrical drawings and
n
specifications which are to be submitted for approval to QGEWC, when appropriate.

io
However, it shall be the Contractors responsibility to obtain written approval from QGEWC for
all such drawings and specifications appertaining to the work carried out under the contract.
ct
QGEWC approvals may take a considerable time to obtain and the Contractor should make
allowance for this and be available for liaising with and pursuing approvals with QGEWC.
tru
1.1.6 Progress Drawings

s
on
1 Provide and keep on the job at all times, one complete and separate set of blackline prints of
the electrical work on which shall be clearly, neatly and accurately noted, promptly as the
work progresses, all architectural and electrical changes, revisions and additions to the work.
C
Whatever work is installed otherwise than as shown on the Contract Drawings, such changes
shall be noted.
ar
2 Indicate daily progress on these prints by colouring in the various conduit, ducts, trunking,
at
cable trays, fixtures, apparatus and associated installation works erected.

Q
1.1.7 As built drawings
1 The Contractor shall provide the as built drawings, as approved by the Engineer, in DXF
format or AutoCAD DWG format, either in floppy diskettes or in CD-ROM, as per the Project
Documentation requirement. The drawings shall be submitted not later than 2 months after
completion of the Project, or putting into operation, whichever is earlier. An addition, 3 sets of
hard copy of all relevant drawings, which will be required for operation and maintenance,
shall be supplied in bound book forms immediately after the commissioning of the Project.
The quality of these drawings shall be consistent with the standard of QGEWC. Diary sheets
for Work completed shall not be authorised until such records have been presented to the
Engineer and accepted.
2 The Contractor shall supply, 3 sets of all operation and maintenance manuals in original,
from the manufacturer in bound book forms, at least 2 weeks prior to commissioning of the
equipment. These shall also be supplied, in computer diskettes, based on popular Microsoft
window based publishing software programmes, along with the as built drawings as
mentioned above, as specified in the Project Documentation or as directed by the Engineer.
1.1.8 Builders Work
1 Lay electrical works in advance of pouring concrete slabs and construction of walls. Obtain
Engineer's approval before commencing builder's work in connection with electrical
installation. Related co-ordinated shop-drawings shall be submitted for approval as per the
related clause 1.1.5 of this section. Materials approval shall be obtained as per procedure
14
detailed in clause 1.1.9 below. The Contractor shall make it certain that drawings properly co-
ordinated with other works are submitted immediately after signing of the contract and
approval of drawings and the materials are obtained at least one month prior to the
20
commencement date of the construction.
2 Check with other trades to ensure equipment and material can be installed in space provided.
s
rd
3 Provide other trades with information necessary for them to execute their work.
da
4 Details on drawings which are specific regarding dimensions and locations, are for
information purposes. Co-ordinate with other trades to ensure work can be installed as
indicated.
an
St
1.1.9 Programme
1 The Contractor shall produce a work programme based on CPM or Bar-chart form or as
n
directed by the Engineer indicating the time required for various operations to complete the
io
Project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the programme:

ct
(a) mobilisation
(b) drawings/submittals
tru
(c) approvals
s
(d) equipment deliveries including delivery periods from supply sources external to the
on
State of Qatar
(e) first fix
C
(f) cabling
ar
(g) main/sub-main distribution equipment

(h) second fix
at
(i) fixing of light fittings

Q
(j) testing
(k) commissioning and handing over.
2 The Contractor is responsible for all liaison with QGEWC in respect of programming the
installation and commissioning of complete electrical system. The Contractor shall ensure
that QGEWC are at all times kept informed of the current progress of the electrical works on
site and that his approved electricity supply subcontractor programs the cable laying works in
the specified sequence in accordance with the approved programme.
1.1.10 Equipment and Materials Approval
1 Approval of materials and equipment shall be based on latest manufacturer's published data.
2 Complete and detailed information of all materials and equipment to be incorporated in the
work shall be submitted. Submit detailed description and specifications, catalogues cuts,
installation data, diagrams, dimensions, controls and any other data required to demonstrate
compliance with the Contract Documents. Each item submitted shall be referenced to the
applicable paragraph in the Specification.
3 At the request of the Engineer, submit a sample of any equipment or material for further
study before approval. Where samples are required by the Engineer, the period required to
obtain the sample will be taken into account when scheduling approvals.
4 Only approved materials shall be employed at the site. All materials installed which are not
approved shall be removed and reinstated by approved ones.
14
5 Time periods for equipment and materials approvals shall be as outlined in Section 9, Part 1,
Clause 1.1.4.
20
1.1.11 Fire and Safety Precautions
s
1 Establish from Architectural Drawings where fire and smoke barriers exist, and make
rd
adequate provision of fire and smoke barriers in and around trunking, conduits, cables, etc.,
where they pass through floors and fire rated walls, and where protection systems are
da
installed pack space between wiring and sleeve full with Fire Retardant Material and seal with
caulking.
an
2 The Contractor shall ensure that this work is carried out such that the integrity of any such
fire barrier is properly maintained where pierced by electrical services.
St
3 For each switchboard the Contractor shall supply the following equipment:
n
(a) 1 no. electrical grade rubber mat to BS 921 1000 mm wide extending the full length of
io
the switchboard
ct
(b) 1 no. pair of electrical grade rubber gloves to BS 697. The hand glove should have the
date of test stamped on it.
tru
(c) 1 no. notice in English and Arabic advising treatment for a person suffering from
electrical shock.
s
on
4 The Contractor shall put the notice for electrical shock treatment in details with sketches and
instructions as per standard procedures. The notice shall comply with the requirement of the
C
QGEWC in content and format. However, this should include the following as a minimum,
(a) ACT IMMEDIATELY

ar
(i) Safeguard Yourself

at
(ii) Switch off current or break electric circuit

Q
(iii) Use or stand on some dry non-conducting material to remove the CASUALTY
from cable or source of electricity.
(iv) Start artificial respiration and call for Medical Aid
(b) TREATMENT FOR ELECTRIC SHOCK
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
(KISS OF LIFE, MOUTH TO MOUTH METHOD)
(i) Lay the casualty on back and if possible on a table
(ii) Kneel or stand near to the casualty‟s head
(iii) Remove any obstruction from the mouth
(iv) Support the nape of the neck and press top of the head so that it is tilted
backwards
(v) Open your mouth and take a deep breath, pinch the casualty‟s nostrils with your
fingers. Seal your lips round his mouth and blow into his lungs until the chest
rises.
(vi) Remove your mouth and watch the chest falls
(vii) Repeat and continue inflation at your natural rate of breathing. Continue to give
artificial respiration until natural breathing is restored or until the medical aid
arrives
(viii) When the casualty is breathing, place in recovery position, lying and resting on
14
the side. Remain with and watch casualty closely.
1.1.12 Protection
20
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until finally inspected, tested,
accepted and handed over. Materials and equipment which are not immediately installed
s
after delivery to site shall be stored carefully. Close open ends of work with temporary covers
rd
or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
da
2 Protect work and material of other trades from damage that might be caused by his work or
workmen and make good damage thus caused. an
3 Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel safety.
St
4 Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 240 VOLTS" or with appropriate voltage in English and
Arabic.
n
5 Arrange for installation of temporary doors for room containing electrical distribution
io
equipment. Keep these doors locked except when under direct supervision of an electrician.
ct
1.1.13 Quality of Staff/Personnel

tru
1 The electrical services installation shall be carried out in a professional manner by

experienced and qualified personnel.
s
on
2 Electrical Contractor shall be to the classifications required by QGEWC and shall carry a
valid licence.
C
3 Prior to the commencement of works the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of his intended
ar
site staffing levels.

at
4 The Contractor shall appoint one graduate Electrical Engineer full time with 5 years
experience in similar works and qualified staff/personnel for the supervision of the Electrical
Q
Installation Works.
5 The name, qualifications and experience of the nominated engineers shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval within 15 days of the receipt of the order to commence the works.
6 An Electrical Foreman of 10 years experience in similar projects should be full time available
on site for direct follow up and implementation of the electrical works.
7 Qualified and Experienced Electricians shall be available on site to carry out the works in
accordance with the programme.
8 The Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide information and
documentation as may be necessary to establish the validity of any individual persons
proficiency and effect their removal from site should they prove to be unsatisfactory.
1.1.14 Climatic Conditions
1 The climate in Qatar in the summer months is hot and humid and a humidity of 100 % at
30 °C has been recorded.
(a) violent sand and dust storms of several hours duration occur and even on
comparatively still days, fine dust is carried in suspension in the atmosphere.
(b) all apparatus and equipment shall, therefore, be so designed and constructed that
they operate satisfactorily and without any deleterious effect for prolonged and
continuous periods in the conditions stated above and at the following ambient
temperature conditions:
14
(i) maximum sun radiation temperature in summer - 84 °C
20
(ii) maximum ambient temperature in summer - 52 °C
(iii) average max. ambient temperature in summer - 45 °C
s
(iv) minimum ambient temperature in winter - 0 °C
rd
(v) the altitude of Qatar may be taken as sea level.
da
2 The temperatures quoted above make no allowance for heat generated from equipment itself
or from any other equipment in the vicinity
an
3 The capacity and ratings of all electrical equipment and materials given are, unless otherwise
St
indicated, for Qatar climatic conditions. Provide the basis of the derating factors applied in
each case
n
4 Where specific sizes are indicated e.g. cable sizes, due allowances have been made in the
io
design for the climatic conditions of Qatar and derating has been applied
ct
5 Where no ratings or sizes are indicated for components and other accessories, supply
tru
equipment which will give trouble free service in the ambient conditions stated above.
1.1.15 Samples
s
on
1 The term „samples‟ includes natural materials, fabricated items, equipment, devices,
appliances, or parts thereof as specified and other samples as may be required to determine
C
whether kind, quality, construction, workmanship, finish, colour and other characteristics of
materials conform to requirements of the Contract Documents.
ar
2 Samples shall establish kind, quality and other required characteristics of various parts of the
work. Indicate details of construction, dimensions, capacities, weights and electrical
at
performance characteristic of equipment or material.

Q
3 Samples and sample board should be prepared and identified by the manufacturer and
stamped/engraved with make, type, Cat No. and size marking should be indelible and legible.
1.1.16 Quality of Materials
1 Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for products furnished under this
Contract. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other
liabilities which manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of
the Contract Documents.
2 All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Contract shall carry
standard warranty against all defects in materials and workmanship. Any faults due to
defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship or Contractor's design which
develop shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of the Contractor, including all
other damage done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from this failure.
3 Guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified
performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated.
4 Upon receipt of notice from the Engineer, of failure of any part of system or equipment during
the period of maintenance, the affected parts shall be replaced.
14
1.1.17 Equipment Duties and Ratings
20
1 Power ratings shown for the proposed equipment are in accordance with the best information
available to the Engineer and are to be considered as minimum ratings. In the event
equipment items proposed by the Contractor should require motors with different power
rating than shown, it shall be the Contractor‟s responsibility to furnish circuit breaker, starting
s
equipment, feeder and branch circuits, conduits, and accessories etc. as required to comply
rd
with the electrical code and prevent excessive voltage drop without added cost to the Client.
da
2 Where equipment to be furnished is installed in an existing enclosure or adjacent to existing
equipment, the Contractor shall field check the dimensions of existing equipment, location of
an
conduits, etc., and shall familiarise himself with all existing conditions and difficulties to be
encountered in performing such work.
St
3 Degree of protection for all electrical equipment shall be as follows:

IP 54, for indoor equipment
n
IP 55, for outdoor equipment

io
IP 68, for submersible equipment

ct
4 All external equipment to be of metallic construction.

tru
5 The equipment shall be located generally as indicated on the drawings and the Contractor
shall ensure that the equipment is suitably constructed to permit installation as shown. The
s
equipment shall where necessary be constructed in modular form to permit access into the
buildings and facilitate ease of erection at site.
on
6 The equipment arrangements and single line diagram are for guidance only and show a
C
practical arrangement that would be acceptable. The Contractor may propose an alternative
arrangement which meets the requirements of the specification.
ar
7 All equipment performing similar duties shall be of a single type and make and be fully
at
interchangeable in order to limit the stock of spare parts required. This is to apply particularly
to such items as motors, switchgear, instruments, controls, relays, etc.
Q
1.1.18 Workmanship
1 The entire work provided in this specification shall be constructed and finished in every
respect in a workmanlike and substantial manner. The Contractor shall provide the system in
accordance with the best trade practice and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2 Keep others fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for
apparatus and give full information sufficiently in advance of the work so that all openings
may be built in advance. Provide and install all sleeves, supports, etc., hereinafter specified
or required.
3 Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus as to the proper method of
installing and connecting same. Obtain all information from others which may be necessary
to facilitate work and the completion of the whole Project.
4 Provide the services of an experienced foreman, who shall be continuously in charge of the
erection of the electrical work, together with all necessary skilled workmen, helpers and
labourers, required to properly unload, transfer, erect and connect up, adjust, start, operate
and test the system.
5 Before installing any work, verify that it does not interfere with clearance required for other
work. Notice of adverse conditions shall be forwarded in writing to the Engineer before any
work in question is installed. If notification is not made, and work installed causes
14
interference with the contemplated design, make such changes in his work as directed by the
Engineer to permit the installation of all work of the Project, at no additional cost to the Client.
20
6 Raceways shall be run as straight and direct as possible in general forming right angles with
or parallel with walls or piping and neatly spaced, with risers erected plumb and true,
maintain a clearance of at least 25 mm between finished coverings and adjoining work.
s
Approved ceiling height shall be obtained from Architectural Drawings.
rd
7 All equipment and accessories shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Should
da
operation of any of the equipment or systems produce noise or vibration which is, in the
opinion of the Engineer objectionable, make change in equipment and do all work necessary
an
to eliminate the objectionable noise or vibration at no additional cost to the Client.
8 Wherever possible services shall not cross expansion joints. Where this is unavoidable the
St
services shall accommodate the design movement without damage, by use of approved
expansion couplings/flexible conduit arrangement.
n
9 All MV, HV and EHV works shall be carried out by a contractor or sub-contractor pre-qualified
io
and approved by QGEWC. Proof of such approval shall be required in writing prior to the
ct
works commencing on site and the name of any sub–contractor to be used shall be entered
in the relevant form of tender when the tender is submitted. All cable jointers to be used on
tru
the Contract shall be required to undertake and pass a trade test conducted by QGEWC at
the Contractor‟s expense.
s
1.1.19 Labels/Circuit Lists/Cable Identification

on
1 For substations, switchgears, switchboards, motor control centres and panel boards:
C
(a) engraved lamacoid name plates, black with minimum 10 mm high white lettering.
ar
2 For Distribution Boards and Circuit Breakers:

at
(a) where individually enclosed or in substations, switchgears, switchboards, motor

control centres and panel boards without doors : engraved lamacoid nameplates,
Q
black with minimum 8 mm high white lettering.
(b) in panel boards with doors : directories mounted inside transparent plastic covers in
metal frames.
3 Wiring Identification:
(a) identify wiring with permanent indelible, identifying markings, either numbered or
coloured, heat shrinkable tube or ferrules, on both ends of phase conductors of
feeders and branch circuit wiring.
(b) maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout
(c) colour code to standards above as specified elsewhere
(d) use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.
4 Conduit and Cable Identification:
(a) colour code conduits and metallic sheathed cables

(b) code with plastic sleeve or paint end points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling
or floor and also at 15 m intervals along its length.
(c) colours to be 25 mm wide prime colour and 20 mm wide auxiliary colour to standards
above
(d) number code, per Circuit Schedule, all feeder and branch circuit cables at both
connection points and in manholes, handholes, pull-boxes and junction boxes with
fibre or non-ferrous metal tags, fastened with non-ferrous wire.
14
5 Device Plates:
(a) for Device Plates of local toggle switches, toggle switch type motor starters, pilot
20
lights and the like, whose junction is not readily apparent : plates to be engraved with 3
mm high letters describing equipment controlled or indicated.
s
6 For Busbars:
rd
(a) phase identification letters shall be stamped into the metal of the busbars of each
da
phase of the main buses in each substation, switchgear, switchboards, motor control
centre and panel board in addition to colour identification
an
(b) Letters shall be visible without disassembling current carrying supporting elements.
(c) busbars shall be sleeved for phase identification by using high temperature grade heat
St
shrinkable coloured PVC sleeving throughout its length. In no circumstances will any
kind of wrapping tape be accepted on busbars.
n
7 For Doors:
io
(a) where switchboard rooms, cable chambers, metal screened spaces and the like
ct
contain electric power cables, bus bars or equipment operating at voltages exceeding
600 V : enamelled sheet metal, red on white, reading "Danger - High Voltage".
tru
8 For Rooms:
s
(a) to switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces assigned to electrical
on
equipment, and the like : enamelled sheet metal, red on white, reading "Electrical
Equipment Room - No Storage Permitted".
C
9 Languages:
ar
(a) nameplates with directional, operational or warning labels shall be in Arabic and
English.
at
1.1.20 Segregation of Services

Q
1 Electrical services shall be segregated as specified throughout the installation to obviate the
following;
(a) electrical interference from one circuit to another

(b) a fault on one circuit affecting another
(c) unnecessary fire damage
(d) difficulties in circuit identification
(e) voltage limits for general safety
(f) difficulties in removal and/or maintenance.
2 All raceways shall be kept clear of other services except where intentionally earthed or
bonded. Generally, raceways shall be kept 150 mm away from and above hot water and 75
mm away from other services.
3 Unless specifically indicated otherwise, normal, emergency, low voltage cables and wiring
shall be segregated throughout the installation generally in the following manner:
(a) armoured and sheathed cables: Where more than one tray has been specified or is
necessary to accommodate the number of cables on a run, where practical,
segregation shall be achieved by dedicating each tray to either normal or emergency
services. Where normal and emergency cables have to run together in trays, ducts
or trenches, they shall be formed in two groups, one normal and one emergency
14
(b) insulated conductors: Insulated conductor circuits shall, where possible, be
segregated throughout by enclosing in separate conduits, trunking or trunking
20
compartments.
4 Fire Alarms:
s
(a) fire alarm cables shall be segregated from other services throughout and be either
rd
armoured and sheathed cable, or insulated conductors enclosed in conduit or
trunking, as indicated on the drawings.
da
1.1.21 Electricity Supply an
1 The Supply Authority will make available, at the incoming terminals of each Main Switchboard
(Medium Voltage Panel) a 3 phase + Neutral, 4 wire, 415 V, 50 Hz supply of adequate
St
capacity and having the following tolerances:
(a) voltage 415 6 %

n
io
(b) frequency 50Hz± 0.1 Hz (short term ± 0.15 Hz for a duration of only a few
seconds)
ct
2 Phase rotation of supply to BS 158.

tru
3 Neutral: Solidly earthed at transformer location

s
4 Earthing system: TNS

on
5 Obtain fault level and fault duration time from the Supply Authority (QGEWC).
C
6 Obtain confirmation from the Supply Authority of the size and number of cables they will
ar
provide to Main Switchboards. Allow for adequate and appropriate cable glands, lugs and
boxes.
at
7 After inspection and approval of the Contractor‟s installation, QGEWC will permit
Q
energisation of the feeder cables to the installation.
8 QGEWC will only inspect the Contractor's installation and permit energisation of the power
supply after receiving a written request to do so from the Contractor.
9 The Contractor will be responsible for any delay caused by omission to make the request in
good time.
10 The Contractor shall provide a generator of adequate capacity to carry out all pre-
commissioning tests. Per-commissioning tests may be carried out using mains electricity if
this is available.
1.1.22 Polarity
1 The polarity of all apparatus used for the Works specified shall be arranged as follows when
apparatus is viewed from the front:
(a) for two pole apparatus the phase or “live” pole at the top (or left hand side) and the
'“neutral or earthed” pole at the bottom (or right hand side). On plug and socket outlets
the polarity shall conform to BS 196, BS 546, or BS 1363 as appropriate
(b) for three or four pole apparatus the phases in order red, yellow, blue and neutral
reading from top to bottom or left to right in the case of vertical and horizontal layouts
respectively.
14
2 All cables shall be so connected between main switchboards, distribution boards, plant and
accessories so that the correct sequence of phase colours is preserved throughout the
system.
20
3 All cable cores shall be identified with phase colours. Where more than one phase is
incorporated on a common system in one room then the live cores shall be red, yellow, blue,
s
as appropriate, and fittings and switch accessories shall be permanently labelled and
rd
segregated in accordance with I.E.E. Regulations.
da
1.1.23 Safety Interlocks an
1 A complete system of interlocks and safety devices shall be provided as necessary for the
safe and continuous operation of the plant in order to provide for the following:
St
(a) safety of personnel engaged on operation and maintenance of the plant

(b) correct sequence of operation of the plant during start up and shut down
n
(c) safety of the plant when operating under normal or emergency conditions.
io
2 Interlocks shall be preventive and not corrective

ct
tru
3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of interlocking schemes for the
approval of the Engineer.
s
4 Locks for interlocking purposes shall be of the figure lock type.

on
5 No spare or master key shall be provided, unless specified.

C
6 Device items are to be arranged to ensure that there is no danger of interchange with existing
locks on other units.
ar
at
1.1.24 Spare Parts

Q
1 General:
(a) provide sufficient spare parts for all the electrical items included within the scope of
works. Submit to the Engineer a list of all spare parts to be required for a further two
years operation from the date of issue of the Maintenance Certificate
(b) spare parts required include but not necessarily limited to those listed below, provided
specified in the Project Documentation or where quantities for each item or equipment
is recommended by the manufacturer
(c) spare parts to be delivered to central stores.
2 Main Low Tension Boards:
(a) 2 % spare moulded case circuit breakers of all different frame sizes, but in any case
not less than 2 nos. circuit breaker of each size
(b) 5 % spare indicating lamps for each indicating lamp in the switchgear
(c) one set of tools required for switchgear maintenance

(d) provide complete spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer for different
sizes of ACB.
3 Switchboards, Motor Control Centres and Distribution Boards:
(a) 5 % spare combination magnetic motor starters
(b) 5 % spare circuit breakers for each rating of each MCCB
(c) 5 % spare HRC fuses for each rating
14
(d) 5 % spare of load break switch (isolators) of each size
20
(e) 5 % spare of current operated ELCB of each size
s
4 Disconnecting Switches:
rd
(a) 5 % spare switch of each size.
da
5 Circuit Accessories: an
(a) plug fuses - furnish ten percent (10%) of the number of each size and type of fuses
installed, but in any case not less than six fuses of each sizes
St
(b) wall switches - provide five percent (5%) of the number of each size and type of wall
switch installed
n
(c) socket outlets - provide five percent (5%) of the number of each size and type installed
io
(d) lamps - provide five percent (5%) lamps of each size and type for indicating panels and
pilot lights installed for different systems.
ct
6 Lighting Fixtures:
tru
(a) for lighting fixtures provide the following spare parts:

s
(i) 2 % of the total quantity of each type of lighting fixture. This quantity shall
on
not be less than one fixture of each type

(ii) additional diffusers for 5 % of the total quantity of each type of lighting fixture
C
provided with acrylic, plastic or glass enclosures. Diffusers shall be identical to

those of the installed fixtures. This quantity shall not be less than two diffusers of
ar
each type
at
(iii) 10 % spare lamps of each wattage of different type

Q
(iv) 5 % of the total quantity of control gear (ballast) of each type and size but in
no case less than (6) ballast of each size and type.
7 Emergency Generating Sets:
(a) complete itemised list of different spares to be included and priced by the tenderers.
For emergency generator, furnish by the generator supplier to maintain it for two
years.
8 The tenderer shall submit with his offer detail prices of the spare parts he is required to
provide under the Contract indicating the quantity and the unit rate of each item.
1.1.25 Protection of Excavation
1 The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Police Department for marking,
lighting and protecting excavations. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the
requirements of Police Department and to comply fully with these requirements. No additional
payments will be authorised under any circumstances for marking, lighting or protecting
excavations.
2 Where carriageway works and road crossings are performed the Contractor shall provide
steel plates of sufficient size and quality to permit the safe passage of traffic and the plate
shall be so placed (if necessary fixed) to permit reasonable traffic flow.
14
3 All doorways, gates and entrances shall be kept clear with full access. Where excavations
impede pedestrian access, crossings boards shall be provided. Crossing boards shall be
1250mm wide with a hand rail on both sides 1 metre high and guard rails on both sides at
20
vehicular access to premises etc. Ducts will not be installed at entrances to premises unless
instructed by the Engineer.
s
4 Materials excavated shall be placed so as to prevent nuisance or damage. Where this is not
rd
possible, the material shall be removed from site and returned for backfilling on completion of
cable laying at the Contractor‟s expense. In cases where the excavated material is not to be
da
used for backfilling trenches it must be removed from site on the same day as it is excavated.
Surplus material shall only be disposed of at Government approved sites. At the time of
an
Contract award the Contractor shall contact the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture
to ascertain the approved sites and route.
St
1.1.26 Supply of materials

n
1 Where materials are to be supplied by the Contractor, the following shall apply:
io
(a) Materials shall be ordered in accordance with the Specifications issued by QGEWC.
ct
(b) Specifications and details of the proposed supplier shall be submitted to QGEWC
before a firm order being placed.
tru
(c) On delivery of materials from outside of Qatar, QGEWC inspectors shall be given the
opportunity to inspect the materials prior to their use.
s
on
1.1.27 Special Requirements

C
1 The Contractor shall consult the public utility authorities not less than one month before it is
proposed to commence work to ascertain whether any underground installations will be
affected by the proposed work, in which event the Contractor shall make all necessary
ar
arrangements with the public utility authorities to safeguard the installation.

at
2 The Contractor shall give at least one week‟s notice in writing to the public utility authorities of
Q
the dates upon which it is intended to operate plant or equipment or carry out any work for
which permission has been given in writing by the public utility authorities: such operations of
work shall only be carried out in the presence of the public utility authorities unless notice has
been obtained in writing from the public utility authorities that they do not require to be
present.
3 The public utility authorities may require work to be executed on their installation during the
period of the Contract: the Contractor shall afford all facilities to the public utility authorities‟
contractors or workmen until their diversion work is complete. The Contractor shall co
ordinate the work of the public utility authorities and his own activities and when necessary
shall amend his programme of working to suit all requirements of the department in
connection with their diversion work and shall keep the Engineer informed of all
arrangements made.
4 The Contractor shall locate and mark with suitable posts all the public utility authorities
underground installations that are within the area of the Works and shall ensure that such
markers are maintained in their correct positions at all times; the Contractor shall advise the
public utility authorities of any installation not found where shown on the Drawings, or found
but not shown or found damaged or subsequently damaged.
END OF PART
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 10: Wiring Accessories and General Power
10 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER ..................................... 2
10.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

10.1.1 General Reference 2
10.1.2 References 2
10.1.3 Description of Work 2
10.1.4 Submittals 2
10.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
10.2.1 General 3
14
10.2.2 Outlet Boxes 3
10.2.3 Switches 3
20
10.2.4 Ceiling Roses 4
10.2.5 Socket Outlets 4
s
10.2.6 Shaver Socket Outlets 5
rd
10.2.7 Cooker Control Units 6
10.2.8 Disconnect Switches and Switch Fuses 6
da
10.2.9 Fused Connection Units 6
10.2.10 Junction, Pull and Terminal Boxes 7
an
10.2.11 Timer 7
10.2.12 Time clocks 7
St
10.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 8

n
10.3.1 Mounting Heights 8

io
10.3.2 Installation of Outlet Boxes 8

10.3.3 Installation of Switches 8
ct
10.3.4 Installation of Junction, Pull and Terminal Boxes 8

tru
10.3.5 Testing 8
s
on
C
ar
at
Q
10 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 General Reference
1 The work of this Section is integral with the whole of the Project Documentation and is not
intended to be interpreted outside that context.
2 Co-ordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this Section.
14
3 Related Parts and Sections are as follows:
This Section
20
Part 1 General Provisions for Electrical Installation
Part 6 Cables and Small wiring
s
Part 7 Conduits and Conduits Boxes
rd
Part 8 Trunking
10.1.2 References
da
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part:
an
BS 88..........................HRC Fuses
BS 546........................Specification Two pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket-outlets and
St
socket-outlet adapters
BS 800........................Specification for radio interference limits and measurements for
n
household
io
appliances, portable tools and other electrical equipment causing

ct
similar types of interference

BS 1363......................13A Plugs, Switched and Un-switched Socket Outlets and connection
tru
units
BS 3456......................Specifications for safety of household and similar electrical appliances
s
on
BS 3676......................Part 1 Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations

BS 4177......................Cooker Control Units rated 30 Amp. and 45 Amp. 250 volts single
C
phase supply
BS 4343......................Industrial Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers
ar
BS 4662......................Boxes for enclosure of electrical Accessories

at
BS 5419......................Fuse Switches and Switch Fuses

BS 5733......................General requirements for electrical accessories
Q
BS 6972......................General requirements for luminaire supporting couplers
10.1.3 Description of Work
1 This Section shall include all labour, materials, equipment, appliances and accessories
necessary for the complete performance of all switches, socket outlets etc. In accordance
with the Specifications and Drawings.
10.1.4 Submittals
1 Submit shop drawings, equipment list, relevant samples etc. as mentioned under Section
Part 1.
10.2 PRODUCTS
10.2.1 General
1 All individual items of materials shall be of the same make throughout the Project unless
specifically approved by the Engineer.
2 Unless otherwise indicated in the sections to follow, the faceplate of all devices shall be
polycarbonate.
10.2.2 Outlet Boxes
14
1 Outlet Boxes:
20
(a) galvanized one piece pressed steel, sizes and designs shall suit devices to be fitted
with a minimum wall thickness of 1.0 mm.
(B) In all hazardous areas specified and/or shown on drawings: explosion proof.
s
rd
2 Outlet boxes mounted externally or in damp locations shall be totally sealed to ensure water
tightness.
da
10.2.3 Switches an
1 Lighting Switches
St
(a) to BS 3676
(b) to be rated 10, 15 or 20 amps depending on connected load, as stipulated in the
n
QGEWC regulations
io
(c) recessed with concealed conduit, surface pattern elsewhere

ct
(d) quick make and break type

(e) single pole, double pole, one way, two way or intermediate as indicated
tru
(f) surface mounted switches to be either poly-carbonate, or metallic and as indicated in

the Project Documentation
s
on
(g) flush mounted switches to be of the grid fixing type with finish as noted in the
Project document.
C
(h) switches shall be certified for AC-23A duty
2 Waterproof Switches:
ar
(a) to be watertight IP 56 or as indicated in the Project Documentation

at
(b) to be made of poly-carbonate for indoor application in damp and wet areas.
Q
(c) to be metallic suitable for AC-23A duty and have sunshades fitted where exposed to
direct sunlight.
(d) to be provided with rear entry for outdoor use to avoid the exposure of conduit/cables
to the harmful effects of the sun.
3 Switch Plates
(a) where two or more switches are grouped together and connected to the same phase,
multi-gang devices and common plates shall be used.
4 Double Pole Switches:
(a) the double pole switches shall be with neon indication lamps and shall be rated 20,
30 or 45 Amps. as indicated on the drawings
(b) the face plate shall be of matt chrome, unless specified otherwise in the Project
Documentation and shall be engraved „WATER HEATER‟, „WATER COOLER‟ etc. as
required.
(c) switches shall be certified for AC-23A duty.
5 Push switches for lighting contactor control:
(a) push to make momentary contact switch

(b) suitable for inductive load
(c) surface mounted type shall be either poly-carbonate, metallic, protected to IP 56 or as
indicated in the Project Documentation
14
(d) where two or more switches occur in one position they shall be contained in one case
and each shall be appropriately labelled to indicate its function
20
(e) switches shall be certified for AC-23A duty and contactors shall be certified for AC-3
duty.
s
6 Dimming Switches:
rd
(a) where indicated on the Project Drawings, dimming switches shall be provided,
da
complying with BS1155
(b) dimming switches shall be interference suppressed to conform with BS588
an
(c) all dimmer units shall be sized to give a 40% margin above the connected load.
(d) switches shall be certified for AC-23A duty
St
10.2.4 Ceiling Roses

n
1 Ceiling roses shall be of the all insulated type conforming to BS76 with a white finish.
io
ct
2 Ceiling roses shall be provided with insulated terminals for the switched live, neutral and
protective conductors; loop-in facilities shall be provided.
tru
3 Plug-in ceiling roses shall be used in large buildings, with extensive false ceiling systems, as
detailed in the particular specification.
s
on
10.2.5 Socket Outlets

C
1 General purpose Socket Outlets:

ar
(a) to BS 1363
(b) 3 rectangular pin (2P+E) shuttered, with combined switch, rated 13A, 250 V
at
(c) to be supplied with plug complete with fuse

Q
2 15A Socket Outlet:
(a) to BS 546
(b) 3 round pin (2 P + E) shuttered switched pattern complete with plugs.
(c) Neon indicator lamp, unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation.
3 Weather proof Sockets:
(a) 13A Sockets: to BS 1363

(b) 3 rectangular pins, Un-switched type to be complete with weather proof plugs
(c) plugs: 13 Amps
(d) sockets: fused type with single pole cartridge fuse link of same rating as plug
(e) sockets and plugs:
(i) to have minimum IP 55 grade protection
(ii) housing parts: brass or pressure die-cast finished in grey hammered
stove
enamel
(iii) plugs:
 cable grips shall have rubber compression rings
 there shall be rubber gasket between plug and socket to ensure weather
tightness.
14
(f) sockets shall have screw on caps that close tight on socket when plugs are not
inserted.
20
4 Socket Outlet Plates:
s
(a) socket outlet face plates shall be finished as indicated in the Project Documentation.
rd
5 Industrial Sockets:
da
(a) Combined Socket
(i) to be a combined unit comprising two sockets, rated 16A, 240V, 1
an
phase and 32A, 415V, 3 phase
(ii) to be equipped with 16A SP and 32A TP MCBs, or as indicted in the
St
Project Documentation
(iii) three phase socket to be 5 pin type, single phase socket to be 3 pin
n
type
io
(iv) plugs of the same manufacturer to be provided

ct
(v) sockets and plugs to conform to BS 4343

tru
(vi) to have minimum IP 55 ingress protection.

s
(b) plugs and sockets for hazardous area:

on
(i) to be suitable for zone 0, zone 1 or zone 2 applications, as relevant,

and indicated on the Project Drawings and/or Project Documentation
C
(ii) to conform to IEC 309-3

(iii) to be corrosion resistant
ar
(iv) ingress protection to IP 66.

at
10.2.6 Shaver Socket Outlets

Q
1 All shaver socket outlet units shall comply with BS 3456 and IEC 335.
2 Shaver units shall be flush pattern with white moulded insert in matt chrome plate engraved
„Shaver Only‟ and be suitable for installation in bathrooms, incorporating a double wound
isolating transformer to provide an earth free supply.
3 Units shall incorporate primary winding circuit protection in the form of a self-resetting
thermal overload device.
4 Units shall incorporate an „ON/OFF‟ switch with red neon indicator together with a selector
switch for 20 VA load capacity at 240 Volts and 115 Volts
5 Units shall incorporate two pin shuttered outlet configuration and have terminals to accept 2.5
2
mm conductors.
6 Unit outlet boxes shall be a minimum of 45 mm deep, rustproof by galvanising of equal finish
and complete with a brass earthing stud secured to the back of the box.
10.2.7 Cooker Control Units
1 Cooker control units shall incorporate a 32 Amp. double pole switch and 13A, 3 pin switched
socket outlet and neon indicator lights for both cooker and socket
2 The cooker control unit shall be flush mounted.
14
10.2.8 Disconnect Switches and Switch Fuses
20
1 Generally
(a) to be metal clad with front operated handles interlocked with switch fuse case to
s
prevent opening switch in the “ON” position
rd
(b) switch shall have “ON/OFF” indication and provision for locking in “OFF” position
da
(c) utilisation category AC 23A
2 Fuse switch and switch fuses

an
(a) to BS 5419
St
(b) fuses: to BS 88 bolted type, class Q1, certified for 415V and AC 80 Duty, rated as
indicated
n
(c) fused switch carriages: withdrawable type

io
(d) fuse switches: ASTA certified to 50 KA.

ct
3 Disconnect switches
tru
(a) same design as switch-fuses, with solid copper links in place of fuses
s
(b) single pole and neutral, or triple pole and neutral

on
(c) ratings, as indicated.
4 Outdoor Equipment
C
(a) equipment intended for outdoor use shall be certified by the manufacturer as being
ar
weatherproof and suitable for use outside in the prevailing conditions and shall be in
compliance with the requirements of Part 28, clause 28.2.6 of this Section.
at
10.2.9 Fused Connection Units

Q
1 240 V fused connection units shall be switched, shall comply with BS1655 and shall be fitted
with a fuse complying with BS5571 with a rating as specified.
2 All fused connection unit shall be fitted with a neon indicator.
3 Live contacts shall not be exposed under normal operating conditions when replacing a fuse.
4 240 V fuse connection units in plant areas, workshops etc., shall be surface mounted,
metalclad and shall comply with BS5575 .
5 The type of fused connection unit, particularly relating to the flex outlet, shall be authorised by
the Engineer prior to the ordering of accessories.
10.2.10 Junction, Pull and Terminal Boxes
1 The Junction Box shall be completed with a terminal block suitable for connecting up to 10
2
mm copper conductor (phase, neutral and earth) and an all insulated moulded white cover
plate with removal covers.
2 The cover plate shall be raised for connecting outgoing cable.
10.2.11 Timer
1 Timers shall be electronic type, unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation.
14
2 Timers shall be suitable for operation from supply voltage of 240V, 1-phase, 50Hz system.
20
3 Timer output contacts shall be suitable for both a.c. and d.c. control circuits. The contacts
shall be suitable for duty of AC-2 or DC-3 utilisation category. The rating of output contacts
shall be co-ordinated with the application requirements.
s
rd
4 Timers shall be provided with 2 independent timing scales with sets of change-over output
contacts:
da
(a) 10 ................... 200 seconds
(b) 0.10 ................ 20 seconds
an
5 ON/OFF indicator shall be provided to monitor the circuit status.
St
6 Timers shall be either:

n
(a) delay on energisation or

io
(b) delay on de-energisation type, as per the application requirements

ct
Upon supply of rated voltage to the input terminals, the timer shall start, the output relay
remains in rest position. After the set time, the output relay pulls in.
tru
The relay resets after the input supply has been cut-off.
s
7 Timers shall be suitable for minimum 10 million operations.

on
8 The timer shall require a pozi-drive screw driver for changing of the settings.
C
9 Degree of protection shall be minimum IP 20.

ar
10.2.12 Time clocks

at
1 Time clocks to control circuits depended on time and hours of the day, may be either
Q
(a) Synchronous motor operated, or

(b) Quartz controlled motor operated, as per Project Documentation.
2 Time clocks shall be suitable for operation from supply voltage of 240V, 1-phase, 50Hz
system.
3 Output contacts shall be suitable for both AC and DC control circuits. The contacts shall be
suitable for duty of AC-2 or DC-3 utilisation category. The rating of output contacts shall be
co-ordinated with the application requirements.
4 The no. of output contacts and the duration of contact closing shall be decided as per the
application requirements.
5 Time clocks shall be provided with a time dial setting for 24 hours and 7 days program.
6 Each time clock shall be provided with a minimum running reserve energy for 1 day.
7 Accuracy of clocks shall be better than 1 second per day.
10.3 INSTALLATION
10.3.1 Mounting Heights
1 The mounting heights of wiring accessories shall be as stipulated in the QGEWC

Regulations, or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
14
10.3.2 Installation of Outlet Boxes
20
1 Location of Boxes:
s
(a) determine exact location of boxes on site and obtain the Engineer‟s approval before
rd
commencing installation
(b) make allowance for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of
da
finish, window trim, panelling and other construction when locating boxes.
2 Fixing:
an
(a) fix outlet boxes securely
St
(b) fix exposed outlet boxes to permanent inserts or lead anchors with machine screws.
10.3.3 Installation of Switches

n
io
1 Lighting Switches:
ct
(a) located at the strike side of the door, approximately 150 mm from the edge of door
frame
tru
(b) plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall
s
(c) plates shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1.5 mm

on
(d) all switch assembly louvered plates shall have their earthing terminal connected to
2
the earth terminal attached to the switch box by an insulated 2.5 mm protective
C
conductor.
ar
10.3.4 Installation of Junction, Pull and Terminal Boxes

at
1 Generally:
Q
(a) fix junction, pull and terminal boxes where indicated and where required to facilities
pulling of wires and cables and connection of future appliances
(b) locate boxes as inconspicuously as possible, but accessible after work is completed.
2 Pull Boxes:
(a) fix at maximum 10m spacing and to limit the number of bends in conduit to not more
than two 90° bends.
10.3.5 Testing
1 Test all switches, socket outlets etc. for correct polarity and continuity of conductors in the
presence of and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
2 Carry out live phase to earth loop impedance tests at all switches and socket outlets with an
approved earth loop impedance tester to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Ensure that
all device plates have satisfactory earth continuity to the protective conductor system.
3 Test all socket outlets for instantaneous tripping of associated distribution board current
operated earth leakage circuit breaker using testing equipment, approved by the Engineer.
END OF PART
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 11: Light Fittings
11 LIGHT FITTINGS ........................................................................................... 2
11.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

11.1.1 General 2
11.1.3 References 2
11.1.4 Submittals 3
11.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
11.2.1 Lamps 3
14
11.2.2 Luminaires 4
11.2.3 Termination/Earthing 5
20
11.2.4 Ceiling System 6
11.2.5 Noise and Interference 6
s
11.2.6 External Lighting 6
rd
11.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 7
da
11.3.1 Lighting Installation 7
11.3.2 Installation of Lamps 7
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
11 LIGHT FITTINGS
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 General
1 This section includes the supply and installation of lighting fittings as shown on the drawings,
and as specified.
14
1 Design Criteria:
20
(a) lighting fittings shall be of first class quality, made by approved manufacturers and
shall be suitable for trouble free operation on the system voltage at the site
s
(b) lighting fittings shall be complete with internal wiring between lamp holder and
rd
termination point. Wiring shall be in silicone rubber insulated heat resistant flexible
da
cables
(c) the Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating the light fitting installation with
an
any other components of the ceiling systems
(d) all lighting fittings shall be complete with accessories and fixing hardware necessary
St
for installation whether so detailed under fixture description or not

(e) outdoor lighting fittings shall be installed at mounting heights as specified or
n
instructed on site by the Engineer

io
(f) all outdoor lighting fittings shall be suitably constructed and protected to withstand
ct
the corrosive atmosphere and high ambient temperatures of the site, whether
tru
indicated under the fittings description or not

(g) lighting fittings shall have power factor not less than 0.9.
s
on
11.1.3 References
C

ar
BS 800 ........................Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference

at
characteristics of household electrical appliances, portable tools and

similar electrical apparatus
Q
BS 3677 ......................High pressure mercury vapour lamps

BS 4533 ......................Luminaires
BS 5225 ......................Photometric data for luminaires
BS 60400 ....................Lamp holders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starter holders
BS EN 60081 ..............Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service
BS EN 60238 ............Edison screw lamp holders
BS EN 60529 ............Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
BS EN 60662 ...........(IEC 662), High pressure sodium vapour lamps
BS EN 60947-1 ........General rules for low voltage switch gear and control gear
BS EN 61167 ............Metal halide lamps
11.1.4 Submittals
1 Products Data:
(a) Fluorescent fittings and other electrical discharge lamp fittings, submit:
(i) full technical details of the fittings, including the control gear, indicating the type
and size of materials used in construction
(ii) relevant sheets of manufacturer’s catalogues and dimensional drawings of the
fittings, clearly showing the location of the component
(iii) wiring diagram of internal connections indicating colour, size and type of wiring
14
(iv) confirmation that control gear is suitable for prolonged and continuous service in
20
the ambient conditions described in Part 1
(v) the power factor under operating conditions and illumination data sheets.
s
(vi) type and quality of any plastic materials used in the fittings.
rd
2 Other lighting fittings, submit:
da
(a) full technical details of the fittings, with relevant manufacturer’s catalogues and
illumination data sheets
an
(b) type and quality of all metal finishes
St
(c) size and quality of all glassware.
3 At least one piece of each of the lighting fixtures originally specified and quoted shall be
n
submitted and displayed at the site office, including the alternative items for comparison in
io
the event an alternate make is offered.

ct
11.2 PRODUCTS
tru
11.2.1 Lamps
s
on
1 General:
C
(a) lamps shall be furnished and installed in all luminaires covered under the Contract
(b) lamps used for temporary lighting services shall not be utilised in the final use in
ar
fixture units
at
(c) lamps for permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixtures until so directed by
the Engineer, and this shall be accomplished directly before the building areas are
Q
ready for occupancy by the Employer

(d) lumen output of lamps shall be in accordance with BS EN 5225
(e) generally, high output, low consumption, tri-phosphorus lamps shall be used, unless
otherwise indicated.
2 Fluorescent Lamps:
(a) (tubular fluorescent lamp, to BS EN 60081. Lengths/diameters as indicated in the

Project Documentation
(b) tube colour: cool white, unless otherwise indicated
(c) fittings shall comply with BS 800, for suppressing radio frequency interference.
3 High Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamps:
(a) wattage as indicated in the Project Documentation

(b) colour: deluxe white
(c) lumen output of lamps shall be in accordance with BS 3677
(d) burning position: universal.
4 High Pressure Sodium Lamps
(a) wattage as indicated in the schedule of luminaires
14
(b) lamps with a high colour rendering index of 80 shall be used as indicated, suitable for
indoor applications
20
(c) lumen output of lamps shall be in accordance with BS EN 60662.
5 Metal Halide Lamps
s
rd
(a) wattage as indicated in the schedule of luminaires
da
(b) lumen output of lamps shall be in accordance with BS EN 61167
6 Control Gear For Fluorescent Lamps:

an
(a) high frequency electronic ballast not less than 25 kHz to IEC 928, unless specified
St
otherwise
(b) when specified, conventional type low loss ballast with electronic starters shall be
n
used and shall provide flicker free operation, as indicated in the Project
io
Documentation
ct
(c) glow starters shall not be used

tru
(d) capacitors shall be supplied with discharge resistors and shall be housed in aluminium
canister.
s
7 Lamp Holders:
on
(a) SBC, BC GES, Bi-pin, etc. as necessitated by the lamp cap

C
(b) Edison screw lamp holders, to BS EN 60238, to be designed so that the lamp cap
only makes electrical contact when fully screwed home, and to have means to
ar
prevent the unscrewing of the lamp due to vibration or similar cause

at
(c) Lamp holders for fluorescent lamps, shall be the spring loaded rotary type, to
BS 6702.
Q
11.2.2 Luminaires
1 Luminaires shall be manufactured to BS 4533 with an appropriate IP classification to

BS EN 60529.
2 All lighting fittings shall be supplied complete with appropriate control gear where necessary,
lamps, mounting and fixing accessories etc. whether explicitly mentioned in the description of
each light fitting or not. All the fittings shall have the same appearance, material, technical
details and approximate dimensions.
3 Luminaires shall be connected to the main circuit wiring with heat resistant flexible cables of
2
a minimum conductor size of 1.5 mm insulated with silicon rubber.
4 Break joint rings shall be used in conjunction with batten holders, ceiling roses or back plates
mounted onto a flush installation.
5 Standard fluorescent luminaires shall have two suspension or fixing points. The thickness of
the luminaries body shall not be less than 0.6 mm.
6 All lamp-holders for flexible pendants shall be of the all insulated skirted pattern with code
grips and for batten or wall mounting shall be of similar pattern. All lamp holders shall be of
14
the bayonet cap pattern.
20
7 The point box suspensions and other parts of the lighting fittings shall be provided to be
erected at festival time to suit the building programme for decoration as per the requirements
of the Project Documentation.
s
rd
8 The glassware diffusers, shades and lamps shall not be fitted until all building work is
complete.
da
9 All fittings shall be easy to clean inside and outside, when mounted.
an
10 All fluorescent fittings shall be suitable for instant start irrespective of any catalogue or list
St
numbers quoted.
11 Diffusers on fluorescent luminaires shall be poly-carbonate unless otherwise specified in the

n
Project Documentation.
io
ct
12 All fittings that are mounted in areas accessible to the public shall be provided with vandal
proof high strength diffusers and shall be additionally provided with a galvanised steel mesh
tru
security guard.
s
13 All luminaires shall be certified by the manufacturer for use in an ambient temperature of
on
50°C.
C
14 All luminaires intended for use in hazardous areas shall be certified to be zone 1 or 2 as
required at 50°C ambient temperature.
ar
15 Wet well luminaries, fixtures and cabling shall conform to ingress protection IP67,shall be
at
PTFE coated and shall be provided with tungsten halogen lamps i.e. no run up or re-strike
time for safety reasons.
Q
16 All wet well luminaries, fixtures and cabling shall conform to ingress protection IP67.
11.2.3 Termination/Earthing
1 Fused terminal blocks shall be fitted and be of sufficient capacity for the wiring involved.
2
Each terminal shall be capable of accommodating two 2.5 mm conductors.
2 Connector strip terminals shall have a current rating not less than the rating of the circuit
protective device and shall be encapsulated in self-extinguishing grade polyethylene.
3 Where connector strips are provided in boxes behind heat producing appliances, porcelain
connectors shall be used where temperatures in excess of 70 °C are likely.
4 Conductors shall be clamped between metal surfaces such that no screws make direct
contact with the conductor. The metal used in construction of the connector shall be at least
85 °C copper alloy such that good conductivity and electrolytic compatibility are maintained at
all times.
5 All light fittings shall be provided with an earthing terminal which shall be connected to the
earth continuity lead of the final sub-circuit.
14
6 The earthing of all pendant or semi-pendant fittings shall be by a separate core in the
connecting flex or cable securely bonding the earth terminal on the fitting to the glanded joint
20
of interconnecting cables. In no case shall pendant chains or conduit support tubes be used
as a means of earthing.
s
11.2.4 Ceiling System
rd
1 In false ceilings, luminaires whether surface or recessed mounted shall not be supported by
da
the false ceiling construction. Separate independent supporting systems shall be provided for
each luminaire, comprising drop rods, chains or similar.
an
2 Luminaires installed in false ceilings shall be connected to the lighting circuit using
St
mechanically coupled plug-in ceiling roses.
3 Luminaires shall be positioned to provide ease of access for maintenance, cleaning etc.,
n
while not impairing the distribution of light.

io
ct
4 The Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire manufacturer has the correct details of the
ceiling system, including suspension, tiles, etc. He shall ensure that the luminaires are
tru
supplied with the correct trim, suspension system and are fully compatible with the ceiling
system.
s
on
11.2.5 Noise and Interference

C
1 The noise level from control gear, obtained from the average of sound pressure levels each
measured at 2000 mm from the control gear in at least five positions (on each side and
ar
below), shall not exceed 30 dB Scale “A” (Noise Rating Number).

at
11.2.6 External Lighting

Q
1 General:
(a) external lighting system shall consist of supply and installation of lighting columns,
foundation and fixing of the columns, underground cabling, high pressure sodium
vapour lamps or as specified, and control equipment as required
(b) contactor units, where specified incorporating a controlling photo-cell and time switch,
shall be provided within the external lighting distribution board for the control of
external lighting
(c) underground lighting cabling shall be XLPE or PVC/SWA/PVC or as detailed in
in the Project Documentation.
2 Lighting Columns
(a) columns shall be hot-dip galvanized steel of either tapered or tubular construction
complete with luminaire fixing arms or brackets, as per design.
(b) all columns shall be externally painted with 2 coats of aluminium paints, internal
surface including the studs inside the cable connecting box with red lead anti-
corrosive paints, the finishing shall be micaceous iron oxide paint pigmented with
aluminium
(c) the column shall be equipped with auxiliary control gear and a 15 amp. single pole
and neutral cut-out (with a three phase and neutral terminal block), two cable glands
14
and two entry slots in the base of the pole for incoming and outgoing cables
(d) a two core and earth 2.5 mm sq. butyl rubber insulated heat resistant flexible cable
20
shall connect the lantern to the cut-out
(e) columns shall be provided with base plates having fixing holes and anchor bolts for
s
foundations
rd
(f) unless specified otherwise, the column length shall be 5m including buried part or 4m
da
when plinth mounted. The diameter at the bottom shall not be less than 120 mm.
3 All external lighting fittings shall be adequately earthed.

an
4 Control gear shall form an integral part of the lighting fittings except where specified, or
St
where this is not possible, it shall be totally enclosed in a housing to suit the installation
location.
n
5 All external fittings shall be dust-tight and waterproof to IP 65.

io
ct
6 The particular requirements for road lighting and high mast floodlighting are specified in
Section 6, Part 12.
tru
11.3 INSTALLATION
s
on
11.3.1 Lighting Installation

C
1 Terminations:
ar
(a) general fluorescent fittings mounted direct to conduit outlet boxes shall have the
circuit wiring run direct to the fittings terminal position. Flexible conduit pigtail
at
shall be provided for all fixtures to J-boxes

Q
(b) terminations for recessed, or semi-recessed pattern fittings fitted in false ceilings,
shall have the circuit wiring terminal above the ceiling in a ceiling rose Outlets
shall be mounted adjacent to the fitting.
11.3.2 Installation of Lamps
1 Generally install new lamps in all luminaires at substantial completion of work.
END OF PART
Part 12: Emergency Lighting
12 EMERGENCY LIGHTING .............................................................................. 2
12.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

12.1.1 Scope 2
12.1.2 Reference Standards 2
12.1.4 Warranty 2
12.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
12.2.1 General 3
14
12.2.2 Central Battery Units 3
12.2.3 Self Contained Emergency Battery Packs 4
20
12.2.4 Luminaries and Lamps 5
12.2.5 Obstruction / Beacon lights 6
s
12.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 6
rd
12.3.1 Wiring 6
da
12.3.2 Installation of Batteries 6
12.3.3 Luminaries and Lamps 7
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
12 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
12.1 GENERAL
12.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general requirements for emergency lighting and accessories both
maintained and non-maintained. It shall be read in conjunction with other parts of the
Specifications and the Project Drawings.
14
This Section
20
Part 1 General Provisions for Electrical Installations
Part 10 Wiring Accessories and General Power
s
Part 11 Light Fittings
rd
Part 24 Testing
da
12.1.2 Reference Standards an
1 The following standards and documents of other organisations are referred to in this Part,
and shall be complied with:
St
BS 4533 .....................General requirements and tests

BS 4533 ......................Luminaires for emergency lighting
n
io
BS 5225 ......................Method of photometric measurement of battery operated emergency

lighting luminaires
ct
BS 5266 ......................Emergency lighting

ru
BS 7671 .....................Requirements for electrical Installations

st
BS EN 60529 ..............Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)

on
C
ISO 9000 ....................Quality management and assurance standards

ar
QGEWC .....................Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation Regulations.

at
Q
1 The supplier‟s manufacturing facility shall be certified to ISO 9000 or equivalent.
12.1.4 Warranty
1 Battery units, luminaires and accessories shall be warranted for a minimum of 5 years by the
manufacturer. The battery shall have minimum 10 years useful life.
12.2 PRODUCTS
12.2.1 General
1 Emergency lighting installations shall be complete with emergency batteries, chargers,

luminaires and wiring, all as described in Specifications and as indicated on the Project
Drawings, complying with BS 5266 Part 1.All emergency lighting shall be Non-maintained
type except for the EXIT lights where it shall be maintained unless otherwise explicitly
specified in the project documentation.
2 Non-maintained luminaires shall be supplied directly from the battery system. Maintained exit
14
luminaires etc., shall be supplied from a separate supply via an independent transformer and
shall only operate from batteries during mains failure.
20
3 The operation of the system shall be such that on loss of one or all phases of the main
electricity supply, a set of central batteries or individual battery packs shall provide power for
s
3 hours to illuminate emergency luminaires throughout the building. On restoration of the
rd
mains supply the batteries shall be charged by an integral charger such that the system
da
supplies not less than 85 % of its rated voltage after a period of 12 hours.
an
12.2.2 Central Battery Units
St
1 Battery chargers:
(a) battery chargers shall be installed in purpose-made metallic enclosures with an index
n
of protection IP 31 in accordance with BS EN 60529 suitable for wall or floor

io
mounting, depending on size

ct
(b) battery charger enclosures may house the system batteries providing the design of
ru
the enclosure ensures safe operation with the batteries specified. This arrangement
should normally be restricted to smaller systems e.g. for circuit breaker tripping
st
supplies for power supply to emergency lighting system, central battery units shall be
wall or floor mounted as required, conforming to BS 4533 Section 102.22, and be of
on
robust, high quality construction. Enclosures shall be metal, with hinged lockable doors
and with suitable ventilation provided
C
(c) battery charger shall operate from a 415 V, three phase or 240 V, 50 Hz single phase
ar
supply, unless otherwise specified

at
(d) battery charger shall be rated to supply trickle charge and any standing loading plus
any additional recharging load that may be imposed
Q
(e) battery charger shall use an uncontrolled bridge as the input stage to minimise
harmonic generation on the supply system. The characteristics of each charger shall
match the requirements of the specific batteries selected and the duty cycle
(f) battery charger shall be suitable for fully automatic charging of the appropriate
battery and shall be provided with:
(i) Mains „ON‟ lamp
(ii) Main ON/OFF switch
(iii) Charge Ammeter Discharge Ammeter
(iv) Battery voltmeter
(v) Test switch facilities

(vi) Contactor/relays to BS 5266 Part 3
(vii) fault protection
(viii) output current limitation
(ix) lamp indication for appropriate faults e.g. charger fail, low volts etc., with lamp
colours in accordance with BS EN 60073
(x) common fault contact for use with a central alarm system or BMS.
(g) units shall be provided with composite output distribution boards of the sizes and
14
types indicated on the Project Drawings
(h) units shall be installed complete with all necessary fixings, maintenance equipment
20
and instructions.
2 Batteries:
s
rd
(a) batteries shall be suitable for the discharge duty they will be required to perform.
Batteries shall be of the lead acid, sealed re-combination type or Nickel Cadmium
da
depending on the duty requirements and as indicated on the Project Drawings. The
contractor shall submit calculation to justify the Ampere-Hour capacity of the
an
batteries for approval to the Engineer
(b) battery system shall be provided with a suitably rated switch disconnector
St
(c) Batteries shall be mounted on suitable tiered galvanized steel shelving with moulded
n
plastic trays to contain any leakage from the battery cells and, to allow safe easy
access for maintenance
io
(d) battery terminals shall be coated with the battery manufacturer‟s approved grease,
ct
and shrouded if not enclosed.

ru
12.2.3 Self Contained Emergency Battery Packs

st
1 Where a central emergency battery unit is not installed, individual emergency luminaries shall
on
consist of individual power packs installed within or remote to the luminaries.

C
2 Battery pack units shall consist of converter/inverter devices, with nickel-cadmium batteries
to provide 3 hours operation under mains failure, unless the main supply is restored prior to
ar
this.
at
3 Luminaries with self contained battery packs shall be connected to the „live side‟ of the local
Q
lighting circuit and lamps shall operate automatically under mains failure conditions.
4 Units shall have the capability of sustaining high temperature so that they can be
accommodated in fittings with high internal temperatures. However, if the internal
temperature of the fittings exceeds 50 °C, the battery unit shall be mounted remote to the
luminaries. In the case of remote mounting, a purpose made remote mounting box shall be
provided.
5 Key operated switches shall be provided, at the locations indicated on the Project Drawings,
for all self contained emergency pack unit luminaries, to control the operation of the
luminaries manually for testing purposes. Test key switches shall be clearly labelled
“Emergency Lighting”.
12.2.4 Luminaries and Lamps
1 Clauses of Part II relating to luminaries and lamps shall also apply to emergency luminaries
and lamps.
2 Slave luminaries shall comply with BS 4533 Section 102.22 and BS Part 3 and be as
specified.
3 Exit sign luminaries lettering shall be both in Arabic and English. The Arabic text shall be
above the English text.
14
Maximum viewing distance for minimum legend height shall be guided as follows:
H > L/200
20
H = Height of Legend
L = Distance of viewer from the sign
s
4 Self contained emergency luminaries shall have a red light emitting diode installed on the
rd
luminaries so that the red light is visible.
da
5 With the central battery unit system, emergency luminaries shall be installed with an
engraved label fixed to the outer case of the luminaries, so that it is readily identified. The
an
label shall detail the lamp wattage and rated voltage.
St
6 Generally, marking of emergency luminaries shall comply with BS Part 1.
n
7 The following illumination level shall be considered for designing the number of luminaries for
io
emergency lighting: (refer to BS 5266, Part 1)

Space to Height Ratio for luminaries shall be 4:1
ct
ru
5 lux for vital positions: first aid and safety equipment

exit doors
st
fire alarm call points

on
fire fighting equipment

exit and safety signs
C
changes of direction
corridor intersection
ar
adjacent areas of final exit points

at
1 lux for normal working spaces: on the centreline of escape route

toilets
Q
lift cars and moving ways

plant rooms
covered car parks
8 Fluorescent lamps shall be provided for both slave and self contained type luminaire
installations. The lamp wattage ratings shall be chosen from the following table:
Slave : 4 watts or 8 watts

Self contained : 8 watts, 18 watts, 36 watts or 58 watts
Total quantity of luminaries shall be calculated based on the illumination level requirement as
per item 7 above, the type of luminaries and lamp lumens.
12.2.5 Obstruction / Beacon lights
14
1 This regulation is mandatory by International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO).
20
2 Where a building height is 45m or more, then the contractor shall install permanent
obstruction lights as required by ICAO.
s
3 The contractor shall obtain local navigation authorities requirements and approval for this
rd
type of installation..
da
12.3 INSTALLATION an
12.3.1 Wiring
St
1 Where the emergency lighting system installation is via a central battery unit, the wiring to
emergency luminaries shall be carried out in MICC, PVC sheathed cables, unless specified
n
otherwise.
io
2 Where the emergency lighting scheme is self-contained emergency packs, the wiring system
ct
shall either be in MICC Cables as above or in PVC insulated single core wires in conduits.
ru
2
3 Generally, cables shall be 2.5 mm cross-sectional area unless specified otherwise.
st
on
4 The Contractor shall pay careful attention to cable routings so as to keep cable runs to the
shortest possible length and ensure the overall volt drop on any circuit is within the tolerances
of the luminaries connected and within the limits specified in the QGEWC regulations.
C
12.3.2 Installation of Batteries

ar
The manufacturer‟s recommendation/instructions shall always be followed.

at
1
Q
2 Insulated tools shall be used.
3 Personnel erecting battery banks shall remove metallic objects from their person i.e.
watches, rings etc.
4 Eye and hand protection shall be provided.
5 Batteries shall not be left on site for prolonged periods without being trickle charged to
maintain their condition i.e. if delivery is some weeks before commissioning of the charger.
6 Due care shall be observed when handling acidic substances.

12.3.3 Luminaries and Lamps
1 Luminaries and lamp installation shall comply with the requirements stipulated in Part 11 for
general light fittings.
END OF PART
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 13: Telephone Installations
13 TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS .................................................................... 2
13.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

13.1.1 Scope 2
13.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
13.2.1 General 2
13.2.2 Telephone Outlets 2
14
13.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 3
13.3.1 Incoming Line/Site Services 3
20
13.3.2 Conduits and Trunking 3
13.3.3 Telephone Outlets 3
s
13.3.4 Special Requirements 3
rd
13.4 RECORD DRAWINGS .................................................................................. 4
da
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
13 TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general requirements for telephone installations carried out as part of
a contract for other works. It shall be read in conjunction with the other Parts of the
Specifications and the Project Drawings.
14
This Section
20
Part 6 Cables and Small Wiring
Part 7 Conduits and Conduit Boxes
s
Part 8 Trunking
rd
Part 9 Cable Trays
da
Part 14 Structured Cabling Systems
Part 23 Testing an
13.1.2 Reference Standards
St
and shall be complied with.
n
BS 13631....................3A plugs, socket outlets, adapters and connection units

io
Telecom Provider .......Regulations

ct
13.2 PRODUCTS
ru
13.2.1 General
st
1 Telephone cabling and equipment supply and installation shall be carried out by an approved
on
Ooredoo contractor specialising in telephone installations.

C
2 All telephone related installations carried out by the Contractor shall conform to the Ooredoo
standard specifications and regulations together with this specification and the Project
Drawings.
ar
3 3 The Contractor shall supply and install cable ways, empty conduits with draw wires
at
and/or trunking, telephone points and outlets, PVC ducts, telephone junction boxes, and
Q
manholes as required and shown on the Project Drawings unless otherwise Specified.
13.2.2 Telephone Outlets
1 The Contractor shall supply and install telephone points and the associated mains power
outlets which shall conform to BS .
2 The telephone outlets shall be jack type and from the same manufacturer, and finish as for
the lighting and general power outlets, unless specified otherwise.
3 Telephone outlets shall be of the type approved by Ooredoo.

13.3 INSTALLATION
13.3.1 Incoming Line/Site Services
1 The Contractor shall supply and install the incoming line underground through Ooredoo
approved PVC-u pipe ducts with draw wires, together with the manholes/draw pits as
indicated on the drawings.
2 The works shall be carried out in co-operation with Ooredoo Engineers.
3 Standard Ooredoo type manhole and manhole covers shall be utilised, appropriate to the
manhole location.
14
4 External ducts shall be installed in a 775 mm deep trench, on 75 mm of dune sand, covered
20
with 75 mm of dune sand, and completed with selected filling materials.
5 Trenches for Q-Tel ducts through rockfill shall be lined with geotextile filter fabric material as
s
specified in Section 6 Clause 14.9.4.
rd
6 Contractor shall arrange with Ooredoo for inspection of the installation during execution stage
da
and on completion, all costs are deemed to be included in his price.
an
13.3.2 Conduits and Trunking
St
1 The Contractor shall if required by the Project Specification or on the Project Drawings, allow
for the supply and installation of an empty conduit system complete with draw wires and/or a
trunking system between the outlet points and the telephone equipment area.
n
io
2 Conduit installations shall be concealed within the building fabric and/or concealed in
suspended ceiling voids.
ct
3 Conduit and trunking installations shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications and
ru
Ooredoo requirements.
st
4 Unless otherwise specified, the minimum size of the conduit installed shall be 25 mm
on
diameter and telephone underground duct 50 mm diameter as subscriber duct.

C
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for liaison with the specialist telephone installer and/or
Ooredoo engineers to ensure that:
ar
(a) the proposed conduits and trunking are adequate to accommodate cables
at
(b) the specialist installer is provided with the programme requirements and that his work
is carried out in accordance with the Contractor’s main programme.
Q
13.3.3 Telephone Outlets
1 Outlets shall be installed at locations indicated on the drawings and at the same heights as
the general power socket outlets, unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation.
13.3.4 Special Requirements
1 The Contractor shall consult the Ooredoo not less than one month before it is proposed to
commence work to ascertain whether any underground installations will be affected by the
proposed works, in which event the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with
Ooredoo to safeguard the installation.
2 The Contractor shall give at least one week’s notice in writing to Ooredoo of the dates upon
which it is intended to operate plant or equipment or carry out work for which permission has
been given in writing by Ooredoo; such operations of work shall only be carried out in the
presence of Ooredoo unless notice shall be obtained in writing from Ooredoo that they do not
require to be present.
3 Ooredoo may require work to be executed on their installations during the period of the
Contract; the Contractor shall afford all facilities to Ooredoo’s contractors or workmen until
their diversion work is complete. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work of Ooredoo and
his own activities and when necessary shall amend his programme of work to suit all
requirements of Ooredoo in connection with their diversion work and keep the Engineer
informed in writing of all arrangements made.
14
13.4 RECORD DRAWINGS
20
1 The Contractor shall keep accurate record drawings of the arrangement, positions and
details of all works constructed by him. These drawings will be of forms and to scales
s
approved by the Engineer and his designated representative.
rd
2 As soon as each drawing has been completed, two prints shall be submitted to the Engineer
da
and his designated representative for approval.
3 If the Drawings or documents are not approved, one copy shall be returned to the Contractor
an
with marked indications of the alterations required. Upon final approval one copy of the
drawing or document shall be stamped "Approved" by the Engineer or his designated
St
representative and returned to the Contractor forthwith.
4 After such approval is given, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer two prints of the
n
finalised drawings, and the digital files in CAD format on CD, for the use of the Engineer.
io
5 All record drawings shall be completed within 30 days of the commencement of the
ct
Maintenance Period.
ru
6 Record drawings will show accurately the exact locations of all road crossings, ducts, joint
boxes, etc., fully dimensioned and triangulated.
st
on
END OF PART
C
ar
at
Q
Part 14: Structured Cabling Systems
14 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS ........................................................... 2
14.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

14.1.1 Scope 2
14.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
14.2.1 General 2
14.2.2 Copper Cables 2
14.2.3 Optical Fibre Cables 3
14
14.2.4 Patch Panels 4
14.2.5 Patch Cords/Line Cords 4
20
14.2.6 Outlets 5
14.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 5
s
rd
14.3.1 Containment Systems 5
da
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
14 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS

14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general requirements for structural cabling system used in data
transmission applications for buildings or sub-systems thereof.
14
This Section
20
Part 8 Trunking
s
Part 9 Cable Trays
rd
Part 18 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems
Part 23 Testing
da
14.1.2 Reference Standards an
St
BS EN 60950.............. Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical

business equipment
n
EN 50173 ...................Information Technologies: Generic Cabling Systems

io
ISO/IEC 11801 ...........Generic Cabling for Customer Premise Cabling

ct
EIA/TIA SP-2840
ru
ANSI/EIA/TIA 455-30,46,51,53,61
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568A
st
ANSI/EIA/TIA 592-AAAA
on
ANSI/ICEA S-83-569 (Ref. B.1.40)

Bellcore TR-TSY-000020
C
14.2 PRODUCTS
ar
14.2.1 General
at
1 The Contractor shall provide structured cabling installations for telephone and computer
Q
networks, including distribution frames, patch panels, racking systems (cabinets), patch
cords, outlets, adaptors, conduits, PVC ducts and junction boxes, in accordance with the
Project Specification and Drawings.
2 Wiring for cabling systems shall be carried out by a Specialist Contractor approved by the
Engineer and Ooredoo, who has 5 years experience in Qatar.
14.2.2 Copper Cables
1 Copper cables shall be 24 AWG, 4 pair 0.170 mm diameter, polymer alloy jacket, category 5,
unshielded twisted pair (UTP), suitable for extended multi-media transmission distance over
frequency range up to 100 MHz, with extremely low noise characteristics.
2 Cables shall conform to ANSI/EIA/TIA 568A, Category 5 and EIA/TIA SP-2840 horizontal
UTP.
3 Cables shall conform to the following performance data:

NEXT (dB) worst pair at 100 MHz : 38 dB
Attenuation (dB/100 m) : 22.0 dB/100 m
Impedance ±7 % (Typical) : 100 ohms ±7 %
14.2.3 Optical Fibre Cables
There are two types of optical fibre cables, one is multi-mode, graded index optical fibre and
14
another is Single Mode optical fibre.
20
1 Multi-mode, Graded Index Optical Fibre.
(a) Multi-mode, graded index optical fibre.The multimode graded index optical fibre cables
with nominal 62.5/125 µm core/cladding diameter, which are optimized for use in both
s
wave lengths 850 nm and 1310 nm.
rd
(b) Fibres shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA 592-AAAA (Ref. B1.18) and also with
da
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568A Paragraph 12.5.1 on mechanical terminations.
(c) Outdoor optical fibres shall be used to connect buildings to the main distribution frame.
an
2 Outdoor optical fibres shall comply with the same specifications, however cables shall also
be, jelly filled, rodent proof specifically made for outdoor applications and shall be used for
St
installation in ducts and shall be flexible and resistant to pulling and torsion forces, with
12 strands ,unless otherwise specified in the project specification.
n
(a) Optical fibres shall meet the graded-index multi-mode performance specified in Table
io
14.1.
Table 14.1
ct
Graded-Index 62.5/125 µm Multi-mode Cable Characteristics

ru
850 nm 1300 nm
st
Attenuation - dB/km 3.75 0.4

Bandwidth - MHz. km 160 500
on
C
(b) Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with EIA fibre optic test procedure
ANSI/EIA/TIA 455-46, 61, or 53 (Ref. B1.39). Information transmission capacity shall
ar
be measured in accordance with the ANSI/EIA/TIA 455-51, or 30 (Ref. B1.39).

(c) Mechanical and environment specifications for indoor fibre optical cables shall be in
at
accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-83-569 (Ref. B1.40). Outdoor fibre optic cables shall be
in accordance with Bellcore TR-TSY-000020 (Ref. B1.36).
Q
3 Single Mode Optical Fibre.
(a) The Single mode optical fibre cables which are optimized for use in both wave lengths
1310 nm and 1550 nm.
(b) The optical fibre cables shall meet the requirements stated in ITU-T Rec. by
international telecommunication Union, BS EN 50173-3 standard.
(c) The fibre utilized in these cables have maximum attenuation at 1310 nm of 0.4 dB/km,
at 1550 nm of 0.3 dB/km or less. If used for outdoor, then the fibre cable must be
loose-tube non-dielectric type.
(d) Outdoor optical fibres shall comply with the same specifications, however cables shall
also be jelly filled, rodent proof specifically made for outdoor applications and shall be
used for installation in ducts and shall be flexible and resistant to pulling and torsion
forces, with 12 strands ,unless otherwise specified in the project specification.
4 The single mode fibre shall be used for fibre optic network more than 300 m distance data
transmission, unless otherwise justified by the manufacturer.
5 The above specified cables shall be new, unused and of current design and manufacture.
Suitable optical fibre cables shall be selected based on the distance travel, bandwidth, indoor
and outdoor application and shall be approved by the Engineer .The material of the fibre shall
be silica glass fibre.
14
14.2.4 Patch Panels
20
1 Patch panels shall be type RJ45, 16 port, 1U type in rows of three with extension possible of
up to six patch panels.
s
2 Patch panels shall be housed inside racking system (19” preferred) cabinets with hinged
rd
doors on either side and lockable front doors.
da
3 Ventilation slots shall be provided in both sides.
4 Rack size shall suit patch panels.

an
14.2.5 Patch Cords/Line Cords
St
1 Patch cords, shall be 2 metres long with adapters at both ends suitable for connection to
n
RJ45 16 port IU patch panels.

io
2 Patch cords shall be Category 5 and be flexible enough to bend without loosing any
ct
performance.
ru
3 Patch cords shall be the flexible stranded type.

st
4 Line cords shall have the same specifications as patch cords, however these shall be the
solid type, used at wall outlets to connect computers or terminals to distribution cabling
on
systems.
C
5 Cables shall comply with the performance data specified in Table 14.2.
Table 14.2
ar
Specifications for Category 5 solid/stranded line cords or patch cords

at
Frequency Attenuation Next

(MHz) (Max. dB/305 m) (Min Loss dB/305 m)
Q
1.00 6.80 62.0

4.00 14.0 53.0
10.0 22.4 47.0
16.0 28.3 44.0
20.0 31.7 42.0
25.0 35.9 41.0
31.25 40.9 40.0
62.5 59.3 35.0
100.0 76.1 32.0
14.2.6 Outlets
1 These shall be twin outlet type RJ45 to EN 60950 IBS 7008 having white moulded plastic
plates with black shutters for computer outlets and white shutters for telephone outlets.
2 Outlets shall conform to the following specifications:
(a) Attenuation (dB) : <-0.12

(b) Return loss (dB) : <-21.54
(c) Bulk resistance (milli-ohm) : 21.85
(d) Voltage rating : >1050 V DC for 1 minute
14
14.3 INSTALLATION
20
14.3.1 Containment Systems
s
1 90 mm diameter or as approved by the Engineer, HDPE ducts and draw-pits shall be
rd
provided from external boundary walls to main distribution frame (MDF) positions and from
the MDF to other buildings, as indicated on the Project Drawings.
da
2 Conduits, trunking and cable trays shall be provided for structured cabling installations,
complying with Parts 7, 8 and 9 respectively of Section 21. The minimum conduit size shall
an
be 25mm.
St
3 The computer wiring shall be laid from the user outlets up to the computer room (server)
without any joints in between. Moreover the maximum length of a single run shall not exceed
90 meters, otherwise amplification of signal shall be provided.
n
io
4 All public offices and buildings shall be equipped with a complete wireless access points
through the building.
ct
ru

st
1 General
on
(a) the Specialist Contractor shall test the complete cabling network to ensure
that noise is not interfering with systems and contact resistance are kept within
acceptable levels
C
(b) certificates shall be supplied by the Specialist Contractor to certify efficient

ar
working of the networks.
2 Copper Cable and Connectors: Each RJ-45 Jack connector shall be tested to ensure
at
Category 5 performance. Each RJ-45 Jack shall be tested for Point to Point connectivity, by
Q
utilising hand held time domain reflectometers (TDR), capable of generating pulses of 100
MHz, and of testing that the following parameters are in accordance with EIA/TIA 568A:
(a) Wire mapping for correct polarity

(b) Length for point to point connectivity under 90 metres
(c) Near end cross talk (NEXT)
(d) Resistance
(e) Impedance
(f) Capacitance
(g) Noise
(h) Attenuation
3 Optical fibre cable shall comply with the following:
(a) certificates of compliance with EIA/TIA specifications, and manufacturer’s test

certificates attached to the reels/drums
(b) white light tests shall be performed to confirm end to end connectivity on delivery to
site, after installation and prior to field termination
(c) after field termination point to point connectivity shall be tested on each cable by a
hand held optical time domain reflectometer, (OTDR), or optical power light meter and
light source, capable of reading and measuring signal loss by generating wave lengths
of 950 mm and 1300 mm. This shall check the field termination loss and that no
damage has occurred from macro/micro bending.
14
END OF PART
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 15: Electric Motors
15 ELECTRIC MOTORS .................................................................................... 2
15.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

15.1.1 Submittals 2
15.1.2 References 2
15.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
15.2.1 Motor Enclosures 2
15.2.2 Induction Motors 4
14
15.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 8
15.3.1 General 8
20
15.3.2 Factory Tests 8
15.3.3 Field Checks 8
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
15 ELECTRIC MOTORS
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Submittals
1 Submit for QGEWC/Engineer approval, shop drawings, factory test reports, manufacturer‟s
certified reports and technical data for motors supplied with driven equipment to the extent
required in this Section and the Specification Sections for mechanical equipment.
2 Shop Drawings. In addition to information to be included in the shop drawings as specified in
14
Part 1, shop drawings shall include the following:
20
(a) motor locked rotor and full load currents
(b) power factors and efficiencies at full load, three quarters load and half load
s
(c) motor housing material, winding material, ambient temperatures and maximum
rd
elevations in which motor is designed to operate continuously, service factor, insulation
Class, temperature rise, type of enclosure, voltage, bearing life and dynamic balance;
da
all of which shall comply to the requirements of the specifications
(d) nameplate data an
(e) dimensions, weights and mounting details of motors
(f) motor construction details
St
(g) speed torque/current at 100 % volts

n
(h) wiring diagrams, internal and typical external connections.

io
3 Current Data. Submit eight copies to the Engineer of field recorded current data. The data
ct
shall indicate the full load current for each motor, and current rating for the overload relay in
each motor starter and controller.
tru
15.1.2 References
s
1 The following standards or revised/updated versions are referred to in this Part:

on
BS 2048 ......................Dimensions for fractional horse-power motors

C
BS 4999 ......................Winding terminations

BS 5000 ......................Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular
ar
applications
at
BS EN 60034
BS 2757
Q
15.2 PRODUCTS
15.2.1 Motor Enclosures
1 Motor enclosures shall be selected from BS EN 60034-5 as follows:-

(a) for submersible applications the enclosure shall be IP68 and be capable of being
continuously submersed to a depth of at least 2 metres greater than the maximum
immersion depth of the application. Where such motors are to be installed in an area
designated as potentially explosive then it shall have the appropriate
BASEEFA/CENELEC or other similar National Testing Organisation Certification.
Copies of the Certificates shall be submitted. Motors to be used in sewage wet wells
shall be certified for use in a Zone 2 area and Certificates shall show that the motors
o
were tested at an ambient temperature of 50 C. They shall be certified in accordance
with BS 4683 Parts 1 and 2 classification Ex d IIA T3.
(b) motors shall be of the submersible squirrel cage rotor induction type suitable for
operating in the specified medium (sewage, effluent etc.).
14
(c) motors shall be suitable for continuous operation when immersed in the specified
medium and when the motor is above the specified medium in an ambient temperature
o
of 50 C.
20
(d) the motors shall be entirely waterproof and provided with adequate cooling facilities which
shall be achieved either by the surrounding liquid in the sump or by providing a motor
s
jacket cooling system supplied with liquid from the pump volute.
rd
(e) terminal boxes shall be watertight and the motor shall be supplied with an adequate
length of multi-core heavy duty flexible cable with tough rubber outer sheath.
da
(f) the cable shall pass through a watertight gland on entry into the motor body.
an
(g) the rotor and impeller assembly shall be dynamically balanced at the duty speed.
(h) for indoor applications the enclosure shall be to IP54 of BS EN 60034-5. Submersible
St
motors that are to be installed in dry wells shall be to IP 68 of BSEN60034-5. The
cooling method shall be exactly the same as if the motor was installed in a submerged
condition. Under no circumstances will an external cooling fan be permitted on dry
n
installed submersible motors.

io
(i) for outdoor application the enclosure shall be to IPW55 of BS EN 60034-5. A

ct
certificate shall be issued by the manufacturer certifying the motor suitability for the
outdoor application, in the service conditions as described under the general section of
tru
this specification.
(j) for high voltage motors the enclosure shall be protected to IP55 of BS4999 Part 105
s
2 Unless stated otherwise, stator frames shall be of cast iron, foot and flange mounted as
on
required by the Contract. Aluminium frames are permitted for 2.2 kW motors and smaller
only. Ductile stainless steel frames shall be used, when specified in the particular
C
specification, for aggressive sewage conditions, and shall be of grade 316L minimum.
ar
(a) lifting facilities shall be provided on all motors

(b) submersible motors shall be protected by a tandem mechanical seal arrangement. Lip
at
seals are not permitted. The Contractor shall provide complete data on the seal
materials, seats, faces etc., and ensure suitability for the medium being sealed i.e. oil
Q
chamber, oil and supernatant.

(c) on pumps greater than 2.2 kW the mechanical seal performance shall be monitored by
monitoring equipment to detect the following:- (alarm indication shall be transmitted on
Motor starter panel.)
(i) moisture within the oil chamber.
(ii) moisture/water or oil within the motor casing.
(iii) temperature rise of the hydraulic driven end bearing.
(iv) loss of oil from the oil chamber.
(d) motors installed outdoors shall be protected from direct sunlight. Fan covers and
cooling fans shall be metallic. Plastic fan covers and/or fans shall not be permitted on
motors installed outdoors. Sunshades on motors/machinery should be sized such that
cable entry points and the ends of cable trays are protected from sunlight. Sun/weather
protection shades shall be manufactured from welded mild steel, hot dip galvanised
after manufacture, or stainless steel. There shall be no sharp edges or dangerous
protrusions on any sun/weather protection shades.
15.2.2 Induction Motors
1 General:
(a) motors shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the driven equipment as specified in
14
this section, and specifically outlined in the driven equipment specifications
20
(b) all motors shall be suitable for operation on a 415V or 690V, 50 Hz 3 phase supply.
Different voltage levels may be used as indicated in particular specifications or
drawings
s
(c) All motors shall be capable of starting 10 times per hour. The stalled motor current
rd
shall not exceed 6 times full load current
da
(d) All motors shall be commercially silent in operation and run free from vibration and the
rotors shall be perfectly balanced both statically and dynamically and shall be tested
and adjusted for dynamic balance in an approved manner
an
(e) All motors shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters of a size to maintain the
temperature of the windings 5 °C above ambient. Each heater shall be provided with a
St
switch and automatic control to disconnect it when its motor is in operation

(f) Terminal Boxes
n
(i) Terminal boxes shall be cast iron and shall be designed to accept XLPE or PVC
io
armoured cable as detailed in the Contract. On non-submersible motors,

ct
terminal boxes shall be mounted on the right hand side when viewed from the
driving end of the motor, unless otherwise required by the Contract.
tru
(ii) The motor stool base where appropriate shall be drilled at works vertically below
the terminal box gland for the passage of the cables and the edges of the hole
s
slightly countersunk or the hole bushed.

on
(iii) Motor terminals shall be stud-type, substantially designed, anchored to a carrier

terminal block and insulated from the motor frame. Terminals shall be identified
C
in accordance with BS 4999 Part 108 or equivalent. A separate earth stud shall
be included on each terminal box. Heater terminals shall be shrouded and
prominently labelled.
ar
(iv) Adequate space and glanding arrangements shall be provided, particularly on

at
smaller motors requiring glanding and terminating of steel wire armoured cable
for star/delta starting, anti-condensation heating and thermistor winding
Q
protection devices.
(v) Where a common terminal box is used for main, heater and thermistor cable
terminations, a permanent warning label shall be fixed to the terminal box cover.
In addition, heater and thermistor cable terminations shall be clearly marked to
identify their separate functions and operating voltages.
(vi) Terminal box covers shall be gasketed to provide a degree of protection
equivalent to or better than that of the motor.
(vii) For Ex 'd' flameproof motors, terminal boxes may employ Type 'e' increased
safety protection, utilising indirect cable entry to the flameproof enclosure.
However, this must be of the same type used to obtain the potentially explosive
hazardous area motor certification.
(viii) 3.3kV motor cable termination boxes shall be high fault level type, with
segregated phases, pressure relief diaphragm and sealing chamber.
(g) arrangements shall be made with the manufacturer so that the Engineer shall witness
motor tests for motors with power larger than 75 kW as specified in the FAT testing
paragraph.
(h) the motors shall run in ball and/or roller bearings and the weight of the motor shall be
carried by thrust bearings incorporated in the motor body
(i) bearings shall be grease lubricated using hydraulic type nipples which are freely
accessible without any dismantling, or otherwise piped out to a readily accessible
location
14
(j) “Sealed for Life” bearings shall not normally be used. However, for small motors the
Engineer may allow the use of sealed for life bearings.
20
2 Motor Ratings:
(a) The efficiency and power factor of the motors shall be high over a wide range of load
s
conditions. The motors shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with
rd
BS 4999 and BS 5000 (or BS 2048 and BS 5000 in the case of small horsepower
motors) for continuously rated industrial electric motors and Class “F” insulation but
da
limited to Class „B‟ temperature rise. This shall be in addition to any adjustments
necessary for high ambient temperatures at site. The maximum continuous rating
an
(MCR) of each motor shall be as set out in Table 15.1 and shall be rated and designed
to suit the climatic conditions at site. This reserve power requirement shall be added to
the calculated power prior to any other adjustments e.g. high ambient temperatures at
St
site
Table 15.1
n
MCR Ratings
io
Application Up to 75 kW drive Above 75 kW drive

ct
All pump motors 10% above that required 5% above that required
tru
(excluding positive under all conditions of under all conditions of

displacement type) operation operation
s
Positive displacement 25% above maximum duty 12.5% above maximum

on
pumps and compressors requirements duty requirements

C
(b) motor starters shall be selected from the following to satisfy the stipulated performance
requirements and comply with QGEWC starting current restrictions:-
ar
(i) motors up to 11 kW (15 hp) shall be squirrel cage suitable for DOL starting
having a starting current not greater than 6 x full load current (FLC)
at
(ii) motors between 11 kW (15 hp) and 37.5 kW shall have their starting current
Q
restricted to 4 x FLC and shall use one of the following starting methods; as
indicated in the Project Drawings or the Project Documentation:-
 Solid State Reduced Voltage (Soft) Start with torque characteristics
suitable for the application
 Star - Delta
(iii) motor over 37.5 kW shall have their starting current restricted to 2.5 FLC and
shall use one of the following starting methods:
 Solid State Reduced Voltage (Soft) Start with torque characteristics
suitable for the application
 VFD
(iv) submersible pump motors because of inherent design are to generally comply
with the foregoing. The starting method is to be restricted to DOL/ Star-delta
starting or soft start according to rating.
(c) motors shall be suitable and certified for the zone of hazard in which they are to be
installed
(d) where flywheels are fitted to the main pump set, the motors shall be capable of
starting and driving the pumps under these conditions.
3 Motor Cooling
(a) non-submersible motors shall be air cooled to IC 41 of BS EN 60034-6.
14
(b) cooling of submersible motors shall be an efficient system to the manufacturer's
design.
20
4 Motor Windings
s
(a) motor windings shall be copper and treated to render them impervious to moisture,
rd
saline atmospheres, acid/alkaline fumes, oil and grease. They shall be adequately
braced to prevent movement of coils during all conditions of service and be insulated
da
throughout to Class F of BS 2757 or equivalent with a temperature rise limit of Class B.
This provision shall be in addition to any adjustments necessary for ambient
o
temperatures at site of 55 C
an
(b) motor operating voltage and connection type shall be clearly stated on the motor
nameplate.
St
(c) for high voltage motors, the stator windings shall use a modern synthetic resin
insulation system based on mica glass tape continuously wound on the coils to give a
n
void-free homogeneous structure. The end windings shall be securely braced to

io
prevent harmful movement arising from electro-magnetic and mechanical forces. The
rotor bars shall be securely keyed into the rotor. The rotor shall be shrunk and keyed
ct
onto the shaft.

tru
5 Thermal Protection
(a) all motors rated at 11 kW and above shall be equipped with thermostatic contact
s
elements in accordance with QGEWC Regulation 801. Six thermostats shall be

on
provided (3 in use, 3 spare) to BS 4999 Part 111 to give Class 1 protection.

Thermostats shall be of the normally closed (break on temperature rise) type. They
C
o
shall operate at 160 C on rising temperature and shall be complete with leads and
terminals.
ar
(b) when thermistors are specified six shall be provided (3 in use, 3 spare) to BS 4999
Part 111 to give Class 1 protection. Thermistors shall be PTC type P160 and shall be
at
complete with control units for motor tripping.

Q
(c) when embedded resistance thermometers are specified six shall be provided (3 in use,
3 spare) either in the stator slots or end windings. They shall be of the platinum wire
o
type compensated for 0 C at 100 ohms (Pt. 100). They shall be complete with
evaluating unit and remote temperature indicators with set points for over temperature
alarms.
(d) when motor winding thermocouples are specified six shall be provided (3 in use, 3
spare) either in the stator slots or end windings. They shall be complete with remote
temperature indicator with set points for over-temperature alarm.
(e) When motor winding RTD‟s (Resistance Temperature Detectors) are specified six
shall be provided (3 in use, 3 spare) either in the stator slots or end windings.
(f) when bearing temperature indicators are specified the sensors shall be Pt. 100
resistance thermometers installed as close as possible to the bearing and complete
with remote temperature indications with set points for alarm.
(g) when cooling air temperature indicators are specified two shall be provided to monitor
both the warmed air and the fresh air. The sensors shall be Pt. 100 resistance
thermometers installed in the air passage and complete with remote temperature
indications with set points for alarms.
(h) where thermostats or thermistors are used in explosion proof designs, the devices
must be of the same type used to obtain the potentially explosive hazardous area
motor certification.
6 Submersible motor cables
(a) submersible motors shall be complete with lengths of black PTFE covered flexible
cable for Power, Signalling and Protection purposes.
14
(b) each cable shall be a minimum of 20 metres long or as otherwise required by the
Contract, and shall be rated in accordance with the cable routing details. As a
20
minimum cables shall be continuously rated to carry the motor full load current when
laid in a classified area to the approval of QGEWC. The cable shall be factory fitted
according to the connection of the motor winding.
s
(c) flexible cables for use in potentially explosive atmospheres shall be identical to those
rd
types used to obtain the potentially explosive hazardous area combined motor/cable
certification. Where protection cables are part of an intrinsically safe circuit the outer
da
sheath shall be coloured blue.
(d) jointing of cables is not acceptable.
an
(e) cables shall be laid such that there is no fouling of the submersible pump whilst lifting
or lowering. The extra length of cable shall be relaxed and not coiled.
St
7 Bearings
n
(a) the motors shall run in ball and/or roller bearings and the weight of the motor shall be
io
carried by thrust bearings incorporated in the motor body.

ct
(b) maximum life bearings with oil seals shall be fitted to both drive end and non-drive end
bearing housings to prevent ingress of solid particles and liquids. Bearings shall be in
tru
accordance with BS 292 or equivalent.

(c) bearings that are not sealed for life shall be grease lubricated and shall be fitted with a
s
means for replenishing the grease and a relief device for disposal of excess grease.
on
Hydraulic button head grease nipples in accordance with BS 1486 Part 2 or equivalent
shall be provided and shall be extended, where necessary, such that they are located
at the top of the frame. Re-greasing points shall be located for ease of access.
C
(d) bearing temperature monitoring facilities shall be provided on submersible motors over
ar
75 kW and on non-submersible motors over 100kW.

(e) All VFD controlled motors shall be provided with insulated bearings to prevent bearing
at
failure due to circulating rotor currents. Confirmation from Motor manufacturer shall be
provided that the motors are suitable for VFD (Variable speed Drive) continuous
Q
operation
8 Noise Levels
(a) unless otherwise required by the Contract, the noise levels (Sound Power Levels
dB(A)) of the motors shall be in accordance with BS EN 60034-9.
9 Paint finish
(a) the paint finish shall be entirely compatible with the environment to which the motors
will be subjected. This shall consist of an anti-corrosion primer/undercoat with a 2 part
heavy duty epoxy resin paint or such other paint finish determined by the application,
and as detailed in the specification for Corrosion Protection.
15.3 INSTALLATION
15.3.1 General
1 Provide all the equipment installations and wiring installations, including connections as
indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the
spaces as shown on the Drawings.
2 Motor:
(a) provide power, control, alarm and earthing installations for all motors as indicated and
required
14
(b) check the connections to provide correct rotation for all motors
(c) record the full load current to each motor, and the overload relay rating in each motor
starter for the certified data submittal
20
(d) provide the wiring for heaters in the motor frames and the required controls to de-
energise the heater when the motor operates (if applicable)
s
(e) provide the required wiring for all equipment that shall be furnished and installed
rd
according to other relevant Sections of the Specifications
(f) install the control stations and/or emergency stop units on steel stanchions or building
da
structures near motors, if specified and as shown on the Drawings. Control stations,
where required in accordance with the particular specification, shall incorporate a
an
“Local/Remote” switch, “On/Off” switch and the emergency stop unit
(g) field damaged factory finish on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal
St
in quality and colour to the original factory finish.
15.3.2 Factory Tests
n
io
1 Factory tests shall be carried out as follows

ct
(a) All motors: - No load current

- High voltage on windings and auxiliary
tru
- Windings resistance
- Vibration
s
(b) One motor: - Full load heat run and temperature rise
on
- Efficiency at 100 %, 75 %, 50 % and 25 % load

- Power factor at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% load
- Noise
C
- Momentary overload
(c) Type test certificate shall be provided for all motors to cover as a minimum the
ar
following:
at
- Locked rotor current

- Locked rotor torque
Q
- Saturation curves
- Percent slip
2 The Contractor shall provide calculations to demonstrate motor power rating and bearing life
with derating factors taken into account.
15.3.3 Field Checks
1 Motor Installations shall be complete and correct.
2 Operation tests shall be performed to observe that motors start, run and stop satisfactorily
under design load.
END OF PART
Part 16: Power Factor Correction Capacitors
16 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ........................................ 2
16.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

16.1.1 General 2
16.1.2 Description 2
16.1.3 References 2
16.1.5 Submissions 2
16.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling 2
14
16.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
20
16.2.1 General 3
16.2.2 Capacitors 3
s
16.2.3 Control and Protection 3
rd
16.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4
da
16.3.1 Installation an 4
16.4 TESTS ........................................................................................................... 5
16.4.1 Factory and Field Tests 5
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
16 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

16.1 GENERAL
16.1.1 General
1 This specification section covers the supply and installation of power factor correction
equipment operating on electrical power systems up to 600 V ac 50 Hz.
2 The work of this part is integral with the whole of the Project Documentation and is not
14
20
This Section
s
Part 1 General Provision for Electrical Installation
rd
Part 2 HV & MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s)
Part 3 Protective Devices
da
Part 15 Electric Motors
an
16.1.2 Description
St
1 Provide all labour, materials, equipment, services and accessories necessary to furnish and
install the work of this Part, complete and functional, as indicated in the Project
n
Documentation and as specified herein.

io
16.1.3 References
ct

tru
BS 88 ..........................Cartridge fuses for voltage up to 1000 V ac

s
BS 1650 ......................Capacitors for connection to power frequency systems

on
BS EN 60949.................Control gear for voltage up to 1000 V ac

C
1 Reference standards as detailed under Part 1 and this Part Clause 17.1.4.
ar
16.1.5 Submissions
at
Q
1 Reference Part 1
16.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 Deliver, store and handle materials and products in a manner to prevent damage.
2 Reference Part 1
16.1.7 Co-ordination
1 The work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the work of other services.
16.2 PRODUCTS
16.2.1 General
1 Power factor improvement equipment shall be provided in LV (415 V) Main Distribution

Board. Correction shall be automatic and be capable of correcting the power factor to within
range 0.9 lagging to unity as required by the design. The power factor setting shall be
adjustable.
2 Individual power factor capacitors shall be provided for the larger motorised drives, as
indicated on the single line diagrams.
14
3 All capacitors must be arranged so that they are connected in minimum 4 stages and subject
to the Engineer’s approval. These stages shall be sized to prevent system over-voltage
20
during light loads conditions.
16.2.2 Capacitors
s
rd
1 Capacitors shall comply with BS 1650 and shall be of a dry metalised film construction,
containing no liquid and must have low losses (typically 0.5 Watts/kVA).
da
2 Each capacitor shall be housed in a sealed container and be fitted with a fail-safe, pressure
sensitive disconnect device.
an
3 Each capacitor shall be equipped with suitable discharge resistors to reduce the voltage to
St
less than 50V in one minute, or less, after supply disconnection.
4 The capacitors shall be housed in a metal enclosure, forming part of the Main Distribution
n
Board. The enclosure size should allow enough space and cabling etc., for at least one
io
additional capacitor unit to be fitted at a later date.

ct
5 Provision shall be made to ensure that a connection point is available for a series connected,
tru
de-tuning reactor in case of problems with harmonics.
6 The equipment must comply with BS 800 with respect to electrical interference.
s
on
7 The capacitors shall be protected by a fused switch-disconnector or circuit breaker on the LV

motor control centre.
C
8 The capacitor manufacturer must recommend the maximum fuse or circuit breaker that will
ensure the protection of each capacitor bank.
ar
9 All power and control cables used within the capacitor bank enclosure must be in accordance
at
with BS 6231 Type BK.

Q
10 Detuned reactor/harmonic filters
(a) anti-resonance reactor detunned or filters deemed necessary to reduce the harmonic
content.
(b) total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of voltage at point of common couplings shall adhere
to IEEE Harmonic Standard 519-1992 and ER G5/4.
16.2.3 Control and Protection
1 Power Factor Regulator

(a) The minimum number of capacitor switching steps shall be four (4) as far as practically
possible for smaller rating capacitor banks and between 6 to 12 steps for others. The
capacitors’ KVAr shall be so chosen to provide maximum programming flexibility such
as switching sequence 1:2:2:2, 1:1:1:1 etc. in order to maintain the power factor within
the set limits for most of the operating time.
(b) an alphanumerical LCD, micro-processor based automatic power factor correction
regulator shall be provided to control steps and display measurement of the following:-
(i) power factor
(ii) no. of steps connected
(iii) step connection and disconnection time
14
(iv) actual current
(v) reactive current
20
(vi) active power
(vii) reactive power
s
rd
(viii) THD voltage
(ix) alarm conditions as listed below
da
(c) the regulator shall have built-in alarm relay for remote indication and following alarm
conditions locally:-
an
(i) low power factor
St
(ii) abnormal power factor
(iii) leading power factor
n
(iv) overcurrent
io
(v) overtemperature
ct
(vi) overvoltage
tru
(vii) THD high

(viii) capacitor overload etc.
s
(d) the regulator shall provide facility to manually energize/denergise capacitor steps for
on
the purpose of testing and verification of required/set power factor.

C
(e) switching contactors shall have a minimum duty category AC4 to BS EN 60947 and a
minimum current rating of 1.3 x the current consumed by the capacitor bank (see BS
1650).
ar
(f) Each capacitor “stage” connection shall be indicated on the panel door by an indicating
at
lamp.
Q
16.3 INSTALLATION
16.3.1 Installation
1 Documentation shall be provided detailing:
(a) Type test certificate

(b) Routine test certificate
(c) Maintenance requirements
(d) Fault diagnosis
(e) Parts list with part numbers and recommended spares
(f) Commissioning instructions
16.4 TESTS
16.4.1 Factory and Field Tests
1 The PFCC assembly shall be tested at the factory and at site during commissioning. The
results so obtained shall be verified with the actual requirements and QGEWC regulations.
Modifications if any shall be carried-out at no extra cost to the Owner.
END OF PART
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 17: Standby Diesel Generator Set
17 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET ........................................................ 2
17.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

17.1.2 Description of Work 2
17.1.3 References 2
17.1.5 Submittals 3
17.1.6 Period of Maintenance 5
14
17.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 5
17.2.1 Diesel Generator Set 5
20
17.2.2 Control Panel 14
17.2.3 Automatic Transfer Switch (A.T.S.) 15
s
17.2.4 System Operation and Performance 16
rd
17.2.5 Manual Operation 16
17.2.6 System Responsibility 16
da
17.2.8 Paint Work 17
an
17.2.9 Site Quality Control 17
17.2.10 Commissioning 17
St
17.2.11 Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel 18

17.2.12 Reference Data Sheet 19
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
17 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

17.1 GENERAL
1 The work of this Section is integral with the whole of the Project Documentation and is not
14
17.1.2 Description of Work
20
1 The Contractor shall supply, install, commission, test and handover in good operable manner
including 400 days guarantee and maintenance of 415 V mains failure, standby diesel
generator set and 5 years guarantee for electric motors, as per the Project Documentation.
s
The set shall be arranged for either automatic or manual start on mains failure, as indicated
rd
on the Project Drawings. The set shall be complete with diesel engine, generator, control
panel, batteries, starting motor, built-in air cooled radiator, main fuel storage tank, daily fuel
da
storage tank, fuel transfer pumps and all other accessories as specified and mentioned in the
BOQ. an
St
This Section
n
Part 7 Conduits
io
Part 8 Trunking
ct
Part 9 Cable Trays

Part 22 Earthing and Bonding
tru
17.1.3 References
s
1 The following standards or revised/updated are referred to in this Part

on
BS 4999 ......................Alternators
BS 5514 ......................Engines
C

ar
1 Manufacturer's Qualification:
at
(a) The Diesel Generator Set shall be designed and manufactured complete by a
Q
manufacturer regularly engaged as a manufacturer of such equipment.

(b) The Diesel Generator Set Manufacturer shall have a proven manufacturing experience
of minimum 10 years in this field. Reference of previous approvals in similar
applications and environmental conditions shall be provided for Engineer’s review and
approval.
(c) The DG set manufacture shall have an approved ISO 9001 QA/QC procedure for
design, manufacturing and testing of complete DG set. The DG set Manufacturer shall
provide minimum the following documents as a part of submittal approval.
(i) Quality policy
(ii) Quality Policy manual
(iii) Manufacturing and storage facilities.
(iv) Traceability of components.

(v) Design facilities.
(vi) Testing facilities.
(d) The Diesel Generator Set manufacturer shall have full Load testing facilities in his
premises for testing the full range of his products at full load as per the relevant BS/
ISO standards.
2 Installer's Qualification:
(a) all the Diesel Generator installation work shall be carried out by a Diesel Generator
sub-contractor. Diesel Generator sub-contractor shall be one who is normally an
14
agent representing one or more of the approved makes of D/G sets. Diesel
Generator installation shall be supervised, checked and tested by a qualified
representative of the manufacturer and handover the works in perfect running order
20
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3 Source Quality Control:
s
rd
(a) The Diesel Generator Set Manufacturer shall test the complete Diesel Generator set at
the manufacturing facilities. The test shall be performed as per the latest BS/IEC
da
standard and the Factory Acceptance Procedure shall be approved by the
Engineer/Client. Any additional test required by the Engineer during the FAT shall be
performed by the Diesel Generator Manufacturer in his cost. The Diesel Generator set
an
shall not be shipped from the manufacturing facilities until the test reports have been
submitted and approved by the Engineer.
St
4 Local Agent:
n
(a) the manufacturer should have an agent in Qatar who is well experienced in
installation and maintenance of diesel generators of the size specified herein. The
io
agent should have been associated with the manufacturer for a minimum period of
ct
five years.
tru
5 Design Criteria:
(a) all materials and equipment shall comply with relevant IEC and BS specifications as
s
regards quality of materials, performance and proving tests.

on
(b) the emergency power supply system and its components shall be such as may be
properly maintained and serviced without the necessity of carrying expensive spare
C
part stocks, or being subjected to interrupted service due to the lack of spare parts
(c) emergency generator set shall be designed to allow easy replacement of major items
ar
subject to wear.
at
17.1.5 Submittals
Q
1 Shop Drawings:
(a) Submit shop drawings for approval in accordance to Part 1

(b) Shop drawings shall be complete, as to be record drawings, not general outline
drawings used for sales and guide layouts
(c) Submit a complete wiring diagram for the generator set, drawn on a single standard
size sheet, showing the following:
(i) all components of:
 engine starting control
 engine alarm
 generator control
 battery
 battery charger
 earthing
 transfer switch control relays
(ii) interior wiring, terminals and interconnecting wiring
(iii) certified dimensions and weights.
(d) submit a composite wiring diagram of the entire emergency transfer system showing
all wiring between the engine starting panel, engine generator set and the automatic
transfer switches
14
(e) wiring diagrams shall clearly show:
20
(i) main current conductors, in heavy lines
(ii) control conductors, with colour and/or number coding
s
(iii) location of relays and apparatus
rd
(iv) description of function, type and catalogue, of all components.
da
(f) alternator Control Panel:
(i) submit a schematic line diagram showing:
an
 Interlocks
 Protection
St
 Instruments
n
(g) submit general arrangement drawings of the generator installation and the generator
io
building layout.
ct
2 Product Data submitted in accordance to Part 1.

tru
(a) submit curves showing the actual performance of a similar engine (same model,
stroke, etc.) to that proposed, superimposed on the standard published performance
curves for continuous, and maximum operation
s
(b) submit the detailed information together with manufacturer's catalogues for the
on
following:
(i) generating set manufacturer
C
(ii) name and Address

ar
(iii) generating set Model No.

at
(iv) diesel Engine

Q
(v) radiator
(vi) fuel System
(vii) alternator
(viii) exciter
(ix) starting Battery
(x) control Panel
(xi) service Facilities
(c) test certificates
(d) list of spare parts
(e) certified factory test reports
(f) instruction manuals for operation and maintenance

(g) parts catalogue with manufacturer address.
17.1.6 Period of Maintenance
1 During the maintenance period of 400 days the sub-contractor shall repair and replace
directly, at his own expense, any of the plant, material or work performed or furnished under
the respective works in the Project which may develop under the conditions provided for by
the Project and under proper use in the works or that portion thereof taken over by the
Engineer. The guarantee period for all electric motors shall be 5 years.
2 The sub-contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer all guarantees or certificates or
14
warranty available from the manufacturers, but only as supplementary to the sub-contractor's
own liabilities under the Project and in no way invalidate them.
20
3 The D/G sub-contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory operation of the D/G
installation during the Maintenance and Guarantee Period. He shall carry out necessary
s
inspection, preventive maintenance and testing to keep the set ready all the time. The set
rd
shall function satisfactorily during power failures. The D/G sub-contractor shall carry out
routine testing of the installation once in every month throughout the Maintenance and
da
Guarantee Period. The testing shall be carried in presence of Engineer. The sub-contractor
shall himself provide all electrical and mechanical spare parts, grease, lubricating oils, touch-
up paints, etc., required for the maintenance of the D/G installation. The owner shall be
an
responsible only for providing diesel oil as and when required. The D/G sub-contractor shall
prepare log-books listed full details of maintenance work and each log-book entry shall be
St
countersigned by the Engineer.
17.2 PRODUCTS
n
io
17.2.1 Diesel Generator Set

ct
1 The Diesel Generator Set shall be of rugged reliable design and built for long trouble free
tru
service under the worst specified climatic conditions and made by an approved reputable
manufacturer.
s
2 Rating:
on
(a) The Diesel Generator Set output shall be design for prime rating as specified
elsewhere. Detailed design calculations for Engine, Alternator, Cooling system, battery,
C
etc shall be provided for Engineer’s approval for the proposed Diesel Generator set.
ar
(b) The rated output shall be as specified elsewhere or as indicated on the drawings,
415/240 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire and 50 Hz or different voltage level as indicated
at
elsewhere in the Contract specifications (690 V or 3.3 KV).. The rated output shall
mean the net full continuous derated output in Qatar at an ambient temperature up to
Q
50°C at a relative humidity of 95%. The set shall also be capable of 110% load for one
hour under these conditions at the rated speed without undue heating of the engine or
alternator and without mechanical or electrical troubles.
3 Diesel Engine:
(a) The diesel engine shall be of the stationary heavy duty, turbo charged
compression/ignition, multi cylinder 4 stroke operation. The steel base frame shall be
provided with spring type vibration isolators. The engine shall be able to deliver full
load in the shortest possible time after start. The engine speed shall not exceed 1500
r.p.m. The engine construction shall be in such a way as to allow for dismantling of
any engine component for inspection or repair without undue complication i.e. without
dismantling of other non-defective parts. The crank case shall be provided with
inspection windows
(b) starting system: The diesel engine shall be equipped with starting system detailed
hereunder and as per Engineer's approval.
(i) Battery Starting System:
 batteries for starting shall be of the nickel cadmium type, 24 Volt, heavy
duty diesel starting type and of sufficient capacity to allow 6 consecutive
start attempts each of 15 seconds with 1 minute intervals. It shall be
possible by means of a selector to alter the starting sequence to provide a
single start attempt of 1 minute before lockout and alarm. The battery
used for starting may also be used to energise the diesel plant control
system but shall have enough capacity remaining after 3 engine start
attempts to energise the system continuously for 24 hours. The control
14
system shall be suitable to continue operating correctly during the voltage
dips occurring on the battery during the engine starts.
20
(c) Cooling System:
(i) radiator : built-in type with sufficient capacity to dissipate the total joules per hour
rejected by the engine cooling system at 110 % full load
s
rd
(ii) blower fan: to have sufficient pressure to circulate required quantity of air for
engine cooling. The fan shall be provided with a suitable guard. D/G room
da
o
inside temperature should not exceed 56 C
(iii) jacket water heaters: to be provided on engine to facilitate quick starting
an
under low ambient conditions
(iv) the cooling system shall be capable of keeping the temperature of cooling
St
water at safe limits at all conditions of load required in the specifications.

Maximum temperature of cooling water after 10 hours of continuous running
at full load at worst Qatar climatic conditions shall not exceed the maximum
n
temperature limits of the diesel engine

io
(v) the cooling system shall include an engine shaft driven circulating water
ct
pump. The water jacket of the engine cylinder shall be so constructed that
the water in the jacket can be drained completely
tru
(vi) the radiator finned tubes shall have a common inlet and common outlet
headers
s
on
(vii) drain valve and a filling valve shall be provided to the radiator for flushing
and quick filling
C
(viii) Cooling water piping, complete with all necessary supports; control valves,
flanges and fittings, thermometers, pressure gauges, relays etc., shall be
supplied and installed to form a complete engine water cooling line.
ar
Piping shall be as of BS 1387

at
(ix) the water pump discharge valve shall preferably be a globe valve, the other
valves shall be (sluice) gate valve.
Q
(d) Fuel System

(i) The engine shall be suitable for running on diesel oil as described below:
- Specific gravity at 60F distillation : 0.834
(P.P. 123/40)
- IBM : 219 C
- 10% : 250 C
- 50% : 276 C
- 90% : 314 C
- F.E.P. : 342 C
- Flash Point PME : 189 C
- Sulphur : 1.1%
- Calorific value BTU/lb. gross

carbon residue. : 19750
- 0.01/wt diesel index : 62
- Viscosity redwood seconds at 100F : 34
(ii) Daily Fuel Tank:
 Fuel supply to the engine shall be maintained by a separate day tank
located in the room. Daily fuel tank shall be sufficient capacity for
continuous run of 8 hours at full load, unless otherwise specified in the
Project Documentation. The daily service tank shall be manufactured
from mild steel to a rectangular shape in accordance with BS 799 and
shall be complete with the following minimum equipment and facilities:-
14
 Inspection cover
 vent/breather pipe
20
 filler pipe connection
 overflow connection
s
rd
 drain valve and sump drain
 emergency dump valve operated by the fire alarm system and by a fusible
da
link mounted over the diesel engine

an
dial type contents gauge calibrated in gallons and litres
 level switches to control fuel transfer pump
St
 level switches to operate high and low fuel level alarm circuits in the
diesel alternator set control panel
n
 lifting lugs.
io
 the Contractor shall provide and install an external dump sump of

ct
sufficient capacity to contain the contents of a full day tank and all
pipework necessary to carry the dumped fuel quickly by gravity, to a safe
tru
location in the event of a fire being detected in the generator house. The
sump shall be constructed to contain the fuel without leakage to the
surrounding ground and shall be provided with a lockable cover. Provision
s
to allow emptying of the sump by portable pump shall be provided.

on
(iii) Main Fuel Storage Tank:

C
 The Contractor shall supply and install a cylindrical diesel oil storage tank
ar
with a capacity to operate the associated diesel generator set

continuously on full load for a minimum of 7 days, unless otherwise
at
specified in the Project Documentation.

 the tank shall be welded mild steel construction suitably protected from
Q
corrosion in accordance with BS. 2594 and shall be installed in the

location indicated on the drawings.
 The storage tank shall be complete with pipes, fittings, feed lines,
vents.etc. The tank shall be of the approved type located outside the
diesel engine room. The tank shall be provided with 600 mm inspection
manhole with cover, 50 mm filling pipe with cooped filling terminal, 50 mm
air vent pipe with screen outlets, isolating valve, valved drain etc.
 Electronic fuel indicator with an audio/visual alarm shall be provided for
main fuel storage tank
 Also the storage tank and its accessories must comply with the Qatar.Civil
Defence Regulations for generator installations.
(iv) Duplex Diesel Oil Pumping Set:

 Provide packaged type duplex, self priming, fuel oil pumping and straining
set with a capacity of four times the total fuel consumption of engine at full
load for each individual Diesel Generator Set. Pump sets shall be factory
assembled, piped, wired and tested. Pumps shall be activated by a
switch in the day tank automatically. All pumps installed in the D/G room
shall be flame-proof and fire-resistant as per NFPA Regulations
 Piping shall be complete to suction, discharge and return line
connections. Provide gate valves and unions arranged to permit removal
of either pump while the system is in operation. Install check valves and
relief valves on pump outlet and gate valves prior to pressure gauges
 Suction strainer shall be flanged connection, duplex type, one-piece,
14
cast-iron body, ASTM A48 Class 30, with 1.2 mm perforation brass
baskets
20
 Oil pump set shall be factory assembled on a structural steel channel
beam base to include pumps, motors, flexible couplings and guards.
Pump set shall be suitable for diesel oil
s
 Suitable manually operated pump shall be provided.

rd
The installation of Diesel transfer pump set shall be subject of the
Engineer’s approval. There shall not be any possibility of flooding of the
da
diesel transfer pumps.
(v) Tank Gauges:

an
 Provide as shown on the Drawings. Each gauge is to be provided with an
St
aluminium case and calibrated to indicate level of fuel in the tank.
Mounted on gauges shall also be a high/low level alarm switch. The
switches and gauges shall be designed for operation from a 24 Volt DC,
n
loop powered system. Locate indicating gauges as shown on the

io
Drawings or required

ct
Tank fittings and pressure fittings shall be made of solid bar stock to
prevent leak possibilities.
tru
(vi) Diesel Oil Piping:

s
 Provide all diesel oil piping from storage tank to day tank fill lines, water
on
tight fill boxes, vents, vent caps, tank foot valves, and accessories
 Provide swing check valves and gate valves at pump inlets. Provide
C
approved anti-siphon valves at high points of suction lines. Provide

whatever additional valves that may be required by local regulations
ar
 All piping shall be provided with ground joint unions at piece of apparatus
at
to facilitate connecting and disconnecting

 All piping, unless otherwise specified, shall be schedule 40 standard
Q
weight black wrought iron pipe

 Steel vent pipelines shall run from the fuel oil storage tanks, carried to the
proper height within building construction and terminating with vent
fittings. Fittings shall be "Bronze Ventilating Brick" with thickness of 20
mesh bronze wire gauge in front of louvered opening.
(e) Lubricating System
(i) The lubricating oil system shall be forced fed type. The details of the system
shall be included in the offer. The shaft bearing lubricating shall be directly
fed from the lubricating oil pump and not through the main bearings
(ii) The lubricating oil shall be of a type readily available internationally
(iii) The lubrication system shall be positive displacement type. By-pass

arrangement should be provided in case of filter clogging
(iv) A heat-exchanger shall be provided for cooling the lubricating oil and this
shall be of long-life type i.e. the system shall not require constant cleaning or
other maintenance work. A valve for taking oil sample shall be provided.
The coolant for the above shall be jacket water of the engine. That is, the
cooling system of the engine and the lube-oil heat-exchanger cooling system
shall work in parallel or in series. If the lube-oil pressure reaches low value,
the engine shall be shut down automatically and also immediately should
give audible alarm together with visual indication. The lube-oil system shall
be provided with means to monitor pressure at important points at the
engine-monitor panel
14
(v) a large capacity oil sump shall be provided and incorporated in the
construction of the bed plate
20
(vi) the system of lubrication shall ensure that adequate oil is pumped to all
rotating parts
s
(vii) The system shall incorporate a level dipstick, filler cap and tube and
rd
crankcase breather pipe or outlet
da
(viii) the capacity of the lubricating oil system shall be sufficient to enable the
engine to run continuously for 12 hours at any load without replenishment.
an
(ix) Suitable manual-pumping arrangement for easy draining of the whole
quantity of lube-oil into a drum shall be provided.
St
(f) Exhaust System:
(i) Exhaust pipes shall be of Schedule 40 black steel and of adequate size to
n
ensure that back pressure does not exceed the value specified by the
manufacturer
io
(ii) The exhaust pipe shall be connected through airtight flexible coupling to the
ct
engine
tru
(iii) Exhaust pipes shall be adequately lagged with 75 mm thick (minimum) rock
wool covered with aluminium sheaths of minimum thickness 1.5 mm so that to
0
take care of exhaust gas temperature in pipes exceeding 500 C. When
s
exhaust pipes pass through walls or roof a suitable weatherproof sleeve or

on
thimble shall be provided to isolate exhaust pipe from the building. A

silencer of heavy duty residential type shall be provided in the exhaust
C
system and it shall also be lagged. The operation of casting the sleeves in
the concrete, if required, will be carried out by a civil contractor
ar
(iv) Exhaust pipes and silencers shall be supported from the ceiling by special
vibration isolating hangers and the pipe shall be slanted away from the
at
engine and a condensate trap fitted at the lowest points. Approved rain caps
shall be installed at the discharge end of the exhaust pipes on the roof.
Q
(v) Suitable flexible expansion joints shall be provided along the pipe run to take
care of expansion requirements
(vi) the completed exhaust system shall be capable of limiting the noise level at
the external outlet to 65 dB (A) at three metres from the end of the exhaust
pipe
(vii) suitable guards shall be provided with the exhaust pipe to prevent small
animals/reptiles from entering.
(g) Filters: Cleanable/replaceable elements should be provided.
(i) Fuel Oil System
The system shall have the following filters fitted before the fuel injection pumps:
 A primary fuel filter of ample capacity to prevent all particles of 10 microns

size or smaller.
 A secondary filter to prevent all particles down to 3 microns size or
smaller.
(ii) Lubricating Oil System
This system should have full flow filters of sufficient capacity
 Tenderers shall give full particulars of the filters used. It shall be
mentioned in if filter elements are cleanable for replaceable, in which case,
the working hours after which the element and the Lubricating oil is to be
replaced should be stated.
14
(iii) Intake and Exhaust System
Air is inducted to the engine manifold through
20
 Precleaner
 Large capacity air cleaner
s
rd
 Both filters are required due to severity of dust storms and dust
suspensions in the air
da
 The engine exhaust line shall be fitted with flexible fitting efficient silencer
to give efficient silencing with minimum back pressure and terminated
an
outside the engine room.
(h) Ventilation:
St
(i) The following ventilation works are required for the diesel engine generator
room.
n
io
 Aluminium inlet louvres with washable metal filters shall be provided for
ct
outside air intake into the engine room. Filters shall be sized to perform
their duty with a face velocity not more than 1 metre per second when the
tru
engine is running. Filters shall be installed in an appropriate arrangement

on the generator room walls. The total filter area shall consider air for
engine intakes and radiator cooling requirements. Filters with handles and
s
easily operated retaining latches shall be provided.

on
 The radiator shall be provided with a motorised louvre, interlocked with

the generator, so that the generator will shut down in the event of the
C
louvre not opening on start up. The louvre shall be capable of being
manually opened in the event of drive motor failure. Gravity louvres shall
ar
not be allowed for the radiator exhaust.

at
(i) Governing System:

Q
(i) the engine shall run steadily at any load within its rating at its rated speed,
and the changes in speed due to change in load shall comply with BS
5514/77 for Class A1 or with ISO 3067
(ii) the governor should be of the electronic type to comply with BS 5514/77
Class A1.
(j) Coupling and Common Bed:

(i) the engine and the alternator shall be suitably coupled directly without
interposing gear arrangement
(ii) the common bed shall be provided with spring type anti-vibration mountings
devices for fixing to the floor
(iii) the engine vibration shall be the minimum possible and shall comply with
the relevant BS. The vibratory force induced as the engine passed through
resonance revolutions during starting and stopping period shall not cause any
damage to the whole system
(k) Engine Control Panel: The engine-generator control panel shall be of rigid
and robust construction and rust-proof and shall be of the electronic modular
type utilising environmentally sealed, solid state, micro-processor based
modules for engine control and AC metering. The panel shall be capable of
operating under the operating temperature range of 0 degrees to + 70
degrees Celsius. Metering accuracy shall be 0.5% true RMS. The electronic
control system shall employ solid-state transducers for constant monitoring of
14
oil pressure and coolant temperature through a Single Sire Serial Data Link.
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation, the control panel shall
20
provide the following features:
(i) automatic start/stop engine control with programmable safety shutdowns and
associated flashing LED indicators for low oil pressure, high coolant
s
temperature, overspeed overcrank and emergency stop
rd
(ii) adjustable 1 to 60 second cycle cranking with rest periods
da
(iii) cool-down timer, adjustable between 0 and 30 sec.
(iv) LCD digital readout for:
an
 engine oil pressure (N/mg)
St
 lubricant oil pressure gauge (N/mg)

0
cooling temperature ( C)
n

0
exhaust gas temperature gauge ( C)
io
 exhaust turbo-blower pressure gauge (N/mg)

ct
 engine RPM
tru
 system DC Volts
 engine run hours
s
on
 eight system diagnostic codes

 generator AC Volts
C
 generator AC Amps
ar
 Generator frequency
at
The system diagnostic codes shall be designed to enhance the system protection and
to allow for trouble shooting by untrained personnel.
Q
These signals shall be:
-loss of engine speed

-invalid engine control switch
-internal circuit fault
-loss of coolant temperature
-loss of data sending unit
-unscheduled engine shutdown
-invalid programming switch position
-loss of failure of programme setting
These panels shall be provided with the following control switches:

-engine control switch
-ammeter -voltmeter phase selector

-emergency stop
-indicator/display test switch
-voltage adjust potentiometer
4 Alternator and Exciter
(a) the alternator shall be able to withstand the stresses caused by the sudden
application of the loads
(i) Type : Self excited, self ventilated, air cooled, splash-
proof, synchronous alternator
(ii) Output : As per Project Documentation, at Qatar Climatic
14
Condition
(iii) Voltage : 415V(Or as indicated in Project documents)
20
(iv) Frequency : 50 Hz
(v) No. of poles : 4
s
rd
(vi) No. of phases : 3, (ungraded neutral to be brought out)
(vii) Power factor : 80% lagging
da
(viii) Commercial efficiency not less than 90 % (including excitation and field losses)
an
(ix) Voltage regulation : Automatic and static.
St
(b) Class F insulation shall be provided for the alternator and exciter windings with the
temperature rise as Class B and de-rated for the ambient conditions.
n
(c) the alternator shall be suitable for continuous running duty type S1, BS 2613 (latest
edition)
io
(d) the alternator unit shall be capable of giving 110% of nominal rated output for one
ct
hour under site conditions. The rotor shall be capable of withstanding an over-speed
test of 15% for 5 minutes
tru
(e) distortion of no-load voltage wave form at alternator terminals shall be within 5 %
s
from the sinusoidal wave form

on
(f) voltage adjustable range of the output voltage by adjusting the exciter shall be not
less than 3 % of rated voltage at rated load and not less than ± 5 % of rated voltage
C
under no-load conditions. This adjustment shall be able to be performed from panel
(g) mounted handle or knob
ar
(h) the voltage of the alternator shall be automatically controlled by electronic static
at
circuits
(i) the alternator shall not be switched on the load until terminal voltage has reached at
Q
least 90 % of the nominal value. It is essential that the voltage regulation equipment
shall have sufficient fast response time so that the alternator is ready to accept load
in the shortest possible time
(j) the voltage regulator shall be designed to maintain the alternator terminal voltage
constant within ± 1 % of the nominal value from no load to full load within normal
variations of engine speed with change in load
(k) the exciter shall be brushless, self excited, rotor mounted type. The rectifying
elements shall be silicon. The silicon diodes of the three phase rectified bridge
assembly shall be protected against surges and overloads such that the generator will
continue to run with a diode failure. Diodes shall have heat sinks suitable for the
ambient conditions described. Means shall be provided to indicate exciter diode
failure on the remote control panel
(l) the unit shall be suitably protected so that when there is a sudden variation of load,
the sudden increase of field current in the rotor shall be curtailed and thus the speed
build up of the engine and the voltage build up of generator shall vary
proportionately
(m) alternator protection. The alternator shall be provided with protection against over
speed, over voltage, over current, short circuit, reverse power, single phasing earth
fault and any other found necessary. The neutral points of alternators shall be solid
by connecting to earth
(n) terminals with cable end boxes shall be provided respectively for the alternator and
exciter
(o) the cooling air for alternator and exciter shall be drawn through openings at the non-
14
drive end and exhausted sideways at the driving end
(p) the alternator shall be fitted with anti-condensation heater to keep the winding in
20
good, dry and safe condition. The anti-condensation heater shall be automatically cut-
off when the machine is running. Necessary on-off switches shall be provided on the
control panel and the operation status of the heater shall be indicated
s
rd
(q) temperature Rise: Alternator components shall be sound electrically and
mechanically in continuous operation lasting over 24 hours at the rated output
da
(r) insulation Resistance: Insulation resistance of the machine at strategic points shall
be provided along with the submission an
(s) dielectric Strength: The Dielectric strength, the voltage of testing and test procedure
at various points of the machine shall be submitted with the shop drawings
St
(t) radio and television interference suppression devices shall be provided in accordance
with the requirements of BS. 800. Components used for suppression shall be to BS
n
613
io
(u) vibration at the fixed components of the alternator under excited no-load
operation shall be as per relevant BS.
ct
(v) terminal symbols for the alternator shall be in accordance with BS

tru
requirements
(w) panel Wiring:
s
on
(i) all wiring of battery charger, exciter and control panel shall be P.V.C tropical
grade of adequate current carrying capacity to prevent over-heating under
worst climatic conditions
C
(ii) all wiring shall conform to the relevant BS and at least 50 % derated with
2
ar
minimum size of 2.5 mm or its equivalent.

(x) terminal Board
at
(i) terminal boards shall have pairs of terminals for Incoming and Outgoing
Q
wires and not more than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal
(ii) insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent connectors. Labels for
wiring designation marks shall be provided on the fixed portion of the
terminal boards as well as wires. No live metal shall be exposed at the back
of the terminal boards
(iii) terminal boards having pressure type terminal lusts or equivalent shall be
used so that no terminal clamp is necessary. 10 % spare terminals shall be
provided for each terminal board assembly.
5 Guards
(a) Suitable guards with brackets and securing arrangements of substantial construction
shall protect all exposed rotating or moving parts. All guards shall be mechanically
fixed to the generator set. Special attention shall be given to guarding the flywheel-
coupling and the radiator fan drive.
17.2.2 Control Panel
1 Cabinet
(a) heavy gauge, 2.5 mm thick, sheet steel construction, totally enclosed, dust and water
protected and vermin proof to IP 55
14
(b) a hinged, lockable door shall give access to control and instruments
20
(c) "live" parts shall be secured to prevent inadvertent contact with them
(d) controls for diesel engine, alternator, exciter, meters and alarm device shall be
positioned to give ample space for removing and installing components.
s
rd
2 Control Panel Equipment and Instrumentation
da
(a) control panel shall include: (unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation)
(i) 3 pole air circuit breaker with over-current, short circuit and earth fault
an
protection as specified in this specification. (unless part of a main
switchboard, as indicated on the drawings)
St
(ii) busbar system as specified in this specification (unless part of a main
switchboard, as indicated on the drawings)
n
(iii) voltmeter (0-500V) with selector switch to read phase to phase and phase to
neutral voltages
io
(iv) ammeters of suitable range 3 Nos.

ct
(v) frequency meter of range 45 - 55 Hz

tru
(vi) duty selector switch OFF/TEST/MANUAL/AUTO key operated

(vii) solid state voltage and frequency sensing relays
s
on
(viii) microprocessor control unit incorporating, but not limited to the following:
 30 sec engine warm-up with override
C
 engine minimum run time of 10 minutes

ar
 engine cool down time of 10 minutes

 return to mains time delay of 30 sec.
at
 80% stand-by voltage setting before load transfer

Q
 80% stand-by frequency setting before load transfer

 auto exerciser of seven days from initial command that allows operation
 with or without load transfer
 controls for remote operation and alarm signalling to remote SCADA/PLC
(ix) current transformer for measuring and protection devices
(x) watt meter for unbalanced phases
(xi) voltage trimmer
(xii) visual and audible alarm for engine starting, engine running overspeed, high
water temperature, low oil pressure, failure to start, engine stalling or shut down,
low fuel level in tanks, overvoltage and alternator overload.
(xiii) indicator lamps for supply available, battery charger and cooling water
heater
(xiv) manual start, stop, emergency OFF and lamp test push-buttons
(xv) manual and automatic service push-buttons
(xvi) control switch for alternator circuit breaker, ON and OFF
(xvii) mimic diagram with moving coil indicator for position of air circuit breaker
14
(xviii) battery charger, automatic type, nominal current 10 Amps. for charging
24 volts nickel cadmium starter battery and all required instruments
20
(xix) all other accessories, fuses, terminal boards, small wiring, etc.
17.2.3 Automatic Transfer Switch (A.T.S.)
s
rd
1 he A.T.S. shall consist of 4 pole, 3 phase, break before make except for the neutral, ted as
shown on the Drawings in accordance with QGEWC regulations
da
2 with the A.T.S. provide manual change-over switches to by-pass the A.T.S. in case of
an
emergency, maintenance or repair
3 the arrangement, wiring and components shall satisfy the requirements of the Diesel
St
generator Manufacturer. His written approval shall be submitted
4 control voltage of A.T.S. shall be normally fed from the main supply, in case of failure
n
of the main supply it shall be fed automatically from the emergency supply.
io
ct
5 in addition to transfer switches the A.T.S. arrangement shall be equipped with the
following:
tru
(a) a selector switch to control the operation of A.T.S. on normal, emergency,

automatic and OFF
s
(b) adjustable - 3 phase voltage sensing relays sense failure in a phase/phases

on
and voltage drop below 70 % of the normal voltage (pick-up and drop-out
voltages and adjustable within the range 70 - 100 % of the normal voltage)
C
(c) visual Mechanical Indicator for transfer switch position

ar
(d) indicator lamps to show transfer switch position normal, emergency and OFF.
at
(e) an adjustable time delay relay of 1 - 3 seconds for starting signal to the
Generator set after cutting of main supply
Q
(f) an adjustable time delay relay of 0 - 3 minutes which allows A.T.S. from
Normal to Emergency after the voltage build up relay of the generator has
sensed 90 % rated voltage when frequency within 90 % rated of rated
frequency
(g) an adjustable time delay relay of 1 - 10 minutes to allow A.T.S. from
Emergency to Normal
(h) an adjustable time delay relay of 0.5 - 5 seconds to prevent instantaneous
transition from EMERGENCY to NORMAL i.e. the delay allows time sufficient
For the residual motor voltage to decay to a safe switching level.
17.2.4 System Operation and Performance
1 The normal mode of system operation shall provide for unattended automatic transfer of load
for the emergency power system. Emergency power shall be supplied to the system
emergency loads within 10 seconds after interruption of the normal service. Upon receiving a
signal from the ATS indicating a failure or normal power from transformer, the system control
unit will signal engine generator to start. Generator circuit breakers are open at this time and
the emergency busbar is dead. The generating set to reach approximately 90% of rated
frequency and voltage signals to start sensor. The sensor then inhibits the operation of
sensors and initiates a closing signal to circuit breaker, connecting this generating set to the
emergency busbar. The priority control then initiates operation of the designated transfer
switch, applying load up to the total kW rating of the generating set.
14
2 If the generating set fails to start after cranking for the suitable cranking period, it shall be
locked off the busbar and the overcrank light on its switchboard shall light and the alarm
20
sound. The control prevents critical transfer switch from operating. The generating set may
receive troubleshooting signals after placing its engine control function switch in the "OFF"
position. When the generating set is operational, it may again be placed into automatic
s
operation by returning its function switch to the "remote" position.
rd
3 If a generating set stalls and shuts down during normal operation, its respective switchboard
da
circuit breaker shall open, removing it from the busbar. The appropriate failure light operates
and the alarm sounds. The load shedding contacts in the control close, tripping a breaker in
an
the load circuits, reducing system load to the rating of the remaining available generating
capacity. After the generating set is made operable, it can be automatically reconnected to
the busbar by resetting the load shed switch and engine control switch.
St
4 After normal power has been restored and the time delay on stop has expired, it shall be
n
possible to manually shut down the generator and restore the mains power.
io
5 Under circumstance or condition operation of an emergency stop push button shall

ct
immediately shut down the engine.

tru
17.2.5 Manual Operation

s
1 The manual operation of the Diesel Generator Set shall have the following features:
on
(a) the emergency power system shall have the capacity of being manually operated.
The generator may be started by engine control switch located on the engine control
C
unit. Once started and stable, the generator may be manually connected to the
emergency busbar through generator circuit breaker
ar
(b) the generator control unit shall be equipped with a generator breaker control switch,
engine speed adjusting potentiometer and a generator voltage adjust thermostat and
at
facilitate.
Q
17.2.6 System Responsibility
1 The generating set, switchboard and automatic transfer switches shall be interconnected
according to building load requirements and to manufacturer's recommendations, to prevent
the emergency generating system from stalling or faltering due to momentary or temporary
overloads beyond system rating, from distribution faults, motor starting loads.
17.2.7 Installation
1 Product Delivery, Storage Handling:
(a) lift all generator equipment using eyes, yokes and skids provided by the manufacturer
(b) do not store equipment assemblies exposed to weather
(c) physically protected all generator equipment against damage from work of other
trades
(d) cover all generator equipment with suitable material to avoid damage to finish.
(e) Contractor shall submit the calculation to prove the adequacy of capacity of the crane
he intends to use for installation of the D-G set
2 Installation:
(a) the engine and generator shall be properly aligned and mounted on a common steel
base through resilient mountings to prevent vibrations. The whole set shall be fixed
on the concrete slabs through suitable number of adjustable spring type vibration
isolators. Foundation and other builder's work shall be as recommended by the
14
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer
(b) except as may be described in this Section or shown on the drawings carry out
20
installation strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
3 Control Boards:
s
rd
(a) run all outgoing cables from the generator to the control boards in the floor trench as
indicated on the Project Drawings.
da
4 Record Print: an
(a) fix record print of each generator set, framed behind non-glare plexiglass, on a wall
near the generator control room.
St
17.2.8 Paint Work

n
1 Paint work of each set shall be of the highest quality to withstand the worst weather
conditions specified. All steel works such as tanks, pipes, frames, louvers, ladders, platform,
io
etc. shall be given two undercoats of anti-rust paint and two enamel finishing.
ct
2 The diesel generator set, day tank internal metalworks and control panel shall be finished to
tru
BS 4800, shade 14E53.
17.2.9 Site Quality Control

s
on
1 Final Testing:
C
(a) testing shall be carried out at full load after completion of installation by the Engine
manufacturer's qualified representative in the presence of the Engineer
ar
(b) if the above cannot be done then testing shall be done at the manufacturer/supplier's
premises at full load in the presence of the Engineer. All arrangements and costs
at
incurred by such a test shall be responsibility of the sub-contractor.

Q
17.2.10 Commissioning
1 Simulated Power Failure Test:
(a) engine-generator shall be made ready for automatic operation and started by means
of the test transfer switch on the automatic transfer switch. Unit shall run for the
duration of all time delays and then automatically shut-down. This test shall be made
with unit operating, and twice with unit simulated for a starting failure.
2 Testing of the Set:
(a) Engine:
(i) the engine shall be tested at site before and after erection to BS 649 and
amendments or equivalent including items which are said to be subject to
mutual agreement. The test shall include inspection, after testing the
following parts
(ii) subsequent running test of eight hours shall be carried out of the set
(iii) the engine shall be subjected to vigorous performance tests at site to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the main items shall include:
 Output characteristics
 Temperature rise
 Checking of valve clearance, fuel pump setting, governor setting, pipeline
connections, exhaust piping and flexible connections
14
 Checking the base and set are level in all directions, checking alignment
of engine and generator and vibration isolators location and proper
20
installation
 Checking of proper operation of engine safety devices
s
 Checking of fuel pipelines, fuel pumps, tank level gauges and level control
rd
switches operation.
(b) Alternator and Exciter:
da
(i) the alternator and exciter shall be tested to BS 5000, P.99 amendments
thereof
an
(ii) tests at site before erection and after erection prior to handing over shall be
carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The main items of tests
St
deemed necessary by the Engineer shall be carried out at the expense of the
Contractor. The performance test shall be for 24 hours under the worst
n
climatic conditions prevailing in Qatar

io
(iii) the Contractor shall be fully responsible to provide all the necessary facilities
for the test at his own expense.
ct
17.2.11 Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel

tru
1 The Contractor shall train a number of persons who will be selected by the Engineer for the
s
operation and maintenance of all the works within the Project before these works are handed
on
over to the Engineer.
2 The training has to be carried out by qualified staff of the Contractor for each specified
C
service and shall be provided for a one month period following the certificate of completion.
ar
at
Q
17.2.12 Reference Data Sheet
1 This Form or similar is to be completed by the Electrical sub-contractor as Well as D/G sub-
contractor and to be submitted for approval to the Engineer unless otherwise Specified.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14
1. Name and Address of
D/G sub-contractor
20
2. Detail of work in hand
now with proposed
D/G sub-contractor
s
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
rd
Name of Government Amount of D/G
Project Installation Works
da
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
an
b.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
St
c.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
d.
n
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
io
e.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ct
We confirm that the Statements given above are true, to the best of our knowledge and it
tru
is known to us that Engineer reserves the right to refuse to award sub-contract to us if

the above Statements are found to be incorrect.
s
on
Name of Electrical Contractor Name of D/G sub-contractor

C
Signature Signature
ar
at
Position in company of Position in company of

person signing person signing
Q
END OF PART
Part 18: Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems
18 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ..................................... 2
18.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

18.1.1 Scope 2
18.1.3 References 2
18.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
18.2.1 System 3
14
18.2.2 Rectifier/Charger 4
18.2.3 Battery 4
20
18.2.4 Static Switch 4
18.2.5 Monitoring and Control 5
s
18.2.6 Test Procedures 5
rd
18.2.7 Environment 6
18.2.8 Protective Devices, Controls and Monitors 6
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
18 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

18.1 GENERAL
18.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for uninterruptible power supply systems.

This Section
14
Part 2 FBA
20
Part 6 Cables and small wiring
Part 7 Conduits
Part 8 Trunking
s
Part 9 Cable trays
rd
Part 10 Accessories and General Power
da
18.1.2 Description
1 A single UPS System shall be provided for the Main Control Room (MCR) Data
an
Communication system (DCS), and peripheral equipment, essential field instruments and
essential equipment subject of Engineer approval
St
18.1.3 References
n
1 The following Standards are referred to in this Part:

io
IEC 157 ......................Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear

ct
IEC 158 ......................Low Voltage Control gear

tru
18.1.4 Submissions
s
1 Submit in accordance with Part 1

on
2 Shop Drawings
C
(a) submit dimensional drawings of the UPS, including sections and

elevations, showing the following:
ar
(i) sizes and positions of components

at
(ii) positions and method of fixing cable and boxes

Q
(iii) location of terminal boards

(iv) Internal wiring diagram
(v) Power and control diagrams
(vi) External connection drawing
(vii) Component parts lists
(viii) Other pertinent data.
(ix) Spare parts list
3 Project Data
(a) Submit:
(i) full specifications of the enclosure and the components of the equipment with
relevant sheets of manufacturer’s catalogues
(ii) confirmation that the equipment complies with the relevant specifications.
(iii) Detailed UPS and battery and rectifier size calculation
(iv) Previous approval in similar applications
18.2 PRODUCTS
18.2.1 System
14
1 The UPS system shall be comprise of single rectifier, battery charger and inverter modules:
20
(a) the UPS system shall be designed in such a way that any spare part, printed circuit
board, sub-assembly or component, can be replaced without any adjustment
(b) it shall supply clean, uninterrupted power to the critical loads and meet the
s
specifications
rd
(c) transformers shall be manufactured using vacuum pressure impregnated insulation.
da
2 The Contractor shall assess the electrical load capacity of the UPS taking into account
derating for non-linear loads and worst case ambient temperature conditions.
an
3 The UPS cabinet shall be designed such that all components are removable from the front
St
and cable entry by floor mounted gland plates.
4 UPS shall be designed and manufactured “standalone” for automatic operation and as such
n
circuit connections; protection devices and the like shall comply with BS EN 60950, BS EN
io
50091-3 and BS EN 60439.

ct
5 The UPS shall be designed to supply clean, uninterrupted power to the loads.
tru
6 The design of UPS shall take account of continuous load capacity, de-rating for non-linear
loads and ambient temperature conditions. The UPS shall be sized to supply all
s
instrumentation and control equipment including but not limited to control and computer room
on
hardware, mimic, annunciation, telecommunication systems and emergency lighting etc.

where applicable.
C
7 Main Features
ar
The UPS shall consist of fully controlled rectifier charger, battery bank, inverter, static bypass
and manual bypass capable to providing safe and secure power supply for a minimum period
at
of 8 hours. The UPS shall include the following features as minimum:-

Q
(a) optimal quality of the output voltage

(b) transient over-voltages and spike protection
(c) voltage variations and mains failures protection
(d) frequency variations protection
(e) true single phase regulation
(f) low noise
(g) low THD (Not to exceed BS G5/4 limits)
(h) PC connectivity for parametering as described under particular requirements.
(i) serial communication 100100 by employing industry standard modbus, fieldbus, NP
etc protocol as described under particular requirements.
18.2.2 Rectifier/Charger
1 The rectifier/charger shall be of solid-state type with fully controlled 6-pulse thyristor bridge
and anti-harmonic chokes. It shall have 10 sec walk-in ramp for input current, adjustable
battery current and voltage. It shall recharge a fully discharge battery in 24 hours. A boost
charge facility shall be provided. A normally open contact rated at 240 Vac, 2A, close on
boost charge, shall be provided for remote monitoring. Input voltage ratings are as follows:
(a) Mains 1 (input to rectifier/charger)

Voltage : 415 volts AC ± 10%
Wiring : 3-phase, 4 wire + Earth.
Frequency : 45 to 55 Hz.
14
(b) Mains 2 (input to static switch)
Voltage : 415 volts AC (± 15%)
20
Wiring : 3-phase, 4 wire + Earth.
Frequency : 50 Hz
(c) Synchronisation Range: ± 0.75 HZ
s
rd
18.2.3 Battery
da
1 Unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation, the batteries shall be of sealed
nickel cadmium maintenance free type and sized for the pre-selected time with the UPS
operating at rated load. The battery bank shall be sized to maintain full load for a period of 8
an
hours
St
2 The inverter shall be of transistorised PWM type, for the specified UPS rated power at 0.8 p.f.
Output rating shall be as follows:
n
Wiring : 3-phase, 4 wire and earth.

io
Voltage : 415/240 volts (± 1%), 50 Hz (± 0.25 Hz).

Transient Voltage Regulation : Voltage transients shall not exceed ± 5 % for a 100 %
ct
load step change and the return to steady state value

shall be in less than 20 milliseconds.
tru
Harmonic distortion : Less than 4% THD

Efficiency : For 100% load 92% & For 50% load 91%
:  65 dBA @ 1.5m
s
Audible noise
on
Output synchronised in amplitude, phase & frequency to mains 2 when mains 2 is within
tolerance limits. Phase difference between inverter output and mains 2 held below 3‫؛‬
(electrical) in such condition so that the maximum gap while transfer to UPS from Mains 2
C
and vice versa occurs shall be less than 167 micro seconds.
ar
3 Overload Capabilities:
at
(a) inverter shall sustain 125 % overload for at least 10 minutes and 150 % overloads for
1 minute. After delay, if overload persists, the load shall be transferred to bypass
Q
supply without break if Mains 2 voltage is within tolerance limits. The UPS shall check
the load and if the load is below overload threshold, inverter shall restart automatically
and load shall be transferred back to inverter. Facility to inhibit automatic re-transfer
shall be provided.
4 The automatic retransfer to the inverter shall be blocked if a transfer to the mains was
initiated six times within one minute or in case of non-synchronization of the inverter with the
mains.
18.2.4 Static Switch
1 The static switch shall have anti-parallel connected thyristor bank for instantaneous load
transfer between the inverter and the mains 2 supply.
2 Maintenance manual By Pass:
(a) Manual bypass switch system of full UPS shall be integrated into the UPS so that load
can be transferred to mains supply WITHOUT break for maintenance of UPS.
Procedure for transfer to maintenance bypass and back to UPS shall be controlled by
the bypass menu of the UPS, thus eliminating possibility of causing disturbance of load
by operator who is unaware of correct procedures.
18.2.5 Monitoring and Control
1 Monitors:
(a) the following status information shall be monitored by indicating lights on the front
14
panel of the UPS:
(i) rectifier-charger on
20
(ii) load on inverter
(iii) load on Mains 2 bypass
s
rd
(iv) alarm
(v) inverter shutdown imminent
da
(vi) boost charge an
(b) an audible alarm shall warn the user of faults or operating problems. The system shall
be equipped with an alarm off button. Metering values displayed on an alpha-numeric
display.
St
(c) The following measurements shall be available:

n
(i) inverter output voltage (L-L)

io
(ii) inverter output frequency

ct
(iii) inverter output currents

(iv) voltage across battery terminals
tru
(v) battery current (charge/discharge)

s
(vi) mains 1 (rectifier/charger) input voltages (L-L)

on
(vii) rectifier/charger input currents.

C
2 Remote Control And Monitoring:
(a) Remote transmission shall be provided for all controls, monitors and measurement
ar
indication on the UPS unit to the site PLC/SCADA.

at
18.2.6 Test Procedures

Q
1 For UPS larger than 75 KW the Contractor shall provide a Works Test Report. The
integrated functional test shall be conducted at manufacturer’s works to ensure satisfactorily
functioning of the equipment.
2 The Assembly shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until the works test sheets have been
duly approved and stamped by the Engineer and written permission is obtained for their
dispatch to site.
3 The UPS manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance Program. In
particular the main equipment manufacturing stages sanctioned by appropriate tests such as:
incoming components inspection, discrete sub-assembly tests and complete functional
checks on the final product. Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in leaving the factory.
Final inspection and calibration operations shall be documented in a report drawn up by the
supplier’s Quality Inspection department.
18.2.7 Environment
0 0
(a) Ambient temperature : 0 C to + 50 C
(b) Maximum relative humidity : 95 %
18.2.8 Protective Devices, Controls and Monitors
1 The UPS shall be built on modular basis.
2 Main Protections - The UPS shall include the following protections as minimum:-
(a) Input over voltage
14
(b) Load short circuit
(c) Over temperature
20
(d) Surge protection
(e) Noise protection
s
rd
(f) Battery deep discharge protection
da
3 Controls shall be micro processor based and the following main controls shall be possible:
(a) rectifier/charger on/off

an
(b) inverter on/off
(c) forced shutdown
St
(d) forced transfer upon forced shutdown of inverter when the bypass power supply
(mains 2) is outside tolerances
n
io
(e) self-test
ct
tru
END OF PART
s
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 19: Sound and Call Systems
19 SOUND AND CALL SYSTEMS ..................................................................... 2
19.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

19.1.1 Scope 2
19.1.4 Submittals 3
19.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
19.2.1 Public Address Systems 3
14
19.2.2 Farash Call Systems 7
19.2.3 Intercom Systems 7
20
19.2.4 Auto Class Change Over Systems 8
19.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 8
s
rd
19.3.1 Wiring and Wiring Facilities 9
da
19.3.3 Maintenance and Guarantees 9
19.3.4 Training 9
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
19 SOUND AND CALL SYSTEMS

19.1 GENERAL
19.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general requirements for sound and call systems, including
amplification and tone selection/control equipment, input stations, loudspeakers, power
connections, cables and terminations.
14
This Section
20
s
rd
Part 8 Trunking
Part 9 Cable Trays
da
Part 13 Telephone Installation
Part 14 Structured Cabling Systems an
Part 23 Testing
St
19.1.2 Reference Standards

n
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part, and shall be complied with:
io
BS 6840 Sound system equipment

BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations
ct
tru
ISO 9000 Quality management and assurance standards

s

on
1 Manufacturer‟s qualifications: the equipment and accessories to be furnished for the sound
C
and call systems shall be the products of one internationally reputed manufacturer regularly
engaged in producing such systems for a minimum of ten years. Manufacturers shall be
ar
certified to ISO 9000 or equivalent.

at
2 Installer‟s qualifications: Installations shall be executed by the manufacturer‟s personnel.

Installations may be executed under the supervision of the manufacturer‟s personnel, with
Q
the Engineer‟s approval, provided the installer has three years previous experience of such
installations and has completed three similar projects within Qatar.
3 Mixing of major components from different manufacturer, to make one system, shall not be
permitted. All components shall by supplied from a single source/manufacturer.
19.1.4 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall include a detailed list of all equipment and materials proposed
2 The Contractor shall include a complete set of catalogues, illustrations, diagrams and any
other descriptive literature sufficient to present complete information about systems for the
Engineer's approval.
3 The Contractor shall include in detail the maintenance programme of equipment and system
capacity to accept future expansions.
14
4 The Contractor shall include a detailed list of recommended spare parts required for 2 years.
20
19.2 PRODUCTS
19.2.1 Public Address Systems
s
rd
1 General
da
(a) the Contractor shall provide and install complete intercommunication systems with
hand-free operation, electronic centralised microprocessor controls and full
an
functionality as specified, to BS 6840 where applicable
(b) systems shall include central exchange controllers, disk stations, surface mounted wall
St
stations, privacy hand-sets, wall receptacles, cables, terminals and strips as
specified to provide a complete working system
n
(c) equipment shall be reliable, long life, maintenance free and have low power
consumption
io
(d) when specified for a large installation having multiple microphone stations, it shall be
ct
possible to automatically isolate remaining microphone input stations or other auxiliary

input terminals as soon as one is activated. Stations shall be activated by push button
tru
action.
(e) multiple channel input and zone selector modules shall permit flexible arrangements
s
for selecting the input channels on priority basis. Stations with higher priority shall
on
override announcements activated by others with lower priority order

(f) systems shall permit announcement on individual zones, any combination of zones
C
and simultaneous announcements on all zones

ar
(g) system layouts shall be according to the Project Drawings.
2 Amplifiers
at
(a) master module amplifiers shall incorporate a master volume control, a sliding
Q
control for both treble and bass, a built-in limiter plus and LED indicator and
headphone socket to permit input signal monitoring
(b) amplifiers shall incorporate a push button ON/OFF switch with indicator lamps to
define unit status
(c) amplifiers shall incorporate a power supply section, mains transformer, output
transformer and printed circuit boards to provide necessary amplification of
input signals. Amplifier outputs shall have voltage tappings of 100, 70 and 50 volts
(d) amplifiers shall be accommodated in racks (19" rack is preferred) with sliding
facilities.
(e) for multiple zones, one amplifier shall be assigned to each zone. Systems shall
include an additional amplifier to be used as common standby with switching facilities
(f) to connect the standby instead of the faulty amplifier

(g) technical performance
(i) Rated Output Power : refer to Project Documentation
(ii) Max. Power Consumption : refer to Project Documentation
(iii) Frequency Response : 60 Hz - 16 kHz
(iv) Distortion at 1 kHz : < 0.5% THD
o o
(v) Operating Temp. Range : 0 C to 45 C
(vi) Relative Humidity : 95%
14
3 Channel Input Modules: shall be programmed so that inter-channel priority forms can be
20
achieved via an interconnection block on main printed circuit boards as follows:
(a) mixing mode : all input channels shall have the same priority and signals may be
s
mixed together
rd
(b) serial/cascade priority mode : Channel 1 has priority over 2, 2 over 3, and so on
da
(c) first served priority mode : The first channel switched on shall block the input for other
channels. an
(d) technical performance
(i) Input Level : 500 mV - 8V max.
St
(ii) Frequency Response : 60 Hz - 16 kHz

(iii) Distortion : < 0.2 % THD
n
io
(iv) S/N : > 65 dB

ct
(v) Cross-talk Attenuation : > 60 dB

tru
(vi) Operating Temp. Range : 0 oC to 45 oC

(vii) Relative Humidity : 95 %
s
4 Active zone selectors: zone selectors shall have the capability of switching ON and OFF
on
loudspeakers in various zones by means of electronic built-in facilities. Switching shall be

based on pre-programmed cascaded order to permit selection of one of the following modes:
C
(a) manual operation : Loudspeakers shall be selected by means of push button

ar
switches. Each switch corresponds to one zone

at
(b) zone programming : in conjunction with input modules to provide the facilities
for connecting any of the zones with any of the input channels
Q
(c) remote control from microphone station : selection of any of the loudspeaker
zones shall be achieved by operating the appropriate switches on the
microphone control unit. It shall be possible by operating a switch in the
microphone control unit to access all the channels at the same time for
common announcements
5 When specified in the Project Documentation, facility for switching to alarm mode shall be
provided. When an alarm signal is initiated, all loudspeaker zones shall be automatically
switched and prepared to receive any common announcement. The alert/alarm signal Input
Units shall be coupled to amplifier units to perform the following functions:
(a) two tone alert signal : 550 Hz tone followed by 440 Hz tone
(b) alarm signal : continuous repetition of the alert signal
(c) time signal : 550 Hz tone

(d) priority : microphone input channel
(e) pre-set control of microphone : independent of master volume control.
Various modes of initiating attention signals shall be by pressing a switch on the unit front
panel, or remotely by the microphone „ON' switch on the microphone control unit attached to
the unit, or any other microphone stations.
6 Central Equipment Assemblies
(a) when specified, free standing racked shelf assemblies shall be provided suitable for
14
accommodating all amplifiers, input modules, zone selector modules and alarm units
(b) when specified, central equipment shall include AM/FM radio tuners and tape
20
playback set. Units shall be integrated and connected to systems through switching
and control units
(c) central equipment racks shall be rack type (19” preferred) accessible from back and
s
with removable side panels. Racks shall be provided with mounting facilities to
rd
permit sliding in and out of units with facilities to fix units to racks by
screws to the front side
da
7 Loud Speakers : Loud speakers shall comply with IEC 268, Parts 5 and 14
an
(a) wall speakers: these speakers shall be provided with a resonating board and an
aluminium grille for universal application for flush or surface-mounted enclosures. The
St
speaker shall be a high performance type and shall be provided with auto-transformer
with taps for 1/4, 1/2 and 1/1 output. The normal rated capacity shall be 4-5 W, if not
otherwise specified in the Project Documentation. A volume control shall be
n
incorporated. The sound pressure shall be approximately 100 dB

io
(b) ceiling speakers: these speakers shall be designed, including their accessories, for
recess installation in various suspended ceiling types. The grille shall be aluminium.
ct
The speaker shall be of the same type as wall speakers

tru
(c) sound column speakers : these shall be designed for interior installation or in
weatherproof design for exterior installation. The enclosure shall be of aluminium and
s
shall be for wall or pole mounting, with suitable accessories. They shall be provided
on
with adjustable cast aluminium fixing arms, which allow sound columns to be adjusted
through 20o vertically and 75o horizontally and shall include multiple loud speakers of
8 Ohms nominal impedance, symmetrically positioned within sound columns. An auto-
C
transformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 and 1/1 capacity shall be built in. The normal rated
capacity shall be 10, 20, 30 or 40 W as indicated in the Project Documentation. The
ar
Column boxes shall accommodate multiple speaker systems depending on capacity,

which may be as follows (preferably as per manufacturer‟s standard design):
at
(i) 10 W - 3 speakers
Q
(ii) 20 W - 4 speakers
(iii) 30 W - 6 speakers
(iv) 50 W - 8 speakers
(d) horn speakers : these speakers shall be designed weatherproof for exterior
installation. The enclosure shall be of aluminium, impact-resistant and coated with
weatherproof paints. They shall be provided with swivel brackets for fixing. An auto-
transformer with taps for 1/8, 1/4, 1/2 and 1/1 capacity shall be built in. The normal
rated capacity shall be 10, 20, 30 or 40 W as indicated in the Project Documentation
(e) the speaker systems may be any of the above or their combinations, according to
requirements in the Project Documentation.
(f) unless otherwise specified, the paint finishing shall be white when mounted on walls.
(g) technical performance

(i) Sound pressure level at 1 kHz Octave, 1 m, at 1 W in accordance with IEC
: refer to Project Documentation
(ii) Power handling capacity : refer to Project Documentation.
(iii) Frequency response : 60 Hz to 16 Hz
(iv) Input Voltage : 100/70 Volts as per driving amplifier.
(v) Environment conditions : 0 oC to 45 oC.
8 Microphone Stations
14
(a) microphone input stations shall consist of swan-necked microphones on table stands,
20
incorporating zone selector switches for remotely controlling loudspeaker zones. If
specified in the Project Documentation, adjustable height microphone, floor stands
with collapsible type boom shall be provided
s
(b) microphones shall be dynamic cardoid type or condenser type with balanced line
rd
level output and suitable for use with unscreened cable.
(c) table stands shall incorporate the following features :
da
(i) microphone switch and LED indicator
an
(ii) colour-coded switches for switching ON/OFF zones.
(iii) one `ALL CALL' switch for switching `ON' all loudspeaker zones for common
St
announcements.
(iv) LED indicators shall operate in parallel with indicators on corresponding
n
amplifier input channels. The Contractor shall submit details of the proposed
io
provisions to confirm the normal conditions of the system and the perfect
ct
selection of zones and input channels, before the operator executes the
feed message of feed in the required signal.
tru
(d) technical performance

s
(i) Frequency Range : 60 Hz - 16 kHz

on
(ii) Rated output Impedance : 200 Ohms

C
(iii) Sensitivity : 2 mV/Pa

(iv) Operating temp. Range : 10 oC to +45 oC
ar
(v) Relative humidity : 95%

at
(e) microphone input stations shall be complete with microphone accessories and 10m
Q
length microphone connections. Provisions shall be made for stations to avoid the
possibilities of feedback.
9 Cassette decks shall have a sequencer which will accept 2 music cassettes, with audio
sensing and auto reverse playback features, to provide truly continuous back-ground music.
Cassettes shall auto-eject on power-off or jammed tape.
(a) technical performance

(i) Frequency : 60 Hz to 16 kHz
(ii) Distortion at 1kHz : < 3 % THD
(iii) Signal to Noise Ratio : < 49 dB
(iv) Wow & Flutter : 0.35 % WRMS
(v) Tape Speed : 4.75 cm/sec.

(vi) Power Supply : 240 volts, 50 Hz
10 FM/AM Tuners shall be 6 channel radios with digital display and a provision of six pre-set
stations.
(a) technical performance

(i) Characteristics : FM/AM tuner section
(ii) Sensitivity : 3 mV for FM channel, 20 mV for AM channel
(iii) Normal Output : 100 mV at ± 100 mV at 50 % modulation
14
27.5 kHz deviations
20
(iv) Freq. Response : To European standard
(v) Distortion : Less than 1 % THD of 1 kHz @ 30 %
s
1 kHz @ nominal modulation output.
rd
19.2.2 Farash Call Systems
da
1 Farash call systems shall be provided and installed in the areas indicated on the Project
an
Drawings. Systems shall comprise call control panels with audible and visual indications
initiated by call push buttons located in the various areas indicated. Call control panels shall
St
have a resetting facility, for visual (sound ends when finger removed from button), after the
call is attended. Systems shall be wired with low voltage wiring independent of other standard
n
wiring systems.
io
2 Door strike: When specified and as per the Project Drawings, door strike system shall be
ct
provided to open, close and latch the entry doors by remote control push-buttons
tru
19.2.3 Intercom Systems

s
1 System Operation
on
(a) calls shall be placed from any master station to any other station in the system unless
specifically blocked. Calling parties shall touch-dial the appropriate digit numbers of
C
desired stations, at which time a „connection tone” shall be heard and an LED
illuminated at both stations to signify completion of connections. Voice
ar
communications may then begin. Connections may be cancelled by either party by

pressing a cancel button
at
(b) master stations shall be equipped with a privacy/open facility to permit any user
Q
to place his station in the “privacy” mode. When calling a station that is in “privacy”
mode, a unique “privacy tone” shall be heard at both stations for a pre-determined
time interval as pre-set at the central exchange
(c) upon completion of conversation and cancellation by either party, the “private” station
shall be restored to “privacy” without further control manipulation
(d) should calls be placed to stations already in use, the interrupted “busy tone”
shall be heard by the calling party
(e) slide-type volume controls to adjust incoming volumes shall be included on each desk
master station. Control settings shall be clearly visible. Stations shall contain
continuously adjustable volume controls.
2 Control Exchange Controllers

(a) central controllers shall provide all control, switching logic, signalling and operating
features listed throughout this specification
(b) circuitry and components shall be arranged on slide-in printed circuit boards of the
highest quality
(c) central controllers shall not require external devices to program system functions and
features
(d) central exchanges shall be equipped with the required number of subscriber boards
necessary to accommodate the quantity of stations required
(e) expansion to ultimate cabinet capacity shall require addition of the requiredquantity of
plug-in type subscriber boards. One plug-in board shall be required to increase
14
exchange capacity
(f) station wiring connections to central controllers shall be by means of screw terminals.
20
Soldering, wire wrap and pressure connectors shall not be used. Interwiring between
circuit board receptacles shall be by master printed circuit lines
(g) central controllers shall be powered by closely regulated power supplies at maximum
s
24 Volt. Power supply mains transformers shall be mounted within or adjacent to
rd
exchange cabinets.
da
3 Master Stations
(a) intercom stations shall be the master type capable of receiving and initiating calls
an
(b) intercom stations shall either be the desk-mounted type as used in commercial offices
St
or a wall-mounted industrial type in workshop and plant areas, as indicated on the
Project Drawings
(c) stations shall have handsets for confidential conversations. Lifting handsets shall
n
switch off microphones and loudspeakers to provide fully telephonic facilities

io
(d) master stations installed in workshop areas shall comprise of heavy duty waterproof
ct
units for use in dusty and/or damp environments.

tru
4 System cabling shall comprise individual twisted pair telephone cables connected to the
central controller from each of the stations.
s
on
19.2.4 Auto Class Change Over Systems
1 Auto-class change over systems for the automatic ringing of class change bells shall be
C
provided located at different places within school buildings as shown on the Project
Drawings. The system shall be microprocessor controlled and programmable.
ar
at
2 Systems shall include the following salient features:

Q
(a) 7 days a week programming

(b) override to silence the alarm on week ends i.e. Friday
(c) minimum time adjustable to 5 minutes
(d) over ride switch to operate the bells in the event of timer failure or wrong time
(e) (easy system to programme the timing throughout the week and also separate
selection through a two way switch for summer/winter schedules
(f) DC backup using nickel cadmium batteries for 24 hours spring reserve
(g) selector switch to select the operation mode in Manual/Auto/Off positions.
19.3 INSTALLATION
19.3.1 Wiring and Wiring Facilities
1 Wiring shall be executed to provide a complete and satisfactory functional system in all
respects.
2 Wiring shall be carried out using multi-core and twisted pair conductors as indicated on the
drawings. Wires/cables shall be enclosed in conduits and/or trunking. Vertical cable
distribution cabling shall be on cable ladders. Cabling, conducting and trunking shall be in
conformity with the relevant Specifications.
3 Cable terminations, components and junction boxes shall have identification tags, indicating
14
polarity and function in a consistent manner throughout the system so that it can be cross-
referenced with the as-built drawings and manufacturer's diagrams.
20
4 Signalling cables shall be electrically and physically separated and isolated from the mains
voltage cables. Microphone cables shall be separated from the loudspeaker cables in a
s
separate conduit.
rd
da
1 After the installations are completed, the Contractor shall conduct acceptance tests to
an
confirm the compliance of the systems with the Specifications. The Contractor shall present a
list of the acceptance test items to be performed for Engineer's approval.
St
2 The test instruments and personnel to conduct the test shall be provided by the Contractor.
n
19.3.3 Maintenance and Guarantees

io
ct
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the system maintenance and repair of any fault for a
period of 400 days starting from the provisional handing over. During this period the
tru
Contractor shall replace and/or repair any fault with all spare parts without any cost to the
Employer.
s
on
2 The Contractor shall guarantee the system for a period of 400 days. During this period the
Contractor shall clear any failure due to design problems or poor installation and
C
workmanship.
ar
19.3.4 Training
at
1 Training of personnel designated by the Engineer shall be carried out to enable to take over,
operation and maintenance of the sound and call systems in the shortest time.
Q
2 The Contractor shall submit a detailed training program which shall include theoretical and
practical training for 1 month for personnel to be deputed by the Employer, at the end of the
guarantee period, in addition to the Employer‟s personnel participation in the installation and
testing stages as specified earlier, and maintenance during the guarantee period of 400 days.
END OF PART
Part 02: MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA‟s)
2 MV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (FBA‟S) ................................................ 2
2.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 2

2.1.1 Scope 2
2.1.3 References 2
2.1.4 Submissions 3
2.2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................... 5
14
2.2.1 Cubicle Switchboards 5
2.2.2 Motor Control Centres 23
20
2.2.3 MCCB Panel Boards 27
2.2.4 Distribution Boards 28
s
2.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 29
rd
2.3.1 General 29
da
Earth Bonding 29
2.3.2 29
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
2 MV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (FBA’S)

2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This Part shall include all labour, materials and accessories for the complete performance of
all MV Cubicle Switchboards, Main Switchboards, Submain Switchboards, Motor Control
Centres, MCCB panel boards, distribution boards in accordance with the Specifications and
Drawings.
14
This Section
20
Part 4 Motor Starters
s
Part 5 VFD
rd
Part 7 Conduits
da
Part 8 Trunking
Part 9 Cable Trays
an
Part 16 Power factor correction capacitors
3 Factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear (MCCs) shall be suitable for
St
operation under the ambient and service conditions specified. They shall comply with all local
regulations and requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for making himself aware
n
of any special conditions which apply to the installation.

io
4 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all details relating to the construction
ct
and protection systems are fully compliant with the latest requirements of QGEWC and
construction shall not commence until QGEWC approval has been obtained. The Contractor
tru
shall provided all protection relays, interlocks and devices deemed necessary by QGEWC.
s

on
1 The work of this Part is integral with the whole of the Project Documentation and is not
C
2 Co-ordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this Part.
ar
2.1.3 References
at
1 The following standards or updated/amended/revised versions are referred to in this Section:

Q
BS 37 Pt. 1 ................Electricity meters general

BS 89, IEC 51 ............Direct acting indicating electrical measuring instruments
BS 142 .......................Electrical protective relays
BS 4794, Pt. 2 IEC 337-2 Control devices
BS 5685, IEC 521 ......Electric meters
BS 6231 .....................PVC insulated cables for switchgear
BS 7626, IEC 185 ......Current transformers
BS EN 60073..............Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
identification coding principles for indicators and actuators
BS 88, BS EN 60127 .Cartridge fuses
BS 159, IEC 61439.....Busbar and connection

IEC 61439, IEC 439 ..Factory built assemblies LV
BS EN 60947-4 IEC-1 & 1A Contactors
BS EN 60529, IEC 529 Degree of protection of enclosures
BS EN 60947-3, IEC 408 Air break switches
BS 4752, IEC 157-1, IEC 61439 Switchgear and control-gear
BS 5472, IEC 61439 ..Low voltage switchgear and control-gear
BS 7354, IEC 61439, .BS EN 6094 Electrical power switchgear
14
2.1.4 Submissions
1 Shop Drawings: All submittals in accordance with Part 1:
20
(a) submit dimensional drawings of all the switchgears, switchboards and motor
control
s
centres, including sections and elevations, showing the following:
rd
(i) arrangement of all components, instruments, indication and
dimensions of all
da
busbars
(ii) positions and method of fixing cables and boxes
an
(iii) location of terminal blocks
St
(iv) single line diagram of the circuits showing the rating of all
components, the
type and size of the incoming and outgoing feeders
n
(v) schematic and elementary wiring diagrams, for each control unit,
io
showing
ct
numbered terminal points, numbered wires and numbered

interconnections to
tru
other equipment and remote devices

(vi) connection wiring diagrams, for each control unit, showing numbered
s
terminal
on
points, numbered wires and numbered interconnections to other

equipment
and remote devices
C
(vii) complete catalogue information for all components

ar
(viii) a complete list of parts, with prices, that would be necessary to

maintain and/or
at
modify the equipment

Q
(ix) Protection coordination studies for all types of MCC/MV panel

breakers.
(x) other relevant data.
2 Product Data:
(a) full specifications of the enclosures and the components of the switchgear,
switchboards and motor control centres, with relevant sheets of manufacturer‟s
catalogues
(b) type test certificates of all components fully type tested and whole assembled
MCCs from an internationally recognised testing authority or from independent
testing lab in accordance with IEC 61439 or updated/revised/amended version.
(c) confirmation that the switchgears, switchboards and motor control centres
comply
with the relevant specification as mentioned in this Section.
1 The switchgear manufacturer must have a previous record of satisfactory service in Qatar for
at least 3 years in similar applications.
2 All new and refurbished Motor Control Centres shall be subject to routine tests to detect
faults and workmanship in accordance with IEC 61439 or revised/updated version. Standard
assemblies and/or products used within the assembly shall also be subject to tests at the
14
manufacture‟s works who supplied the products. Routine tests shall include:
(a) the effectiveness of mechanical actuating elements, interlock, locks etc. shall be
20
checked. The conductors and cables shall be checked for proper laying and the
devices for proper mounting. A visual inspection is also necessary to ensure
that the prescribed degree of protection, creepage and clearances are
s
maintained.
rd
(b) all termination types and connections especially screwed connections shall be
checked for adequate contact and torques.
da
(c) factory built assemblies such as motor control centres for pumping stations and
treatment plants, unit mounted stand alone control panels etc. shall be
an
inspected thoroughly and tested at the manufacturer's works to verify the
electrical operation in accordance with the control philosophy by simulating the
St
site conditions.
(d) the manufacturer shall submit the process flow diagram together with cause and
n
effects for the assemblies involving complex control schemes and complicated
interlock, sequence controls, etc.
io
(e) the tests so conducted on the assembly at manufacturer's works shall be

ct
repeated as integrated tests on site with all field devices and interfaces present.
tru
(f) the manufacturer shall submit in advance, the testing procedure to the Engineer
for approval prior to conducting the tests.
s
(g) Motor Control Centres shall be subjected to dielectric tests as described in IEC
on
614391 and 2or latest /updated version of the standard.. All electrical
components of the assembly shall be connected for the test, excluding those
designed for lower test voltage and currents e.g. measuring instruments.
C
(h) anti-interference capacitors installed between the live and exposed conductive
ar
parts shall be capable of withstanding the test voltage without being

disconnected from the circuit.
at
(i) the protective measures with regard to protection against direct and indirect
contact shall be checked as per IEC 61439 or latest /updated version of the
Q
standard.
(j) Motor Control Centres shall be Totally Type Tested to IEC 61439-1 and 2
ASTA/KEMA type test certificate together with test report including reports/terms
under (k) shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(k) following is a list of verifications and tests to be performed on a Totally Type
Tested Assembly according to IEC 61439-1 A type test report shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
(i) Strength of material and parts 10.2 Not required as “Type test” but as
“Design and construction” rules on paragraph 7 or on subsidiary
standard
 Resistance to corrosion 10.2.2
 Properties of insulating materials 10.2.3
 Thermal stability 10.2.3.1
 Resistance of insulating materials to normal heat 10.2.3.2
 Resistance to abnormal heat and fire due to internal electric effects

10.2.3.3
 Resistance to ultra-violet (UV) radiation 10.2.4
14
 Lifting 10.2.5
 Mechanical impact 10.2.6
20
 Marking 10.2.7
s
(ii) Degree of protection of enclosures 10.3 8.2.7
rd
(iii) Clearances and creepage distances 10.4 8.2.5
da
(iv) Protection against electric shock and integrity of protective circuits
10.5-8.2.4 an
 Effective continuity between the exposed conductive parts of the
Assembly and the protective circuit 10.5.2
St
 Effectiveness of the Assembly for external faults 10.5.3
(v) Incorporation of switching devices and components 10.6 Not

n
required as “Type test” but as “Design and construction” rules on

io
paragraph 7 or on subsidiary standard

ct
(vi) Internal electrical circuits and connections 10.7

tru
(vii) Terminals for external conductors 10.8

(viii) Dielectric properties 10.9
s
 Power -frequency withstand voltage 10.9.2 8.2.2

on
 Impulse withstand voltage 10.9.3

C
(ix) Temperature rise limits 10.10 8.2.1

ar
(x) Short-circuit withstand strength 10.11 8.2.3

(xi) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 10.12 + Annex J 8.2.8 + Annex
at
H
Q
(xii) Mechanical operation 10.13 8.2.6
2.2 PRODUCTS
2.2.1 Cubicle Switchboards
1 General:
(a) M.V. cubicle switchboards shall be of indoor construction, purpose made, floor
standing, totally enclosed, cellular cubicle type, dust protected, vermin proof and
of clean and modern appearance containing the main components shown on the
Drawings and/or specified
(b) the switchboards shall be fabricated, assembled, wired, checked, tested and co-
ordinated at the factory by one manufacturer using the same make for all
internal switchgear components and shall be constructed in accordance with
IEC 61439 or latest /updated version of the standard..
(c) the switchboard shall be equipped with Air Circuit Breakers, moulded case
circuit breakers, relays, instruments, transformers, ancillary devices necessary
for operation protection or measurement purposes and Automatic Transfer
control with Manual operation bypass arrangement as indicated on the Drawings
(d) the normal components, fittings and accessories required for safe and proper
operation of switchgear shall be provided, whether specifically mentioned herein
or
14
not
(e) to withstand thermal and mechanical stresses set up by short circuit conditions
20
in accordance with the fault through current of the feeding transformer. In
general
fault breaking capacities for main switchboards shall be as stipulated in
s
QGEWC
rd
regulations minimum 44KA for 3 Seconds.
(f) spare ways indicated on the Single Line Diagram shall be fully equipped
da
(g) all FBA‟s should have a manufacturers name plate indicating minimum;
Manufacturer name, address, project No. busbar rating, fault current, year of
an
manufacture, serial no. IP, etc.as per Engineer approval.
(h) the MCCs shall be designed, manufactured and tested to IP54 in compliance
St
with the requirements of IEC 60529.

(i) equipment such as Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), UPS and others with large
n
watt loss, if specifically mentioned in the particular requirements to be included

io
in the MCC, that require forced ventilation by employing external fan and louvers
as recommended by the manufacturer, the degree of protection (IP rating) shall
ct
be reduced to IP43 from IP54.

tru
(j) the MV/MCCs panels shall be designed and type tested to withstand a fault
current of 44 kA for 3 seconds symmetrical. Additionally the MCCs shall be type
tested for safe containment of an internal arcing fault, which will check the
s
capability of the steel structure to withstand the forces associated with the arc,
on
and ensure safety and integrity of the assembly for continuous use. This is to
establish that the enclosure of MV/MCCs together with internal partitions and/or
C
barriers withstands the pressure and temperature arising from internal arcing
with short circuit current and thus provides protection for persons in front of or
within the close proximity of the MCCs in the event of internal arcing.
ar
(k) the test certificate must show that the neutral bar has been tested with the full
at
fault current and for the full time specified.

Q
(l) the MCCs shall be designed and equipped with properly sized circuit breakers
and/or fused disconnect switches, having a minimum factor of safety of capacity
1.5 taking into account the connected load and its diversity, with provision for
selective short-circuit co-ordination so that faults are cleared without disturbing
other circuits.
(m) the MCCs shall be designed for indoor installation except where specified for
outdoor installation.
(n) the MCCs shall be designed to operate satisfactorily in an ambient air
temperature of +50° C and RH exceeding 90%.
(o) unless otherwise specified temperature up to +70° C and RH up to 100% shall
apply during transport, storage and installation. Equipment subjected to these
extreme service conditions without being operated shall not suffer irreversible
damage when operated under normal specified conditions.
(p) the altitude of the site installation shall not exceed 100 meters.
(q) the MCCs shall normally be located indoors in service conditions as specified
above. However some parts of the MCCs such as sensors, field instruments
and pilot devices may require installation in highly corrosive gaseous
environments. Gases such as hydrogen sulfide and methane may adversely
affect the functions of the components and devices. In such application
environments, special measure shall be adopted to prevent corrosion and the
subsequent rise in resistance leading to temporary or permanent interruption in
control or power circuits.
(r) the temperature rise in MCCs shall not be allowed to damage the components,
connectors, wires, terminals etc. With the equipment in normal service
14
condition, no live part shall become subjected to high temperature causing
overheating that increases the risk of internal arcing accidents.
20
(s) extreme care shall be taken while designing the MCCs to ensure external
surface temperature is maintained within the specified limits.
(t) the clearances and creep age distances in the MCCs shall be based on rated
s
impulse withstand voltage in accordance with IEC 61439to ensure that the
rd
equipment designed is capable of withstanding the specified voltage without
failure under specified test conditions.
da
(u) the equipped MCC must confirm to the clearance and creepage distances and
withstand voltages explicitly by taking into account the specified service
an
conditions.
(v) the maximum height of assemblies shall be 2400 mm above the finished floor
St
level.
(w) site consideration including safety and maintenance shall be taken into account
n
in the design of assemblies. These considerations shall include:

io
(i) clear floor space of at least 2000 mm shall be provided in front of the
ct
MV/MCC panel from the free edge of the doors in the open position.
Clear floor space of 900mm shall be provided behind the MCC when
tru
the doors are in the open position if the MCC is less than 4000mm
long. If the MCC is 4000mm or longer the space provided shall be
1200mm. The clear floor space behind the MCC is not required when
s
a true front access assembly is provided.

on
(ii) in order to provide an unobstructed exit route a clear path of not less
than 1000mm shall be provided at each end of the MCC.
C
(iii) provision of sufficient space to allow for doors to open fully without
ar
fouling other items of equipment or other open doors.

(iv) limiting the size and weight of assembly sections to those imposed
at
by transportation, site access and permitted levels of site floor

loading.
Q
(v) clear floor space of at least 1000 mm shall be provided from the
sides of all MCCs in order to allow possible future extension.
(vi) Provide a 2 m clear opening, cable basement access room below the
MV/MCC rooms for cable access including the required fire alarm,
ventilation, earthing and lighting requirements as listed elsewhere
and as per Qatar UPDA Municipality requirements.
(vii) All cable penetrations from MCC basement to MCC trough the MCC
floor shall be sealed with 2 hours fire rated spray compound, subject
of Engineer‟s approval.
(viii) 50% standby capacity Air Conditioning (minimum one unit) shall be
provided for the MCC/MV room.
2 Construction:
(a) unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation, main FBA

switchboards and MCC for general purpose indoor uses shall be constructed to
comply with the requirements of IEC 61439 –Form 4b or Form 4 Type 7 conform
with GAMBICA
(b) switchboard shall be factory built, totally enclosed, and have provision for rear
access. Size, rating arrangements shall be as indicated on the Drawings
(c) the switchboard shall consist of standard cubicles assembled together on
continuous base channels to form a rigid in line flush fronted free standing
continuous switchboard assembly. For small installations where particularly
14
specified, true front access MCCs must be provided. For all other cases front
and rear access MCCs must be provided. MCCs shall be constructed such that
doors and covers are flush with one another and aligned to a common vertical
20
plane; manufactured out of mild steel coated with Alu Zinc having the following
thickness:
s
(i) Plinth/bed frame - 3.00 mm
rd
(ii) Frames - 2.00 mm
da
(iii) Covers and Doors - 2.00 mm
(iv) Mounting plate an - 3.00 mm
(v) Gland Plate - 3.00 mm
(d) a separate cubicle section shall be provided for the main incoming circuit
St
breaker
and cable glands shall be provided for the incoming cables in accordance with
the
n
QGEWC regulations.
io
(e) each cubicle shall be divided into segregated busbar section and circuit section.
ct
The
circuit section shall be further divided into segregated compartments for housing
tru
main
and emergency circuit breakers and other devices. Access to internal
s
components of
any compartment must be feasible by isolating its particular switch. The hinged
on
door
shall be mechanically interlocked with the switch in such a manner that the door
C
can
be opened only in the „OFF‟ position
ar
(f) the switchboards shall be totally enclosed, all hinged doors, covers shall be
gasketed
at
to provide protection against dust

Q
(g) cabinet shall have adequate means of lifting and shall be capable of being rolled
or
moved into the installation position and bolted directly to the floor
(h) the switchboards shall be provided with suitable cable glands to suit the type,
size and
number of cables as indicated on the Drawings. The cable glands or bracket
where
required shall be adequately mounted inside the switchboard. The switchboards
shall
be provided with the proper cable fixing clamps and terminal lugs for incoming
and
outgoing cables as well as earth bonding connections
(i) after fabrication, steel work shall be cleaned, zinc sprayed and stove enamelled
with one prime coat, two under-coats and one finishing coat, the surface being
rubbed down after each coat or epoxy coated subject of Engineer‟s approval.
(j) the finish of all parts shall be entirely suitable for the climatic conditions on site.
(k) the equipment shall be finished with at least two coats of undercoat and two
coats of high grade acrylic stove enamel or epoxy coated subject of Engineer‟s
approval. Cubicle interiors shall be completely painted white, however this is not
essential for the rear of the door. The height of the switch board shall be limited
to 2200mm unless specifically required to meet the site constraints and
approved in writing by the Engineer.
14
(l) any damage caused to the finish during transportation and erection shall be
returned to the manufacturer for repair if it cannot be perfectly repaired on site.
20
The structure shall be protected from rust and oxidization. The paint shall be
applied to rust and grease free surface of metal. The steel shall be electro –
zinc plated (ZINTEC) and must have a minimum of priming coat, undercoat and
s
finishing coat or epoxy coated subject of Engineer‟s approval. The undercoat
rd
and finishing coat shall be stove enamelled.
(m) The exterior shall be green to BS 4800, shade 14E53. The switchboard degree
da
of protection shall be IP 54 to BS EN 60529.
(n) all plastic parts used within the assembly shall be of flame-retardant, self
an
extinguishing type and halogen free.
(o) MCCs shall have internal separation by means of metallic or non-metallic
St
partitions or barriers.
(p) all internal components within the compartment /cubicle shall be provided with
n
the degree of protections to IP 2X as minimum whereas the degree of

io
Protection to IP4X shall be provided to adjacent functional units preventing

contact with live parts.
ct
(q) electrical continuity between the exposed conductive parts of MCCs and
tru
protective circuits of the installation shall be ensured to provide protection

against indirect contact by using protective circuits.
s
(r) the protective circuits throughout the installation shall be so designed that it is
on
impossible to break the protective path with the removal of any component from
the MCC.
C
(s) all outgoing circuit‟s protective conductors shall have a separate terminal of
adequate size duly identified in accordance with the Identification Section
ar
explained elsewhere in QCS.

(t) MCCs must be designed by giving highest importance to accessibility especially
at
when in service/fully powered, allowing easy viewing for inspection and

operation, replacement of fuses and extension of additional functional units etc.
Q
(u) floor mounted assembles shall either be provided with an integral plinth or a
separate rolled mild steel channel bed frame, at least 50 mm high. Fixing shall
be by not less than four holding down bolts per assembly/column section,
located around the periphery of the section. The fixing shall not be visible from
outside the section, but shall be readily accessible from within.
(v) fixings for wall and pole mounted enclosures shall be provided outside the
enclosure. The back of the enclosure shall not be drilled to accept fixings.
(w) the type of cubicle construction shall be multi-compartment type unless specified
otherwise.
(x) compartments containing switchfuses, starters, control sections, distribution

boards, busbars, downdroppers and similar equipment shall be fully segregated.
There shall be no aperture large enough to admit a 5mm diameter wire between
any two adjacent compartments. Each cubicle/compartment shall have its own
door.
(y) interconnecting cables between adjacent compartments shall not proceed
directly from one to the other but shall pass through a vertical wall into a cabling
compartment before re-entering. Holes for interconnecting cables shall be of the
minimum size necessary. All such holes shall be filled with insulating grommets.
(z) all cubicles shall be provided with a means of ensuring that equipment can be
adequately isolated for maintenance purposes without interrupting essential
14
loads which may continue to operate whilst maintenance is being undertaken.
(aa) distribution sections shall be fully insulated to allow safe operation by non-
20
engineering personnel.
(bb) doors shall be adequately sized to accommodate readily and neatly all mounted
equipment, open at least 120 degrees, be rigidly constructed, suitably braced
s
and provided with at least two substantial hinges which shall be captive when
rd
the door is closed. Doors shall be provided with stays to prevent over opening.
da
(cc) each door shall be provided with non-rusting metalic ‘T’ type handles at least
one of, which shall be lockable. an
(dd) the doors shall be fixed to the frame by substantial single knuckle non-rusting
type, or internal concealed type hinges. Hinges shall be on the left hand side of
the door. Hinges shall not be welded to either the door or frame. Substantial
St
continuous stainless steel type hinges over the whole height of the door may be
considered if the manufacturer can provide evidence of long continuous service
n
of this type of hinge on his product.

io
(ee) locking combinations shall be provided as specified. Three keys for each key
type shall be provided on individual key rings having a nametag showing identify
ct
details.
tru
(ff) where the need of padlocking facilities is identified by the engineer/employer, the
padlocks shall be supplied and fitted.
s
(gg) equipment shall not be mounted on covers. Covers shall not weigh more than
on
30 kg, and any cover over 7.5 kg shall be provided with a means of supporting
the lower edge when its securing bolts are being inserted or removed.
C
(hh) removable back covers shall be provided.

(ii) each door shall be provided with an internal welded earthing stud, and shall be
ar
bonded to the assembly main earth bar.

at
(jj) every incomer, starter, feeder, etc. shall have an individual terminal/gland box.
Control compartments and small power and lighting distribution boards must
Q
also have independent gland boxes but these may be common to more than
one circuit.
(kk) terminal/gland boxes may be externally mounted on the rear of the MCC or
internal. Terminal/gland boxes shall not inhibit access to or maintenance of any
part of the MCC.
(ll) outgoing main and control cables shall be glanded at the compartment so as to
ensure a full earth screen to each compartment and shall also be glanded at
plinth level to make the complete MCC vermin-proof. Compartment gland plates
shall be a minimum of 300mm above the plinth level gland plate.
(mm) gasket material used for sealing panel doors and covers and for door mounted
instruments shall be of highest quality and should not be subject to deterioration
by temperature, UV, hydrogen sulphide and methane.
(nn) doors and covers giving access to potentially live conductors shall be provided
with prominent warning labels, in English and Arabic.
(oo) doors on outdoor assemblies shall be retained in the open position by the
provision of adequately fixed stays.
(pp) each cubicle/compartment shall be provided with a removable steel components
mounting plate located clear of the cubicle rear panel.
(qq) all components, other than door mounted, shall be located on the component
mounting plate by bolting into tapped holes or by using self-tapping screws.
Nuts used for securing components shall be captive.
(rr) rail type fixings may be used where appropriate. Components shall not be
14
mounted on any other surface.
(ss) no components shall be located within the assembly at a height greater than
20
2000 mm or less than 500 mm above finished floor level.
(tt) it shall be possible to replace and maintain any component without first
removing other components.
s
rd
(uu) bolts and nuts for cover fixing shall be captive and provided with protective
washers to prevent damage to paintwork.
da
(vv) unless specified otherwise control supplies shall be 110V a.c. derived from a
transformer within the control compartment or in a separate compartment, fused
an
on its primary circuit. Neutral shall be earthed with a removable link. Individual
compartments shall be fed through a fused tapping next to the main 110v bus
adjacent to the transformer. Proper fuse coordination to be achieved to avoid
St
one section fault from affecting the other section. Transformer shall be rated for
at least 150% of the maximum loading for long service life.
n
(ww) auxiliary supplies such as 24 V AC/DC, 240 V AC etc. are specified in the
io
relevant individual component‟s specifications.

ct
(xx) each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed compartment heater
rated 110 Volts AC. Apart from those in motor starter compartments the
tru
heaters shall be controlled by means of individual “OFF/AUTO” switches. Auto

operation shall be by means of adjustable panel mounted humidistat covering
the range of humidity envisaged.
s
on
(yy) MCCs shall be designed for ready extension at each end.

(zz) all terminals for outgoing connections shall be located at a low level in the
C
compartment adjacent to the cable gland trays. Adequate space shall be

provided the installation and dressing of site cables. It should be noted that site
ar
cables are frequently oversized to allow for high ambient temperatures and long
cable routes. Direct termination on equipment such as Distribution Board Fuses
or Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB‟s) shall not be permitted.
at
(aaa) all main switches shall be arranged such that a minimum distance of 700mm
Q
exists between the glandplate and the bottom of the circuit breaker or terminals,
whichever is the less.
(bbb) all live terminals, bus bar joints, main incoming and DG cables lugs/joints with
the Busbar ACB terminals (or similar cases) shall be fully shrouded by using
removable jointing caps high-grade high temperature material subject of
Engineer‟s/client approval.
(ccc) all cable entries shall be affected using brass cable glands to IP rating as
specified.
(ddd) all cable glands shall be provided with earth tags.
(eee) cables shall enter assemblies through detachable steel or aluminum/brass (for
single core cables); gland plates fitted at least 200 mm above finished floor
level.
(fff) gland plates shall be rust proofed and provided with a welded and bonded
earthing stud, and adequately sized to accommodate present and known future
cabling requirements. Access to both sides of each gland plate when it is in
position shall be possible from within the assembly. Cables shall enter at the
top or bottom of assemblies as specified and/or as shown on the relevant
drawings where applicable.
(ggg) cableways shall be provided to ensure that apart from inter-connections no
cable routed to one cubicle shall pass through any other cubicle.
2
(hhh) for cable sizes 300mm and above insulated glands shall be fitted.
(iii) provision for accommodation of rising armored cables shall be provided with
adequate cable supports and a form of cable entry via approved cable glands
14
secured to a steel glanding plate.
(jjj) space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of appropriate size for
20
incoming and outgoing circuits. All gland plates and trays shall be adequately
earthed.
s
(kkk) cable disconnecting links shall be provided where specified and shall be used
rd
for maintenance purposes only. The links shall be fitted to the bus bar risers
immediately before the cable terminations and shall be easily accessible. The
da
links shall be labeled „ISOLATING LINK‟ and the circuit or cable reference shall
be quoted. an
(lll) within each assembly, all metal parts of equipment supplied, other than those
forming part of an electric circuit, shall be bonded to the earth bar. Metalwork
may be used for this purpose provided that earth continuity conductors are fitted
St
at all joints and other discontinuities and those connections to metal work are
made using a welded or bolted stud.
n
(mmm) the following metal parts must be provided with equipotential bonding
io
connected to an earth busbar system by using yellow/green earth cable of at

least 6.0 mm square.
ct
(i) gland plates

tru
(ii) gland covers

(iii) side sheets
s
on
(iv) top barriers

(v) intermediate barriers
C
(vi) top covers

ar
(vii) end covers

(viii) rear Covers
at
(ix) front covers

Q
(x) cable Boxes

(xi) doors and bolted front covers
(xii) horizontal busbar barriers.
(nnn) Where specified in contract document, each compartment shall be provided with
a smoke detector. In addition to this, a heat sensitive cable shall be run
throughout the MCC passing through each compartment. Both shall be
connected to the fire alarm panel and shall additionally be arranged to open the
main supply circuit breaker and inhibit the start up of the standby generator.
(ooo) Where specified in contract document, MV/MCC panel shall be provided with
capsular type fire extinguishing system using FM 200 clean agent as described
in section 23. One cylinder for maximum 2 columns shall be provided. The
system shall be connected to the fire alarm panel and shall be arranged to open
the main supply circuit breaker and inhibit the start up of the standby generator.
No objection letter shall be provided by the FBA manufacturer for installation of
Capsular Fire Extinguishing system in the FBA panel..
(ppp) The height of the switch board shall be limited to 2200mm unless specifically
required to meet the site constraints. Proposal shall be approved in writing by
the Engineer.
(qqq) Provide carriage/Lifting Truck if an ACB exceeded 25kg in weight (One carriage
14
only for each site/project regardless of number of breakers provided).
(rrr) The different panel compartments shall be arranged in the following order when
20
facing the front of the MCC and reading from left to right:
(i) Supply incoming ACB/MCCB including Electricity Supply Authority
metering.
s
rd
(ii) Diesel generator ACB/MCCB incoming.
(iii) Pump starters (current pump installation-if existing)
da
(iv) Pump starters (future pumps) –
an
(v) Miscellaneous feeders / valve actuators, etc.
(vi) PLC
St
3 InstrumentationLabels:
n
(a) Provide identification on all equipment e.g. control panels, MCC, controllers,
raceways, boxes and conductors, devices etc in accordance with BS 61346, BS
io
61666, BS 61175 and BS 60445 standards or latest edition of other applicable

ct
standards to the approval of the Engineer.

tru
(b) All labels shall be permanent, and be machine generated. NO HANDWRITTEN

OR NON-PERMANENT LABELS SHALL BE ALLOWED.
(c) Prior to making any label or nameplate for the purpose of identification, submit
s
a detailed schedule indicating nameplate size, lettering size, color, material and
on
actual nameplate information for the Engineer's review and approval.

(d) All external labels, nameplates, operational and warning signs shall be provided
C
in English.
ar
(e) Material used in making the engraved labels shall be of highest quality suitable
for the environmental and climatic conditions as specified in the relevant section.
at
(f) Critical devices such as disconnect switches; service feeders and branch circuit
protective feeders shall be legibly labeled to indicate its purpose and point of
Q
origin. The legibility distance shall not be less than 2.0 meters.
(g) Identification nameplates shall be provided in addition to the manufacturer's
equipment nameplates as required by NEMA, BS, IEC or UL.
(h) Warning signs and instruction labels wherever needed shall be provided in
accordance with all applicable local regulations.
(i) The Contractor shall clearly show locations and fixing arrangements of
nameplates and labels on layout drawings.
(j) The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements for labels:
(i) Provide equipment identification labels for all electrical equipment
including, but not limited to switchgear, control panels, switchboards,
transfer switches, disconnect switches, transformers, generators,

power factor capacitors, fixed equipment, motor starters, MCCs etc.
(ii) Provided sub-classification label for all emergency power system,
junction boxes and pull boxes.
(iii) External labels:3mm thickness minimum, Clear Perspex back
engraved, in black letters on white backgorund in English with
chamfered edges fixed with stainless steel screws with nuts and flat
& lock washers. The letters should be filled in white and the rear
surface painted black.
(iv) Internal labels: Multi-layered plastic to an approved design engraved
in English, and fixed with stainless steel screws. Alternatively special
14
purpose made DIN rail may be used for fixing labels as approved by
the engineer.
20
(v) All labels shall be screw or rivet fixed and adhesive labels shall not
be permitted under any circumstances.
s
(vi) Internal components labels shall have circuit designations correlated
rd
with the drawings.
(vii) Labels shall not be attached to trunking covers or other readily
da
removable items.
(viii) electrical equipment enclosures, vaults, doors and fences shall be
an
provided with "DANGER KEEP OUT" warning sign, showing proper
voltage.
St
(ix) disconnect switches and emergency devices shall have "CAUTION"

warning signs as directed by the Engineer.
n
(x) fuse and MCB distribution boards shall be provided with internal,
io
screw fixed, engraved circuit labels. Ink on paper, ink on plastic,

printed paper, printed plastic, plastic film or any kind of adhesive
ct
labels shall not be permitted.

tru
(xi) Provide a main Title Label all for electrical distribution and all other
control equipment, panels etc.
s
(xii) Provide a Function Label for door mounted components.

on
(xiii) Every internal component - Identification Label.

(xiv) Provide a Identification Label for Protective devices - ( e.g. fuse/mcb
C
type, rating).
ar
(xv) Provide a Title Label for Communication equipment.

(xvi) Compartments with doors and covers not electrically interlocked to
at
an isolator, external label - “ DANGER, LIVE TERMINALS ” with

flash and voltage in red letters on white background in Arabic and
Q
English.
(xvii) Provide a function description Label for group of terminal blocks.
(xviii) Letter size shall be to the approval of the Engineer
(xix) Removable rear cover shall be provided with identification and the
location on the Switchgear panel shall be provided with identification
label.
4 Switchboard Wiring:
(a) Wiring shall generally be of the multi-stranded high temperature to minimum

105° C flexible PVC insulated, 600/1000V single core stranded copper type
cable to BS EN 6231. Where it is proposed to use alternative high temperature,
double insulated or other special cable or insulated flexible laminated bus bar
this should be brought to the attention of the Engineer for his approval.
(b) Wiring shall be supported in insulated cleats or cable trunking. Adhesive type
cleats or mounts shall not be used unless augmented by screw fixings.
(c) Busbar chambers shall not be used as trunking for small wiring.
(d) Wiring shall be neatly laid and run in limited compression insulated cleats,
insulated straps or, where more than ten wires follow the same route, in plastic
slotted-sided trunking with clip-on covers. Where trunking is used, the effective
14
overall cross-sectional area of cables shall not be greater than 70% of the
trunking cross sectional area.
20
(e) Wiring to items of equipment mounted on hinged doors or subject to movement
shall run in plastic sleeving or flexible conduit, being securely anchored at both
ends; leaving ample slack to prevent wiring strain, arranged so that they are
s
subject to torsion rather than bending.
rd
(f) Holes in steelwork through which cables pass shall be protected using
da
grommets or bushes, suitable for the size of hole.
(g) Cables used for control, extra low voltage and instrument signal transmission,
an
likely to be affected by interference, shall be screened and/or spaced from each
other and from heavy current power cables. The separation distance shall
ensure that the resultant electrical noise is insufficient to cause any form of
St
malfunction of associated equipment or give false readings.

(h) A sufficient number of terminal connections including 15 % spare terminals shall
n
be provided for all control and instrument wiring.

io
(i) All wiring shall be identified at each end by means of glossy plastic ferrules
ct
showing the wire number as on the schematic diagrams. Ferrules shall be color
coded, ‘Z‟ type and indelibly marked.
tru
(j) Where single core cable is to be accommodated, a non-magnetic gland plate

shall be provided. For cable size 300 mm Sq. and above insulated glands shall
s
be fitted.
on
(k) Undrilled gland plates shall be provided for the reception of conduits and
threaded glands. Boxes and glands shall be within the cubicles except where
C
otherwise approved.
(l) Single strand wire shall not be used. The minimum cross sectional area of the
ar
2 2
wire used shall be 1.0 mm (multi strand flexible) for control circuit and 2.5 mm
for power circuit. Both ends of every wire shall be fitted with a white cable
at
marker as described above. Clip on type cable markers shall not be used.
Color-coding shall be:
Q
 Red - Red phase

 Yellow - Yellow phase
 Blue - Blue phase
 Black - Neutral
 Green and Yellow - Earth/Protective conductors
 Grey - 110V a.c
 White - 60 D.C
 Purple - <50V a.c
 Brown - Current Transformers
Identification of conductors and auxiliary circuit shall be in accordance with BS EN
60445 and BS EN 60446
(m) Terminations shall be as follows:-
(i) All wiring shall have crimped terminations, only one wire being held
by any one crimp. Crimped lugs shall be of the insulated type
without conductor exposure between the crimp and wire insulation.
(ii) The type of crimp used shall be appropriate for the type of terminal to
which it connects. The crimping shall be tubular when the tightening
screw sits directly above it, or fork type if the tightening screw passes
through the lug.
(iii) Terminations shall be neatly arranged leaving adequate length for
one termination.
(iv) All terminal blocks for the connection of small wiring shall comprise
shrouded anti-tracking molding of melamine phenolic or comparable
14
material with provision for securing conductors either by high tensile
screws and clamps or alternatively in the case of small telephone
20
type conductors by solder tag connection.
(v) Terminal blocks shall be arranged to facilitate easy access to both
terminals and wiring ends. Connections for outgoing circuits to
s
auxiliary pilot cables shall be provided with test links.
rd
(vi) Removable rail terminals shall be provided for all wiring, mounted at
da
an angle to provide ease of access. Centre-disconnecting link type
terminals shall be provided for analogue signal circuits, external
control devices and all alarm/telemetry signals. Sufficient, suitably
an
sized earth terminals and end stops shall also be provided.
(vii) The gap between gland plates and associated terminals shall be
St
such that conductors can be safely manipulated and connected

without damage. Terminals shall face the door of a cubicle for ease
n
of connection.
io
(viii) Barriers shall be provided on all terminal banks, to group terminals

into logical divisions. Power terminals of different phases shall be
ct
barriered from each other and separated from control terminals.

tru
(ix) In all cases care shall be taken to ensure that terminals are easily
accessible after all wiring and plant cabling has been installed and
terminated. All connections shall be made on the front of terminal
s
blocks.
on
(x) No more than one conductor shall be connected to one side of a

terminal. Where several conductors are to be connected, shorting
C
bars shall be provided across multiple terminals. Outgoing cables

shall be wired so that all assembly wiring is connected to one side
ar
only.
at
(xi) The terminal numbers, voltage grouping and terminal block layout
shall correspond precisely with wiring diagrams so that quick and
Q
accurate identification of wiring can be made.

(xii) All terminals shall show the circuit wire number reference.
(xiii) A separate dedicated telemetry/RTU section shall be provided in the
MCC cubicle equipped with all terminals duly wired and located in the
side or on the top of the compartment interior leaving maximum
room for free issued fully wired and tagged RTU complete with all
associated hardware‟s on a mounting plate. When a PLC control
system is provided the PLC should be suitable for telemetry
communication and shall be configured to communicate with the
SCADA master station.
(xiv) The MCC vendor shall co-ordinate with the RTU vendor through the
Contractor to confirm the size of free issued duly wired RTU on a
backplate. The MCC vendor shall install and complete

interconnection wiring between the RTU and the MCC accordingly.
(n) The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval, samples of wires,
numbered ferules, and terminal pins or lugs which he proposes to use.
5 Safety Measures.
(a) circuit breakers shall be provided with suitable means to prevent unauthorised
and accidental operations. Interlocks to prevent dangerous operations shall be
provided wherever necessary. High voltage parts shall be protected to prevent
accidental human contact. Warning signs of durable type fixed on visible place
shall be provided on high voltage parts. Earthing of metal parts shall be
14
provided.
(b) mechanical interlocking shall be provided where required. All electrical
20
interlocking shall be of the double interlocked type having separate permissive
and prohibitive interlocks. Thus to allow a device to operate there must be an
absence of prohibitive signals and a presence of permissive signals from the
s
remaining devices in the interlocked system i.e. fail safe.
rd
(c) suitable equipment shall be provided mechanically to prevent a device being
manually operated when a prohibitive signal from another part of the interlocked
da
system is present.
(d) when the MCC includes a standby generator incomer in addition to the QGEWC
an
incomer, mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be provided in accordance
with QGEWC regulations.
St
6 Pilot Devices:
n
(a) pilot devices shall confirm to BS EN 60947-5.1. These shall be circular, 22 mm

dia suitable for mounting on the cubicle door. The pilot devices shall have two
io
main parts the operator and the Snap-On contact block. The mounting between
ct
the cubicle door and the operator shall be done through Snap-On flange. Pilot
devices shall be designed to provide IP65 as a minimum protection when
tru
installed in the enclosures. Terminals shall be protected to IP2X.

(b) push buttons shall comply with the following specifications unless specified
s
otherwise in particular requirements: -

on
(i) standard design

(ii) mushroom/stayput/lockable type where specified
C
(iii) non illuminated

ar
(iv) anodized Aluminum Bezel

at
(v) 1NO+1NC configuration minimum

(vi) RED button for STOP function
Q
(vii) GREEN button for START function [Recessed type]

(viii) mushroom RED for Emergency STOP function
(ix) BLACK button for manual RESET
(x) WHITE button for lamp test
(xi) push buttons for other functions where applicable shall be subjected
to the approval of engineer.
(c) selector switches shall comply with the following specifications unless
specified otherwise in particular requirements: -
(i) standard design
(ii) lever type cam operated
(iii) Twist Release/Push-Pull/KEY type where specified and/or approved

by engineer.
(iv) non illuminated
(v) anodized aluminum bezel
(vi) No. of positions as per logic diagram
(vii) BLACK color
(viii) 1NO+1NC configuration minimum
(d) indicators shall comply with the following specifications unless specified
otherwise in particular requirements: -
14
(i) low voltage transformer latch type 110V/50Hz primary
20
(ii) bulbs shall be long life neon types rated at least 10% higher than the
operating voltage.
(iii) GREEN colour for RUN/ON indication
s
(iv) WHITE/Grey colour for STOP/OFF indication
rd
(v) AMBER colour for TRIP/FAULT indications
da
(vi) BLUE colour for equipment selected „On-Auto‟ indication
(vii) WHITE color for SUPPLY AVAILABLE / ENERGISED
an
(viii) RED colour for DANGER (in operation) indication
St
(ix) indicators for other conditions where applicable shall be subjected to
the approval of the Engineer.
n
(x) the pilot light operator shall be designed to facilitate removal of bulb
io
from the front of the unit without requiring any tool.

(e) LEDs shall be allowed.
ct
(f) emergency and safety switches where specified shall confirm to BS EN 60947-
tru
3, Utilization Category AC23 and comply with the following specifications: -

(i) IP65 metal/thermoplastic enclosure suitable for installation in non-
s
safe areas involving Methane and H2S gases.

on
(ii) visible operating handle with marking OFF/ON position

C
(iii) lockable in Off position by using padlocks

(iv) suitable for base/wall mounting
ar
(v) the breaking capacity shall be more than the largest circuit it breaks
at
(vi) the emergency switch shall have red handle on a yellow background
Q
7 Busbars:
(a) the busbars shall be electro-tinned hard drawn, high conductivity 99.9 % purity,
suitably sleeved for phase identification to BS 158
(b) all busbars shall extend through the length of the board with same cross section
throughout unless indicated otherwise
2
(c) a copper Earth Busbar sized at least 50 % of the phase busbars or 300 mm ,
whichever is greater, shall be provided along the full length of the board
(d) busbars shall be adequately supported by porcelain or moulded insulators
spaced on
suitable centres so that the complete assembly can withstand the maximum
mechanical stresses to which it may be subjected to under fault conditions
(e) unless otherwise stipulated in the particular specification or drawings busbars

shall be
housed in separate adequately ventilated compartment which shall not contain
any
wiring or apparatus other than that required for connections for busbars
(f) rating : As indicated on the drawings.
(g) the mechanical and dielectric strength of bus bars and supports shall be capable
of withstanding the worst conditions of electrical surge, which can occur in the
installation
(h) bus bars shall be sleeved for phase identification by using high temperature
grade heat shrinkable colored PVC sleeving throughout its length. In no
14
circumstances will any kind of wrapping tape be accepted on busbars.
(i) all three phases and the neutral busbar shall be of same size enclosed in a
20
common separate chamber.
(j) the mains horizontal busbars shall be housed in a separate chamber located on
s
the top of the assembly. Busbars located elsewhere not on the Top shall be
rd
accepted at the discretion of the Engineer after verifying the certification, site
location, available space and considering other factors necessary for ease in
da
operation and maintenance of the assemblies. Insulation barriers shall be
provided at each cubicle division.an
(k) vertical busbars shall be fully enclosed in a separate chamber.
(l) bus bars connections shall be identified by phase color marking and adequately
St
supported by suitable supports designed to withstand the full fault capacity as
specified herein.
connections from the main bus bars to MCCB‟s controlling main motor starters
n
(m)
and outgoing distribution feeder shall be via solid copper bus bars.
io
(n) Connections to busbars shall take the form of rigid bolted copper strips. Caliper
ct
sliding connections or similar movable contacts shall not operate directly onto
the busbars or down-droppers.
tru
(o) The utilization of “Fault Free Zones” will be permitted for the connection between
the busbar risers and functional units rated 32 amps or below. These may be of
s
copper conductors of solid rigid manufacture or double-insulated flexible

on
conductors provided that they are securely fastened, provided in both cases that
under normal operating condition an internal short circuit is only a remote
C
possibility. For all functional units the connections between the busbar and the
functional units should be sized to the frame rating of the short circuit protection
ar
device in the functional unit and an ASTA/KEMA certificate for their short circuit
2
let though (I T) capability shall be provided.
at
(p) bolted copper bus bar links shall be provided where specified and shall be used
for maintenance purposes only. The link section shall be easily accessible from
Q
the front or top of the board and shall have a lockable cover. Provision for
storing the links nuts and bolts shall be made in the switchboard.
(q) the temperature rise of busbars shall be limited to that which will not cause
damage to the insulating material when carrying their rated current at the site
ambient temperature and shall in any case not exceed 60°c reduced by the
amount the site ambient temperature exceeds 40°c.
(r) The neutral shall be solidly earthed at the MCC. The neutral-earth link shall be
adjacent to the incomer, externally labeled and be easily accessible.
8 Instruments:
(a) the Measuring Instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, kWh meters,
selector
switches and associated accessories as indicated on the Drawings and
described
herein as follows:
(i) Ammeter, Voltmeter and Power Factor Meter:
 the measuring instruments shall be moving iron vane type, flush pattern with
dust and moisture proof enclosure. Anti-glare glass front, anti-parallax scales
and white faces with black numerals and marking shall be used. All
instruments shall be of long scale 240 degree with full load indicating
approximately at 180°
14
 the dial size shall be 10 x 10 cm2.
 accuracy shall be one percent of full scale values
20
 moving elements shall be provided with zero adjustments located at face of
 dial.

s
the ammeter shall be capable of withstanding twice of rated current for 10
rd
 minutes and overload sustained under fault conditions without damage or
loss of accuracy.
da
 voltmeter shall have a measuring range from 0 to 500 V and shall withstand
 twice the rated full scale voltage for 1.0 minute without damage
an
 three ammeters or a single ammeter with selector switch shall be provided to
 read the current of each phase, as indicated on the Drawings
St
 the voltmeter selector switch shall be of the rotary type with cam operated
 contactor and shall have (7) positions off, R-Y, Y-B, R-B, R-N, Y-N, B-N
n
 single and poly phase power factor meters with associated current and
io
 potential transformers shall be provided as required and specified herein

ct
 ammeters shall have maximum demand pointers.

tru
(b) Current Transformers:

(i) current transformers shall be of the bar primary type, air cooled and
s
suitably
on
insulated. The current transformers shall be of Class X accuracy for

restricted
earth fault protection and Class 1 accuracy for metering purposes, as
C
stipulated
in the QGEWC Regulations
ar
(ii) current transformers shall be rated not less than 5 VA and shall have
at
thermal
and mechanical rating at least equal to those of the main circuit
Q
breakers.
(iii) following are the approved ratings of the current transformers (CTs)
as approved by QGEWC.
 100/5
 200/5
 500/5
 800/5
 1200/5
 1600/5
 2000/5
 2500/5
(iv) removable links shall be located on the main busbars of each phase
and neutral to enable easy maintenance and replacement.
(v) current transformers shall comply with BS 3938 and should be

suitably rated and designed to carry out the appropriate function as
indicated.
(vi) The rated burden of the current transformers shall be 30% in excess
of the sum of burdens of all relays, instruments and related loads.
(vii) the short time rating shall not be less than 44kVA for 3 seconds.
(viii) identification labels giving type, ratio‟s, rating output, manufacturer
and serial numbers shall be fitted. Duplicate rating labels are to be
fitted on the exterior of the mounting chambers suitably located to
enable reading without removal of Any cover. Labels shall be
supplied for multi ratio current transformers indicating the connection
14
required for alternative ratios.
(ix) bar type current transformers shall be provided in preference to
20
those with wound primaries. Short time current factors shall relate to
the full fault level for three seconds. For overcurrent protection the
product of VA rated burden and rated accuracy limit factor shall be
s
150 unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
rd
(x) one secondary terminal of each current transformer shall be earthed
da
through a removable link.
(c) kWh Meters: an
(i) the kWh meters shall be suitable for operation on 415/240 Volt, 3
phase, 4
St
wire, 50 Hz supply and shall conform to BS 37 Part 1 and BS 5685
(ii) the meters shall be dust-proof and vermin proof, protected from
n
corrosion due
to high humidity and compensated against the effect of temperature
io
up to 55 °C
ct
(iii) the meters shall maintain their accuracy over many years service
tru
under Qatar
climatic conditions. The counter shall be of the cycle meter type with
six
s
figures, the lowest figure being unit. Pointer type counters are not
on
acceptable
(iv) the meter cover and cases shall be of metal
C
(v) meters shall not have less than 5 mm diameter terminal holes and
shall be
ar
operated through three current transformers and the counter of the

meter should be calibrated to read the primary kWh. The current
at
transformers
Q
shall be selected from the standard sizes stipulated in QGEWC

Regulations
(vi) all meters shall be handed over to the Qatar General Electricity &
Water Corporation for calibration prior to final installation and
connection.
(d) power monitoring Unit(PMU):
(i) power monitoring (PMU) shall be a true RMS digital instrument, with
LCD display, capable of controlling and measurement highly non-
linear loads accurately and able to detect voltage based
disturbances.
(ii) the LCD unit combined with function keys, minimum IP54, shall be
mounted locally on the Incomer cubicle door.
(iii) PMU shall be CE marked and confirm to BS EN 61010-1

(iv) the Power Monitoring Unit shall register all measured values and log
current and previous measured values for reporting and printing
purposes.
(v) the Power Monitor shall be supplied with software, user manual and
associated interconnecting cables.
(vi) PMU shall be provided with user friendly software minimum windows
2000 based communication (fully supported by Latest Edition of
Windows Based Operating System) program allowing easy access to
all features with pull down menus
14
(vii) true RMS measurement of current and voltage
(viii) control and measurement of highly nonlinear loads
20
(ix) capable to detect voltage based disturbances
(x) interface capability with PLC/RTU/Circuit breaker
s
(xi) provide load shedding capabilities
rd
(xii) provide interface with Power Factor Correction Control equipment
da
(xiii) RS-485 port
(xiv) modbus communication protocol
an
(xv) DNP3.0 Communication protocol
St
(xvi) web enabled Ethernet capability
(xvii) measurement of Harmonics
n
(xviii) monitoring of disturbances in the power supply network

io
(xix) continuous sampling at 128 times per cycle

ct
(xx) trending analysis for historical data collection

tru
(xxi) sequence of events

(xxii) RMS current of each phase
s
(xxiii) RMS voltage L1-L2-L3-N

on
(xxiv) average system voltage (Vav)

C
(xxv) average system current (Iav)

(xxvi) real power (KW)
ar
(xxvii) reactive power (KVAr)

at
(xxviii)apparent power (KVA)

Q
(xxix) power factor (cos phi)

(xxx) peak demand
(xxxi) frequency (HZ)
(xxxii) temperature (T)
(xxxiii)THD current (%Ithd)
(xxxiv) THD Voltage (%Vthd)
(xxxv) K-factor100
9 Restricted Earth Fault Protection.

(a) Restricted earth fault protection shall be provided for main switchboards in
accordance with the QGEWC Regulations.
(b) 30 DC supply is required for tripping of the LV ACBs through D.C. shunt trip for
restricted earth fault relay. Contractor to provide for this unit a trickle charger
and long life nickel cadmium batteries. The unit shall be designed to operate
on 240 volts, 1 phase & 50 Hz A.C. Supply and for continuous duty at an
ambient temperature of 50 ºC and 98% relative humidity. The capacity of the
unit is to be determined by the manufacturer and based on number of trip unit ,
all to the approval of the Engineer and KAHRAMAA.
10 Anti-Condensation Heaters.
14
(a) anti-condensation heaters shall be provided inside each compartment in
strategic
positions. These shall be controlled by an internally mounted humidistat and an
20
external overriding ON/AUTO switch
(b) heaters shall be of sufficient size to maintain the air temperature inside
s
compartment
o
rd
at least 10 C above the outside ambient.
da
2.2.2 Motor Control Centres
1 General:
an
(a) provide the metal enclosed motor control centres as indicated, specified and
required
St
(b) the motor control centres shall be switchboard type construction as described
for M.V.
n
cubicle switchboards except as modified herein

io
(c) the motor control centres shall be front access only

ct
(d) shipment shall be made in sections to facilitate field handling, and the shipped
tru
sections shall be joined together to form a complete back-to-wall or back-to-

back unit
assembly as indicated
s
(e) the motor control centres shall be free-standing or wall-mounted, as indicated in

on
the
Project Drawings.
C
2 Construction
ar
(a) vertical sections shall contain adequate space for connecting the incoming
power
at
supply circuits, outgoing branch circuits, motor circuits and control circuits to
terminals, horizontal and vertical power bus bars, horizontal earth bus, circuit
Q
breakers, magnetic starters, contactors, control stations, pilot lights, timers,

terminals,
transformers, panels, relays, ammeters, voltmeters, meter switches, earth
leakage
protection, space heaters, thermostats, fans, vents, screens, filters and switches
(b) the vertical sections shall be fabricated from heavy gauge steel (minimum
thickness
of 1.5 mm), with uniform surfaces
(c) unless otherwise indicated, the standard section shall be 800 mm wide (600 mm
for
equipment and components, 200 mm for vertical wire way) by 600 mm deep
(d) holes shall be provided in the structural base of each section for anchor bolts
(e) sections shall contain wireways, brackets, supports, plates, trims, barriers,
gaskets,
doors, base channels, lifting angles and hardware
(f) horizontal wireways (top and bottom) shall extend through the width of each
section
(g) wire way openings shall be provided between sections with closing plates on the
end
sections
(h) each vertical section shall contain its own individual full height vertical wire way
14
separated from the vertical bus by a metal barrier, and also separated from the
individual control units by the side pan of the control unit.
20
(i) wire ties shall be furnished in the vertical wireways to group and securely hold
the
conductors in place
s
(j) a separate cover shall be provided on the vertical wire way
rd
(k) control units shall be isolated from one another by horizontal steel barriers
da
(l) front to rear bracing shall not interfere with the cable entrance areas
(m) hinged doors shall be equipped with screwdriver operated quarter-turn latches
an
that
catch automatically when the door is pushed closed. Large doors shall be
St
equipped
with additional latches
n
(n) provision shall be included to add a vertical section on either end of the line up in
the
io
future
ct
(o) the power supply compartment shall be sized to accommodate the incoming
power
tru
conductors. The compartment shall be located at the top or bottom of the

vertical
s
section as shown on the Drawings. The power compartment shall be covered by

on
a
hinged door and shall be held closed with quarter-turn pawl type latches
C
(p) busbars shall be provided for the power and earth systems. When shown on
the
ar
Drawings, provide full length full capacity and insulated neutral bus and cable
connectors. Bus joints shall be connected with bolts, nuts and spring washers.
at
The
main horizontal power bus shall be located in the centre or near the top of each
Q
section, joined together to form a continuous bus for the full length of the motor
control centre. The horizontal power bus shall be copper and the current rating
shall
be as shown on the Drawings. The vertical power buses shall be copper full
height
and rated for the section total load. The minimum current rating for the vertical
power
buses shall be 300 amperes or as specified in the Project Documentation. Small
openings in the vertical barriers shall permit the plug-on control unit contacts to
pass
through and engage with the vertical bus bars. Unused plug-on openings in the
vertical barriers shall be equipped with plastic snap-in closing plugs.
(q) each MV/MCC Incomer Section shall consist of: in addition to KAHRAMAA
requirements
(i) 4 Pole ACB/MCCB (For Generator Incomer)

(ii) 3 Pole ACB/MCCB with solid neutral link (For Mains Incomer)
(iii) 1X Voltmeter 96X96, 240 degree scale for mains bus voltage live
indication (For Mains Incomer)
(iv) 3X Voltmeter 96X96, 240 degree scale for generator bus voltage live
indication (For Generator Incomer)
(v) 1X Voltmeter Selector Switch 7 Position (For Mains Incomer)
(vi) 1X Ammeter 96X96, 240 degree scale (For Mains Incomer)
(vii) 3X Ammeter 96X96, 240 degree scale (For Generator Incomer)
14
(viii) 6X Maximum Demand Indicator 96X96 (May be included with
ammeter)
20
(ix) 1X Ammeter selector switch 5 position (For Mains Incomer)
(x) Power Monitoring Unit (PMU) for Main and Generator Incomers
s
(xi) phase failure/phase sequence relay for sensing the main incomer,
rd
generator incomer and busbar voltage.
da
(xii) 2X IDMTL overload relay (may be included in the circuit breaker)
(xiii) 2X IDMTL earth fault relay (may be included in the circuit breaker)
an
(xiv) 2X IDMTL restricted earth fault relay
(xv) 1X Frequency meter (45-55)Hz
St
(xvi) 3X Supply available and 3x supply on indicator lamps (for each

phase for Main and Generator incomers)
n
io
(xvii) auto/manual changeover for MCC with two or more Incomers (See
Metering Section below)
ct
(xviii) trip circuit healthy test facility in case of a circuit breaker designed to
tru
trip on fault through externally mounted protection devices e.g. IDMT

(Inverse Definite Minimum Time relay), UV relay etc.
s
(xix) control fuses

on
(xx) open/close/trip indicating lamps

(xxi) terminals etc.
C
(r) the changeover function shall be fully automatic mains Generator on failure of
power and vice versa.
ar
(s) a separate metering section shall be included in order to accommodate

at
analogue meters, Power Monitoring Unit (PMU), control relays, timers, PLC,
selector switches, push buttons, indicating lamps etc. as necessary for
Q
interlocking scheme for the incomers.All informations available in PMU shall be

transferred to PLC/SCADA for monitoring.
(t) an auto/manual changeover scheme shall be included unless specified
otherwise, as a definite requirement for two or more incomers, fully wired and
factory tested.
(u) detailed drawings shall be prepared during the design stage and the same to be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the manufacturing.
(v) installations requiring a mobile generator shall be provided with an appliance
inlet socket outlet or junction box.
(w) the appliance inlet shall be used for generators up to 125 A and be housed in a
weather proof box fixed and located outside the MCC Room as shown on plant
and equipment drawing. The junction box shall have detachable gland plate at
the bottom facilitating easy connection and disconnection of the generator cable.
For higher capacity generator ratings above 125 A, a weatherproof junction box
shall be provided with solid copper links and ample space for terminating cables.
(x) a separate section shall be provided to house the QGEWC kWh meter. The
kWh meter compartment shall be provided with a 300mm X 300mm X 12mm
thick plywood mounting board and a ten way terminal block in accordance with
QGEWC regulations.
(y) the kWh meter shall be CT operated for loads exceeding 100A.
14
(z) each outgoing starter, feeder or other functional unit shall be enclosed within its
own section providing Form 4 type 7 (Gambica) segregation (or Form 4b as per
20
IEC).
(aa) Tree spare equipped feeder section (MCCB only) per MCC shall be provided as
minimum. The rating shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
s
rd
(bb) the Common Control section shall consist of the following controls and
instruments as minimum for guidance purpose only subject to the approval of
da
the engineer:
(i) non door interlock MCCBan
(ii) 24 V DC regulated power supply
(iii) 24 V DC Ni Cd battery
St
(iv) 24 V DC Ni Cd battery charger

n
(v) power distribution MCBs for field instruments

io
(vi) programmable Logic Controller (PLC) – Refer to Instrumentation &

Control Section for specifications
ct
(vii) Video Display Unit where specified - Refer to Instrumentation &

tru
Control Section for specifications

(viii) pressure & level indicators - Refer to Instrumentation & Control
s
Section for specifications

on
(ix) sounder complete with auto cut-off time and mute pushbutton as
specified in the particular requirements.
C
(x) flashing Beacon Light (mounted outside building) as specified in the

particular requirements.
ar
(xi) local/remote selector switch

at
(xii) float/level selector switch

Q
(xiii) pumps Duty-Standby selector switch

(xiv) push buttons for lamp test, fault-reset etc.
(xv) status Indicating Lamps
(xvi) control relays, timers and control fuses as required according to the
logic + 20% as spares wired to the terminals.
(xvii) zener barriers
(xviii) hygrostatically controlled Anti-condensation heater
(xix) standard and special terminals to suit the applications requirement
(xx) terminal kiosk (A separate partitioned terminals arrangement clearly
labelled identifying IN/OUT). [All wires to field devices and telemetry
section must be routed through terminal kiosk].
(xxi) 240V, 13 amp AC single phase 3 pin (flat) standard socket

(cc) the telemetry section shall consist of the following controls as minimum for
guidance purpose only subject to the approval of the engineer:
(i) Non door interlock MCCB
(ii) 24 V DC Ni Cd battery
(iii) 24 V DC Ni Cd battery charger
(iv) Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) – Refer to Instrumentation & Control
Section for specifications
(v) Interposing relays
14
(vi) Hygrostatically controlled Anti-condensation heater
20
(vii) Terminals, control fuses and surge protection etc.
2.2.3 MCCB Panel Boards
s
1 General.
rd
(a) MCCB panel boards shall be manufactured to IEC 61439, factory
da
assembled and type tested certified by an internationally authorising testing body
(b) the panel board shall be suitable for operating on a 3 phase, 4 wire, 415 V
an
supply
(c) the symmetrical through fault rating shall be 25 kA for a duration of 3 seconds
St
(d) if necessary, the panel board shall include a suitable hardwood backboard to
accommodate the QGEWC metering equipment.
n
2 Construction.
io
(a) the panel board shall be of robust construction, fabricated from heavy gauge
ct
folded
tru
steel angles strengthened by horizontal and vertical folded channels

(b) the frame work shall be enclosed in self-supporting, screw -on front, rear and
s
top
on
covers of sheet steel with gaskets

(c) the doors shall be lockable and have concealed hinges provided with gaskets
C
(d) thickness of the steel sheet shall be not less than 1.5 mm
(e) the panel shall be suitable for wall mounting.
ar
(f) the structure shall be protected from rust and oxidisation before being given a
at
coat of
primer and finishing coats
Q
(g) the finished paint colour shall be to Engineer‟s approval selected from BS 381.
3 Busbars
(a) the bus bars shall be of high conductivity, rectangular section, hard drawn
copper,
electrolytically tined suitably marked and colour sleeved coded in accordance
with BS
158/159
(b) the short circuit ratings of the bus bars shall be as stated above
4 Components
(a) the switch boards shall comprise of the following components:

(i) incoming: suitably rated isolator/MCCB as indicated on the tender

drawings and
to comply with relevant Clauses of this specifications
(ii) outgoing: Moulded Case Circuit Breakers of 25 kA fault level with
ratings
as per the tender drawings and de rated for 50 ºC ambient
temperature.. All MCCB of rating 100 Amps and above shall have
adjustable thermal and magnetic facilities
(iii) meters: 3 ammeters with dead pointer to indicate the maximum
reading and 1
No. 0-500 Volt voltmeter with Off/ph-ph/ph-N selector switch, for
14
incoming
supply.
20
2.2.4 Distribution Boards
1 Distribution boards shall be provided to serve lighting, fans, socket outlets, and other
s
appliances. Board shall be arranged in banks of ways as indicated on the schedule of points.
rd
2 The Distribution Board shall be a part of the MCC cubicle assembly unless otherwise
da
indicated in the project Documentation
3
an
Where there is Distribution Board stand alone, then:
(a) Distribution Boards shall be flush mounted type, or surface mounted type and
St
shall be mounted separately from motor control centres or switchboards. The
boards shall be totally enclosed, dust protected, vermin proof type. Distribution
boards installed in all plant rooms and other process areas shall be corrosion
n
resistant.
io
(b) Enclosure shall be fabricated from robust galvanised sheet steel fully rust-
ct
proofed, stove enamelled, of minimum thickness of 1.5mm and shall be

protected to IP 32 for internal use with neoprene gaskets for the doors.
tru
(c) The distribution boards shall be provided with fixed cover and a hinged door with
padlock which can be opened without any obstruction about 120 degrees and
s
conduit knockouts from the top and bottom. The hinged door with a lock and key
on
shall be integral part of the fixed cover.

(d) The cabinet shall be constructed so that it is necessary to open the door to
C
operate Miniature Circuit Breakers or ELCB. Access to interior components and

internal wiring shall be gained by removing a separate barrier within the
ar
enclosure.
4 All distribution boards shall be controlled by an adequately rated on-load main isolator or
at
circuit breaker to interrupt the supply to the entire distribution board. This main isolator or
Q
circuit breaker shall be double pole for single phase DBs and triple pole for three phase DBs.
Moreover, it shall be connected to the busbar directly without links whatsoever.
5 A circuit label shall be provided to indicate the area served by each MCB.
6 Busbars shall:
(a) be of appropriate current carrying capacity at least equal to the rating of the
main incoming isolator or circuit breaker.
(b) be of high electrical conductivity copper.
(c) Where the main isolator or circuit breaker is connected to bus bars then these
bus bars shall be shrouded.
7 Each DB shall have separate earth and neutral bars having the same number of connection
as there are for phase connections. A cable connection shall be made from earth bar to the
incoming cable gland earth tag. All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full
load current of the controlling breaker which shall be of flat tinned copper rigidly mounted,
supported on shock-resisting, non-hygroscopic, high grade insulators with high resistance to
tracking, not subject to mould growth or termite attack with adequate spacing and clearance.
8 Connection from the bus bars to the breakers shall be made by using solid circular insulated
conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed. Each connection to or
from a phase or neutral bar shall have its own brass fixing screws, washers, butts and
locknuts.
14
9 Each distribution board shall be fitted with an identification label on its front cover. The label
shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution boards reference number/letter, rating in
volts & amperes and the number of ways in English and Arabic. In addition to the above a
20
reference card shall be fitted inside the distribution board giving details of each circuit, MCB
size, cable size and location. The reference card shall be affixed to the inside of the
distribution board‟s door via a transparent envelope.
s
rd
10 Distribution Boards (DB) located remote from the main switch boards shall be mounted at a
height of not less than 1200mm from finished floor level to bottom of the DB and maximum
da
height of this DB shall be 2200mm from finished floor level to top of DB.
11
an
All live terminals of parts and bus bars shall shrouded with insulating materials to ensure that
it is impossible for any live metal to be touched while withdrawing or replacing MCBs.
St
12 The correct rating of breakers shall be fitted in each way to conform to the size of the final
circuit conductor and its connected load in conformity with KAHRAMAA.
n
13 All breakers and DBs shall be of one make throughout the whole of the works.
io
ct
2.3 INSTALLATION
tru
2.3.1 General
s
1 The M.V./MCC cubicle switchboards shall be supplied and installed in the building or in a
on
separate services building or in substations as indicated on the Drawings.
2 The Contractor shall submit details of proposed equipment and method of installation to the
C
Engineer and QGEWC for approval prior to commencement of installation work.

ar
3 Provide all the motor control equipment installations, wiring installations and tests, including
connections and interconnections for the electrical controls as indicated, specified and
at
required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces shown on the
Drawings.
Q
4 Equipment shall be installed level and securely attached to the concrete foundations and
walls with expansion anchors. The sections shall be joined together with bolts, nuts and
washers to form a complete unit assembly. Floor standing equipment shall be installed on
concrete plinths as shown on the Drawings.
2.3.2 Earth Bonding
1 Each MV/MCC switchgear panel or section shall be individually connected (at both end of the
panel earthing bar) to two separate earthing pits trough the main earth bar located in the
electrical or cable basement rooms. Calculation for the earthing cable size shall be provided
using professional dedicated, international recognized approved software subject of
Engineer‟s approval.
2 Each panel section shall be cross bonded to adjacent panel section earthing terminal.
3 MV/MCC panel earthing conductor to earthing bar and earthing pit is to be sized for
maximum earth fault current for 5 seconds with final conductor temperature not exceeding
160 °c or sized not less than 20 mm² per 100 KVA of transformer rating, and with a minimum
of 95 mm².
END OF PART
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 20: Elevators/Escalators
20 ELEVATORS/ESCALATORS ........................................................................ 2
20.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

20.1.1 Scope 2
20.1.2 References 2
20.1.3 Submittals 3
20.1.5 Warranty 3
20.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 4
14
20.2.2 Electric Traction Passenger Lifts 4
20
20.2.3 Electro-Hydraulic Passenger Lift 8
20.2.4 Escalators 11
s
20.3 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 15
rd
20.3.1 Site Condition Inspection 15
da
20.3.2 Preparatory Work 15
an
20.3.4 Field Quality Control 17
20.3.5 Field Adjustments 17
St
20.3.6 Acceptance Inspection and Tests 17

20.3.7 Clean Up 18
n
20.3.8 Manufacturer's Services 18

io
20.3.9 Maintenance and Guarantees 18

ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
20 ELEVATORS/ESCALATORS
20.1 GENERAL
20.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifics the general requirements for elevators and escalators used only for
passengers
14
This Section
20
Part 4 Motor Starters
Part 6 Cables and Small wiring
s
rd
Part 8 Trunking
Part 9 Cable Trays
da
Part 11 Light fittings
an
Part 15 Electric Motors
Part 22 Earthing and Bonding
St
Part 23 Testing
Section 5 Concrete
n
Section 16 Structural metal work

io
Section 17 Metal work

ct
ru
20.1.2 References
st
on
BS 476 ........................ Fire tests on building materials and structures

C
BS 5655 (EN 81) .......Lifts and service lifts

BS 5656 (EN 115) ......Safety rules for the construction and installation of escalators and
ar
passenger conveyors
at
BS 6977 ...................... Insulated flexible cables for lifts and for other flexible connections
BS 7255 ...................... Code of practice for safe working in lifts
Q
BS EN 9000 ................ Quality management and assurance standards
Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation Regulations for passenger and goods lifts.
20.1.3 Submittals
1 Manufacturer’s product data and samples.
(a) submit three 75 x 300 or 300 mm length samples of each required finish, excluding
those intended for painting after installation, for the Engineer’s approval
(b) catalogues shall be provided of signal equipment units to show push buttons, lights,
graphics and mounting provisions.
2 Shop Drawings:
14
(a) drawings for all main components including the pit, hoistway, and the machine room
general arrangements, foundations and installations, sectional elevations of the
20
hoistway, car and entrance details, and signal details
(b) component specifications and preventative maintenance charts
s
(c) electrical schematics and one copy of the approved master electric schematic and
rd
approved lubrication chart shall be framed with a clear plastic cover and mounted on
the machine room wall
da
3 Motor data including: an
(a) manufacturer
St
(b) minimum guaranteed efficiency
(c) power factor under all load conditions
n
(d) locked rotor current

io
(e) motor speed

ct
(f) mounting details

ru
4 Certificates of Compliance.
st
5 Certified Test Reports.

on
6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

C
7 Training Programme.
ar

at
Q
1 Products shall be from an experienced manufacturer who can demonstrate equal or larger
capacity installations using similar equipment, installed and successfully operating for at least
5 years, with names and phone numbers of contacts at installations to verify performance.
The manufacturer shall comply with ISO 9000 or equivalent.
20.1.5 Warranty
1 All components shall be free of defects in materials or workmanship.
2 The Contractor shall remain responsible for routine maintenance for 400 days from the date
of acceptance of the installation by the Engineer. During this period the Contractor shall
promptly replace and/or repair any fault with supply of all spare parts without any cost to the
Client.
3 Motors shall have 5 year warranties.
4 Individual warranties by component manufacturers in lieu of single source responsibility by

the elevator manufacturer shall not be acceptable.
5 Items which fail during the warranty period, excluding expendable items, shall be replaced
without cost to the Employer.
6 Manufacturer’s guarantee and warranty certificates shall be provided prior to equipment start-
up.
14
20.2 PRODUCTS
20
20.2.1 Description
1 Equipment shall be provided by a single manufacturer who shall design, fabricate, and test all
s
components of the elevators as well as supervise, install and commission the units.
rd
2 Elevators shall be complete in all respects and shall include but not necessarily be limited to
da
the following components: an
(a) machine room equipment
(b) hoistway equipment
St
(c) elevator entrance ways

n
(d) door opening and closing devices

io
(e) elevator cars

ct
(f) car control stations

ru
(g) landing control stations

st
(h) appurtenances
on
3 The Contractor shall make all modifications, adjustment, and improvements to the elevator
system necessary to meet the performance requirements specified. The elevator shall
C
provide safe, smooth operation, complying with all building and elevator codes required by
the authorities.
ar
20.2.2 Electric Traction Passenger Lifts

at
1 Machine Room Equipment

Q
(a) general: shall be provided with manufacturer’s standard pre-engineered elevator

system in accordance with the specification. Manufacturer’s may provide custom-
manufactured elevator systems that meet specified requirements. Where
components are not specified, components shall be provided as for manufacturer’s
standard pre-engineered elevator systems, or as necessary to produce a safe and
fully operational elevator system
(b) motor control: solid-state power converter/inverter with line filters or chokes to
prevent peaks or spikes from feeding back into building power systems
(c) hoisting machine: variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) thyristor, traction-type,
geared hoisting machine with squirrel cage motors designed specifically for elevators.
Unless specified otherwise, variable voltage variable frequency AC drives shall be
used. Refer to part 5 of this section for general specification
(d) selector: microprocessor solid-state, integrated controller with durable cabinet,
lockable doors and adequate ventilation to dissipate heat, wired to identified terminal
block studs, with identifying symbols or letters identical to those on wiring diagrams,
permanently marked adjacent to each component on the controller
(e) The microprocessor based controller shall include the facility to interface with Remote
Elevator Monitoring (REM) and Elevator Management Service (EMS) as a part of
14
Building Management System through the data network system.
20
2 Hoistway Equipment
(a) guide rails and brackets: T-section cold drawn (not fabricated) guide rails and
s
brackets suitable for travel, car weight and support locations at structural floors, with
rd
backing as EN 81
(b) buffers: energy dissipation type with blocking and supports
da
(c) normal terminal stopping devices: in accordance with EN 81
an
(d) electricity wiring: copper conductors with 600 volt insulation throughout with
individual wires coded, with 10 % spare capacity. All connections shall be identified
St
on studs or terminal blocks, rated 75 °C minimum. Splices or similar connections in

wiring are not permitted except at terminal blocks, control cabinets or junction boxes.
n
Flexible heavy-duty service cord to BS 6977 may be used between fixed car wiring
io
and car door switches

ct
(e) conduit and duct shall be PVC jacketed or galvanised steel 20 mm minimum
diameter. Flexible conduit shall not exceed 450 mm in length and shall be as in Part 7
ru
(f) entrance equipment:

st
(i) door hangers: shall use two-point suspension with upthrust rollers
on
(ii) door tracks: replaceable bar or formed cold drawn steel with smooth hanger
contact surface
C
(iii) interlocks: operable without retiring cam, with interlocks that are visible and
ar
conspicuous when doors are open, painted matt black

(iv) closures: spring or aspirator type
at
(v) pit stop switches to BS EN 81

Q
3 Hoistway entrances shall be fire rated in accordance with BS 476 Part 8, with frames as
follows:
(a) floor entrances, jambs and heads shall be fabricated steel with a 304 stainless steel
cladding
(b) frames shall be hollow metal, bolted to form a one-piece unit
(c) jamb and head depth and profiles shall be as indicated on the Project Drawings,
fabricated from mild steel not less than 1.2 mm thick, steel pan construction, with
side-opening doors, rubber bumpers to cushion closing impact, and finished
faces as specified. Each door panel shall include gibs. The trailing door gib shall be
in the sill groove throughout the length of travel
(d) sills: extruded hard aluminium

(e) fascia toe guards, dust and fascia width hanger covers: 1.5 mm galvanised steel with
door open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts.
4 Door Opening and Control Devices
(a) safety edge devices shall be full height, infra red, non contact, door edge safety
devices to detect obstruction in the doorway and reverse
(b) nudging action : in the event that the safety edge is operated for a pre-determined
time interval (15-20 seconds) after automatic door closing has been initiated, a buzzer
14
shall sound, and the doors shall close with a maximum of 0.35 Kg-meters kinetic
energy
20
(c) Microprocessor based Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) drive operational
control shall be extended for door control as integral with the car movement.
s
5 Car Equipment
rd
(a) car frames: welded or bolted steel channel construction
da
(b) platforms: isolated type, steel, construction fire proofed on the underside
an
(c) guide shoes: nylon sliding type
(d) car sills: hard aluminium type sill
St
(e) toe guards: in accordance with EN 81

(f) car door hangers and tracks: as specifications on hoistway entrance hangers and
n
tracks
io
(g) headers: minimum 1.2 mm thick steel shaped to provide stiffening flanges
ct
(h) car door electrical contacts shall operate in conjunction with the car doors so that
ru
elevators cannot operate unless doors are closed, or within tolerances allowed by EN
st
81
(i) door operators : shall be microprocessor based a.c./d.c. capable of opening doors at
on
no less than 60 m/min and accomplishing reversal in no more than 65 mm of door

movement
C
(j) car finishes front return, side & rear wall, door, handrail, floor, ceiling panels, and
ar
light fixtures shall be finished as detailed in the Specifications

at
(k) removable panels shall be provided as specified for side and rear wall panels at
elevators with facings glued to plywood, full-height between top of base and ceiling of
Q
car. Panel joints shall be flush with panel surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s
standard layouts. Elevator car suspended ceiling panels shall have suitable strong
backing in the ceiling frame to prevent sagging, without exposed screws or bolts.
6 Car Control Stations
(a) car control stations shall have durable vandal resistant face plates and micro-Touch
Buttons
located no higher than 1620 mm above the car floor (875 mm for alarm buttons)
floor buttons, alarm buttons, door open buttons shall be identified by engraved or
painted letters or symbols in accordance with EN 81
(b) car floor buttons shall have 16 mm numbers on the face of buttons corresponding to
the floors served for registration of the car stops. Call registration lights, located within
or behind the buttons, shall illuminate the floor number corresponding to the call
registered
(c) alarm buttons at the bottom of stations shall be provided to ring bells located
on the car doors. Open and close buttons shall be provided to stop motion of doors
and cause them to return automatically to their fully open or closed position
respectively. Buttons shall be effective while cars are at landings and until cars start
into motion, regardless of any special operational features
(d) car top control stations shall be in accordance with EN81, mounted on car tops,
14
accessible from landings
20
(e) work lights and plug receptacles shall be provided top of elevator car with on-off
switches and bulb guards
(f) car position indicators shall be provided in elevator car operating panels with digital
s
indicators representing floors served and direction of car travel
rd
(i) when cars leave or pass a floor, the numeral representing the floor shall
da
be displayed, thereby indicating the position of the car in the hoistway at all
times an
(ii) proper direction arrows shall be continuously illuminated to indicate the
direction of travel
St
7 Landing Control Stations

n
(a) micro-touch buttons stations shall be provided adjacent to door jambs of each
io
entrance with the following features:

ct
(i) flush-mounted vandal resistant durable faceplates and buttons for each
direction of travel, illuminated to indicate call registration
ru
(ii) A fire recall station shall be provided at the main access level in addition to the
st
call button
on
(b) signal fixtures shall be provided at each entrance to indicate the intended direction of
travel of the elevator to waiting passengers, with the following features:
C
(i) display numerals for car level, arrow and a gong mounted in the box fastened
ar
in the wall. Up or down arrows shall be illuminated and a gong sounded (once
for up direction travel and twice for down direction travel) prior to the car’s
at
arrival at the floor. The light shall remain illuminated until shortly before the
elevator doors start to close
Q
(ii) hall lanterns shall be provided, of impact resistant plastic lenses and with
satin stainless steel finish.
8 Performance. The elevator shall:
(a) speed to within plus or minus 10 % of the specified speed under any loading condition
(b) safely lower, stop, and hold up to 125 % of the rated load
(c) stop the elevator within plus or minus 10 mm of the design landing elevation under
any loading condition.
9 Unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation, operation shall be "Selective Down
Collective Automatic Operation" as defined in EN 81. Doors shall open automatically when a
car arrives at the main floor to permit egress of passengers, whether or not the main floor call
has been registered in the car. When the car has arrived at the landing it shall have its doors
open until the car is dispatched, or on expiration of a timed loading interval with no demand.
10 Emergency Features shall comply with EN 81 for Emergency Firemen’s Service, and the
following:
(a) emergency operation: the elevator shall be equipped with a control system to operate
(b) and recall the car in fire or other emergency condition.
14
(c) terminals shall be provided on the controller for connection of signals from the
20
sensors. Operation shall be similar on all elevators and visual/audible signals shall
operate until return is complete or automatic operation restored
(d) standby lighting and alarm: during power failure, car lighting and car alarm shall be
s
supplied with standby power via a car-mounted battery unit, including solid state
rd
charger, with testing means, installed in common metal container. Batteries shall be
da
rechargeable with 10 year minimum life expectancy. Car mounted units shall operate
alarm bell and light only an
(e) emergency landing device: in the event of normal power failure, an emergency
evacuation power supply shall drive the lift to a nearby floor. This controller shall be
St
operated by sealed batteries which will be kept automatically charged for use by the
unit:
n
(i) standby power shall be provided by 24/12 V battery units mounted in the
io
machine room, including solid-state chargers with testing means installed in

common metal containers
ct
(ii) upon arrival at floor landings, elevator doors shall open automatically
ru
and remain open until the regular door time has expired. Elevators shall
st
then become inactivated

(iii) upon restoration of normal power supply to the building, elevators shall
on
automatically resume normal operation.

C
11 Protection of electrical work: boxes and enclosures shall be provided with gasket covers.
Doors and motors shall be totally enclosed.
ar
20.2.3 Electro-Hydraulic Passenger Lift

at
Q
1 General: materials and equipment associated with electro-hydraulic passenger lifts shall
comply generally with the requirements stipulated for electric traction lifts above, with specific
requirements stipulated below.
2 Lift Machines
(a) hydraulic pumps shall of the high efficiency type of either vane or screw type
design. Means shall be provided where pumps may be coupled to the driving
motors without the effect of eccentric loading on the pump bearings
(b) if pumps/motors of monoblock construction are offered, access shall be provided
for inspection/replacement of coupling systems, thrust bearings, etc.
(c) pump/motor assemblies shall be mounted on rigid mild steel bedplates and
suitably insulated, to absorb vibration of pump/motor assemblies
(d) direction of rotation of pumps shall be clearly indicated on pumps where they
can be readily seen
(e) pumps shall be clearly marked to indicate inlets and outlets, related to a specified
direction of rotation if external to power systems. Inlet sides to pumps shall
be fitted with renewable fine mesh filters
(f) data plates with manufacturer’s name, part model and serial number shall be
permanently displayed on or adjacent to pump/motor assemblies.
14
3 Drive Motor. Motors shall be suitable for operation for 415 V 50 Hz 3 Phase
20
(a) motor drive: solid-state power converter/inverter with line filters or chokes to
prevent peaks or spikes from feeding back into building power systems
s
(b) pump drive: variable voltage variable frequency(VVVF) thyristor controlled, geared
rd
machine with squirrel cage motors designed specifically for elevators. Unless
specified otherwise, variable voltage variable frequency a.c. drives shall be used.
da
Refer to part 5 of this section for general specification
(c) control: microprocessor solid-state, integrated controller with durable cabinet,
an
lockable doors and adequate ventilation to dissipate heat, wired to identified terminal
block studs, with identifying symbols or letters identical to those on wiring diagrams,
St
permanently marked adjacent to each component on the controller

(d) The microprocessor based controller shall include the facility to interface with Remote
n
Elevator Monitoring (REM) and Elevator Management Service (EMS) as a part of

io
Building Management System through the data network system

ct
(e) shall run with the minimum of noise and vibration, capable of a continuous duty cycle
of at least 60 motor starts per hour. Contractors shall submit full test certificates in
ru
triplicate for all tests. Refer to part 5 of this section for motor starter general
st
specification and part 15 for electric motor general specification.

on
4 Anti-creep devices shall be provided which shall automatically limit the car movement within
75 mm of the landing, from any point within the interlock zone, irrespective of handling doors.
C
Devices shall only operate in landing level interlocked zones, and shall operate cars in the
‘UP’ direction only. Operation may depend on the availability of the electrical power supply
ar
provided that:
at
(a) main switches are kept in closed positions at all times except during maintenance,
repairs and inspections
Q
(b) electrical protective devices shall not cause electrical power to be removed from the
anti-creep mechanism, except when such a device operates in consequence of motor
failure.
5 Mufflers: High pressure systems shall be suitably muffled. Flexible pipes shall be included to
prevent the hydraulic pulse attenuation from being transmitted to cars.
6 Cylinders and rams
(a) Cars shall be directly supported by one side-acting steel ram turned true parallel,
fine polished, and of sufficient diameter and strength to raise the Contract load at
Contract speed
(b) ram attachments to car platforms shall be of sufficient strength to support ram
weight with a safety factor of 4
(c) rams shall not be subjected to bending stresses or eccentric loading. Eccentric
loading shall be taken by car frames and guide shoes
(d) Rams shall be provided with solid metal stops at limits of stroke, or other means
to prevent rams travelling beyond limits of cylinders
(e) multi stage rams, shall only be used if approved by the Engineer
(f) cylinder interconnections shall incorporate flow restriction valves to limit
ram descent speed, should supply pressure lines fracture
14
(g) suitable trays shall be fitted to ram heads to collect leakage from ram seals.
20
7 Pipes and Pipe Supports
(a) all necessary pipework and supports shall be provided between cylinder and valve
s
block assemblies. Pipes shall be supported such that undue stresses are eliminated
rd
at all joints, bends and fittings, particularly at sections of systems subject to vibration
da
(b) cross-sectional areas of pipework shall be sufficient to prevent cavitation and
starvation and not to induce turbulence or rise in temperature of oil.
an
8 Oil Storage Tank
St
(a) oil storage tanks shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel provided with
tight fitting covers, oil level gauges and protective vents. Suction inlets shall be
n
provided with filters to prevent ingress of foreign matter to systems. Means

of completely draining oil storage tanks shall be provided.
io
ct
9 Valves
ru
(a) check valves shall be provided and shall be installed so that they hold the lift car
with the Contract load at any point in the lift well, when the pump stops, or the
st
pressure drops below the minimum operating pressure

on
(b) check, relief and other auxiliary valves shall withstand a static pressure equal to twice
the normal operative pressure without damage
C
(c) valve gear/blocks shall be fitted with gradual restriction/release of hydraulic fluid to
provide smooth acceleration and slowing of cars
ar
(d) main pressure supply restrictions shall be diverted back to oil reservoirs and not to
at
pump outlets
Q
(e) relief valves shall be located between pumps and check valves and shall be
of such types and so installed in by-pass connections that valves shall pass oil
directly to tanks and not to pump suction sides
(f) main controlling valves shall be constructed such that they will remain closed to
supply when pressure is shut off
(g) electrically controlled valves shall remain safe in the event of power supply
failure.
20.2.4 Escalators
1 Escalator Trusses
(a) escalator trusses shall be of welded construction, fabricated from warm rolled
standard ST 52 steel profiles. Sides of trusses shall be of frame work design
(b) truss design shall ensure that the maximum deflection is less than D/880 of the
distance between end supports with a calculated passenger load of 500 N/m2.
(c) oil tight welded 5 mm sheet steel bottom plate shall be welded over the full length
and width of the bottom of the trusses
14
(d) prior to welding, profiles shall be sand blasted, and after welding shall be
protected against corrosion by minimum 40 µm thick primer coat
20
(e) a maintenance room shall be provided at the end of the lower landing to EN 115
(f) truss support angles welded to the truss at the ends of both landings
s
shall be capable of carrying the weight of the escalator and the load transmitted by
rd
the passengers (5000 N/m2)
da
(g) teflon sliding supports shall be used at the lower landing and if an expansion joint of
the building is located between upper and lower landings
an
(h) anti vibration rubber pads shall be provided to ensure that escalator support angles are
isolated from building structures. Pads shall be used at both landings.
St
2 Track System
n
(a) closed track systems shall be provided to guide and support step chains and steps as
io
they cycle around trusses

ct
(b) track holders shall be welded to the framework of the trusses in order to fasten the
ru
individual tracks
st
3 Main Drive
on
(a) main drives shall be located in upper landings and shall consist of a rigid solid shaft to
eliminate tension with self-aligning spherical roller bearings
C
(b) main drive shaft bearings shall be replaceable without dismantling balustrades
ar
(c) main drives shall provide smooth operation and power transfer from drives to moving
steps.
at
4 Tension carriage
Q
(a) tension carriages shall be located at lower landings of escalators for tensioning step
chains
(b) step chains shall be guided laterally by sliding block guides and constantly tensioned
by two compression springs
(c) reversal tracks shall be fabricated from 3.5 mm sheet steel
(d) special openings shall be provided to remove steps for maintenance or replacement
(e) correct chain tension shall be monitored by safety switches at each side of the tension
carriages.
5 Step Chain
(a) step chains shall be made of flat steel links, provided with wheels and interconnected
by pins made of hardened ground steel
(b) the breaking strength per stand shall be 150 kn. The safety factor shall be 5 for the
maximum rise. Step chain pins shall allow a maximum pin pressure of 32.3
N/mm2 at maximum rise
(c) both sides of step chains shall be linked by solid axles to optimise performance
(d) step chain wheels shall be provided at both ends of step axles between step chain
links and shall have sealed bearings and oil resistant rubber tyres.
14
6 Steps
20
(a) steps shall be one piece die-cast aluminium design with cleated treads and rises,
ensuring maximum safety as each step meshes with the adjacent step
s
(b) step rollers shall have polyurethane tyres
rd
(c) step tread pitches shall be 8.47 mm. Riser pitches shall be 16.94 mm
da
(d) steps shall be fastened to step chain by means of spring loaded pins providing
a positive fixing to the axle, allowing the steps to be easily removed for maintenance
an
(e) step systems shall be designed such that step removal does not require
St
dismantling of skirting or balustrade parts
(f) steps with yellow demonstration lines or yellow plastic inserts may be required, as
n
specified.
io
7 Handrail drive system

ct
(a) handrail drive systems shall be driven directly from step chains via drive sprockets and
ru
reinforced toothed belts

st
(b) handrail drive units shall be located on both sides of the escalator in the incline
section close to upper landings
on
(c) syncronisity between steps and handrails shall be assured to within EN115
C
recommendations
(d) design and positioning of drive systems shall be such that components can be
ar
inspected without need for step removal

at
(e) handrails shall be provided as endless vulcanised loops. Handrails shall have
endless inner steel cord members to make handrails free of elongation,
Q
eliminating the need for frequent retensioning

(f) handrail guides shall be made from extruded aluminium profiles, having special
polymer covers throughout the length to reduce friction between guides and handrails
to a minimum
(g) passenger lines shall have tensioned spring clamps located between aluminium
profiles and glass panels
(h) return lines shall have aluminium profiles fastened to trusses using screws.
8 Balustrades, decking and skirting
(a) balustrade heights above finished floors shall be 1000 mm or 930 mm in upper and
lower landing areas
(b) inclined sections heights shall be 842 mm at right angles to step nose lines
(c) material and finishes for balustrades, decking and skirting profiles shall be as
specified
9 Combs, Comb Plates and Floor Plates
(a) combs, comb plates and floor plates shall be designed for maximum passenger
14
loads in accordance with EN 115
20
(b) combs shall be made of die cast aluminium, screwed to comb
plates for ease of replacement if necessary. Comb teeth shall have intentional
rupture points, allowing them to break easily in the event of objects getting trapped
s
between steps and combs, thereby preventing serious damage
rd
(c) comb plates shall be made from extruded aluminium profiles with laterally
da
extending grooves preventing passengers from slipping. Grooves shall be
powder coated black and the surfaces finished as stated in the particular specification
an
(d) fixed floor plates shall be made from extruded aluminium profiles with laterally
extending grooves to match the comb plate. The grooves shall be powder coated
St
black and surface finished as specified
(e) removable floor plates shall be provided, allowing access to both machine rooms and
n
maintenance rooms. Removable floor plates shall be constructed from low weight
io
extruded aluminium profile sections allowing ease of the removal by one service
mechanic. Standard removable floor plates shall be recessed by 7 mm, allowing
ct
for infill materials as specified.

ru
10 Drive Machinery and Brakes

st
(a) drives, motors and gearboxes shall be designed to ensure quiet and smooth operation
on
of the escalator
(b) star delta starting shall be provided for motors > 5 kW
C
(c) motor insulation Class F, protection class IP 55

ar
(d) operational brakes located between motor and gear boxes shall have an AC
commercial magnets and shall use asbestos free brake linings. Double acting shoe
at
brakes shall be fail safe and shall operate automatically via springs in the event
Q
of power failure or on safety switches tripping

(e) a hand winding devices shall be provided with machines in order to move step
bands by hand
11 Electronic Controllers
(a) protection class controller cabinet shall be IP 54

(b) control voltages shall be < 50 V
(c) cabinets shall have an industrial enamel triple corrosion resistant coating with the
following layers:
(i) phosphate layer
(ii) primer coating, minimum 25 µm layer thickness
(iii) final coating, colour RAL 5019 (blue), minimum 35 µm layer thickness, or as
otherwise specified
(d) controllers shall be equipped with modular electronic boards. Mother boards
shall cover all basic functions
14
(e) interface capabilities shall be provided for remote monitoring by volt free
contacts
20
(f) controllers shall include the following functions:
(i) directional settings
s
(ii) supervision of power supply voltage
rd
(iii) full motor protection against overheating
da
(iv) fault indicator by means of display an
(v) control of safety contacts
(vi) asymmetric relays
St
12 Operation Panels
n
(a) operation panels shall be installed at upper landings and at lower landings
io
(b) panels shall be located in steel panels next to handrail entry guards
ct
(c) operational panels at the lower landings shall be equipped with key switches and stop
ru
buttons only
(d) operation panels at upper landings shall be equipped with key switches, key boards,
st
displays and stop buttons

on
(e) displays shall have 8 digits, using 5 x 7 dot matrix for alpha numeric indicators with
text shown in plain language
C
(f) after setting of passwords via the key board, displays shall show maintenance
ar
and fault finding information, including but not limited to:

(i) memory of faults (50 messages deep) e.g. amount of faults within a definite
at
period of time
Q
(ii) operating hour counter (total and per week)

(iii) start counter (total and per week)
(iv) stopping distance and deceleration indicator
13 Electrical Safety Devices
(a) the escalator shall be equipped with all safety devices required by EN 115 including,
but not limited to:
(i) emergency stop buttons and key switches at landings
(ii) handrail entry devices
(iii) broken step chain devices

(iv) comb plate safety devices
(v) broken step and chain wheel control contacts
(vi) step chain roller monitoring switches
(vii) non reversal devices (electronic device, located in the controller)
(viii) operational brakes
(ix) motor thermal devices
14
(x) sockets for manual inspection
(xi) main and secondary circuit breakers
20
(xii) earthing contacts
(xiii) asymmetric relays (inside controllers)
s
rd
(xiv) hand lamps
da
20.3 INSTALLATION
20.3.1 Site Condition Inspection

an
1 Before the commencement of installation of equipment the hoistway and machine room
St
areas shall be examined to verify that no irregularities exist that would effect the execution of
the work, particularly:
n
(a) the hoistway size, plumpness and wellway lengths

io
(b) the support areas for bracket and beams etc.

ct
ru
2 Installation shall not commence until previous work conforms to Project requirements.
st
20.3.2 Preparatory Work

on
1 Legal Hoistways and Pit Enclosures. The following shall be provided:

C
(a) clear plumb hoistway with variations not exceeding 25 mm at any point
(b) bevel cants (15 degrees from vertical) over any rear or side wall ledges or
ar
beams that project 50 mm or more into the hoistway

at
(c) provisions for guide rail bracket supports in concrete in place as required, with
necessary supports provided by elevator installer as indicated on shop drawings
Q
walls and floors cut and patch as necessary

(d) blockouts or cutouts for push button stations, hall lanterns and position indicators
(e) front hoistway wall, erected after entrances have been installed
(f) pit ladders, cars and counterweight buffers, and rail load supports
(g) waterproof pits and 600 x 600 x 600 mm deep sump pit
(h) barriers at open hoistways and entrances during construction
(i) cars, entrances, and special metal finishes protected from damage after installation
(j) hoistways vented to outside air.
2 Machine Rooms. The following shall be provided:
(a) facilities conforming to EN 81 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

(b) concrete on metal deck machine room floors
(c) fire-rated, self-closing, and lockable machine room access doors installed
(d) machine room ventilation
(e) machine room floor slab, smoke venting grates, dampers, and ducts installed
(f) machine room walls, ceiling and floor painted and monocoat beam fireproofing
sealed to prevent flaking.
14
3 Electrical Services. The following shall be provided:
20
(a) pit and machine room lighting and convenience outlets in accordance with EN 81
(b) conduits run from elevator hoistways to ground level control consoles. Sizes and
s
locations as indicated on elevator installation drawings
rd
(c) 415 V, 3-phase, 50 Hz main power feeders to terminals of each elevator controller
da
unit, including protected lockable "OFF" disconnect switch (copper conductors to
terminals) an
(d) 240 V a.c., single-phase, 50 Hz, power feeders to each car controller available for
lighting and exhaust blowers, including individual 20-amp circuit breakers at locations
St
shown on elevator shop drawings

(e) suitable power feeders and branch wiring circuits as required to elevator
n
control panels in machine rooms as designated by elevator installer.

io
20.3.3 Installation
ct
ru
1 The elevator installer shall supervise and co-ordinate the preparation of all shop drawings,
the selection and furnishing of all materials included in the specifications, and the installer
st
shall also install the cars. Installation work shall be to BS 7255. The elevator installer shall
on
also be responsible for the supply and installation of the following:
(a) electrical controls and signal fixtures and wires complete

C
(b) conduit and wiring to lighting and ventilating fixtures, with temporary power and
ar
lighting as required
(c) headers, tracks and thresholds
at
(d) hangers and gibs on car doors and hang doors

Q
(e) communications system as specified

(f) basic car construction of 1.2 mm steel, with vent slots in accordance with EN 81, and
wall panels as specified
(g) exhaust blowers, isolated from steel canopies on rubber grommets.
2 Each equipment item shall be installed in accordance with accepted manufacturer's

directions, referenced codes and specifications, with clearances complying with the same.
3 Items shall be installed so that they may be removed by portable hoists or other means for
maintenance and/or repair, and so that access for maintenance is safe and readily available,
in accordance with BS 7255.
20.3.4 Field Quality Control
1 Inspection
(a) work at job sites will be checked during the course of installations. Full co-operation
with inspections is mandatory
(b) corrective work required shall be accomplished prior to performing further
installations dependent upon, or related to, required corrections.
2 Acceptance. The Engineer’s and Employer’s acceptance inspections shall be performed,

before acceptance of the works. Verification will be required that tests have been completed,
14
corrective work accomplished and installation approved for issuance of a permit to operate.
20
20.3.5 Field Adjustments
1 Guide rails shall be aligned vertically within a tolerance of 1.5 mm in 30 m. Joints shall be
s
secure without gaps and irregularities filed to a smooth surface.
rd
2 Cars shall be balanced to equalise pressure of roller guide shoes on rails
da
3 Equipment shall be lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
an
4 Motors, controller, levelling switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocking, and
St
safety devices shall be adjusted to achieve required performance levels.
20.3.6 Acceptance Inspection and Tests

n
io
1 Acceptance of installations shall be made only after all field quality control and tests are
ct
complete, all submittals and certificates have been received, and the Engineer is satisfied
that the following have been satisfactorily completed. The Contractor shall supply, labour,
ru
materials and equipment necessary for tests:

st
(a) workmanship and equipment comply with specifications

on
(b) speed, capacity, and floor-to-floor performance comply with specifications

(c) performance of the following are satisfactory:
C
(i) starting, accelerating, running

ar
(ii) decelerating, stopping accuracy, stopping

at
(iii) door operation and closing pressure

Q
(iv) equipment noise levels.

(d) in all test conditions, speed and performance times specified shall be met, stopping
accuracy shall be maintained without re-levelling, and general ride quality shall be
acceptable to the Engineer.
Temperature tests may also be required, at the Engineer’s discretion.

2 Should tests detect any defects or poor workmanship, or non-compliance with or variance
from the specification requirements, the following work and/or repairs shall be completed at
no expense to the Employer:
(a) replace all equipment that does not meet specification requirements
(b) perform all work and supply all labour, materials, and equipment necessary to
complete specified operation and/ or performance
(c) perform all retesting required by the authorities and the Engineer to verify
specified operation and/ or performance.
20.3.7 Clean Up
1 Areas shall be kept orderly and free from debris during Project progress.
2 Loose materials and filings resulting from work on hoistway surfaces and truss interiors shall
be removed.
14
3 The machine room equipment and floor shall be cleared of dirt, oil and grease.
20
4 Hoistways, cars, car enclosures, entrances, operating and signal fixtures, handrails, and trim
shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, and finger marks.
s
rd
20.3.8 Manufacturer's Services
da
1 The manufacturer's representative shall inspect the final installation and supervise initial
operation. Manufacturer’s certificates shall be provided prior to field testing equipment.
an
2 The manufacturer's representative shall instruct and train plant personnel for at least one 8
St
hour day on proper operation and maintenance procedures.

n
20.3.9 Maintenance and Guarantees

io
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the system maintenance and repair of any fault for a
ct
period of 400 days starting from the provisional handing over. During this period the
Contractor shall replace and/or repair any fault with all spare parts without any cost to the
ru
Client.
st
2 The Contractor shall guarantee the system for a period of 400 days. During this period the
on
Contractor shall clear any failure due to design problems or poor installation and
workmanship.
C
END OF PART
ar
at
Q
Part 21: Lightning Protection
21 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ........................................................................... 2
21.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

21.1.1 Scope 2
21.1.2 References 2
21.1.4 Submittals 2
21.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
21.2.1 Materials 2
14
21.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4
20
21.3.2 Testing 5
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
21 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
21.1 GENERAL
21.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for lightening protection.
2 Related Parts and Section are as follows:
14
(a) This Section
20
Part 7 Conduit
Part 9 Cable Trays
s
Part 8 Trunking
rd
Part 2 HV and MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s)
da
21.1.2 References an
St
BS 6651 Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning.
BS 7430 Code of practice for earthing

n
io
ct

tru
1 Design Criteria:
s
(a) the lightning protection system shall be in accordance with QGEWC Rules and
on
Regulations.
21.1.4 Submittals
C
1 Shop Drawing and product Data per Part 1.

ar
(a) submit full technical details and conductor size calculations of each type of cable or
at
wire proposed
Q
(b) submit exact route of each cable or wire proposed.
21.2 PRODUCTS
21.2.1 Materials
1 Generally:
(a) (products used in the lightning protection system shall be copper or an approved
copper alloy, unless otherwise specified, and specifically manufactured for the
purpose.
2 Air Termination Conductors and Down Conductors:
(a) lightning air terminals and down conductors for lightning air terminals shall be
provided as indicated on the drawings. Where vertical air terminations are used,
they shall be min of 15 mm diameter tinned copper (air termination rod)
0.8 meter long with top spike, unless otherwise specified in the Project
Documentation
(b) generally, roof conductors and down conductors shall be of PVC sheathed 3 x mm
(minimum) copper tape. PVC colour to be approved by the Engineer. However, bare
copper tape may be unless indicated otherwise on the Project Drawings or
14
Specification
(c) air termination rods shall be securely anchored and welded
20
(d) down conductors shall be run along the outer surface of the wall or column of the
building
s
rd
(e) down conductors shall be as short as possible, protected and directly connected to
earthing system through test links (refer to item 7 below)
da
(f) anchoring bolts shall be used to hold roof conductors and down conductors in firm
position
an
(g) lightning conductor connectors shall be provided for conductor splice connections and
conductor terminal connections
St
(h) the connectors shall be heavy duty, cast metal and shall have hex-head screws in the
n
bodies and holes in the tongues for bolts

io
(i) TV antenna, HVAC equipment, handrails and structures in the vicinity of the lightning
protection system, if any, shall be bonded to the system by 3x20 sq. mm (minimum)
ct
PVC sheathed copper tape.

tru
3 Main Earth Loops:

s
(a) 25 x 3 mm tinned copper tape, unless otherwise indicated on the Project Drawings or
on
Specification.
C
4 Earth Electrodes:
ar
(a) shall be of the earth rod type

(b) earth rod electrodes: 16 mm diameter steel core copper jacketed type, comprising a
at
high strength steel alloy core with a molten welded copper covering, minimum 0.25
Q
mm thick
(c) to be not less than 3.6 m long, in 1.2 m sections coupled by strong bronze couplers.
5 Earth Connectors:
(a) shall connection of rod electrodes: bolted type.
6 Removable Earth Links:
(a) to comprise a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete with
studs, nuts and washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately sized for
the final connection of the earth electrode.
7 Bolts, Washers And Nuts In Bolted Connections:
(a) high copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.
8 Earth Pit Cover
(a) shall be of heavy duty construction

(b) shall have a recessed lifting hook
(c) shall have a brass plate, engraved “Electrical Earth Below”.
21.3 INSTALLATION
14
21.3.1 Installation
20
1 Removable Earth Links
s
(a) fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected for
rd
testing
da
(b) install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth
electrode. an
2 Bolted Connections:
St
(a) multiple bolt type
(b) where bare copper is bolted in connections contact surfaces shall be silver
n
electroplated.
io
3 Brazed Connections:
ct
(a) where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly clean
tru
metal prior to brazing and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.
4 Connections Between Dissimilar Metals:

s
on
(a) protect by:

(i) painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or
C
(ii) wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.

ar
5 Earth Rod Electrodes:

at
(a) extensible rods of the same diameter shall be installed in holes drilled into the ground.
Q
If ground conditions permit, rods may be driven into the ground either manually or
mechanically. The earth electrode shall be installed at such a depth that it penetrates
the summer water table by a minimum of 2 metres. Under no circumstances shall
lightning protection electrodes be connected to any QGEWC earthing electrode. A
minimum distance of 7 metres shall be provided between any lightning earth electrode
and a QGEWC earth electrode.
(b) weld earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number to make connection
with all incoming cables.
6 Earth Pit:
(a) provide a concrete/PVC pit complete with a heavy duty concrete, cast iron or PVC
cover with recessed lifting hook to the Engineers written approval, at the head of the
earth rod, to protect the rod and allow access to connections for testing.
21.3.2 Testing
1 Testing earthing systems by the earth megger test.
2 The resistance of any one point in the lightning protection earth continuity system to the main
14
earth electrode shall not exceed 10 ohms, unless allowed otherwise by QGEWC, without
taking account of any bonding to other services.
20
3 Install additional earth electrodes in parallel, if these figures are not met.
s
END OF PART
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 22: Earthing and Bonding
22 EARTHING AND BONDING .......................................................................... 2
22.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

22.1.1 Scope 2
22.1.2 References 2
22.1.4 Submittals 2
22.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
22.2.1 Materials 2
14
22.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 3
20
22.3.2 Testing 5
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
22 EARTHING AND BONDING

22.1 GENERAL
22.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for earthing and bonding.

This Section
14
Part 2 HV and MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s)
20
Part 7 Conduit
Part 8 Trunking
s
Part 9 Cable Trays
rd
22.1.2 References
da
BS 7430 ......................Code of practice for earthing

an
1 Design Criteria: the earthing system shall be in accordance with QGEWC Rules and
St
Regulations.
22.1.4 Submittals
n
io
1 Shop Drawing and product data per Part 1.

ct
(a) submit full technical details and conductor size calculations of each type of cable or
tru
wire proposed
(b) submit exact route of each cable or wire proposed.
s
22.2 PRODUCTS
on
22.2.1 Materials
C
1 Generally:
ar
(a) products used in the earthing system shall be copper or an approved copper alloy,
at
unless otherwise specified, and specifically manufactured for the purpose.

Q
2 Earth Continuity Conductors:
(a) sizes shall be as specified by QGEWC, unless otherwise indicated, but in no case shall
size be less than half that of the associated phase conductors
(b) insulation shall be of the same material as insulation in associated sub-circuits.
3 Main Earth Loops:
(a) 25 x 3 mm tinned copper tape, unless otherwise indicated.
4 Rod Electrodes:
(a) shall be of the earth rod type

(b) earth rod electrodes: 16 mm diameter steel core copper jacketed type, comprising a
high strength steel alloy core with a molten welded copper covering
(c) Length as required, in 1.2 m sections coupled by strong bronze couplers.
5 Earth Connectors:
(a) Connection of rod electrodes: shall be bolted type.

(b) All connection of earth electrodes with conductor/tape in earth pit shall be provided
with clamps. Two connection clamps shall be provided for each individual connection.
6 Removable Earth Links:
14
(a) to comprise a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete with
studs, nuts and washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately sized for
20
the final connection of the earth electrode.
7 Bolts, Washers And Nuts In Bolted Connections:
s
(a) high copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.
rd
8 Earth Pit Cover
da
(a) shall be of heavy duty construction an
(b) shall have a recessed lifting hook
(c) shall have a brass plate, engraved “Electrical Earth Below No.XXX”. Including
St
identification No. as per the approved drawings.
22.3 INSTALLATION
n
io
22.3.1 Installation
ct
1 Circuit Wiring
tru
(a) shall have a green/yellow coloured insulated earth continuity cable connecting the
earth bus or earth terminal in switchboards, switchgears, motor control centres and
s
panel boards to the motor, equipment, outlet and other device by earthing lugs. All
on
hand rails and other metal works within 2 m of a potentially live metal surface shall
be earthed.
C
2 Main Earth Loops

ar
(a) Fix in mechanical equipment rooms and other areas indicated on the drawings, in
convenient locations, allowing two return paths to earth
at
(b) Fix copper tape to structure with copper or brass saddles and/or screws. Make tees
Q
and straight joints by riveting and seating

(c) Make branch connections between main loop and major equipment, such as
switchboards, switchgears, motor control centres and large motors, with copper tape
of same size as main loop tape
(d) Make other branch connections to equipment with copper conductors of size not less
than half that of the relative phase conductor.
3 Removable Earth Links
(a) Fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected for
testing
(b) Install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth
electrode.
4 Exposed Earth Cables
(a) Install and locate in a manner to provide maximum mechanical protection, utilising
ceiling corners, suspended ceiling and webs of beams as much as possible.
5 Bolted Connections:
(a) Multiple bolt type

(b) Where bare copper is bolted in connections contact surfaces shall be silver/tin
electroplated.
6 Brazed Connections:
14
(a) where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly clean
(b) metal prior to brazing and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.
20
7 Connections Between Dissimilar Metals:
s
(a) protect by:
rd
(i) painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or
da
(ii) wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
8 Equipment Earthing:
an
(a) connect all non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical/mechanical installation
to the earthing system
St
(b) non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical installation include:

n
(i) metal conduit, cable armour, raceways, outlet boxes, cabinets, and the like
io
(ii) exposed metal parts of apparatus

ct
(iii) enclosures, doors, grills, barriers and the like protecting or shielding
electrical equipment from direct access
tru
(c) series earthing of one piece of equipment to another is not acceptable. Each item
shall be individually connected to earth system
s
on
9 Fire Fighting Equipment:
(a) earth on a separate ring system.

C
10 Motors Earthing:
ar
(a) connect the motor terminal box to the relative earth loop. The terminal must be
mechanically connected to the frame or, where this is not feasible
at
(b) extend the earthing conductor through an insulated bushed opening in the connection
Q
box and connect to the frame.
11 Main Switchboards, Switchgears and Motor Control Centres Earthing:
(a) connect the special earthing lug or busbars inside the cabinet to the main earth
copper tape.
(b) connect all parts of the switchboards, switchgears and motor control centres other
than “live” parts, to the earth bar in the board in an approved manner.
(c) The MV /MCC panel shall be connected at both end of the MV/MCC to a two separate
Earthing pits, (directly or through intermediary Earthing bar installed in MV/MCC
basement) or as approved by the Engineer. The earthing cable calculation shall be
performed with approved professional international recognised licensed software,
Subject to the Engineer’s approval.
12 Distribution Boards Earthing:
(a) connect an earthing conductor from the main distribution earth busbar to an earth
connector welded to the cabinet and earthing bushings on the incoming and outgoing
feeder conduits.
13 Bus-Duct Feeders Earthing:
(a) connect the green/yellow coded earth busbar directly to the earth bus-bar in main
switchboard with earth copper tape
14 Cable Armour Earthing:
14
(a) Connect steel armour to the earthing system Coordinate with QGEWC regarding any
specific earthing requirements for the EHV cable sheaths.
20
15 Earth Rod Electrodes:
(a) extensible rods of the same diameter shall be installed in holes drilled into the ground.
s
If ground conditions permit, rods may be driven into the ground either manually or
rd
mechanically. The earth electrode shall be installed at such a depth that it penetrates
the summer water table by a minimum of 2 metres.
da
(b) bolt earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number to make connection
with all incoming cables. an
16 Earth Pit:
St
(a) Provide a concrete/PVC pit complete with a heavy duty concrete, cast iron or PVC
cover with recessed lifting hook to the Engineers written approval, at the head of the
earth rod, to protect the rod and allow access to connections for testing.
n
io
17 Transformer and MCC/MV Panel Earthing:

ct
(a) Transformer Earthing Terminals are to be connected to MV main earthing bar by bare
copper earthing conductor not less than 30 mm² per 100 kVA of transformer rating,
tru
with a minimum of 120 mm².

(b) Transformer Neutral (Star Point) is to be connected by insulated conductor (colour
s
black) to MV/MCC panel as per QGEWC rules and regulations.

on
(c) MV/MCC panel earthing conductor to earthing bar and earthing pit , is to be sized for
maximum earth fault current for 5 seconds with final conductor temperature not
C
exceeding 160 °C or sized not less than 20 mm² per 100 kVA of transformer rating,
and with a minimum of 95 mm².
ar
22.3.2 Testing
at
1 Testing earthing systems shall be done by the earth megger test. The electrical resistance
Q
value of the earthing system shall not exceed 1 ohm, unless approved otherwise by QGEWC
2 The resistance of any point in the earth continuity system to the main earth electrode shall
not exceed 1 ohm, unless approved otherwise by QGEWC.
3 Install additional earth electrodes if these figures are not met.
END OF PART
Part 23: Inspection and Testing
23 INSPECTION AND TESTING ........................................................................ 2
23.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

23.1.1 Inspection and Tests at Manufacturer's Place 2
23.1.2 Inspection and Tests at Site 3
23.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TESTING...................................................... 4
23.2.1 General 4
23.2.2 Verification of Polarity 5
23.2.3 Earth Electrode Resistance 5
14
23.2.4 Insulation Resistance 5
23.2.5 Ring Circuit Continuity 5
20
23.2.6 Phase Rotation 6
23.2.7 Continuity of Protective Conductor 6
s
23.2.8 Earth-fault Loop Impedance 6
rd
23.2.9 Operation Tests 6
da
23.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING .......................................................... 6
23.3.1 General 6
an
23.4 COMMISSIONING ......................................................................................... 7
St
23.4.1 General 7
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
23 INSPECTION AND TESTING

23.1 GENERAL
23.1.1 Inspection and Tests at Manufacturer's Place
1 The Engineer shall be authorised to inspect, examine and test at any reasonable time and in
the premises of the manufacturer, the quality of the material used for the equipment to be
supplied. These work inspections shall include but not be limited to the following equipment,
lighting fixtures, emergency power equipment, switchgears, switchboards, motor control
centres, main and sub-main distribution boards, Pumps (>75 KW), Motors (>75 KW),
14
Blowers, Compressors, VFDs / AHF(>75 KW), Diesel Generators Sets, GT sets,
MV/FBA/MCCs/Switchgears, SCADA/PLCs, 11/3.3 kV Switchgears, HV Transformers,
HV/EHV cables, UF equipment, UV systems, Chlorination equipment. He shall also be
20
authorised to verify the qualifications of the staff employed by the manufacturer.
2 Should part of the equipment be subcontracted to another manufacturer, the Contractor shall
s
ensure that the Engineer is authorised to inspect, examine and test the equipment in the
rd
premises of the Sub-Contractor.
da
3 These inspections, examinations and tests shall not relieve the Contractor, in any case, from
the contractual responsibility and commitments. an
4 Factory Inspection. The Engineer and his representative shall inspect the Mechanical and
Electrical / I&C equipment listed in the tender documents at the manufacturing facilities after
St
the completion of manufacturing process. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing
of the Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) schedule dates, 30 calendar days before
commencement date of Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) in order that the factory inspection
n
can be arranged. Factory inspections will be made at any reasonable time after the
io
completion of internal testing by the Manufacturer and prior to shipment. Approval of

equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the equipment to the Site and
ct
does not constitute final acceptance. Where specified, the Contractor shall include in the
ru
Contract Price for all the costs of the Engineer and his representative. The equipment will be
released from the manufacturing facilities only after written FAT witness test reports are
st
accepted in writing by the Engineer/Client.

on
5 Factory Acceptance Witness Tests and Test Certificates. Factory Acceptance Witness tests
shall be carried out as specified in the Project Specification at manufacturing facilities places,
C
and as required by international standards and industry norms. Detailed Factory Test
Procedures shall be provided by the Contractor and submitted for Engineer’s approval
minimum 60 days before the proposed inspection date, and shall be subject of Engineer’s
ar
approval. The FAT test procedure shall be approved by the Engineer 30 days before the FAT
witness date is proposed.
at
Q
6 The Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer provides all labour, materials, electricity,
fuel, stores, apparatus and all instruments as are requisite and as may reasonably be
required to carry out the test efficiently. The Engineer and his representative will witness the
FAT tests.
7 The Contractor shall submit from the equipment manufacturer, a certified internal written test
certificate in accordance with the requirements/international standards of the relevant test
procedure before the FAT witness testing date.
8 If after examining or testing any equipment the Engineer, or his representative, shall decide
that such equipment or any part thereof is defective or, not in accordance with the
specification, he may reject the said equipment or part thereof. He shall notify the Contractor
in writing within 7 calendar days of the rejection, stating the grounds on which the rejection is
based.
9 Wherever possible, Site conditions shall be simulated at the manufacturing facilities during
FAT witness, or the tests shall be extended to allow for Site conditions. Where the pumps
are driven by VFD equipment, the complete Motor VFD shall be FAT witness tested in the
presence of the Engineer.
10 Should the Contractor provide for tests to be made in the premises of the Contractor or any
Sub-Contractors or suppliers, the Contractor shall afford any assistance, labour, materials,
electricity, fuel supplies, equipment and instrument required and which can be reasonably
requested for these tests.
23.1.2 Inspection and Tests at Site
14
1 This specification defines the tests to be made on electrical equipment, distribution systems
and installations at site to establish compliance with the specification and to ensure they are
20
entirely suitable for the intended purposes.
2 For all tests a minimum of 30 days notice in writing shall be given by the Contractor to the
Engineer to enable the tests to be witnessed.
s
rd
3 All electrical tests, unless otherwise specified, shall be made either in a manner prescribed in
the relevant:
da
(a) British Standard Specification and Code of Practice
an
(b) IEE Regulation (latest edition)
(c) QGEWC regulation
St
(d) Civil Defence Department regulation

n
(e) or where no Standard/Code/Regulation exists, in a manner approved by the

Engineer.
io
4 A pre-closing Inspection shall be carried out on all items of Electrical equipment, cables and
ct
conduit to be permanently concealed i.e. underground cables and ducts, conduit in screed or
ru
plastered into walls, above ceiling etc.

st
5 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with 3 clear working days notice of his intention to
cover the works. Failure to comply with this requirement shall result in the re-exposure.
on
Engineer's inspection and re-exposure of the works being carried out shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
C
6 The inspection and tests specified herein do not supersede but are supplementary and
complimentary to the tests called for in Project Specifications and clauses for equipment,
ar
systems and installation.

at
7 The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores,
Q
connection, skilled and unskilled labours and services with proper, reasonable and safe
facilities required for the tests. Any costs which may be involved in the tests shall be included
in the tender. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the instruments and the
equipment to be used for any test are adequate as regards accuracy and calibration for the
tests to be undertaken.
8 Workmanship shall be checked during work in progress and completed work inspections.
Any work not to the satisfaction of the Engineer during such inspection shall be replaced to a
standard approved by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense, and prior to any subsequent
inspection.
9 A complete written record shall be made by the Contractor of all inspections and tests. These
records shall be made at the time of the tests and shall be countersigned by the Engineer, if
present, as a true record. A copy of each record sheet shall be included with the operation
and maintenance manual. Inspection or approval of tests, acceptance of test certificate and
waiving of tests, by the Engineer, of any equipment, works or installation shall not relieve the
Contractor from the obligation to supply the complete equipment and complete work and
installations in accordance with the Project Specification and suitable for the purpose
intended.
10 Certificates of tests shall contain or have attached to them, the following information:-
(a) the job name and number as designated by the Engineer
14
(b) the name, address and contract or order number of the Contractor
(c) a description of the item, component, equipment, system or installation tested
20
including any fabrication, block or production number
(d) date and time of test
s
(e) environmental conditions including weather, if relevant
rd
(f) the testing party (if other than the Contractor) and signature of the Engineer
da
(g) the properties to be tested and the source of the parameters for such
properties, an i.e.
British Standard, Codes of Practice, QGEWC Regulation, Specifications, etc
(h) the results of the tests and any divergence from the specification, production
St
drawings or statutory requirements
(i) the detail of any works to be completed but which is outside the scope of this
test.
n
io
11 The Engineer shall have discretion to waive inspection/testing for either any part or of the
complete installation.
ct
ru
23.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TESTING

st
23.2.1 General
on
1 On completion of the entire electrical installation work or any separate or distinct part thereof,
notify the Engineer, in writing, that the complete part of the electrical work is ready for
C
inspection and testing. Before doing so, perform initial trial tests. Test, correct, adjust,
balance, regulate, etc., the section concerned as necessary until required conditions are
ar
obtained.
at
2 The results and readings obtained for tests shall be equal or better than the requirements of
the IEE and the QGEWC Regulations and these shall be recorded on Forms similar to the
Q
ones described in the IEE Regulations. The tests shall be carried out in a manner as
described in these regulations.
3 The Contractor shall supply all instruments and tools required for carrying out the tests.
4 In case the tests specified below are satisfactory and no errors or faults appear in the
installation, submit the necessary test forms, duly filled out, to QGEWC to repeat, if
necessary, the tests in the presence of QGEWC inspectors.
5 Upon Completion of testing, the Contractor shall follow-up and make all necessary
arrangements with the QGEWC and Telecom Provider for the purpose of providing
permanent electricity supply and telephone services to the new facilities. Also provide all
facilities and attendance to QGEWC for any other tests to be carried out before energising
the installation.
6 The testing of the installations shall comprise of the following but not limited to:-
23.2.2 Verification of Polarity
1 Verification of polarity shall be made to ensure that all fuses and single pole control devices
are connected only on the live phase conductor. The neutral must not be connected through
any of these devices.
2 The centre contact of Edison type screw lamp holder shall be connected to the phase
conductor, the outer threaded metal part shall be connected to the neutral conductor.
3 Wiring to plugs and socket outlets should be such that that they are connected with phase
14
conductor on the right pole when viewed from the front.
20
4 A suitable type of testing device shall be used to confirm the above.
23.2.3 Earth Electrode Resistance
s
rd
1 Upon installation of earth electrode, test shall be carried out to ensure that the installation of
electrode has reduced the earth fault impedance effectively to the required value.
da
2 Resistance to earth of all earthing rods, each earth termination network, continuity of
conductors and all bends and joints shall be tested by means of a Wenner test. The
an
electrode resistance shall not exceed 1 ohms requirement or as specified in the QGEWC
regulation.
St
23.2.4 Insulation Resistance

n
1 Insulation resistance test shall be carried out before a completed installation is permanently
io
connected to the supply. Large installations may be divided into groups. A DC voltage not
less than twice the normal supply voltage (RMS value of AC system voltage) shall be applied
ct
for the measurement of the insulation resistance. For low voltage installations, where
apparatus voltage rating does not exceed 55 V, shall be tested applying 500 V DC only.
ru
2 When measured with all fuse links in place, all switches (including, if possible, the main
st
switch) closed, the insulation resistance for whole installation shall not be less than 1 meg
on
ohm.
3 When measured between one phase conductor and other conductors connected together to
C
earth, in turn for all phases, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 1 mega ohm.
ar
4 Wherever possible, so that all parts of the wiring may be tested, all lamps shall be removed,
all current using apparatus disconnected, all local switches shall be closed; where removal of
at
lamps or disconnection of current using apparatus is not practicable, respective control

switches shall be opened.
Q
5 Where apparatus is disconnected for the tests, the insulation between the enclosure or
frameworks and all the live parts (phase) of the apparatus shall be measured separately and
shall comply with the requirements as per BS for the corresponding apparatus, where such
standard is not available, the insulation resistance shall not be less than 0.5 meg ohm.
23.2.5 Ring Circuit Continuity
1 A test shall be carried out to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the earth
continuity conductor) of every ring circuit and all readings shall be tabulated.
23.2.6 Phase Rotation
1 The complete installation shall be tested to ensure that all distribution boards are connected
to give correct phase rotation for the corresponding apparatus as required.
23.2.7 Continuity of Protective Conductor
1 A test shall be carried out to verify that all protective conductors are connected correctly and
are electrically sound, before power supply is connected to an installation.
2 When the protective conductor is a core in multi-core cable or a separate protective

conductor, a DC ohmmeter may be used to measure the resistance. Where steel conduits or
14
other metallic structure is used as protective conductor, the test shall be carried out by
current injection at a voltage not exceeding 50 V AC or DC and current about 1.5 times the
20
normal circuit current but not exceeding 25 Amps. When using DC source, it must be
ensured that inductors are not connected in the test path.
s
3 A portable hand generator is preferable to use for this test so that the disconnected phase
conductor can be connected to the consumer earth terminal and tests can be made between
rd
phase conductor and the protective conductor at each outlet point.
da
23.2.8 Earth-fault Loop Impedance an
1 Each completed installation shall be tested for effectiveness of the earthing by means of an
earth fault loop impedance test. The test shall be carried out by using earth loop impedance
St
test instrument
23.2.9 Operation Tests

n
io
1 This clause applies to relays, Interlocks and any other protective and control device, viz.,
residual current devices, to ensure correct functioning.
ct
2 Suitable test pro forma shall be prepared, as per the recommendation of the manufacturer for
ru
protective relay tests and submit to the Engineer for approval. Logic diagram for control and
interlocks shall be prepared, based on the requirement for functional tests, and shall be
st
submitted to the Engineer for approval. Tests shall be carried out according to the approved
on
form and all results shall be tabulated.
3 The RCDs shall be tested by external supply to check for instantaneous operation. The
C
testing device shall be single phase double wound continuously variable type transformer
(variac) with maximum output voltage 50 V and loading resistors to control current. While
ar
rated current applied, the device shall operate instantaneously or within a time delay as per
manufacturer data sheet. The test current to be applied shall be as per manufacturer
at
recommendation.
Q
23.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
23.3.1 General
1 The Contractor shall fully test and commission the whole of electrical installation in
accordance with QGEWC and IEE regulations, as per requirements of the Project
Documentation and as outlined in this section.
2 The following equipment will be inspected and tested on site after installation. Any omission
or defects, or faults raised by the Engineer are to be remedied or corrected by the Contractor
and re-testing made at the direction of the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense:
(a) 415V switchgears and MCC, VFD

(b) Mains cable

(c) Motors
(d) Starters and control gear
(e) Control and starter panels
(f) Small wiring etc.
(g) Elevator, walkway system
(h) Radio and TV interference
(i) Fire alarm and detection system
14
(j) Public address system
(k) HV switchgear
20
(l) HV cables
(m) Power transformer
s
(n) EHV cables
rd
(o) Main telephone installations
da
(p) Diesel Generators an
3 Following functional tests shall be carried out to ensure proper functioning of the plant and all
apparatus.
St
(a) All protective circuits, interlocks, control and alarm shall be tested for correct
operation
n
(b) All lighting circuits shall be energised and checked to ensure that they are
io
operational
(c) All motors, plants and electrical equipment connected with mechanical
ct
services shall be checked to ensure that they run freely in the correct
ru
direction/rotation and in correct sequence

(d) Fire alarm system, fire fighting system, SCADA/PLC, etc, elevator system and
st
building management system (if applicable) shall be tested for correct

on
operation.
(e) All major authority related testing requirements shall be witnessed by the
C
relevant authority representative (QGEWC, Qatar Civil Defence, or Telecom

Provider). The Contractor shall give a minimum of one-week advance notice
prior to performing any major tests
ar
(f) The Contractor shall obtain all relevant testing requirements from QGEWC
at
and Telecom Provider and make available all necessary testing apparatus.
Q
4 The testing requirements and procedures for the various items of electrical equipment is
specified in the other relevant specification parts for electrical works and relevant standards.
23.4 COMMISSIONING
23.4.1 General
1 This specification deals with the Contractor’s work involved in commissioning to energise the
electrical distribution systems, installations and plants after inspections and tests to ensure
safety and proper operation; and the evaluation of performance by means of further
inspection and tests to ensure the works operate in conformity with the design specification.
2 Commissioning works shall be carried out by the Contractor using trained, experienced
commissioning engineers. The commissioning engineer shall perform switching operations
and also must be in charge for the opening and closing of circuits, interlocks and safety
devices.
3 The Contractor in conjunction with the Engineer shall prepare a commissioning schedule.
This shall show a time scale and the extent of power or other services requirements for
setting the plant to work. The following information shall be made available to the Engineer:
(a) Specification of work

(b) Test certificates from works test at manufacturers facilities
14
(c) Test results from site progress tests.
(d) Notes from pre-commissioning meetings.
20
4 The method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer and get it approved at least 1
month before the commencement of commissioning tests.
s
5 After commissioning, the plant shall operate for the guarantee period as per the requirements
rd
of the Project Documentation, from the date of practical completion certificate issue in
accordance with normal requirements without defect of any kind. Any defect which appears
da
shall be remedied forthwith by the Contractor without any cost to the contract and reliability
run shall start after re-commissioning. The guarantee period shall be calculated from the
latest date of such re-commissioning.
an
St
END OF PART
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 24: Documentation Format
24 DOCUMENTATION FORMAT ....................................................................... 2
24.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

24.1.1 Scope 2
24.1.2 General Requirements 2
24.1.3 Document format 2
24.1.4 Time Scale 2
24.1.5 Approval 2
24.1.6 Record Drawings 3
14
24.1.7 As-Built Drawings 3
24.1.8 Scales 3
20
24.1.9 Scale Bar 3
24.1.10 Presentation of Drawings 3
24.1.11 Manuals 4
s
24.1.12 Instrumentation Documentation 7
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
24 DOCUMENTATION FORMAT
24.1 GENERAL
24.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general requirements and standards required for the compilation of
paper and electronic documents.
14
Section 1 Part 7
Section 1 Part 21
20
Section 21 Part 1
Section 21 Part 23
s
rd
24.1.2 General Requirements
da
1 Documents will be presented both electronically and on paper. Documents from an
electronic source shall, when printed, conform to the requirements for documents presented
an
on paper. The number of hardcopy manuals shall be determined by the contract
documentation.
St
2 The final approved documentation shall be reproducible in the following sizes. These sizes
n
are defined to ensure that the provided documentation can be easily read and understood.
io
(a) A4 size paper for manuals

ct
(b) A3 size for system diagrams

tru
(c) A1 size for instrument location and plant drawings

s
24.1.3 Document format

on
1 Drawings shall be compiled in AutoCAD DWG or Microstation DGN file format or similar
approved with Engineer. Word processed documentation should be presented in Adobe
C
Acrobat PDF format or similar approved with Engineer. Scanned copies of the „as built‟
ar
drawings showing all of the required approval signatures and official stamps shall be
provided in TIFF format. The files should be presented on optical disc containing a
at
readme.txt file containing an index of the disk.

Q
24.1.4 Time Scale
1 The time scale for delivery of manuals shall be as stated in the contract documentation, with
the final versions of the manuals being available before hand over.
24.1.5 Approval
1 During the construction phase of the project, the drawing and manuals status shall be
monitored and discussed. These discussions form part of the project meetings / site
meetings and are part of the approval process. All documents shall be approved prior to
hand over.
24.1.6 Record Drawings
1 This specification defines the production of drawings so they are provided in a consistent
way that shall make the drawings easy to use. This section refers to record drawings that
relate to the as built product. Documents from an electronic source shall, when printed,
conform to the requirements for documents presented on paper.
24.1.7 As-Built Drawings
1 Drawings produced by suppliers/Vendors shall be of appropriate size as below. Documents

from an electronic source shall, when printed, conform to the requirements for documents
14
presented on paper.
20
2 Drawing information shall be handed over in 'As Constructed‟ form and marked-up
accordingly in the information panel.
s
24.1.8 Scales
rd
1 As few scales as possible shall be used and each scale used shall be recorded in the title
da
panel. The scale shall be large enough to permit easy and clear interpretation of the
information and ensure clarity of prints of all sizes reproduced. The recommended scales are
an
listed in Table 24.1.
St
Table 24.1
Scale Recommendations
n
Category Recommended ratios of scale

io
Enlargement 50:1 20:1

ct
10:1
Scale 5:1 2:1
tru
Full Size 1:1

s
1:2 1:5 1:10

on
1:20 1:50 1:100

Reduction Scale
1:200 1:500 1:1000
C
1:2000 1:5000 1:10000

ar
24.1.9 Scale Bar

at
Q
1 The original scale shall be indicated by means of a relevant numbered scale bar. A warning
against scaling the drawing shall be given.
24.1.10 Presentation of Drawings
1 Title panel and information panel shall contain the following information:-
(a) client
(b) contractor
(c) supervisory consultant
(d) designer/manufacturer
(e) project title

(f) name of site/s
(g) name and type of installation/s
(h) drawing title/description
(i) sheet number in the series
(j) drawing status
(k) identity of persons carrying out the draughting and checking
14
(l) date of drawing
(m) drawing scale/s
20
(n) drawing no. with provision for revision suffix (Year/Contract/Number/ /Revision)
(o) contents of information panel
s
rd
(p) The nature and date of each revision and the identification of the person approving it
shall be recorded in the information panel, starting next to the title panel. General
da
notes shall commence at the opposite end of the information panel
2 All text and drawings shall be in black unless otherwise stated.

an
3 Amendment of Drawings
St
(a) After receipt by the Client of (draft) 'As Constructed' drawings, the Contractor shall
n
notify the Client of any changes by re-issuing a complete draft, with further revision
suffix to title and information panel.
io
(b) Each section shall clearly indicate the status of the information in the form of
ct
amendment notes.
tru
4 4 Electrical Schematics
s
(a) Electrical schematics shall be complete with cross references for all contact elements
on
of all components used.

(b) The legend for naming and symbols used shall be clearly displayed on the drawing.
C
24.1.11 Manuals
ar
1 A contents page shall be provided for each Volume listing the contents of that particular
at
Volume. It shall be entitled “Contents of Volume No XXX”. Where there are two or more
Q
volumes to a manual then there shall be a complete index to the set of volumes with each
Volume.
2 The manual(s) shall be formed containing operational information in the first part of the
manual and maintenance information in the latter part.
3 The manual shall be split into the following sections:
(a) Section 1.0 - Introduction

(i) The introduction shall describe the purpose of the operating manual. This shall
include how to start up and shut down the installation and/or process and/or
plant as appropriate and maintain it at its optimum performance. The following
details shall be included in the body of the manual.
(b) Section 2.0 - Technical Description
(i) process descriptions
14
(ii) plant description
(iii) schedule of equipment commencing with a complete data sheet specific to the
20
equipment used detailing Make, Type or Model No.. Rating, Order No., Quantity
used etc.
s
(c) Section 3.0 - Safety
rd
(i) safety precautions
da
(ii) hazardous area zoning
(iii) confined spaces
an
(iv) emergency procedures
St
(v) site security description

(vi) warning labels, etc
n
io
(d) Section 4.0 - Operating Information

ct
(i) plant settings

tru
(ii) operating procedure

(iii) start up/shut down/power failure
s
(iv) routine check procedure

on
(v) replacement of consumable items

C
(e) Section 5.0 - Control Philosophy

Functional Design Specification (FDS) to include the following as minimum:-
ar
(i) description of mechanical plant

at
(ii) description of electrical plant

Q
(iii) description of instrumentation, control and field devices

(iv) process & instrumentation diagrams (P&ID's)
(v) plant start up sequence for both manual and automatic mode
(vi) plant shut down sequence for both manual and automatic mode
(vii) power fail and restart sequences
(viii) normal process sequences
(f) Section 6.0 - Maintenance Instructions including:-

(i) safety precautions
(ii) routine maintenance schedules
(iii) spare parts listing and agreed spares list
(iv) lubrication
(v) plant strip down/assembly
(vi) fault finding instructions
14
(g) Section 7.0 - Suppliers
(i) Supplier‟s/Vendor‟s names, contact person and his title, addresses and
20
telephone numbers, email etc.
(h) Section 8.0 - Drawings and Records
s
(i) plant drawings
rd
(ii) electrical diagrams
da
(iii) cable schedules an
(iv) valve schedules
(v) instrument loop diagram
St
(vi) vendor manuals (original manuals only-photocopies shall not be acceptable)

n
(vii) vendor test certificates

io
(viii) instrumentation loop test certificates

ct
(ix) plant description forms

tru
(x) hazardous area zoning drawings

(xi) a general description of each plant and how it operates, shall be included at the
s
beginning of each of the M&E sections. The description shall explain the
on
function of the equipment. It shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the reader to

understand how the works operates before using the operating instructions.
C
(xii) a complete set of data sheets providing specific details of the equipment used
with Order No., Serial No., and specific technical details etc. If a
ar
comprehensive spare parts list is not attached to the individual equipment

at
catalogue section, the same shall be compiled by the Contractor and attached
to this section.
Q
(xiii) a complete list of all components used for Order No., Motor Control Centres
detailing Make, Model No., Rating, Quantity used etc.
24.1.12 Instrumentation Documentation
1 The instrumentation documentation shall be according to the following specification.
(a) For the instrumentation the contractor shall supply the following information:
(i) instrument loop diagrams
(ii) manufactures literature
(iii) certificate of calibration
(iv) certificate of conformity
14
(b) RTU Documentation
For the RTU system, the contractor shall supply the following information:
20
(i) RTU I/O schedules
(ii) GA and wiring diagram
s
rd
(iii) isagraph program (disk)
da
(iv) RTU configuration (disk)
(v) RTU user manual
an
(vi) RTU programming software user manual
St
(vii) licensed and latest version of the programming software original with all end
user license agreements.
n
(c) PLC Documentation

io
For the PLC system, the contractor shall supply the following information:-
ct
(i) system architecture drawing

tru
(ii) rack layouts

(iii) PLC I/O schedules (printed sheet + Excel format disc)
s
(iv) PLC memory map

on
(v) PLC hardware listing

C
(vi) annotated PLC ladder logic (printed sheet + disc)

ar
(vii) PLC user manual

(viii) PLC programming software user manual
at
(ix) licensed and latest version of the PLC programming software original with all
Q
end user license agreements.

(d) HMI Documentation
For the Man Machine Interfaces, the contractor shall supply the following information: -
(ii) graphic copy and description of all mimics
(iii) description of all trends
(iv) alarm handling and schedules
(v) operator control functions
(vi) HMI database listing with disc, if applicable
(e) SCADA Documentation

For the SCADA system, the contractor shall supply the following information:
(ii) software user manuals
(iii) SCADA database listing and discs
(iv) alarm handling and schedules
(v) description of all trends
(vi) graphic copy and description of all mimics
14
(vii) database point allocation table (disk
20
(viii) application software source code
(ix) SCADA latest version of the programming software and IO Drivers with all end
s
user license agreements.
rd
END OF PART
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 25: Electrical Identification
25 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS ................................................................. 2
25.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

25.1.1 General 2
25.1.2 Nameplates and Labels 2
25.1.3 Wire and Cable Markers 3
25.1.4 Interconnecting Cabling Identification “ICA” 3
25.1.5 Under ground Warning Tape 4
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
25 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS
25.1 GENERAL
25.1.1 General
1 Provide identification on all equipment e.g. control panels, FBA, controllers, raceways, boxes
and conductors, devices etc in accordance with BS 61346, BS 61666, BS 61175 and BS
60445 standards or latest edition of other applicable standards to the approval of engineer.
14
2 All labels shall be permanent, and be machine generated. NO HANDWRITTEN OR NON-
PERMANENT LABELS SHALL BE ALLOWED.
20
3 Prior to making any label or nameplate for the purpose of identification submit a detailed
schedule indicating nameplate size, lettering size, color, material and actual nameplate
s
information for Engineer's review and approval.
rd
4 All external labels, nameplates, operational and warning signs shall be provided in Arabic
da
and English. an
5 Material used in making the engraved labels shall be of highest quality suitable for the
environmental and climatic conditions as specified in the relevant section.
St
6 Critical devices such as disconnect switches; service feeders and branch circuit protective
n
feeders shall be legibly labeled to indicate its purpose and point of origin. The legibility
io
distance shall not be less than 2.0 meters.

ct
7 Identification nameplates shall be provided in addition to the manufacturer's equipment

nameplates as required by NEMA, BS, IEC or UL.
tru
8 Warning signs and instruction labels wherever needed shall be provided in accordance with
s
local regulations of QGEWC, Civil defence etc.

on
9 Contractor shall clearly show locations and fixing arrangements of nameplates and labels on
C
layout drawings.
ar
25.1.2 Nameplates and Labels

at
1 Nameplates:
Q
(a) Provide equipment identification labels for all electrical equipment including, but not
limited to Switchgear, control panels, switchboards, transfer switches, disconnect
switches, transformers, generators, power factor capacitors, fixed equipment, motor
starters, FBA etc.
(b) Provided sub classification label for all emergency power system, junction boxes and
pull boxes.
(c) External labels: Clear Perspex, back engraved in black letters on white background, in
Arabic and English with chamfered edges fixed with stainless steel screws with nuts
and flat and lock washers.
(d) Internal labels: Multi-layered plastic to an approved design engraved in Arabic and
English, and fixed with stainless steel screws. Alternatively special purpose made DIN
rail may be used for fixing labels as approved by the engineer.
(e) Adhesive labels shall not be permitted.
(f) Internal components labels shall have circuit designations correlated with the
drawings.
(g) Labels shall not be attached to trunking covers or other readily removable items.
(h) Electrical equipment enclosures, vaults, doors and fences shall be provided with
"DANGER KEEP OUT" warning sign, showing proper voltage.
14
(i) Disconnect switches and emergency devices shall have "CAUTION" warning signs as
20
directed by the engineer.
2 Locations:
s
(a) Provide Title Label for electrical distribution and all other control equipment, panels
rd
etc.
da
(b) Provide Function Label for door mounted component.
(c) Every internal component - Identification Label.
an
(d) Provide Identification Label for Protective device - (e.g. fuse/mcb type, rating).
St
(e) Provide Title Label for Communication equipments.

(f) Compartments with doors and covers not electrically interlocked to an isolator,
n
external label - “DANGER, LIVE TERMINALS” with flash and voltage in red letters on
io
white background in Arabic and English.

ct
(g) Provide Function description Label for group of terminal blocks.

tru
3 Letter Size is to be approved with Engineer.

s
25.1.3 Wire and Cable Markers

on
1 Description: Interlocking ferrules of white insulating material engraved in black. Letters and
C
symbols to IEC 446 shall be used for control wiring and Flameproof Cable tags for
appropriate cable group.
ar
2 Locations:
at
(a) Conductor at pull boxes outlet, junction boxes and each load connection.
Q
(b) Cable laid in trenches, duct, raceways etc.
3 Legend:
(a) Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
(b) Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection
diagrams on drawings.
25.1.4 Interconnecting Cabling Identification “ICA”
1 Each horizontal cable from instruments, transmitter, controller etc. termination blocks or
patch panel if any to an outlet box shall be labelled at both ends.
2 Tags shall be consecutively numbered so that no two (2) cables have the same identification
number.
3 In addition the cable tag shall indicate the reference of location where the associated outlet
is located and the device is installed.
25.1.5 Under ground Warning Tape
1 Description: 100 mm wide plastic tape, detectable type, coloured yellow with suitable
warning legend describing buried electrical lines e.g. 0.6/1KV, 11KV etc.
14
25.1.6 Installation
20
1 Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
2 Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
s
rd
3 Secure nameplate to equipment front as specified.
da
4 Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished
locations.
an
5 Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench
St
at 150 mm below finished grade.
END OF PART
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 26: Electromagnetic Compatibility
26 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ................................................................. 2
26.1 REGULATIONS ....................................................................................................... 2

26.1.1 General 2
26.1.2 EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility 2
26.1.3 The CE Marking 2
26.1.4 EMC Directive and Standards 2
26.1.5 EU Product Directives 3
26.1.6 Harmonized European Standards 3
26.1.7 CE Marking Vs ISO 9000 4
14
26.2 Recommendations for reducing interference ........................................................... 4
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
26 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
26.1 REGULATIONS
26.1.1 General
1 Ensuring electrical components, equipment and systems supplied are safe and does not
interfere with the normal operation of other equipment is the basis for Electromagnetic
Compatibility regulation.
14
2 Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC; shall apply to electrical equipment designed for use at a
rated voltage of 50 to 1000 V for alternating current and 75 to 1500 V for direct current. Rated
20
voltage shall refer to the input or output voltage of the equipment and not voltages which are
generated internally.
s
3 The electrotechnical product shall also meet the requirements of other applicable directives
rd
in addition to the Low Voltage Directives. The compliance of individual components with the
da
requirements of appropriate European Norms (EN) does not imply compliance of the end
product. End product testing ensures that interconnections as well as manufactured CE
marked components are performing to what is formally stated in their declaration of
an
conformity.
St
26.1.2 EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility

n
1 EMC is the ability of different items of electrical equipment to work together without suffering
io
the effects of interference. All equipment shall operate without interfering with broadcast and
communications signals and be immune to normal levels of such signals.
ct
2 EMC implies that equipment shall not generate unacceptable levels of interference, which
tru
affect the performance of other products designed to operate in the same environment. Also,
equipment shall have sufficient immunity to electrical interference, such that the equipment
s
continues to operate in an acceptable manner.

on
3 The contractor shall submit a certificate issued by the manufacturer that the electrical
C
equipment's supplied against the contract under execution complies with the requirements of
the EMC Directive.
ar
26.1.3 The CE Marking

at
Q
1 All electrical products shall have CE Marking as an EU recognised certification mark that
confirms the product has been tested and complies with the European Union
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive and other relevant directives, standards or norms.
26.1.4 EMC Directive and Standards
1 The electrotechnical products shall be designed and constructed that do not cause excessive
electromagnetic interference and are not duly affected by electromagnetic interference.
Electrical products shall carry a CE mark and manufacturers 'Declaration of Conformity'.
2 There are four generic standards:
(a) EN 50081-1 1992 EMC - Generic emission standard - Part 1. Residential commercial
and light industry.
(b) EN 50081-2 1993 EMC - Generic emission standard - Part 2. Industrial environment.
(c) EN 50082-1 1997 EMC - Generic immunity standard - Part 1. Residential commercial
and light industry.
(d) EN 61000-6-2 1999 EMC - Part 6-2: Generic standards - Immunity for Industrial
Environments.
14
26.1.5 EU Product Directives
20
1 The EU product directives deal with large families of products or horizontal risks such as
those addressed in the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive. The manufacturer and
exporter are responsible for ensuring the product meets the requirements for all applicable
s
directives.
rd
2 The following directives (with the reference between brackets) have been adopted:
da
(a) low voltage (73/23/EEC) an
(b) simple pressure vessels (87/404/EEC)
St
(c) safety of toys (87/378/EEC)
(d) construction products (89/106/EEC)
n
(e) electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) (89/336/EEC)

io
(f) machine safety (89/392/EEC)

ct
(g) personal protection equipment (89/686/EEC)

tru
(h) new hot-water boilers (92/42/EEC)

s
(i) gas appliances (90/396/EEC)

on
(j) explosives for civil uses (93/15/EEC)

(k) recreational craft (94/25/EC)
C
(l) non-automatic weighing machines (90/384/EEC)

ar
(m) active implantable medical devices (90/385/EEC)

at
(n) equipment for explosive atmospheres (94/9/EEC)

Q
(o) telecommunications terminal equipment (91/263/EEC)
3 Most of the above-mentioned directives are amended by Directive 93/68/EEC, "Rules for the
Affixing and Use of the CE Conformity Marking."
26.1.6 Harmonized European Standards
1 EU product directives are limited to essential safety, health or other performance

requirements in the general public interest. The technical details of how to meet these
requirements are to be certified by the three regional European standards organisations,
CEN, CENELEC, ETSI, and government appointed product certification bodies.
2 Products that meet the essential technical standards developed by CEN, CENELEC and
ETSI are presumed to conform to the requirements of EU directives
3 For many products, however, a manufacturer can choose not to comply with CEN,
CENELEC, ETSI standards, but must then demonstrate that the product meets the essential
safety and performance requirements of the directives.
26.1.7 CE Marking Vs ISO 9000
1 Manufacturer having a quality management certificate that demonstrates an efficient

organisational confirming low failure rate shall not be acceptable as a substitute to CE
14
marking.
20
2 The quality system makes no reference to the quality of the product. The quality certificate is
only a recommendation for customers that their order will be processed correctly and on
time.
s
rd
3 The CE marking indicates that the product complies with the essential requirements relating
to safety, health, environment and consumer protection of the user.
da
4 Some directives explicitly make use of a quality management system (ISO 9000) as part of
an
the conformity assessment. If a manufacturer wishes to provide the customer with assurance
about the functional quality of the product, the manufacturer can then obtain a voluntary
St
quality inspection mark that guarantees the products conform to safety and functional
requirements over the long term.
n
26.2 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REDUCING INTERFERENCE

io
ct
1 The contractor shall exercise the manufacturer's recommendation for reducing interference.
tru
Following is basic guidelines for ready reference that helps reduce radiated interference by
screening of the equipment and cables. The conducted interference can be reduced by
filtering of the mains supply.
s
on
(a) keep all cables as short as possible

(b) separate power cables and signal cables from each other and from different
C
equipment
ar
(c) shield the mains cable to the welding equipment if any

at
(d) apply earthing and equipotential bonding to the welding installation

(e) connect the equipment to a separate mains supply spur or using a different phase
Q
(f) physically separate welding equipment from other equipment

(g) weld at times, which cause minimum disruption.
END OF PART
Part 27: Battery and Battery Charger
27 BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER ......................................................... 2
27.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

27.1.1 Scope 2
27.1.3 References 2
27.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
27.2.1 General 3
14
27.2.2 Batteries 3
27.2.3 Battery Chargers 3
20
27.3 QUALITY CONTROL AND TEST PROCEDURES ........................................ 5
s
27.3.1 General 5
rd
27.4 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................ 5
da
27.4.1 General 5
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
27 BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER

27.1 GENERAL
27.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for battery and battery charger.

This Section
14
Part 2 FBA
20
Part 7 Conduits
Part 8 Trunking
s
Part 9 Cable Trays
rd
da
27.1.2 Description
1 A single battery and battery charger shall be provided for each FBA of motor control centre,
an
control desk or control panel.
St
27.1.3 References

n
EIC 157 ......................Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear

io
EIC 158 ......................Low Voltage Control gear

ct
27.1.4 Submissions
tru
1 Submissions shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section and Part 7 of Section 1.
s
on
2 Shop Drawings submission shall include dimensional drawings of the battery and battery
charger, including sections and elevations, showing the following:
C
(a) sizes and positions of components

(b) positions and method of fixing cable and boxes
ar
(c) location of terminal boards

at
(d) Internal wiring diagram

Q
(e) Power and control diagrams

(f) External connection drawings
(g) Component parts lists
(h) Other pertinent data.
(i) Spare parts list
3 Submission of project data shall be as follows:
(a) full specifications of the enclosure and the components of the equipment with relevant
sheets of manufacturer’s catalogues
(b) confirmation that the equipment complies with the relevant specifications.
(c) Detailed battery and battery charger size calculation

(d) Previous approval in similar applications
27.2 PRODUCTS
27.2.1 General
1 The batteries and chargers shall be used as back-up power source for uninterruptible and
bumpless operation of controls, instrumentation, alarm and monitoring equipment, but not for
switchgear tripping/closing or other special function batteries.
14
2 Where alternate a.c. supplies are available, provide for taking the supply to the battery
charger from either source (e.g. from either side of the bus-section switch) with facilities for
automatic changeover from one source to the other in the event of failure of the supply
20
system.
3 The battery and charger unit shall be housed in the common control section of the MCC
s
provided that the battery is of the sealed type and shall not release any corrosive media. If
rd
the battery is not sealed it shall be mounted in a separate compartment.
da
4 A separate sheet steel floor standing cubicle having adequate ventilation and separate
compartments for the batteries (lower compartment) and chargers (upper compartment) with
an
associated control and protection devices and accessories may be used as a stand-alone
unit for large capacities where it is difficult to accommodate within a dedicated section of the
MCC and in case of all other applications wherever specified.
St
5 When used as a stand-alone unit, the access to the batteries shall be via lockable, hinged
doors, and to the chargers via removable covers.
n
io
6 Batteries and charger units shall be suitable for the intended service under the prevailing
climate and environments conditions and Tropical use.
ct
tru
7 Unless specified elsewhere the, the battery charger shall confirm to the specification herein.
8 Form 4 panels when equipped with battery and charger shall be provided with fully
s
segregated/shrouded arrangement for the batteries within the cubicle, ensuring proper
on
ventilation. Alternatively batteries may be located in a separate enclosure installed within the
close proximity of the control panel.
C
27.2.2 Batteries
ar
1 Nickel Cadmium sealed batteries shall be used confirming to BS EN 60623.

at
2 The batteries shall be maintenance free long life Nickel Cadmium sealed type with a nominal
Q
output of 24 volts, and shall be of adequate capacity to maintain full operation of the relevant
load equipment’s’ plus an additional 20 per cent, for a period of 8 hours during mains failure,
assuming a normal charge condition at the start of the mains failure.
3 All batteries shall be protected from mechanical damage and any accidental electric shorting.
All batteries shall be supplied in banks sized for easy handling, and all interconnections shall
be included. Batteries shall not be housed above charger units or any other equipment and
shall be so ventilated that gases do not permeate into adjacent equipment.
27.2.3 Battery Chargers
1 Battery Chargers shall confirm to BS EN 60146-1.

2 Battery chargers complete with associated controls shall be provided and mounted on its
own chassis and housed in one of the section of the FBA, stand-alone panel or in a separate
enclosure as applicable.
(a) The front panel for each charger unit shall include:-
1 No. “ON/OFF” Mains switch
1 No. Lamp to indicate “A.C. Supply On” (white)
1 No. Charger Ammeter
1 No. Lamp to indicate “Boost Charge” (Red)
1 No. Lamp to indicate “Float Charge” (White)
1 No. Lamp to indicate “Charger Failed” (Amber)
1 No. Lamp test push button
14
(b) Each charger unit shall also be provided with:-
1 No. “Float/Boost” selector switch, mounted internally
20
1 No. Set of a.c. supply fuses
1 No. volt-free contact for charger failed alarm
1 No. volt-free contact for low d.c. output voltage alarm
s
1 No. volt free contact for loss of d.c. output voltage alarm
rd
3 The chargers shall protect the batteries from deep discharge and over charging.
da
4 Volt free contacts shall operate in fail-safe mode and be wired to terminal block.
an
5 The Charger unit shall also be equipped with the following:-
1 No. DC output voltmeter, scaled to indicate regions of “Low”, “Normal” and “High” output
St
6
voltages, by the use of different colored sectors.
n
7 1 No. D.C. output switch

io
8 1 No. D.C. output Ammeter

ct
9 The charger unit shall also be provided with one set of full capacity rated output d.c.
tru
terminals and fuses.

s
10 In the event of failure of the charger, the batteries shall ensure operation of controls,
on
instrumentation, alarm and monitoring equipment for at least 6 hours. A separate relay
contact shall be provided to indicate “Critical Alarm Condition – Charger Fail".
C
11 The chargers shall be of the constant potential type, and shall be designed to regulate the
charger output voltage to within +/- 1 percent.
ar
12 A suitable means shall be provided to the approval of Engineer to protect the batteries from
at
deep discharge. Alarm shall be provided for this condition.

Q
13 The D.C. terminal voltage shall be regulated such that under “Float” or “Boost” charge
condition the DC voltage does not rise to more than 10 percent above the nominal.
14 The charger unit shall also be provided with both short circuit and reverse polarity functions.
15 The charger when selected to “Float” shall be capable of restoring the battery to 75 percent
capacity within 7 - 8 hours.
16 Under “Boost” condition the charger shall be capable of restoring a fully discharged battery
to 75 percent capacity within 4 - 5 hours.
17 Fix inside the cubicle a wiring diagram indicating and identifying all outgoing terminals,
components and fuses, and also a warning label in Arabic and English giving maintenance
and safety instructions.
18 The Battery Charger shall be connected to PLC/SCADA control room and all the
information’s available in the charger shall be transmitted to SCADA for battery chargers
larger than 50 KW.
27.3 QUALITY CONTROL AND TEST PROCEDURES

27.3.1 General
14
1 The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Control Program or Inspection
Test Plan (ITP). In particular the main equipment manufacturing stages sanctioned by
20
appropriate tests such as: incoming components inspection, discrete sub-assembly tests and
complete functional checks on the final product. Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in
leaving the factory. Final inspection and calibration operations shall be documented in a
s
report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality Inspection department and/or qualified Third Party
rd
Agency (TPA).
da
2 Complete charge and discharge tests on each battery and combined battery and charger
shall be conducted and results recorded so as to permit verification of the ampere-hour
capacity of the battery. During these tests five reference cells shall be selected at random
an
and the voltage curves thereof shall be checked when the battery is discharged over three
and ten hour periods. The automatic control feature of the charger shall be demonstrated
St
over the specified load range.
3 The integrated functional test shall be conducted at manufacturer’s works to ensure

n
satisfactorily functioning of the equipment.

io
4 The Assembly shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until the works test sheets have
ct
been duly approved and stamped by the Engineer and written permission is obtained for
their dispatch to site.
tru
27.4 ENVIRONMENT
s
on
27.4.1 General
C
1 Environmental conditions shall be in accordance with Section 1 Part 1 unless specified

herein.
ar
2 Minimum ambient temperature shall be 0C.

at
3 Maximum relative humidity shall be 95%.

Q
END OF PART
Part 28: Small Enclosures
28 SMALL ENCLOSURES ................................................................................. 2
28.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

28.1.1 Scope 2
28.1.3 References 2
28.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
28.2.1 General 3
14
28.2.2 Hinged Cover Enclosures for use Indoors 3
28.2.3 Cabinets and Junction Boxes for use Indoors 4
20
28.2.4 Terminal Blocks 4
28.2.5 Weatherproof Cabinets for use Outdoors 4
s
28.2.6 Small outdoor Enclosures for Pushbutton Stations, Local Isolators, Local
rd
Starter or Control Gear etc. 6
da
28.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 6
28.3.1 General 6
an
St
28.4.1 General 7
28.5 Environment ................................................................................................... 7
n
io
28.5.1 General 7
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
28 SMALL ENCLOSURES
28.1 GENERAL
28.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for small enclosures.

This Section
14
Part 2 FBA
20
Part 7 Conduits
Part 8 Trunking
s
Part 9 Cable Trays
rd
da
28.1.2 Description
1 The use of small enclosures, cabinets and junction boxes shall be limited to enclosing
an
terminal blocks and low voltage (not exceeding 415 Volts) electrical field devices e.g.
transmitters, sensors, switches, sockets, local starters and control stations, etc. excluding
St
main motor control and switchgear.
28.1.3 References
n
io

ct
BS 6220 .....................Junction Boxes

BS 7671, ....................Requirements for Electrical Installations
tru
IEE, UK., BS EN 60947-4-1

s
NEMA 250
on
NEMA ICS 4
NFPA 70 - ..................National Electrical Code, U.S.A
C
...................................or other approved equivalent standards as applicable.

ar
28.1.4 Submissions
at
Q
2 Shop Drawings submission shall include dimensional drawings of the battery and battery
charger, including sections and elevations, showing the following:

(d) other pertinent data.
(e) Component part list
(f) Single line diagram
(g) Three line diagram
(h) Wiring diagram

(i) Spare parts list
(c) Previous approval in similar applications
28.2 PRODUCTS
14
28.2.1 General
20
1 The specification shall be in accordance with latest edition of local and International
regulations e.g QGEWC.
s
2 The product selected and proposed shall include manufacturer's Instructions that Indicate
rd
application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified
da
under Regulatory Requirements.
3 The Contractor shall select the product only from manufacturer’s specializing in
an
manufacturing products specified in this Part with minimum five years documented
experience of the products being satisfactorily in use in a similar service and climatic
St
conditions.
4 The Contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination with related civil and other project
n
associated activities prior to the selection of the equipment.

io
5 The Contractor shall clearly show locations and fixing arrangements on the drawings.
ct
6 IP ratings are based on short laboratory tests and are not an indication of an enclosure’s
tru
suitability for use outdoors or in a harsh environment. All such enclosures need considerable
interpretation for each installation.
s
on
7 Any enclosure installed in the wet well of a pumping station or in any area where the change
of flooding exists shall be rated for IP68 classification.
C
8 Any enclosure installed the wet well of a pumping station shall be rated for Zone 2
hazardous area classification.
ar
28.2.2 Hinged Cover Enclosures for use Indoors

at
1 Construction: Galvanized steel with minimum sheet steel thickness of 2 mm with panel fronts
Q
of thickness 2.0 mm minimum.
2 Covers: Lift-off hinge held closed by lockable T type handles. Doors shall close on to
neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips held in place mechanically.
3 Provide interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish
with white enamel.
4 Enclosure Finish: Green to BS 4800, shade 14E53.
5 Enclosure Protection: Dust and vermin proof. Environmental protection to IP 54 or as

applicable depending on the application.
28.2.3 Cabinets and Junction Boxes for use Indoors
1 Boxes: Galvanized steel with minimum sheet steel thickness of 2 mm with panel fronts of
thickness 2.0 mm minimum.
2 Box Size: To suit equipment requirements.
3 Provide interior metal panels for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish
with white enamel.
4 Fronts: Lift-off hinge held closed by lockable T type handles. Doors shall close on to
neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips held in place mechanically.
14
5 Junction boxes enclosing small quantity of terminals with bolted cover shall however be
20
permitted to be used as per the approval of the Engineer.
6 Glandplates shall be provided to suit cable, conduit and circuiting arrangements.
s
rd
7 Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and
voltages.
da
8 Provide accessory feet, pedestal or pillar for free-standing equipment.
an
9 Enclosure Finish: Green to BS 4800, shade 14E53.
St
10 Enclosure Protection: Dust and vermin proof. Environmental protection to IP 54 or as
applicable depending on the application.
n
28.2.4 Terminal Blocks

io
1 Terminal Blocks: IEC 947-7-1 or BS EN 60947-7-1: Terminal blocks for copper conductors.
ct
tru
2 Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw
connectors, rated 600 volts.
s
3 Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting,
on
with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts.
4 Provide earth bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to the enclosure.
C
5 Special terminals e.g. disconnect type, diode type, bridging type, fuse type etc. according to
ar
the applications requirements or as directed by the Engineer shall be provided.

at
6 All terminal assemblies shall be provided with dividers as necessary and end plates. Where
included in the manufacturers’ inventory, locking wire shall be installed on every terminal
Q
assembly.
28.2.5 Weatherproof Cabinets for use Outdoors
1 Weatherproof cabinets shall be provided for all electrical, control, instrumentation,

distribution, etc. equipment which is to be used externally.
2 Outdoor equipment shall be weatherproof and designed to prevent the collection of water at
any point. Metal to metal joints will not be permitted and all external bolts or screws shall be
provided with blind tapped holes where a through hole would permit the ingress of moisture.
The insides of outdoor cubicles shall be coated with an approved anti-condensation finish.
3 Confirmation must be provided from the manufacturer of any equipment intended for use
outdoor that the equipment is suitable for use outdoors in the local climatic conditions, in
situations where minor accidental damage, e.g. chipping, is likely to occur.
4 All kiosks and cubicles shall be fitted with door operated internal lights and shall be
ventilated.
5 All instrumentation and control cubicles, kiosks etc. designed for use outside shall be
manufactured having walls of double skinned, resin bonded fibreglass, with a totally
encapsulated infill of rigid weather and "boil" proof plywood to DD ENV 12038 between the
two skins.
14
6 The roof section shall have a totally encapsulated infill of end grain balsa instead of plywood.
The end grain balsa shall have a minimum thickness of 18mm.
20
7 They shall be fully wind, dust and water tight and suitable for the prevailing climatic
conditions and be of robust vandal proof construction.
s
8 The cabinets shall have a single door or two or more hinged non-overlapping doors fitted with a
rd
double locking bar, with a waterproof lever handle and cylindrical lock. Doors shall have an all
round channel recessed gasket of non-fatigue, oil and age resistant material. Hinges shall be
da
strong, smooth action and non-corrodable which allow the door to be easily removed. Doors
shall be fitted with a suitable fixing bar to hold in the open position.
an
9 Box section steel shall be encapsulated into door edges and door frames.
St
10 All door catches and locks shall latch onto steel reinforced surfaces. The door sill shall be
protected by a non-corroding alloy material.
n
io
11 Door mounted meters and transparent windows shall be of wired glass, which shall be protected
from harmful direct sunshine by orientation or other approved means.
ct
12 The cabinet shall be stiffened and/or reinforced when required for additional rigidity.
tru
13 The cabinet shall have an easily removable rear mounting plate on moulded spacers.
s
on
14 All internal equipment shall be mounted on supports built into the fiberglass structure. Fixing
bolts through the skin will not be accepted.
C
15 If required by the internal components, encapsulated thermal insulation shall be included.

ar
16 The laminate material shall have flame retardant characteristics in compliance with BS 476
Part 7 Class 2, and shall retain "stability, integrity and insulation" for 30 min. when tested in
at
accordance with BS 476 Part 8. An indicative fire test report shall be provided with the
tender.
Q
17 Colour impregnated gel coats backed by coloured resin shall be used to ensure maintenance
free and "colour fast" finishes.
18 The cabinet shall be light grey in colour. The finish shall be colour fast and maintenance
free.
19 The cabinet shall be constructed to provide environmental protection to IP 55.
20 The cabinet shall have a suitable shade canopy.
21 Ventilation via louvres with efficient sand traps and vermin screens will be permitted.
22 The cabinet shall be floor mounted suitable for bolting down to a concrete base.
23 The locking arrangement shall be suitable for the Master Lock & Key System used by the
Employer.
28.2.6 Small outdoor Enclosures for Pushbutton Stations, Local Isolators, Local Starter or
Control Gear etc.
1 All push button stations for use outdoors shall be of cast alloy, galvanised iron or stainless
steel, heavy duty construction, specifically made for outdoor use and certified by the
manufacturer as weatherproof.
14
2 Stop push buttons shall be of the auto-latch turn-to-release type. Push buttons shall not be
prone to U.V. degradation.
20
3 Clearly visible legend plates to indicate the motor controlled shall be fitted at each push
button or control station.
s
4 Isolator enclosures shall be of similar construction, lockable in the off position and fitted with
rd
auxiliary contacts for alarm purposes.
da
5 A robust factory manufactured and galvanised steel or stainless steel floor standing support
shall be supplied and fixed for mounting the enclosure at a convenient height. These shall
an
be pipe mounted with cabling running up inside the pipe, to protect the cables from
mechanical damage and sun or fabricated from substantial angle iron and channel.
St
Enclosures shall not be attached to handrailing. Under no circumstances shall enclosures be
mounted on channel type supports of the unistrut type. Unistrut will not be accepted as any
part of a welded support.
n
io
6 Where enclosures are installed in direct sunlight sunshades of an approved design shall be
provided.
ct
7 Hinged doors shall have a rain trap all round the opening and enclosures shall be fitted with
tru
a separate weather protection canopy.

s
8 Under no circumstances will painted sheet steel enclosures or enclosures with knock-outs
on
for conduit or glandplates be acceptable for use outdoors unless they are mounted inside a
heavy duty GRP enclosure and weather canopy.
C
28.3 INSTALLATION
ar
28.3.1 General
at
1 Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation" and other standards as directed
Q
by the Engineer.
2 Remove dirt and debris from enclosure
3 Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each
corner under the provisions of Section "supporting Devices".

28.4.1 General
1 The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Control (QC) plan or Inspection
complete functional checks on the final product. Final inspection and calibration operations
shall be documented in a report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality Inspection department.

14
20
s
28.5 ENVIRONMENT
rd
28.5.1 General
da
an
herein.

St

n
io
END OF PART
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 29: Underfloor Ducts
29 UNDERFLOOR DUCTS ................................................................................ 2
29.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

29.1.1 Scope 2
29.1.3 References 2
29.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
29.2.1 General 2
14
29.2.2 Underfloor Ducts 3
29.2.3 Trench Ducts 4
20
29.2.4 Service Fittings 4
29.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 5
s
rd
29.3.1 General 5
da
29.4.1 General 6
an
29.5 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................ 7
St
29.5.1 General 7
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
29 UNDERFLOOR DUCTS
29.1 GENERAL
29.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for underfloor ducts.
14
This Section
Part 7 Conduits
20
Part 8 Trunking
Part 9 Cable Trays
s
rd
29.1.2 Description
da
1 Underfloor ducts shall be provided as specified and shown on the drawings.
an
29.1.3 References
St

n
BS 7671......................Requirement for electrical installations. IEE wiring regulations.

io
Sixteenth Edition
ct
29.1.4 Submissions
tru
s
2 Shop Drawings submission shall include dimensional drawings, including sections and
on
elevations, showing the following:

C

ar
(c) other pertinent data.

at

Q
29.2 PRODUCTS
29.2.1 General
1 Underfloor ducts shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS 7671, NFPA 70 - National

Electrical Code, U.S.A or other equivalent standard as applicable.
2 Underfloor duct specification shall be in accordance with QGEWC regulations and IEE latest
edition as applicable.
3 The product selected and proposed shall include manufacturer's instructions that indicate
application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by the product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements.
4 The contractor shall select the product only from a manufacturer specializing in
conditions.
14
5 The contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination with related civil activities prior to the
20
selection of the equipment.
6 The contractor shall clearly show locations of ducts, service fittings, junction boxes, and
s
branch circuiting arrangements on the drawings
rd
29.2.2 Underfloor Ducts
da
1 Sheet metal raceway shall be designed to be embedded in concrete slab.
an
(a) concealed underfloor duct - Type of underfloor duct, which has concrete topping over
St
cover, which shall have inserts for installation of service fittings.
(b) flush duct - Type of underfloor duct, which has cover, installed flush with concrete
n
slab. Cover shall have openings for installation of service fittings

io
2 Steel duct shall be provided with a corrosion-resistant finish.

ct
3 The ducting shall be Underfloor or Flush as specified

tru
4 Configuration of the ducting shall be one or two level systems as specified using ducts in
s
parallel runs as shown on Drawings.

on
5 Services shall include, 240 volt power - standard size, telephone - extra width size, computer
C
data - extra width size, 415 volt power - standard or extra width size as specified.
ar
6 Underfloor ducting shall be selected from the standard range of the manufacturer. The
nominal size shall be 38 x 76 mm or as specified.
at
7 Underfloor ducting where required for larger width application shall be 38 x 152 mm or as
Q
specified.
8 Fabricate distribution lengths with standard height preset inserts on 610 mm centers or
provide precut 32 mm diameter holes on 610 mm centers as specified. Close with flat metal
screw plugs.
9 Rectangular or round cover and trim single level junction boxes or as specified with
adjustable height shall be used. Provide internal barriers, conduit and duct entrances, and
extension rings as required.
10 Rectangular or round cover and trim Two Level Junction Boxes or as specified with
adjustable height shall be used. Provide separate enclosures for each service to allow feeder
ducts to cross under distribution ducts. Provide conduit and duct entrances and extension
rings as required.
11 Junction Box Cover Plate shall conform to one of the following as specified:
(a) tile trim plate flush with finished floor.

(b) smooth cover plate flush with concrete floor
(c) carpet trim holders of proper depth.
14
12 Supports shall be adjustable type and to be adjusted before concrete topping placement.
20
13 Service Fittings shall be provided in conjunction with wiring devices.
s
14 Duct Markers shall be corrosion resistant marker screws, with escutcheon.
rd
15 Manufacturer's standard range of fittings and accessories shall be used as much as is
da
practically as possible.
29.2.3 Trench Ducts

an
1 Underfloor raceway where specified shall be provided with a removable cover flush with the
St
concrete slab.
n
2 Steel trench duct shall be provided with corrosion resistant finish. The duct shall be of closed
io
or open bottom type as specified

ct
3 The duct sizes shall be as specified or indicated on the Drawings.

tru
4 Provide adjustable compartment dividers.

s
5 Supports shall be adjustable type and to be adjusted before and after concrete topping
on
placement.
C
6 Coverplates shall conform to one of the following as specified:

ar
(a) 6.4 mm thick steel removable Coverplates with gasket joints

at
(b) smooth cover plate flush with concrete floor

(c) recessed coverplate with tile trim.
Q
7 Manufacturer's standard range of fittings and accessories shall be used as much as is

practically as possible.
29.2.4 Service Fittings
1 Pedestal Convenience Receptacle shall have satin aluminum housing with stainless steel
device plate in one duplex, two duplex or back to back configurations or as specified.
2 Flush Cover Convenience Receptacle shall be of aluminum or brass in duplex with flap or
threaded opening or as specified.
3 Pedestal Communication Outlet shall have satin aluminum housing with stainless steel
device plate having One bushed opening 25 mm inside diameter or as specified.
4 Flush Cover Communication Outlet shall be of aluminum or brass with stainless steel device
plate having 54 x 25-mm combination threaded opening or as specified.
5 Pedestal Communication Fitting shall have satin aluminum housing with stainless steel
device plate having one duplex convenience receptacle with one bushed opening, 25 mm
inside diameter or as specified.
6 Flush Cover Communication Fitting shall be of aluminum or brass with stainless steel device
14
plate having 54 x 25-mm combination threaded opening or as specified.
20
29.3 INSTALLATION
29.3.1 General
s
rd
1 Install Products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
da
2 Locate duct in structural slab or concrete topping as specified.
an
3 Provide expansion fittings with suitable bonding jumper where duct crosses building
expansion joints.
St
4 Terminate ducts for power service in bottom of panelboard or wireway as specified using
n
suitable fittings. Terminate in junction box for extension of conduit to panel board where
io
specified. .
ct
5 Terminate ducts for telephone service 50 mm above floor in telephone closet or in bottom of
telephone cabinet using suitable fittings as specified.
tru
6 Terminate ducts for data services in bottom of data services cabinet using suitable fittings.
s
on
7 Level cover plates flush with finished concrete floor.

C
8 Place rectangular plates square with wall lines.

ar
9 Securely hold junction boxes and ducts in place during installation to avoid floating or other
movement.
at
10 Close unused duct or conduit entrances to junction boxes. Seal duct terminations at junction
Q
boxes.
11 Earth and bond duct under provisions of Part "Earthing and Bonding".
12 Install underfloor duct with tops of preset inserts as specified or indicated on the Drawings
below finished floor line. Locate ducts on centers as specified or as indicated on Drawings.
13 Install flush duct flush with finished floor.
14 Place schedule on the inside of coverplate of each junction box indicating distance to first
insert in each direction, measured from the center of the box. Use self-adhesive labels for
schedule.
15 Use blank duct in permanent corridors, passages, lobbies, for connecting parallel ducts less
than 1.8 m apart, for feeder duct from cabinet or panelboard to first junction box, and where
indicated.
16 Join duct lengths using combination support couplers where practical. Provide additional
supports at intervals of not over 1.5 m, within 750 mm each side of junction boxes, and as
close as practical to elbows, bends, and terminations.
17 Install insert within 30 mm of edge of junction box. Align inserts on same centers for all
services.
14
18 Do not extend inserts into special floor finishes, such as terrazzo, marble, or wood.
20
19 Install a duct marker in each insert adjacent to junction box, at end of each duct run, on both
sides of permanent partitions, and on both sides of change of direction of duct. Install
markers flush with finished floor material. In carpeted areas, install marker screws level with
s
carpet backing.
rd
20 Install surface service fittings after installation of floor finishes. Cut floors as necessary,
da
following duct manufacturer's recommendations. Replace damaged floor construction and
finish.
an
21 Install trench duct trims flush with coverplates. Maintain covering of factory-applied tape for
St
protection.
n
22 Terminate ducts for X-ray circuits at wall; interface with wall duct provided under Part
io
"Surface Raceway Trunking".

ct
23 Clean ducts and fittings of debris and dust before installing wire and cable.
tru
24 Pull wire and cable from outlet insert toward junction boxes.
s
25 Install branch circuit conductors continuous between junction box and farthest fitting. Do not
on
cut conductor to make connections to receptacle devices.

C
26 Clean finished surfaces before and after the installation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
ar

at
Q
29.4.1 General
1 The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Control (QC) Plan or Inspection
29.5 ENVIRONMENT
29.5.1 General

herein.
14
END OF PART
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 03: Protective Devices
3 PROTECTIVE DEVICES ............................................................................... 2
3.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

3.1.1 Scope 2
3.1.3 Ratings 2
3.1.4 Standards 2
3.1.5 Overcurrent Protective Device Co-ordination 2
14
3.1.7 Manufacturers 3
3.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
20
3.2.1 Air Circuit Breakers 3
3.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 6
s
3.2.3 Miniature Circuit Breakers 7
rd
3.2.4 MCB/ELCB 7
3.2.5 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB) 7
da
3.2.6 Overload Relays 8
3.2.7 Fuses 10
an
3.2.8 Fuse Switches 11
3.2.9 Isolating Switches 12
St
3.2.10 Stop Lock-off Push Buttons 12

3.2.11 Control Relays/Auxiliary Relays/Interposing Relays 12
n
3.2.12 Protection Relays 13

io
3.2.13 Alarm System 13

3.2.14 Padlocks 14
ct
3.2.15 Hours Run Meters 14

tru
3.2.16 Thermistor relay 14

3.2.17 Moisture and mechanical seal leakage protection 15
s
3.2.18 Timers 15
on
C
ar
at
Q
3 PROTECTIVE DEVICES
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 This Part shall specify the requirements for protective devices.
14
1 The work of this Part is integral with the whole of the Project Documentation and is not
20
s
3.1.3 Ratings
rd
1 The ratings of the various overcurrent protective devices shall be, in general, as indicated on
da
the Project Drawings. However, the protective device ratings shall be confirmed based on the
equipment and items being provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall provide calculation
an
and justification for proposing any change in the rating.
St
3.1.4 Standards
1 The following standards shall be followed:

n
io
BS EN 60255-6, IEC 255 Electrical relays

ct
BS EN 60269, IEC 269 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000VAC and 1500
tru
V AC
BS EN 60898, IEC 157-1A Miniature and Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
s
BS EN 60947, IEC 947-2 Low Voltage circuit breakers

on
BS EN 61008-1 ..........Earth Leakage circuit breakers

C
BS EN 61810-1 ..........Electrical Relays

ar
BS88........................... Cartridge fuses

at
Q
3.1.5 Overcurrent Protective Device Co-ordination
1 The Contractor shall carry out and provide an overcurrent protective device. Co-ordination
study as part of his material submission, as outlined below:
2 Properly co-ordinated automatically operated overcurrent protective devices shall be provided

for this Project. The overcurrent protective devices shown on the Drawings shall be co-
ordinated for adequate continuous current and interrupting capacity to assure proper
overcurrent protective devices operation under normal and fault conditions in the system.
3 All overcurrent protective devices on this Project and the first upstream device of the existing
electrical system shall be co-ordinated so that they will perform as follows. When two or more
overcurrent protective devices (including the first upstream protective device of the existing
system) in series with each other experience current flow greater than their rated current, the
device with the lowest rated current shall trip and/or open the circuit first and thereby prevent
the higher rated devices from operating.
4 The Supplier of the overcurrent protective devices shall prepare a co-ordination study to
verify the above stated performance requirements. The study shall be documented by the
Supplier and the documents shall include but not be limited to the following:
14
(a) a composite drawing or drawings (on full size, reproducible, log-log paper) showing
the entire new electrical system (including the first upstream protective device of the
existing system) showing all protective device curves (including motor overloads),
20
short circuit duties, motor starting curves and damage curves for motors, equipment
and conductors. This drawing or drawings shall show that all protective devices are
properly co-ordinated to perform as stated above
s
rd
(b) manufacturer‟s overcurrent operating curves (on full size, reproducible, log-log paper)
for each overcurrent device. In the case of fuses, both minimum melt and maximum
da
clearing time curves shall be included
(c) reproducible copies of all Project single line diagrams so marked to show short circuit
an
duties at all switchboards and motor control centres, and which operating curve
applies to each overcurrent device on the diagram (the operating curves shall also be
correspondingly marked)
St
(d) a tabulation of the short circuit duties at all switchboards and motor control centres,
sizes and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and the required settings of all
n
of the adjustable overcurrent protective devices so that the performance

io
requirements are met. Protective devices which have earth fault protection features
are specifically required to meet this performance requirement.
ct
5 This documented co-ordination study shall be submitted for review before the overcurrent
tru
devices are supplied for the Project.

s

on
1 The suppliers manufacturing facility shall be certified to the ISO - 9001 series of standards
C
from the International Standards Organisation.

ar
3.1.7 Manufacturers
at
1 Preference will be given to one manufacturer of ACB, MCCB and MCB to ensure proper co-
ordination in accordance with Clause 3.1 above.
Q
3.2 PRODUCTS
3.2.1 Air Circuit Breakers
1 To IEC 947-2 or BS EN 60947-2, suitable for triple pole service and shall have breaking
capacity of 50 kA symmetrical for 3 seconds at 415 Volts.
ACBs shall be of the horizontal withdraw able, load making and breaking type with the
contacts being of the double break pattern with arcing chutes, shutters etc. The main arcing
contacts shall be of the high pressure butt type with wipe and roll action on opening and
closing. The main contacts shall be of silver alloy.
Removable arc chutes shall be fitted together with an air circuit breaker. ACB shall be
complete with a mechanical ON/OFF position indicator, pad-lockable. ACB shall conform to
B.S. En 60947-2 (EN 60947-2, IEC 947-2) and B.S. En 60664-1.
Each circuit breaker shall be enclosed in sheet steel and provided with three phase manual
and automatic isolating devices suitably interlocked so as to prevent isolation except when
the circuit breaker is in open position. It shall be arranged in such a manner that it will not be
possible to withdraw the breaker or remove the front cover unless the ACB is in the isolated
position.
14
Provision shall be made for locking the ACB in this position (isolated position).
20
Shutters shall be provided to protect the live terminals against accidental touch when the
ACBs are in a fully withdraw able position. The ACB shall have solid sate overload and short
circuit protection devices along with earth fault trip mechanism. The solid state circuit shall
s
be provided with proper LED indication to indicate the trip status of the ACB. The ACBs shall
rd
be equipped with shunt trip of 30V DC trip mechanism for tripping the breaker with restrictive
da
earth fault relay to be provided separately with suitable size of CTs.
2 The Air Circuit Breakers (the conventional type and not moulded case circuit breaker) shall
an
be 500 V, 50 Hz, triple pole with neutral link for incoming and outgoing ACB or four poles for
bus tie ACB only with ratings as shown on the Drawings. They shall be air break, trip free,
St
draw-out type with mechanical and electrical ON/OFF indicators.
3 Where air circuit breakers are to be electrically operated by automatic motor wound spring
n
mechanism, a standby manual operating handle shall be provided for operating the circuit
io
breaker in case of power or motor failure.

ct
4 The air circuit breaker shall be provided with built-in overcurrent, short circuit and Earth fault
tru
protection having the following characteristics:-
adjustable long time delay current setting between 50 – 200% with variable tripping
s
(a)
on
time characteristics.
(b) adjustable short time delay current setting 200 – 800% with variable tripping time
C
characteristics.
(c) instantaneous tripping for heavier over current applications adjustable from 400 –
ar
1600% of the base current.

(d) adjustable earth fault trip current setting 20 – 80% with variable tripping time
at
characteristics.
Q
5 The circuit breaker shall have three position on the draw-out mechanism, namely service
position where all main and auxiliary contacts are made, test position where main contacts
are open but auxiliary contacts are closed and isolated position where all contacts are open.
An indicator shall clearly show these positions and provisions shall be made for locking the
breakers in any position. ON/OFF indicator shall be provided.
6 Mechanical Interlocks shall be provided to prevent withdrawing or inserting of the breaker

when it is „ON‟. Any attempt to do so shall trip the breaker automatically.
7 The withdrawable part of the circuit breaker shall be effectively connected to earth through
scraping contacts that shall make before and break after the main and auxiliary contacts.
8 The moving contacts comprising the main and arcing contacts shall be of the spring loaded,
self aligning type. The arc contacts shall be arranged to make before and break after the
main contacts.
9 The air circuit breaker shall include but not limited to the following as minimum:-
(a) 8NO/8NC auxiliary contacts

(b) arc chutes
(c) folding extension rail
(d) charging handle
14
(e) open and close push buttons
(f) trip indicator
20
(g) spring charge motor
(h) spring charge indicator
s
rd
(i) breaker position indicator mechanically and electrically.
(j) micro-processor based protection and management unit that provides the following
da
control and monitoring features:-
(i) overcurrent protection
an
(ii) short circuit protection
St
(iii) earth fault protection

(iv) neutral protection
n
io
(v) thermal memory

(vi) alarm logging
ct
(vii) field selectable Manual or Auto reset

tru
(viii) microprocessor malfunction watch dog

s
(ix) programmable input/outputs

on
(x) load monitoring

C
(xi) operation counter

(xii) serial communication.
ar
(k) carriage/Lifting Truck for ACB exceeding 25 Kg in weight [One carriage for each
at
site/project regardless of number of breakers provided

Q
(l) shunt trip and under voltage release
10 The Main Incoming Circuit Breakers shall be provided with cable terminal boxes to suit the
incoming cables from the transformer/source supply. The gland plate for the incoming cables
shall be non-ferrous material brass compression type glands, earthing tags and shrouds. In
case single core PILCA/PVC cables are used, the clamping arrangement is to supplied as
per the sketch nos. 9 & 10 shown on pages 144/145 of KAHRAMAA regulations.
11 Circuit breakers shall be tropicalised to operate continuously in an ambient temperature of 55

°C and high relative humidity.
12 Type test certificate for each size of circuit breakers and MCCB from an internationally
recognised testing authority acceptable to the Engineer shall be provided.
13 The ACB shall have adjustable settings and the following facility:
(a) Long time current setting and tripping delay.

(b) Overload signal.
(c) Short time pick up and tripping delay.
(d) Instantaneous pick-up.
(e) Earth leakage test button.
(f) Long time rating plug screw.
(g) Test connector
14
(h) Lamp test, reset and battery test.
(i) Indication of tripping cause.
20
(j) Digital display.
(k) Three phase bar graph and power display.
s
rd
(l) Setting / programmable buttons.
da
14 The ultimate breaking capacity (ICU) shall be minimum of 44KA. The rated service breaking
capacity (ICS) and rated short time withstand current (ICW) shall be equal to or greater than
an
ICU.
St
15 The ACB section of the switch board shall be in separate cubicle separated from other parts
of the switch board. This section shall not have any outgoing feeders.
n
io
3.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

ct
1 Shall have a combination of thermal and magnetic tripping giving an inverse time delay
tru
protection against sustained overloads and instantaneous tripping under heavy overloads
and short circuits. Unless otherwise stated in the particular specification or drawings, MCCB
shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 25 kA.
s
on
2 Breakers shall have a quick make, quick break over-centre switching mechanism that is
mechanically trip free from the handle so that contacts cannot be held closed against short
C
circuits and abnormal current.

ar
3 Tripping due to overload or short circuits shall be clearly indicated by the handle assuming a
position mid-way between the manual ON and OFF position.
at
Q
4 Latch surfaces shall be polished.
5 Poles shall be constructed to open, close and trip simultaneously.
6 Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible.
7 Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case to IEC No. 157 - 1A, suitable for
installation inside switchboards.
8 Non-interchangeable trip breakers shall have the trip unit sealed.
9 Breakers with earth leakage relay protection shall be provided with shunt trips.
10 Frame sizes shall be as per manufacturer‟s standard size and as approved by the Engineer.
11 The magnetic trip shall be adjustable type for rating 200 Amp. and above, with 8 settings
from 1.5 to 10 times the rated current of the circuit breaker.
12 Each MCCB shall be housed in a separate Compartment with the operating handle door
interlocked when used as an Incomer, feeder or motor starter isolator, so that access can
only be gained to the Compartment with the MCCB in the OFF position. Padlocking shall be
provided in the OFF position only. When the MCCB is used for control transformers,
distribution or ICA compartments the handle shall be internally mounted with appropriate
shrouding and warning labels.
14
13 Each MCCB shall be complete with 2 N/O and 2 N/C spare auxiliary contacts (10A, 240v
20
rating) in addition to those required for the Contract.
14 Each MCCB used as an Incomer or feeder shall have facilities for electrical as well as
s
mechanical interlock.
rd
15 All incoming circuit breakers shall be provided with electrical & mechanical interlocking
da
scheme to ensure that only one incoming supply can be energized at any one time where
more than one supply is available.
an
3.2.3 Miniature Circuit Breakers
St
1 These shall be type C for general purpose uses, suitable for the load they feed, and shall
have short circuit rating of 9 kA, unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation.
n
io
2 They shall be fault rated so that fuse backup protection is not required.
ct
3 They shall be rated in accordance with BS EN 60898, IEC 898.

tru
4 They shall include the following minimum features:

s
on
(a) magnetic and thermal trip elements

(b) trip-free mechanisms
C
(c) locking of facilities with detachable proprietary brackets and clearly marked ratings.
ar
5 RCBO shall comply with BS EN 61008-1 & BS EN 61009-1

at
3.2.4 MCB/ELCB
Q
1 Combined MCB/ELCB units shall be provided for final circuits supplying socket outlets, water
heaters and water pumps.
2 The units shall have a trip sensitivity of 30 mA.
3.2.5 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB)
1 Current operated earth leakage circuit breakers shall provide accident protection by
interrupting dangerous contact with voltage which may be present in faulty electrical
equipment as a result of frame faults, insufficient insulation or misuse.
2 The ELCB shall also provide high degree of protection against earth leakage, fire and electric
shock. It shall withstand at least 10 kA or as specified in the project documents. The
breakers shall comply with BS EN 61008-1 and the recommended specification CEE 227 of
the IEC on rules of approval of electrical equipment.
3 The breaker shall consist of a core balance transformer, a tripping coil with contact assembly,
main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, a test button and a trip free mechanism all enclosed in
a robust body of all insulated material.
4 Degree of Protection against earth leakage throughout the electrical installation shall be as
indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, ELCB shall have 30 mA trip settings.
14
5 The breaker protecting lighting and or power circuits shall be mounted in the panel board
20
enclosure.
3.2.6 Overload Relays
s
rd
1 Thermal Overload Relay
da
(a) thermal overload relay where specified shall be of Bi-metallic inverse time-lag type,
an
which shall be used with a contactor in the starter circuit enabling switching device to
open both control and power circuit (fully isolating the power to the motor terminal box)
when the current in the relay exceeds a predetermined value.
St
(b) the thermal overload relay shall fully comply with the requirement of BS EN 60255-8
n
(c) the thermal overload relay shall be simple and robust suitable for direct contactor
mounting or if to be mounted separately shall be used with manufacturer supplied links
io
and associated attachment.

ct
(d) the thermal overload relay shall be designed to include ambient temperature
compensation feature from – 20 Deg C to + 65 Deg C eliminating the need of any
tru
calibration in the field during operation.

(e) the thermal overload relay shall provide the following protections:-
s
on
(i) over-current/Overload
(ii) single phasing/Phase failure
C
ar
(f) the thermal overload relay shall have MAN/AUTO field convertible Reset button
located on top of the relay for resetting of the relay after trip. Additionally a facility shall
at
be provided on the door of starter compartment to reset the relay if so

required/specified.
Q
(g) the thermal overload relay shall have two characteristics, the one when the relay bi-
metals are in cold state that will break the contacts of the relay within 8-10 seconds
and the other when in hot state the contacts breaking shall be reduced to
approximately one third of the tripping time as indicated for the cold characteristics.
The tripping time may be allowed to vary depending upon the starting of the motor
such as normal/heavy-duty.
(h) the thermal overload relay shall have been type tested and ASTA certified to achieve
Type 2 co-ordination in accordance with BS EN 60947.
(i) thermal overload relays shall be used for motors rating up to and including 11 kW.
2 Electronic Motor Protection Relay
(a) General
(i) the Motor Protection shall be an intelligent electronic device that is user friendly
and user configurable, capable of controlling the motor manually or automatic.
(ii) EMPR shall be CE marked and confirm to BSEN 60947-1
(iii) EMPR with LCD display shall be provided in the MCC for each sewage pump
motor starter regardless of the rating of the pump and non-sewage pump drives
above 11.0 KW. The LCD unit combined with function keys, minimum IP54,
shall be mounted on the cubicle door
(iv) non sewage pump drives upto 11.0 KW inclusive may be provided with ambient
compensated bi-metal type thermal overload relay.
14
(v) EMPR shall have built-in RS485 communication port utilizing Modbus RTU
protocol for serial communication with other devices on the network.
20
(vi) EMPR shall be supplied with software, user manual and interconnecting cables.
(vii) EMPR shall be provided with user friendly software minimum windows 2000
s
based communication (fully supported by Latest Edition of Windows Based
rd
Operating System) program allowing easy access to all features with pull down
menus.
da
(b) the protection features shall include the following as minimum:-
an
(i) over load protection
(ii) over current protection
St
(iii) over voltage protection

n
(iv) under voltage protection

io
(v) under current protection

ct
(vi) phase sequence

tru
(vii) phase imbalance

(viii) phase loss
s
on
(ix) earth leakage

(x) earth fault
C
(xi) thermistor broken

ar
(xii) open contactor

at
(xiii) locked rotor

Q
(c) motor current sensing shall be through external 5 A or 1 A current transformer. The
following measured values shall be displayed on the LCD mounted on the starter
compartment door.
(i) RMS current of each phase
(ii) RMS voltage
(iii) earth leakage current
(iv) continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of the motor
(v) thermal capacity used
(vi) power factor of the motor
(vii) motor kW
(viii) phase unbalance

(ix) parameter settings
(x) percentage of FLC of the motor
(xi) adjustable delayed start/stop
(xii) maintenance Log
(d) EMPR shall be capable of registering all trip commands and log trip and pre-trip
metering values for reporting and printing purposes.
(e) Programmable Ranges
14
(i) overload – shall be based on the calculation of accumulated I²t value and
selected thermal capacity curve. The tripping time shall be 0-10 Sec. Adjustable.
20
(ii) locked rotor – To trip the motor within 1 to 5 Sec. when the running current
exceeds the stalled rotor trip level of 1.5 to 5.0 x FLC.
s
(iii) phase unbalance – Should there be a phase current unbalance of greater than
rd
15% lasting for 5 seconds an alarm shall be generated. If the condition
prolonged for 10 seconds or more a trip shall occurs.
da
(iv) earth fault – The earth fault shall be measured as a percentage of primary range
an
of current transformer. The setting range for the ground current shall be 0.1 to
1.0 x ground fault CT primary current. An adjustable delay time of 0-30 seconds
St
shall allow preventing nuisance alarm from momentary surges. It should be
possible to make the alarm setting below the trip level to indicate early warning
insulation breakdown.
n
thermistor/over temperature – EMPR shall be capable of accepting PTC and

io
(v)
NTC sensors. Thermistor level shall be selectable for both alarm and trip
ct
conditions with an adjustable time delay of 0-5 seconds.

tru
(vi) under current – 10 – 100% of motor FLC with a time delay of 0-30 seconds.
3.2.7 Fuses
s
on
1 These shall be selected according to the application and be suitable for the type of load they
feed, for example motor starting, cable protection, protection for the semi conductor devices,
C
control transformer protection etc.

ar
2 Fuses shall be sized according to the condition under which they will operate such as normal,
at
small sustained overload, heavy overload etc. in order to consider the operating
characteristics accordingly.
Q
3 The fuse shall either include a suitable fuse carrier or it shall be capable of isolation. If the
fuse carrier is included it shall be such that when it is being withdrawn normally or when it is
completely withdrawn the operator is completely protected from accidental contact with any
live metal of its fuse link, fuse contacts and fixed contacts.
4 Fuse/links shall be fixed inside cubicles with sufficient spacing to facilitate easy fuse/link
withdrawal.
5 If the fuse is capable of isolation it shall be so interlocked with the switch that isolation is
complete before the fuse enclosure can be opened further. The switch shall be prevented
from closing while the fuse-cover is open.
6 All fuses shall be of HBC/HRC cartridge type to BS 88/BS EN 60269.
7 Fuse holders and fittings shall be made of molded plastic insulating material of an approved
make. Ceramic materials will not be accepted. Fuse fittings shall be fully shrouded and it
shall be possible to change the fuses without danger of contact with live metal. Fuse holder
terminals shall be of the clamp type where the screw does not directly tighten onto the
conductor.
8 Fuse fittings shall have basic sizes of 16, 32, 63, 100 and 200A and the fuse holders shall be
able to accept fuse links of that rating on any BS rating down to the next basic size.
14
9 A mechanical indication device shall be built into the fuse to indicate operation/fail status.
20
10 All small wiring for voltmeters etc. from the busbars shall be via busbar mounted fuse holders
containing 20 amp fuse links. The fuse holders shall be solidly bolted to the busbars.
s
3.2.8 Fuse Switches
rd
1 Fuse switches where specified shall comprise flush/surface mounted heavy duty composite
da
air break switches and fuse units complying with BS EN 60947-3 and fitted with fuses to BS
EN 60269 and shall be rated and equipped as detailed. Composite units shall be contained
an
within an enclosure of metal and shall be fitted with an earthing terminal or equivalent to
enable the enclosures to be earthed irrespective of any means of connection such as is
St
provided for attaching armoring or other metallic covering of the cable supplying the
composite unit.
n
2 Fuse switch shall be capable of making, carrying and breaking current under normal circuit
io
condition, which may include specified operating overload conditions and also carrying for
ct
specified time currents under specified circuit conditions such as those of short circuit.
tru
3 The switch breaking capacity shall be related to AC 23 utilization category or other approved
equivalent standard for 415 V 3 phase 50 Hz 4 wire operation for use on specified fault level
s
and for service and site climatic conditions as described in section 16480 Factory Built
on
Assembly (FBA).
C
4 BS EN 60269 complied HRC fuses shall be provided as a mean of overcurrent/overload

protective device to protect the switch. The maximum rated current of the fuse with regard to
ar
the prospective short circuit current in the actual circuit shall be mentioned.
at
5 The fuse shall be connected after the switch so that a short circuit will not occur in the fuse-
combination, thus for an expected fault to take place after the combination fuse switch unit
Q
6 In the event of a fault this combination shall provide protection, permitting switching without,
for example contact welding and preventing separation of main contacts in case of fault
occurring during running.
7 The combination fuse switch unit shall be housed in an enclosure so constructed that the
cover cannot be opened until the switch is fully opened and the construction shall be such
that when the cover is opened a competent examiner can override the interlock and operate
the switch. After such operation the cover shall be prevented from closing with the switch
position indicator in a false position.
8 Switches shall be provided with mechanical ON/OFF indicators and operating handles.
9 Means shall be provided for locking the switch in the OFF position only.
10 The combination fuse switch unit shall be fitted with 2NO + 2 NC auxiliary contacts wired to
the terminals.
3.2.9 Isolating Switches
1 The switch when used alone as explained above as an Isolator shall confirm to the utilization
category AC23 and shall fully comply with the requirement specified for isolating functions
specially the isolating distance in accordance with the applicable standard.
14
2 An Isolator shall be capable of opening and closing the circuit ON-LOAD with full voltage
applied across the terminals.
20
3 The Isolator shall be capable of carrying currents under normal circuit conditions and carrying
for specified time currents under abnormal conditions such as those of short-circuit.
s
rd
4 All other features of the Isolator shall be same as specified above for combination fuse switch
unit.
da
3.2.10 Stop Lock-off Push Buttons
an
1 Stop lock-off push buttons for motors shall be the mushroom headed red stay-put type with
St
automatic latching, the units having to be key operated to be released.
2 Push buttons shall be housed in a surface mounting weatherproof enclosure to IP 65.

n
io
3 Push buttons shall be UV stabilised.

ct
3.2.11 Control Relays/Auxiliary Relays/Interposing Relays

tru
1 All auxiliary relays shall mainly comply with BS EN 116000 and BS EN 116205-7.
s
on
2 Where similar relays have different operating voltages and/or different contact configurations,
they shall be non-interchangeable.
C
3 Voltage at nominal operating temperature and shall not „drop-out‟ at greater than 60 % of the
ar
nominal coil voltage.

at
4 Relays shall be continuously rated and capable of sustaining a voltage 10 % in excess of the
nominal coil voltage.
Q
5 Relays shall be fully encapsulated and be of the plug-in type, with terminals protected to a
minimum of IP2X.
6 Plug-in relays shall be fitted with transparent dust-proof covers. External connections shall be
screw clamp terminals, which are easily accessible with the relay in position.
7 Relays shall include the provision for manual operation.
8 The pin configuration of the relay shall be printed on the casing and on the bases in order to
ensure correct pin alignment.
9 Relays shall be suitable for operation at plus 10% and minus 20% of their nominal rated
voltage.
10 The contacts configuration shall be either normally open/normally closed or changeover

contact combinations.
11 The contact material used in the Relay for general logic design shall be AgCdO. Specific
applications requiring extra low switching current shall have GOLD Flash contacts for
minimal voltage drop across the contacts.
12 It will not be permitted to use mixed voltages on the different contacts of a particular relay. If
14
necessary additional relays shall be used by employing good engineering practices such as
operation of add-on relay through auxiliary contact of main relay.
20
13 Relays Coil shall be vacuum impregnated ensuring satisfactorily operation for the adverse
climatic conditions as specified.
s
rd
14 The relays shall be mounted on DIN Rail.
da
15 Relays shall be secured to their bases by retaining bar or clip to prevent malfunction due to
the relay being loosened in its base.
an
16 Care shall be taken to ensure that relay contacts and associated wiring are suitably fused
St
protected.
17 All type of relays shall have a means of visual indication e.g. light emitting diode (LED) or
n
neon bulb mounted within their clear covers connected directly across the relay coil to
io
indicate when the relay is energized. These indicators shall be easily seen when the relay
ct
compartment door is opened.

tru
18 A permanent means of identification shall be affixed to both relay and base in line with the
circuit diagram reference.
s
on
19 Where remote supply voltages are used, a warning label engraved in English and Arabic
shall be fitted, clearly identifying the source of supply.
C
20 The relay shall be designed for minimum 1 Million mechanical operation and 200,000+
ar
electrical operations at rated load.

at
3.2.12 Protection Relays

Q
1 Protection relays shall comply with BS EN 60225-6, BS EN 61810-1, IEC 255.
2 Secondary injection shall be easily possible by means of purpose-made voltage and/or

current plug-in type test terminal blocks which automatically open circuit or short circuit the
integral voltage transformers or current transformers respectively and provide termination‟s
for the test supply. Disconnection of any permanent wiring will not be acceptable.
3.2.13 Alarm System
1 Auxiliary relays and auxiliary contacts and circuit breakers shall be provided as necessary
and if indicated to transmit alarm signals to remote control buildings.
2 Alarms shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall be selected from:
(a) circuit breaker tripped

(b) power failure
(c) standby generator failed-to-start.
3.2.14 Padlocks
1 Padlocks shall be provided for all handle operated circuit breakers, fuse-switches, isolators
and the like.
14
2 Padlocks and keys shall be housed inside a safety key box located in the relevant electrical
switch rooms, including padlocks and keys for lockable field equipment supplied from the
20
switch-room.
3 Safety key boxes shall also be lockable using a master key.
s
rd
3.2.15 Hours Run Meters
da
1 There shall be two counters provided for each motor. The one counter shall be non-
resettable hour run meter, rotating disc type for measuring total operating period
an
(accumulative) of a motor. The minimum size shall be 48 x 48 mm. The counting capacity
shall be 99,999.99 hours. The color of the decimal digits shall be red while the color of other
St
digits shall be white.
n
2 The second counter shall be provided for counting total (accumulative) number of start of
motors 75kW and above. This shall be non-resettable, electronic type with permanent
io
memory retention arrangement and LCD display to indicate Number of start of a motor.
ct
3.2.16 Thermistor relay

tru
1 All motors where recommended by the manufacturer or 30 kW and above shall be protected
s
against excessive temperature, poor cooling, high ambient temperature, high starting
on
frequency etc. by providing thermistors unless otherwise specified.

C
2 Thermistors shall be of PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) type made of platinum wire
Pt100 having resistance of 100 ohms at 0 degree C. These shall be embedded in the stator
ar
winding/slot and the leads of the elements shall be brought out to a separate terminal block
located within the junction box of the motor.
at
3 Thermistors shall have a tamper proof pre-set point and fast response time.
Q
4 Thermistors shall be designed to include the following features:-
(a) tamperproof
(b) rapid responding
(c) UL/CSA recognized component
(d) eliminates nuisance trips
(e) field-proven Klixon design
(f) requiring no field adjustment
(g) allows full use of motor rating
(h) directly senses winding over-heating
5 Thermistors shall protect the motor against the following conditions:-
(a) locked rotor

(b) running overload
(c) single phasing
(d) voltage unbalance
(e) high motor ambient temperature
(f) blocked ventilation
14
6 Thermistors have to be connected to a separate control unit that enables tripping of the
20
motor through the starter contactor upon change of resistance of elements in the thermistor
circuit beyond pre-determined value.
s
7 The wiring of the relay module shall be so done, that inhibit the starting of the pumps
rd
automatically even after the temperature limit sensors have cooled and reclosed the circuit.
The facility shall be provided in the motor control centre to reset the control circuit manually,
da
ensuring that a proper cause of overheating has been determined and corrected prior to the
restart of the pumps in auto mode.
an
8 Additional to the sensing of winding temperature by the thermistor, means shall be provided
St
to monitor the bearing temperature wherever possible and as recommended by the motor
manufacturer.
n
3.2.17 Moisture and mechanical seal leakage protection

io
ct
1 All submersible sewage pump motors shall be provided with a dedicated moisture and
mechanical seal leakage protection relay.
tru
2 The moisture sensing probes extended into the oil chamber located between the lower
s
(outer) and upper (inner) seals to detect the presence of moisture in case of failure of outer
on
seal.
3 The probes shall also detects water in the motor chamber and provide a warning prior to the
C
water reaching the bearing or wound stator assemblies. The sensor leads must be connected
ar
to a moisture relay equipped with alarm contacts for indication.

at
4 The moisture detection relay shall be supplied by the pump motor manufacturer and to be
free issued by the contractor to the Motor Control Centre Vendor together with detailed
Q
schematic diagrams and work instructions pertaining to the mounting and location of the
relay.
5 The Motor Control Centre vendor shall strictly adhere to the wiring practices and works
instructions as provided by the manufacturer.
3.2.18 Timers
1 Timers shall be plug-in or surface-mounting types; solid state microprocessor based

employing CMOS IC technology.
2 Timers shall be suitable for operation on a nominal 240 V AC, 110V AC, 24 V AC/DC or other
voltage as specified or deemed necessary for the safe operation.
3 Timers shall have linearly calibrated scales, in units of time, each scale division being a
maximum of 5% of full scale. Repeat accuracy shall be within 0.5% of full scale.
4 Timers shall be provided with “energized” and “timed out” indicators.
5 Plug-in timers shall be fitted with transparent dust-proof covers. External connections shall be
screw clamp terminals which are easily accessible with the timer in position
14
6 Timers shall be secured to their bases by retaining bar or clip to prevent malfunction due to
the relay being loosened in its base.
20
7 The pin configuration shall be printed on the casing of the timer and on its associated bases
in order to ensure correct pin alignment.
s
rd
8 Timer shall be provided with 10 Amps. Rated output relay with DPDT contacts.
da
9 Unless specified otherwise, timers shall be provided for circuits that require delay on operate,
delay on release, and star-delta starting of a 3-phase induction motor.
an
10 Multifunction timing relay programmable where specified shall be provided to the satisfaction
St
of the engineer.
11 The use of pneumatic timers, motor driven timers and other special timers shall be avoided
n
unless specifically mentioned in the particular requirements and the same shall be subjected
io
to the review and approval by the engineer.

ct
tru
END OF PART
s
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 30: Duct bank and Manholes
30 DUCT BANK AND MANHOLES..................................................................... 2
30.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

30.1.1 Scope 2
30.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
30.2.1 General 2
30.2.2 Rigid Steel Conduit 3
14
30.2.3 Plastic Conduit 3
30.2.4 Plastic Duct 3
20
30.2.5 Reinforced Resin Conduit 3
30.2.6 Pre-Cast Concrete Manholes 4
s
30.2.7 Accessories 5
rd
30.2.8 Cast in Place Manhole Accessories 5
da
30.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 5
30.3.1 Duct Bank Installation 5
an
30.3.2 Pre-Cast Manhole Installation 6
30.3.3 Cast in Place Manhole Installation 7
St

n
30.4.1 General 8
io
30.5 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................ 8

ct
30.5.1 General 8
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
30 DUCT BANK AND MANHOLES
30.1 GENERAL
30.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for duct bank and manholes.
14
This Section
Part 7 Conduits
20
Part 8 Trunking
Part 9 Cable Trays
s
rd
30.1.2 Description
da
1 Duct bank and manholes shall be provided as specified and shown on the drawings.
an
30.1.3 Submissions
St
n
2 Shop Drawings submission shall include dimensional drawings of the duct bank and
io
manholes, including sections and elevations, showing the following:

ct
(a) sizes and positions of manholes

tru
(b) duct routing

s
(c) location of entry to buildings

on
(d) other pertinent data.

C
3 Submission of the project data shall be as follows:

ar
at
Q
30.2 PRODUCTS
30.2.1 General
1 Duct Banks and manholes shall confirm to requirements as specified in relevant standard as
applicable.
2 The specification shall be in accordance with latest edition of local and International
regulations e.g. QGEWC, NEMA, ASTM, IEE etc.
4 The contractor shall select the product only from the manufacturer specializing in
conditions.
5 The contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination with related civil and other project
associated activities prior to the selection of the equipment.
14
6 The contractor shall clearly show locations and arrangements of fittings on the drawings.
20
7 To ensure that field measurements are as indicated.
s
8 Provide detail routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation. for rough in.
rd
9 Provide locations of manholes prior to excavating for installation.
da
30.2.2 Rigid Steel Conduit
an
1 Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 or other approved standard.
St
2 Fittings: NEMA FB 1 or other approved standard, steel.

n
30.2.3 Plastic Conduit

io
ct
1 Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC or as specified, with fittings and
conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3 or other approved standard.
tru
2 Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type A PVC; UL 651A, Type EB PVC; High-
s
density polyethylene, Schedule 40 or Fibreglass-reinforced epoxy as specified or indicated.

on
30.2.4 Plastic Duct

C
1 Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6; PVC or ABS Type EB or DB as specified or other

ar
approved standard.
at
2 Plastic Utility Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9 or other approved standard.

Q
3 Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 10, Type EB or DB as specified or

other approved standard.
30.2.5 Reinforced Resin Conduit
1 Conduit and Fittings: NEMA TC 14, Type SW or HW as specified or other approved

standard.
2 Joining Method: Tapered bell and spigot joints, threaded joints or saw-cut system as
specified.
30.2.6 Pre-Cast Concrete Manholes
1 Pre-cast concrete manholes shall be as specified as follows:
(a) Description: Precast manhole designed in accordance with ASTM C858, comprising
modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories or as specified.
(b) Loading: ASTM C857, Class A-16, A-12, A-8 or A-0.3 as specified.
(c) Shape: Square or rectangular with truncated corners or as indicated.
(d) Nominal Inside Dimensions: Specified or indicated mm x mm.
(e) Corner Panel Dimensions: Specified mm wide.
14
(f) Inside Depth: Specified mm.
20
(g) Wall Thickness: Specified mm.
(h) Base Section: Include 75 or specified mm deep x 350 or specified mm round sump
s
with cast sleeve, and two 25 mm ground rod openings where specified
rd
(i) Top Section: Include 1000 mm diameter or other approved size and shape grooved
opening for frame and cover.
da
(j) Riser Casting: 150 or 300 mm as specified or indicated, with manhole step cast into
an
frame.
(k) Frames and Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron, 686 or 762 mm size as
St
specified or other approved standard and size, machine finished with flat bearing
surfaces. Provide cover marked ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE or as directed by the
n
Engineer to indicate utility.

io
(l) Duct Entry Provisions: Single duct knockouts, window knockouts or windows with
ct
plastic duct terminators and diaphragms as specified.

(m) Duct Entry Locations: As specified or indicated.
tru
(n) Duct Entry Size: 100 or 150 mm as specified.

s
(o) Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanised rod and hardware. Locate opposite each duct
on
entry. Provide watertight seal.

(p) Cable Rack Inserts: Minimum load rating 365 kg or as specified. Locate at specified
C
or indicated distance on centre.

ar
(q) Cable Rack Mounting Channel: 38 x 19 mm or approved size steel channel, 1.2 m or
specified length. Provide cable rack arm mounting slots 38 mm or at standard
at
centres.
Q
(r) Cable Racks: Steel channel, 38 x 19 x 350 mm or other approved size, with fastener
to match mounting channel.
(s) Cable Supports: Porcelain, Maple or other approved type clamps and saddles.
(t) Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic manhole step with 13 mm steel reinforcement,
Cast steps at 300 mm on centre vertically or as specified or indicated or Ladder:
Aluminium rung, approved length, with top hook to engage manhole step in riser
casting. Provide one ladder for each manhole.
(u) Sump Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron or other approved standard.
(v) Source Quality Control: Inspect manholes in accordance with ASTM C1037 or other
approved standard.
30.2.7 Accessories
1 Underground Warning Tape: 100 mm wide plastic tape, detectable type, coloured yellow with
suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
30.2.8 Cast in Place Manhole Accessories
1 Frames and Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron, 686 or 762 mm size as specified
or other approved standard and size, machine finished with flat bearing surfaces. Provide
cover marked ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE or as directed by the Engineer to indicate utility.
14
2 Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanised rod and hardware.
20
3 Cable Rack Inserts: Minimum load rating of 365 kg or as approved.
4 Cable Rack Mounting Channel: 38 x 19 mm or approved size steel channel, 1.2 m or
s
specified length. Provide cable rack arm mounting slots 38 mm or at standard centres.
rd
5 Cable Racks: Steel channel, 38 x 19 x 350 mm or other approved size, with fastener to
da
match mounting channel.
an
6 Cable Supports: Porcelain, Maple or other approved type clamps and saddles.
St
7 Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic manhole step with 13 mm steel reinforcement, Cast
steps at 300 mm on centre vertically or as specified or indicated or Ladder: Aluminium rung,
approved length, with top hook to engage manhole step in riser casting. Provide one ladder
n
for each manhole.

io
ct
8 Sump Covers: ASTM A48; Class 30B gray cast iron or other approved standard.
tru
30.3 INSTALLATION
s
30.3.1 Duct Bank Installation

on
1 Install duct to locate top of ductbank at depths as indicated on drawings or install duct to
C
locate top of ductbank minimum specified or indicated mm below finished grade.

ar
2 Install duct with minimum slope of 100 mm per 25.4 m (0.33 percent) or as specified or
indicated. Slope duct away from building entrances.
at
3 Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q
4 Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
5 Join non-metallic duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
6 Wipe non-metallic duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to
entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
7 Install no more than equivalent of two 90-degree bends between pull points.
8 Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required.

9 Terminate duct at manhole entries using end bell.
10 Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 150 mm minimum.
11 Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 1200 mm on centres.
12 Band ducts together before backfilling or placing concrete.
13 Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.
14 Place concrete under provisions of relevant section. Use mineral pigment to colour concrete
14
where specified.
20
15 Provide minimum 75-mm or other specified concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of
ductbank.
s
16 Provide specified or indicated steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas.
rd
17 Connect to existing concrete encasement using dowels.
da
18 Connect to manhole wall using dowels.
an
19 Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples.
St
20 Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and moisture.
n
21 Backfill trenches under provisions of relevant section.

io
ct
22 Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling specified in relevant

section. Install tape 150 mm below finished surface.
tru
30.3.2 Pre-Cast Manhole Installation

s
on
1 Excavate for manhole installation under the provisions of relevant section.
2 Install and seal precast sections in accordance with ASTM C891 or other approved standard.
C
3 Install manholes plumb.

ar
at
4 Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole cover to finished elevation.
Q
5 Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole installation is complete.
6 Where specified or indicated, install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage system
or provide DN100 pipe terminating in 1/4 cu m crushed gravel bed under provisions of
relevant section.
7 Damp proof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has cured
28 days, under provisions of relevant section.
8 Backfill manhole excavation under the provisions of relevant section.

30.3.3 Cast in Place Manhole Installation
1 Excavate for manhole installation under the provisions of relevant section.
2 Formwork: Form inside and outside manhole surfaces in accordance with provisions of
relevant section.
3 Reinforcing: Install reinforcing under the provisions of relevant section.
4 Concrete: Provide air-entrained, 2000 psi (20 mPa) compressive strength at 28 days under
the provisions of relevant section or as specified.
14
5 Shape: As specified or indicated.
20
6 Nominal Dimensions: As specified or indicated.
s
7 Inside Depth: As specified or indicated.
rd
8 Wall Thickness: As specified or indicated.
da
9 Base: Include 350 mm drain opening and two 25 mm ground rod openings where specified.
an
Slope to drain at 6.35 mm per m (2 percent).
St
10 Top: Include 1000-mm diameter or other approved size and shape opening; cast 13-mm rod
in opening to accept ladder hook.
n
11 Duct Entry: Cast ducts openings in walls as indicated.

io
ct
12 Cable Pulling Irons: Locate opposite each duct entry.

tru
13 Cable Rack Inserts: Locate at specified mm on centre.

s
14 Construct brick collar with 760-mm or approved size clear opening to bring cover to proper
on
elevation.
15 Manhole Steps: Cast steps at 300 or specified mm on centre vertically or install ladder in
C
each manhole.
ar
16 Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole construction is complete.

at
17 Install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage system or provide 100 mm pipe
Q
terminating in 0.25 cu m crushed gravel bed under provisions of relevant section where
specified or indicated.
18 Dampproof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has cured
28 days, under provisions of relevant section.
19 Backfill manhole excavation under the provisions of relevant section.

30.4.1 General
14
20
30.5 ENVIRONMENT
s
rd
30.5.1 General
da
herein. an
St

n
END OF PART
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 31: Power Distribution Transformers
31 POWER DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS ................................................ 2
31.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

31.1.1 Scope 2
31.1.3 References 2
31.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
31.2.1 General 3
14
31.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4
20
31.3.1 General 4
31.3.2 Earthing 4
s
rd
31.4.1 General 4
da
31.4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 4
an
31.4.4 Final Adjustments 6
31.4.5 General 6
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
31 POWER DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
31.1 GENERAL
31.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for Power Distribution Transformers.
31.1.2 Description
14
1 Power Distribution Transformers shall be provided as specified.
20
31.1.3 References
1 Power Distribution Transformers shall be provided in accordance with QGEWC latest
s
specifications and the International Standards referred to here below: Power Distribution
rd
transformers shall be submitted for QGEWC approval.
da
BS EN ISO 1461:2009 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles.
an
BS 381C 1980 ............Specification for Colours for Identification, Coding, and Special
Purposes.
St
BS 3692......................ISO Metric Precision Hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts.
BS 4190......................ISO Metric Black Hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts.
n
BS 7079, BS EN ISO 8501, BS EN ISO 8503------Surface Finish of Blast Cleaned Steel for
io
Painting.
ct
BS 2562 1979 ...........Specification for Cable Boxes for Transformers and Reactors.
BS EN ISO 12944, BS EN ISO 14713------Code of Practice for Protective coating for Iron
tru
and Steel Structures against Corrosion

BS 6435 1984 ............Specifications for Unfilled Enclosures for the Dry Termination of HV
s
Cables for Transformers and Reactors.

on
BS Code of Practice 1010.

C
ESI Standard 98-1.

BS IEC 60076, BS IEC 60078----Power Transformers
ar
IEC 296/BS 148 .........Insulating Oil for Transformers and Switchgear.

at
IEC 529/BS 5420 ....... Specification for Degrees of protection Provided by Enclosures.
BS EN 60076. IEC 60076 Method of Measurement of Transformer and Reactor Sound
Q
Levels.
IEC 726 ......................Cast risen transformers
QGEWC latest requirements for Power distribution transformers.
31.1.4 Submissions
1 Tender information and drawings shall be submitted to QGEWC through the supervising
consultant. Submissions shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest QGEWC
specifications.
2 The following documents to be submitted to QGEWC for approval:

(a) Product data and catalogue for each product specified, detailed description of
construction, including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show minimum
clearances and installed devices and features, weight and bearing forces, incoming
and outgoing terminals and provisions for feeder terminations.
(b) Wiring diagrams of transformers and accessory components, differentiating between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and cabling.
(c) Type tests, Routine Tests And Special Tests are to include measurement of noise
level, winding resistance, voltage ratio, check of polarity/vector group, impedance
voltage, load loss, no-load loss, no-load current, induced overvoltage withstand test
and separate source voltage withstand test.
14
(d) Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
20
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of relevant completed
projects with project names and addresses, and names and addresses of the
respective Engineers and Government.
s
(e) Shop and construction drawings including foundation details, grouting holes, base
rd
frames and installation details. All civil works are to be approved by END,
da
Civil Section (EWD).
(f) Operation and maintenance data for materials and products.
an
(g) Undertaking form signed by the Supervisory consultant, supplier, manufacturer in
original form.
St
(h) Spare parts list

n
(i) KAHRAMAA/QGEWC Scheme number and Building Permit number.

io
(j) Any additional information as required by QGEWC.

ct
(k) It is the Contractor responsibility to provide al QGEWC/KAHRAMAA requirements in

tru
time in order to obtain the approval in time.
31.2 PRODUCTS
s
on
31.2.1 General
C
1 The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission Power Distribution Transformers as
specified.
ar
2 The transformers shall be ONAN outdoor, mineral oil filled, in compliance with QGEWC
at
latest standards.
Q
3 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the latest version of QGEWC specification
for Power Distribution Transformers and shall be responsible for obtaining QGEWC
approval.
5 The Contractor shall provide full technical details of the proposed transformers together with
a copy of all relevant standards for review and comment by the Engineer, prior to submission
to QGEWC for approval.
31.3 INSTALLATION
31.3.1 General
1 Comply with QGEWC electrical safety codes and the manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
2 A contractor who is currently approved by QGEWC must carry out installation. The written
approval of QGEWC for the contractor to carry out the work must be forwarded to the
Engineer, and be acknowledged by him, before any installation work commences.
14
3 Equipment Bases: ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings
20
and equipment manufacturer’s drawings and that holes for fixings bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
s
4 Cable Trenches: ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
rd
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
da
5 Cabling and Wiring: install cables, wires, raceways, supports, cable ends and termination
fittings in accordance with the appropriate sections of the Specification and/or as shown on
an
the Drawings. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values.
St
31.3.2 Earthing
n
io
1 Earth transformers shall be in accordance with Part 22.

ct

tru
31.4.1 General
s
on
C
ar
The Assembly shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until the works test sheets have
at
2
Q
3 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer (approved by QGEWC) of high

voltage electrical distribution equipment to perform the installation specified in this Section.
4 Standards: Comply with IEC 76, 354, 726 - Power Transformers and IEC 296 - Insulating Oil.
31.4.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1 Spare Parts: provide spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer, for one year
maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for emergency replacement
due to accidental breakage or failure.
2 Spare Parts for Oil Filled Transformers are to include, but are not limited to, one set of 11 kV
bushings, drain plug, fragile parts which are subject to external damage and suitable quantity
of make-up insulating oil.
3 Tools and Instruments: provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection,
testing, operation and maintenance, recommended by the manufacturer.
1 Transformer to be tested in accordance with QGEWC requirements.
14
2 Schedule tests and provide notification at least one week in advance of test commencement.
20
3 Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and
workmanship.
s
4 Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to the manufacturer's
rd
instructions. For test method and data correction factors, conform to applicable Standards.
da
(a) Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical, and electrical integrity, for
presence of damage or deterioration, and to ensure removal of temporary shipping
an
bracing. Do not proceed with tests until deficiencies are corrected.
(b) Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's
St
published torque values or, where not available, those of applicable Standards.
(c) Insulation Resistance: Perform megohmmeter test of primary and secondary winding-
n
to-winding and winding-to-ground according to the following:

io
ct
WINDING RATING MINIMUM TEST MINIMUM INSULATION

tru
(VOLTS) VOLTS (d.c.) RESISTANCE (MEGOHMS) FOR

LIQUID FILLED
s
601 – 5.000 2.500 1.000

on
5.000 – 35.000 5.000 5.000

C
(i) Duration of Each Test : 10 minutes.

ar
(ii) Temperature Correction : correct results for test temperature, deviation

from 20 C standards.
at
(d) Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured ratios
Q
deviating more than 0.5 per cent from the calculated ratio or the measured ratio for
adjacent coil are not acceptable.
(e) Winding Resistance: Measure for winding at nominal tap setting. Measured
resistance deviating more than 1 per cent from that of adjacent winding is not
acceptable.
5 Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data.
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified
requirements.
31.4.4 Final Adjustments
1 After completing installation and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match
original finish.
2 Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment

throughout the normal operating cycle of the facility. Record voltages and tap settings to
submit with test results.
31.4.5 General
14
1 Environmental conditions shall be as specified in Section 1 Part 1 and/or QGEWC
specifications as applicable.
20
END OF PART
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 32: 11 kV Switchgear
32 11 KV SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................... 2
32.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

32.1.1 Scope 2
32.1.3 References 2
32.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
32.2.1 General 2
14
32.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 2
20
32.3.1 General 2
s
rd
32.4.1 General 3
32.5 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................ 3
da
32.5.1 General an 3
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
32 11 KV SWITCHGEAR
32.1 GENERAL
32.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for 11 kV Switchgear.
32.1.2 Description
14
1 11 kV Switchgear shall be provided as specified.
20
32.1.3 References
1 11 kV Switchgear shall be provided in accordance with QGEWC latest specifications and the
s
International Standards referred to therein.
rd
32.1.4 Submissions
da
1 Tender information and drawings shall be submitted to QGEWC through the supervising
an
consultant. Submissions shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest QGEWC
specifications.
St
32.2 PRODUCTS
n
32.2.1 General
io
ct
1 The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission 11 kV Switchgear as specified.
tru
2 The 11 kV Switchgear complete with metering and instrumentation, special tools,

accessories, test equipment, etc, shall be in compliance with QGEWC latest standards.
s
on
3 The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the latest version of QGEWC specification
for 11 kV Switchgear and shall be responsible for obtaining QGEWC approval.
C
ar

at
5 The contractor shall provide full technical details of the proposed 11 kV Switchgear together
with a copy of all relevant standards for review and comment by the Engineer, prior to
Q
submission to QGEWC for approval.
32.3 INSTALLATION
32.3.1 General
1 Install Products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2 A contractor who is currently approved by QGEWC must carry out installation. The written
approval of QGEWC for the contractor to carry out the work must be forwarded to the
Engineer, and be acknowledged by him, before any installation work commences.
3 Earth and bond duct under provisions of Part "Earthing and Bonding".
32.4.1 General
14
20
32.5 ENVIRONMENT
s
rd
32.5.1 General
da
1 Environmental conditions shall be as specified in Section 1 Part 1 and/or QGEWC
specifications as applicable. an
END OF PART
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 33: Actuators
33 ACTUATORS .......................................................................................................... 2
33.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2

33.1.1 Scope 2
33.2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 2
33.2.1 Electric Actuators 2
33.2.2 Pneumatic 5
14
33.3 QUALITY CONTROL AND TEST PROCEDURES ................................................... 5
20
33.3.1 General 5
33.4 ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................... 5
s
33.4.1 General 5
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 33: Actuators
33 ACTUATORS
33.1 GENERAL
33.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for valve/penstock actuators.
33.1.2 Description
14
1 Electric or penstock actuators shall be provided for valves and penstocks where specified.
20
33.1.3 Submissions
s
rd
2 Shop Drawings submission shall include dimensional drawings of the actuator, including
sections and elevations, showing the following:
da
(a) sizes and positions of components an
St
(d) wiring diagrams

n
(e) other pertinent data.

io
3 Project data submission shall contain the following:

ct
tru

s
on
(c) the torque-speed requirement calculations / data sheet done for this selection.
33.2 PRODUCTS
C
ar
33.2.1 Electric Actuators

at
1 Where specified valves or penstocks shall be provided with electric motorised actuators.
Q
2 As far as possible, the actuators shall be the standard product of a well known specialist
manufacturer such as Rotork or Auma, which shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 Valve actuators shall be directly mounted onto and supported by the valves/penstocks which
they control unless the valve/penstock is underground where the actuator shall be mounted
at coping level. They shall be suitable for remote Automatic control and shall also
incorporate means for local manual operation using a handwheel or lever. Actuators shall
have integral starters and control equipment, unless the actuator motor is of a size that
necessitates a panel mounted starter, in which case it will be specified in the particular
specification.
Part 33: Actuators
4 The output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem and incorporate thrust bearings of
the ball or roller type.
5 The design shall permit the gear case to be opened for inspection or disassembled without
releasing the stem thrust or taking the valve out of service.
6 Valves stems and threads shall be provided with grease lubrication, rising spindle valves
being protected with a totally enclosed grease packed cover tube.
7 The actuator shall be fitted with a drive bushing which is easily detachable for machining to
suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. Bushing shall be fitted in the base of the actuator
14
to enable standard length valve stems to be used.
20
8 Only two categories of sealing are permitted:
(a) UK BASEEFA certified for EExdIIBT4 CENELEC Norm EN50018, BS5501 for defined
s
hazardous locations; or
rd
(b) Watertight, dust-tight complying with the requirements of BS 5490 IP67 or better.
da
9 Actuators shall be suitable for pedestal mounting and interchangeable without removal of the
associated valve, penstock, pedestal, etc.
an
10 Sealing of static joints shall be by 'O' ring on moving components to prevent leakage of
St
lubricant from the machine.
n
11 The actuator shall provide Double Sealing between the terminal compartment and the
internal electrical elements of the actuator, fully protecting the motor and all other internal
io
electrical elements of the actuator from ingress of moisture and dust when terminal cover is
ct
removed on site for cabling.

tru
12 For control purposes limit switches shall be fitted to the actuator at both the closed and open
positions of the valve. Limit switches shall also be fitted for signalling purposes. All these
s
shall be fitted internally. Limit switches contacts shall be volt-free. The switch contact rating
on
shall be 5 amps, 250 volts AC, 30 volts DC. Valve position shall be clearly marked externally
on the actuator.
C
13 The actuators shall be sized so that they develop sufficient torque to reliably seat/unseat the
ar
valve or penstock off its seat, and to provide adequate torque throughout its operating range.
The torque output must be at least 20% more than is required under maximum operating
at
conditions (i.e. maximum differential head). The drive shall incorporate a lost motion
Q
hammer blow feature.
14 Adequate overload protection shall be provided to prevent actuator motor damage in the
event of seizure. This shall either be in the form of torque switches, or over-temperature
thermostats. The torque switch shall latch out on operation, and to be reset by driving in the
opposite directions. A mechanical latch shall be provided to prevent the open torque switch
tripping while the initial unsealing hammer blow is applied.
15 The setting of the torque and limit switches shall be able to be carried out without the need to
remove any electrical compartment covers.
16 Adjustable mechanical limit stops shall be provided for open and closed positions of
actuators.
Part 33: Actuators
17 Actuators supplies shall be 110 volts Single Phase or less for quarter-turn and 415V three
phase for multi-turn. Motors shall have Class F insulation, with a time raring of 15 minutes or
three times the open/close stroking time whichever is the longer. Motors shall be capable of
operating at the sun radiation temperature and certification shall be provided to this effect.
Nevertheless, sun/weather canopies shall be provided for all externally installed actuators.
These shall give complete shading from the sun during the hottest part of the day and should
not restrict maintenance or operational access.
18 Certain valve actuators will require fail safe operation in the event of an electricity mains
failure. The Contractor may achieve this either by using fail-safe actuators, or by providing
standby power supplies for the affected actuators. There should be no tendency for any
14
actuator to "creep" either open or closed, both in normal operation or under mains failure
conditions.
20
19 Anti-condensation heaters for use on 110 volt a.c. shall be provided for all actuator motors.
s
20 The actuator motor gearbox shall be of the totally enclosed oil bath lubricated type suitable
rd
for operation at any angle and provided with appropriate filling and drain plugs.
da
21 A hand wheel shall be provided for manual operation of the valve. This hand wheel shall not
operate during powered actuator movement by reason of a positive means of disconnection
an
from the motor driven mechanism. The wheel shall be maintained in its engaged position
once this is selected until powered movement takes place when it shall automatically
St
disconnect and "free wheel". The hand wheel gearing shall be selected to allow valve
operation without undue effort i.e. not exceeding 25 kg.
n
22 It shall be possible to secure hand or powered operation by means of padlocking in the

io
selected mode.
ct
23 Where necessary to present the actuator hand wheel at a convenient operating height,
tru
flange mounted pillars shall be provided which fully enclose the necessary valve stem
extension spindles. Supplementary support of the extension spindle within its pillar shall be
provided for long shafts.
s
on
24 The open/close direction of rotation shall be clearly indicated on the hand wheel.
C
25 A visual position indicator shall be provided within the actuator complete with a pointer
showing open/closed and in travel positions, and a sealed potentiometer to transmit
ar
continuous remote position. Where specified in the particular specification, this indicator
shall be illuminated.
at
26 Electrical and mechanical disconnection of the motor should be possible without draining the
Q
lubricant from the actuator gear-case.
27 The colour code for actuator push button shall be:
(a) “Start” actuation Green

(b) “Stop” actuation Red
(c) “Re-set” actuation Black
(d) “Test” actuation White
(e) “Emergency Stop” Red (mushroom style, latching on depressing, release on
turning).
Part 33: Actuators
33.2.2 Pneumatic
1 Where specified valves/penstocks shall be provided with pneumatic actuators.
2 Air actuators shall only be used where specified in the particular specification and shall be of
the double acting type and be field interchangeable without the necessity of removal of the
valve or penstock.
3 Where a pneumatic actuator is used for modulating control it shall be fitted with integral
feedback.
14
20
33.3.1 General
s
rd
da
complete functional checks on the final product. Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in
leaving the factory. Final inspection and calibration operations shall be documented in a
report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality Inspection department.
an
2 Combined operational lists shall be carried out at the valve/penstock manufacturers works
St
and list certificates provided confirming limit switch and torque settings.
n

io

ct
tru
s
33.4 ENVIRONMENT
on
33.4.1 General
C

ar
herein.
at
2 Minimum ambient temperature shall be assumed as 0C.

Q
3 Sun radiation temperature shall be assumed as 70C.
4 Maximum relative humidity shall be assumed as 95%.
END OF PART
Part 34: High Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
34 HIGH VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (>1000 V) ..................... 2
34.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

34.1.1 Scope 2
34.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................... 2
14
34.3 STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 3
34.3.1 Codes and Standards 3
20
34.3.3 Warranty 4
s
34.4 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 4
rd
34.4.1 Ratings 4
da
34.4.2 Design Characteristics 5
34.4.3 Control System an 6
34.4.4 Controller Keypad 8
34.4.5 Communications Interface 8
St
34.4.6 Fault Detection 8
34.4.7 Protection Features 9
n
34.4.8 Emergency Stop Control 11

io
34.4.9 Drive Enclosures 11

34.4.10 Factory Witness Inspections 12
ct
34.5 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 12

tru
34.5.1 Documentation 12
s
34.5.3 Training 13
on
C
ar
at
Q
34 HIGH VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (>1000 V)

34.1 GENERAL
34.1.1 Scope
1 This Specification defines the requirements for High Voltage Variable Frequency Drive
Systems (VFDs) for the operation of pump motors. The system shall consist of the following
main components: Isolation breaker, Drive Isolation Transformers, High voltage Variable
Speed Drives (VFDs), Output Sine Filter, and any necessary power factor correction or
harmonic filter components if required to meet this Specification.
14
2 The Manufacturer shall prepare a complete compliance with the Specification. Any exception
20
shall be included in the compliance statement with an explanation, clearly indicating the
paragraph of the Specification to which the exception applies, and concisely stating the
reasons.
s
rd
3 Unless clearly identified as an exception, the Specification shall have precedence where
there is conflict between Manufacturer descriptive information and the Specification.
da
4 The drive manufacturer shall have a proven operation for the proposed drive and active
harmonic filter/if provided in the sewage treatment plants or sewage pumping stations (or
an
similar applications –subject to Engineer‟s approval) for more than 10 years.
St
34.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
34.2.1 Description
n
io
1 The VFD System (VFDS) shall consist of the following main components: Isolation breaker,
Drive Isolation Transformers, High voltage Variable Speed Drives (VFDs), Output Sine Filter,
ct
and any necessary power factor correction or harmonic filter components if required to meet
tru
this Specification.
2 The VFD manufacturer shall provide a dedicated fused contactor or circuit breaker (Hereto
s
called Input Isolation Switchgear); rated to protect the VFD from specified short-circuit levels.
on
The Input Isolation Switchgear shall be controlled by the VFD. The VFD doors shall be
interlocked to prevent opening when main power is available.
C
3 The VFD shall be supplied with 11 kV, 3 phase, 50 Hz power and shall be able operate with
+/-6% voltage variation.
ar
4 Auxiliary power 415V, 3 phase, 50 Hz and safe-line power 240V, single phase, 50 Hz will be
at
provided on site from a separated UPS. Alarm of missing Auxiliary power supply shall be
Q
provided in the VFD and an indication lamp shall be provided on the VFD door.
5 The variable frequency drive shall control a 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor
6 The drive will be suitable for the motor(s) rated 3300V, 3 phases, 50 Hz and above.
7 The power capacity of the converter shall meet the speed-load curve of the application, even
at minimum mains supply voltage. An additional service factor or over-dimensioning of the
VFD is not required.
8 The VFD shall be suitable for use with a new or an existing standard squirrel cage motor with
1.0 service factor and standard High voltage insulation and have dv/dt 10 to 50µsec.
9 The VFD shall control the speed by employing advanced torque control techniques and auto
tuning that measure and set all constant and critical parameters of the motor automatically.
10 It will be necessary to conduct field tests to measure the harmonics with all VFDs regardless
of whether filters, reactors, chokes etc. are installed or not, running at 100 percent and 50
percent loads for the duration of at least 3 hours under each load condition. If drives don‟t
meet the specified performance, the Contractor shall provide an acceptable solution at no
extra cost.
11 The VFD shall be selected based on the following as the main advantages:-
(a) User friendly allowing the operator to configure the VFD at site with ease.
14
(b) Uniform motor running at all speeds.
(c) Power factor close to unity regardless of the speed of the motor.
20
(d) High overall system efficiency
(e) No increase of noise in the motor.
s
rd
12 The VFD shall be arranged to prevent nuisance tripping due to failure of supply for a short
duration (transient disturbances).
da
13 The following indication LED lamps with labels as per the relevant QSC Section 21, shall be
provided on the VFD door.
an
(a) Ventilation fan failure.
St
(b) VFD General fault.

(c) Run/Stop.
n
(d) Local/Remote.
io
34.3 STANDARDS
ct
tru
34.3.1 Codes and Standards
1 The specified Variable Frequency Drive System shall be designed and materials shall be
s
furnished in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable sections of the following Codes
on
and Standards.
IEEE 519 ....................Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static
C
Power Converters.
ar
IEEE 995 ....................Recommended Practice for Efficiency Determination of AC Adjustable

Speed Drives.
at
IEEE C57.12.00-2000 General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution Power and

Q
Regulating Transformers.
IEEE C57.12.01-1989 General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers.
ANSI C57.12.10-1988 Transformers – 230 kV and Below 833/948 through 8333/10417 kVA,
Single-Phase, and 750/862 Through 60000/80000 kVA with load TAP
Changing – Safety Requirements.
ANSI C57.12.51-1981 Requirements for Ventilated Dry-Type Power Transformers, 501 kVA
and Larger, Three-Phase with High-Voltage 601 to 34500 volts, Low-
Voltage 208Y/120 to 4160 Volts.
ANSI C57.12.70-1978 Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and Power
Transformers.
IEEE C57.12.90-1999 Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and Regulating
Transformers.
IEEE C57.12.91-1995 Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers.
IEEE C57.18.10-1998 Practices and Requirements for Semiconductor Power Rectifier
Transformers.
IEEE C57.124-1991 ...Detection of Partial Discharge and the Measurement of Apparent
Charge in Dry-Type Transformers.
ENV 50141 .................Radio frequency common mode.
EN55011 ....................Suppression of Radio disturbances caused by electrical appliances
and systems.
14
EN 50081-2 ................Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
20
IEC 146-1-1 ................Semiconductor Converters
IEC 529 ......................Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
NFPA-70.....................National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) –70 National Electric Code
s
rd
(NEC), latest adopted edition.
ICS7.1 ........................NEMA Safety standard for construction and guide to selection,
da
installation and operation of Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems.
OSHA .........................Standard No. 29 CFR 1910.147 – The standard for control of
an
hazardous energy (Lockout/Tagout).
IEC1000-4-2 ...............Electrostatic immunity test
St
IEC1000-4-4 ...............Fast transient immunity test

IEC1000-4-5 ...............Surge immunity test
n
IEC61800 ...................Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems

io
UL 347 ........................High Voltage Industrial Control Equipment.

ct
UL 508C .....................Power Conversion Equipment

tru
UL 467 ........................Safety Standard for Grounding Equipment

NEMA .........................National Electrical Manufacturer‟s Association Standard MG1 (1987)
s
on
1 The VFD manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification.

C
2 The VFD manufacturer shall be able to provide start-up service, 24 hour/day emergency call
ar
service, repair work, maintenance and troubleshooting training of customer personnel.

at
3 VFD converter shall be UL listed/EC certified.

Q
34.3.3 Warranty
1 The drive shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a minimum of three years from the date
of commissioning in PWA name.
34.4 PRODUCTS
34.4.1 Ratings
1 The VFD shall convert 11k V - 3 Phase - 50 Hz, power to an adjustable voltage and
frequency for controlling the speed of the pump. The output voltage shall vary proportionally
with the output frequency to maintain a constant volts/hertz value up to a nominal frequency.
Above nominal frequency, the output voltage shall remain constant.
2 The drive shall be designed to operate in ambient temperature between 0°C and 50 °C with a
relative humidity of up to 95 % (non-condensing).
3 The drive shall be capable of being stored at a temperature between -0 °C and 70 °C.
4 The drive shall be capable of operating at altitudes up to 200 meters above sea level.
5 The drive shall be capable of operating at a minimum efficiency of 95% at full load and full
speed
6 The incoming line power factor shall range between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over the entire
operating speed range.
14
34.4.2 Design Characteristics
20
1 VFD
(a) Converter shall be offered with minimum 18 Pulse or higher to mitigate Harmonics
s
generated at the line side and shall confirm to IEEE 519-1992 standards
rd
(b) The VSD shall have a fixed and alternatively variable V/f curve characteristic suitable
da
for the required application.
(c) The VSD shall be capable of varying the motor speed from a maximum speed at full
an
load and at any intermediate speed down to 10% full load speed.
(d) The drive shall be designed to be selectable for variable or constant torque. When
St
selected for constant torque, the drive shall supply 150% of rated current for up to one
minute. When selected for variable torque the drive shall supply 110% of rated current
for one minute every 10 minutes.
n
(e) The rectifier shall make use of three phase Rectifier Bridge consisting of diodes for
io
power conversion from AC to DC. The inverter section shall use latest IGCT or non-
ct
transistor based modules for minimal loss, high speed switching and very low
harmonics.
tru
(f) The VFD shall be trouble free operation.

(g) The VFD shall have a fuse less design, which detects failures and acts within 25
s
microseconds. The device should be non-rupture type.

on
(h) VFDs, using electrolytic high voltage capacitors or fuses, are not acceptable.
C
(i) The manufacturer shall not use any control or power components that require
replacement before 50,000 hours of operation minimum.
ar
(j) The Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the VFD shall be greater than 50,000
hours minimum. All components of the VFD shall be considered for MTBF
at
calculations.
Q
(k) The calculated Availability of the VFD shall be greater than 99.95%. The Availability
shall be calculated based on the expected downtime due to corrective and preventive
maintenance.
(l) The VFD shall be capable of continuous operation (“ride-through”) in the event of a
power loss of up to 1 second or more. The time limit shall be defined by the load inertia
and not by the VFD‟s capability.
(m) The VFD shall be able to safely operate, without tripping, at down to 30% under
voltage of the mains supply.
(n) The FVD drive shall be a high voltage VFD system. All power semiconductors and
passive power components in both the rectifier and inverter part shall be high voltage
rated components. Low voltage components are not acceptable in the power part
sections
(o) The drive must be capable of switching on to a motor already rotating in either
direction.
(p) The starting arrangement must include a ramp speed control, to achieve starting
currents not exceeding normal full load current.
2 Drive Isolation Transformer
(a) A drive isolation transformer shall be furnished to provide power conversion from the
11 KV line voltage to the required VFD voltage and to isolate the line from harmonics
and common mode voltages. The transformer shall conform to ANSI/IEEE C57.
(b) The transformer shall be designed to withstand a short circuit. It shall maintain
electromagnetic symmetry when only one secondary winding is in short circuit in order
14
to minimize the resulting short circuit forces. The transformer shall be capable of
thermally withstanding a short circuit for 2 seconds.
20
(c) Transformers shall be of a high efficiency type with full load losses of less than 2%.
(d) Transformer winding material shall be copper.
s
(e) Suitable vibration dampers shall be provided with the transformer and its enclosure in
rd
order to attenuate mechanical resonance and to reduce the operational sound level.
da
(f) The cable distance between the VFD and Drive Isolation transformer shall be designed
for up to 50 m minimum. an
(g) The transformer shall include electrostatic shielding between the windings to carry high
frequency capacitive currents to ground.
St
(h) Transformer designs shall be indoor / outdoor, mounted dry type /ONAN type.
(i) Only Rectifier grade K-factor transformers shall be utilized, with K-Factor of 6 for diode
n
rectifiers. VFD manufacturers providing SCR type rectifiers shall include K Factor of
12 transformers for variable torque applications and K Factor of 20 for constant torque
io
applications.
ct
(j) Dry type transformers shall be protected with an over-temperature protection, and any
tru
other protections as per the relevant standards, device with alarm and trip contacts
and subject of Engineer‟s approval
(k) Liquid cooled transformer / ONAN shall be equipped with an oil level indicator, an
s
overpressure device (Buchholz or overpressure relay) and a top oil thermometer with
on
alarm and trip contacts and subject of Engineer‟s approval.

(l) Each primary winding shall be provided with taps, adjustable in a range of +/-2.5% and
C
+/-5% above and below nominal voltage. All taps shall be full capacity, no load type
lockable type.
ar
(m) If a dry type transformer is provided, the transformer shall be of Temperature Class
at
180C and average winding temperature rise of 115C.

(n) If a liquid cooled transformer / ONAN is provided, the transformer shall have an
Q
average temperature rise of 60C for the oil and 65°C for the windings.
34.4.3 Control System
1 The VFD shall have a sensorless vector torque control or Direct torque control algorithm with
static speed error of less than 0.2% and open loop torque step rise time under 10
milliseconds
2 Unless specified, the VFD shall not require the use of a tachometer.
3 The VFD shall be able to catch and take control of a spinning load if started while rotating
equipment is already spinning. Appropriate safeguards shall be included in this operation to
prevent damaging torque excitations, voltages or currents from impacting any of the
equipment. The user shall have the option of employing this feature or disabling it.
4 The VFD to provide an automatic current limit feature to control motor currents during startup
and provide a “soft start” torque profile for the motor-load combination. Current and torque
limit adjustments shall be provided to limit the maximum VFD output current and the
maximum torque produced by the motor.
5 The VFD shall accept a start/stop command and speed reference from a local VFD panel, or
from a remote panel.
6 The VFD shall have the capability to avoid up to five critical operating ranges. The critical
operating ranges (skip frequencies) shall have selectable bandwidth, configurable via the
operator interface
14
7 Upon restoration of power following a power loss, if the VFD status is healthy, the VFD shall
be capable of re-starting upon receiving a start signal from the main processor.
20
8 The VFD shall be capable of passing through a momentary power outage of 3 cycles without
causing the drive to trip.
s
9 The modulating control scheme shall closely approximate actual sine wave current
rd
throughout the speed range of the drive. The frequency resolution of the VFD shall be
0.01Hz.
da
10 Each VFD shall be equipped with a front mounted operator control panel consisting of a back
an
lighted alphanumeric display and a keypad with the functions:
(a) Run/Stop command including indication lamps on the door.

St
(b) Local/Remote command including indication lamps on the door.

n
(c) Increase/Decrease command

io
(d) Forward/Reverse command

ct
(e) Menu navigation and parameter selection

tru
11 All parameter names, fault messages, warnings and other information shall be displayed in
plain text to allow the user to understand what is being displayed without the use of a manual
or cross-reference table. A display contrast adjustment shall be provided to optimize viewing
s
at any angle.
on
12 During normal operation, the speed reference, and run/stop forward/reverse and local/remote
C
status shall be displayed. At least 3 additional user selectable analogue values shall be
available for display including the following values as a minimum:
ar
(a) Motor speed, current and power.

at
(b) Output frequency, voltage and torque

(c) DC bus voltage.
Q
(d) Cooling air or water temperature.

(e) Status of discrete inputs and outputs.
(f) Values of analog input and output signals.
13 Password protection shall be provided for prevention of unauthorized parameter access.
14 If specified, hardware inputs and outputs shall be provided to interface with external operator
and supervisory control and monitoring equipment. The following galvanically isolated I/O
points shall be included:
(a) Analogue inputs shall be 4 - 20 mA. Analogue input signals processing functions shall
include scaling adjustments, adjustable filtering and signal inversion. Analogue signal
functions shall include speed reference signals.
(b) Discrete (binary) inputs shall be designed for 24 VDC. Discrete input functions shall
include „run/stop‟ and „remote reset‟.
(c) Analogue outputs shall be 4 to 20 mA signals. Analog outputs shall be programmable
to provide signals proportional to at least output motor speed and current.
(d) Relay contact outputs shall be rated to switch in minimum 6 A at 24 VDC or 250 VAC.
Function selections shall include „VFD ready‟, „running‟, „alarm‟ and „trip‟ indications.
15 The VFD output frequency shall be controllable between 0 – 66 Hz.
16 The VFD memory shall retain and record, run and fault status with a minimum of 8 last fault
conditions.
14
17 The VFD cubicle shall be provided with additional control and accessories if any are deemed
necessary to meet the operating logic as described in the particular requirement.
20
18 The VFD shall include any additional protective features not detailed in the specification but
recommended by the manufacturer in order to avoid damage to the VFD or Motor.
s
rd
34.4.4 Controller Keypad
da
1 The VFD shall be provided with a unit mounted but detachable LCD display unit, provided
with a three meter length of cable, suitable for mounting on the cubicle door. The VFD shall
an
allow the program stored in one drive to be copied to another drive by using the display unit
and supplied software. Interconnecting cables and associated accessories together with a
user manual must accompany the VFD.
St
n
recommended by the manufacturer in order to avoid damage to the VFD or Motor

io
3 All parameters shall be password protected to prevent tampering and unauthorised changes.
ct
34.4.5 Communications Interface

tru
1 The drive shall incorporate an RS 485 serial communications interface to allow full drive
control, programming, monitoring and diagnostics, including access to history record.
s
on
2 The VFD shall be provided with communication interface and facility to integrate the
operation of the system. The facility employing communication protocols e.g. profibus,
C
modbus etc. shall be compatible with other system equipments such as the PLC, RTU etc.
ar
3 The Contractor shall provide a suitably sized programming device (laptop) complete with all
necessary connection cables, software and licenses for configuration and maintenance of the
at
VFD‟s.
Q
34.4.6 Fault Detection
1 The drive shall keep a record of the last ten trips, plus a 100 sample history record of up to
ten pre-defined parameters to enable fast diagnosis and minimum down time. Automatic
printout of history record to a serial printer shall be an available feature.
2 The VFD shall have a programmable fold back function that will sense a controller/motor
overload condition and fold back the frequency to avoid a fault condition.
3 A dedicated microprocessor based electronic motor protection system to be provided for the
protection of the motor.
4 The VFD shall be protected against short circuit between output phases and ground,
analogue outputs and logic circuit.
5 For each programmed warning and fault protection function, the VFD shall display a
message in complete English words or Standard English abbreviations. At least 40 time
tagged fault messages shall be stored in the drive‟s fault history
6 In order to guarantee correct fault indications and trip sequence in the event that auxiliary
power source feeding the drive is lost, the drive system processor shall be connected to an
uninterrupted Power supply source (either within the drive or provided externally) to supply
control power for display and signals.
34.4.7 Protection Features
1 For personal safety reasons all power capacitors have to be hard grounded (mechanical
14
interlock), before accessing any MV section of the VFD. The grounding has to be
mechanically and electrically interlocked with the cabinet doors. It shall be only possible to
open the doors when the capacitors are grounded.
20
2 For each programmed warning and fault protection function, the VFD shall display a
message in complete English words or Standard English abbreviations. At least 40 time
s
tagged fault messages shall be stored in the drive‟s fault history.
rd
3 An Emergency-stop push button (E-Stop) shall be provided on the VFD door and one
da
additional remote located near the motor shall be provided.
an
4 The VFD shall provide input phase loss protection.
St
5 The system offered shall incorporate adequate protection and alarms properly coordinated by
the Vendor for the drive control and for motor but not limited to the following :
n
6 The drive shall be protected against supply-phase loss and mains discontinuity.
io
7 The drive shall have a selectable auto-restart after trip.

ct
8 The drive shall be designed to shut down with no component failure in the event of any of the
tru
above fault conditions arising.
(a) Main Drive Motor & Supply Cables

s
on
(i) The Motor Phase Loss

(ii) Short Circuit in the Rectifier Bridge
C
(iii) Supply Phase Loss

ar
(iv) Overload of the Inverter.

(v) Short Circuit of the Inverter
at
(vi) Battery Test if applicable

Q
(vii) Communication Fault

(viii) External Motor Protection Trip
(ix) External Transformer Protection Trip
(x) Process Stop
(xi) External Emergency Off
(xii) Overcurrent (through current control limiter)
(xiii) Overvoltage
(xiv) Phase unbalance/Single phasing
(xv) Earth fault
(xvi) Locked Rotor

(xvii) Overspeed – 105% / Under speed – 95%
(xviii) Over temperature in stator through Motor model
(xix) Line breaker tripped
(xx) Cooling medium temperature high
(xxi) Loss of one cooling system in case of redundant cooling system
(b) Following minimum control are envisaged on front of the panel unless otherwise
specified.
(i) Start/stop
14
(ii) Speed control
20
(iii) Raise/lower
(iv) Forward/Reverse
s
(v) Auto/Manual mode
rd
(vi) Local/Remote.
da
(vii) Emergency stop
(c) The system shall monitor the status of the following and provide indications.
an
(i) Drive on
St
(ii) Drive off
(iii) Motor over speed
n
(iv) System ready to start

io
(v) Remote breaker trip

ct
(vi) Ventilation fan failure.

tru
(vii) VFD General fault.

(d) Fault Annunciation Display of forty maximum previous faults shall be provided with a
s
minimum of the these features

on
(i) Inverter overload

(ii) Inverter high temperature
C
(iii) No cooling of panel/motor

ar
(e) Following control / metering shall be provided on local control panel.

(i) ON/OFF push button
at
(ii) Speed Raise/Lower push button

Q
(iii) Emergency stop push button

(iv) Local/remote selection indication
(v) Speed indicator
(vi) Ammeter
(vii) ON/OFF indication
(viii) Drive ready to start indication
34.4.8 Emergency Stop Control
1 An Emergency-stop (E-Stop) shall be provided on the VFD door in addition to inputs for
customer supplied E-Stop command to ensure effective direct stopping of the drive if
dangerous situations arise. The means provided should include direct connection to an
Breaker, arranged such that its opening on-load:
(a) does not inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the variable speed controller
(b) does not produce additional safety hazards
(c) does not cause damage to the controller.
14
34.4.9 Drive Enclosures
1 The converter and inverter section shall be suitably housed in sheet steel panels and shall be
20
fabricated with 2 mm thick cold rolled sheet steel and structural steel. The panel shall be
suitable for indoor installation if not otherwise specified. The panel shall be free standing,
dust and vermin proof and degree of protection IP- 4X for air cooled or for water cooled if not
s
otherwise specified. The cabinet shall be riveted/welded type construction to provide
rd
effective protection against Electromagnetic emissions.
da
2 The followings minimum thickness shall apply:.
(a) Plinth/bed frame - 3.00 mm

an
(b) Frames - 2.00 mm
St
(c) Covers and Doors - 2.00 mm
(d) Gland Plate - 3.00 mm
n
3 The VFD Converter shall require front access only.

io
ct
4 The VFD Converter enclosure doors shall include an electromechanical interlocking system
with a safety grounding switch. The enclosure doors can be opened only if the safety ground
tru
switch connects all DC buses to ground, to ensure all stored VFD and motor energy is
discharged before opening any high voltage compartment door.
s
5 The Output Sine Filter, Input Harmonic Filter and Power Factor Correction filter, if required,
on
shall be factory mounted and wired into the Converter enclosure.

C
6 All painted surfaces shall be (ZINTEC) and must have a minimum of priming coat, undercoat
and finishing coat. The undercoat and finishing coat shall be stove enamelled. The exterior
shall be green to BS 4800, shade 14E53. Interior surfaces shall be white painted or shall be
ar
bright (unpainted) galvanized steel.

at
7 All bus bars shall be copper and corrosion protected.

Q
8 The enclosure must be designed to avoid harmonic and inductive heating and eliminate radio
frequency interference.
9 VFD noise level shall be less than 85 dB(A) for air cooled and less than 70 dB(A) for water
cooled drives at 3 feet distance.
10 Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a thermostat and humidistat and have
OFF/AUTO control on the cubicle front door. The heater shall not be in operation when the
inverter is functioning.
11 The VFD shall be of Fuse less design.

12 All panels shall be same height so as to form a bank, which shall give good aesthetic
appearance.
13 All the control wiring shall be enclosed in plastic channel. Each wire shall be identified at
both ends by wire marker tapes or PVC ferrules.
14 Power and control wiring inside the panel shall be done with PVC insulated copper
conductor.
15 All Power modules and components shall be accessible from front of panel only.
16 PCB construction shall be rigid and robust. Components shall be wave soldered to the
14
PCBs. Each component on the board must be clearly identified.
20
17 Suitable lifting hooks shall be provided for lifting the panel.
18 All FVD components shall be individually provided with identification engraved label.
s
34.4.10 Factory Witness Inspections
rd
da
1 Where specified in the tender documents, the stand-alone Drive (VFDs) shall be witness
tested at the manufacturing facilities in the presence of Engineer and/or his representative.
The detailed and complete Factory Acceptance testing procedure including the testing sheets
an
shall be subject of Engineer‟s approval, and shall be approved by the Engineer 30 days
before FAT dates are proposed. Internal test reports shall be provided to Engineer before
St
the FAT test is performed.
2 The VFD shall be tested at 25%, 50% and 100 % load, minimum 3 hours recording the
n
temperature rise.
io
3 The VFD System shall undergo standard manufacturing testing and as approved by the
ct
Engineer.
tru
4 Each VFD shall be factory 100% load tested with a similar induction motor size on a
dynamometer test stand at manufacturing facilities.
s
on
5 The FAT inspection procedure shall be submitted to Engineer for approval, and approved 30
days before performing the FAT witness test at manufacturing facilities.
C
6 Internal Factory test report shall be provided before preparation of the FAT witness date.
ar
at
percent loads for the duration of at least 3 hours under each load condition. If drives do not
Q
extra cost.
34.5 INSTALLATION
34.5.1 Documentation
1 The following documentation shall be provided:
(a) load de-rating (with tender)

(b) harmonic distortion (with tender)
(c) circuit diagrams
(d) maintenance instructions
(e) fault diagnosis

(f) parts list with part numbers
(g) commissioning instructions
(h) general arrangements drawings
2 A recommended spares list for two years continuous operation shall be submitted at the time
of tender. Where multiple, identical units are being supplied a rationalised list, i.e. not a
summation of individual drives, requirements, should be produced.
34.5.2 Commissioning
14
1 The manufacturer of the drive system shall have a factory trained service representative
residing in the Qatar for commissioning, programming and to provide training and after sales
20
service.
2 The representative shall be trained in the installation, maintenance and trouble-shooting of
s
the equipment specified and shall assist the Contractor to set-up and commission the
rd
variable speed motor drives and controls.
da
3 System validation tests shall be performed on all VSD‟s.
4 The integrated site test on the VFD, motor and all other associated devices shall be
an
conducted to verify the input and output current, voltage, frequency, power factor,
acceleration and deceleration rate etc. in accordance with the operating characteristics as
St
approved by the Engineer.
5 Test VFD at different operating conditions by adjusting parameters (25, 50, 75 and 100%).
n
Record the performance and verify.

io
6 The power system shall be tested for harmonics, line notching and for RFI/EMI in cable
ct
circuits and in the air.

tru
7 Tests shall be performed during normal plant operation and during operation with the
emergency generator.
s
on
8 The test results so obtained shall be used to calculate the Total Harmonic Distortion (%THD)
and compare the same with IEEE 519
C
9 The manufacturer's engineer or their trained and qualified engineer working full time with the
local supplier shall conduct all tests on site.
ar
10 Upon completion of site tests a duly signed report listing all tests and checks, together with all
at
supporting documents and drawings where applicable, shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review. The Owner‟s representative shall be invited to witness the tests.
Q
11 Submit all test reports, drawings and supporting documents to the Engineer and obtain
written approval from both prior to the system being accepted by the Owner.
34.5.3 Training
1 Site Training. The AC drive manufacturer shall provide an on-site training program for the
operating personnel of minimum 7 working days. This program shall provide operating and
instruction manuals, training in equipment operation, and troubleshooting of the AC drive.
The training program shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) Instruction on the basic theory of pulse width modulation control

(b) Instruction on the layout of the variable frequency controller indicating the location and
purpose of each component
(c) instruction on troubleshooting problems related to controller
(d) installation and removal of printed circuit boards
(e) actions to take under failure of controller
(f) necessary cleaning of component parts.
2 Factory training. Duration of training program shall be minimum 10 days for two client
persons at the manufacturing facilities.
14
20
END OF PART
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 04: Motor Starters
4 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS (<1000V) .......................................... 2
4.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

4.1.1 Scope 2
4.1.2 References 2
4.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 2
4.2.1 Starters 2
4.2.2 DOL Starters 3
4.2.3 Star Delta Starters 4
14
4.2.4 Reduced Voltage “Soft Starters” 4
20
4.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 5
4.3.2 Earth Bonding 6
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
4 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS (<1000V)

4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part includes the supply and installation of motor starters and associated equipment.
4.1.2 References
1 The following standards or updated/revised/superseded versions shall be followed
14
BS EN 60073..............Coding of indicating devices and actuators by colour and
20
supplementary means
BS EN 60439, IEC 439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control gear
assembly
s
BS EN 60947-4 ..........Contactors and motor Starters
rd
BS EN 60947-1, IEC 947 Low Voltage switchgear and control gear
da
4.2 PRODUCTS an
4.2.1 Starters
St
1 Motor starters shall be rated to carry the full load current of its rated duty at its most severe
load conditions. All starters shall be capable of at least 20 starts per hour at 100 % full load
n
torque unless otherwise specified.

io
2 In accordance with the current QGEWC regulations, motors up to and including 11 kW shall
ct
be started direct on line. Motors above 11 kW shall incorporate assisted starting.

tru
3 Motor starters shall be housed in a separate cubicle compartment of the relevant motor
control centre and each starter cubicle shall contain the following components, or as
otherwise indicated on the Project Drawings or Project Documentation.
s
on
(a) 1 no. triple pole ACB or MCCB or fuse switch, as indicated on the Project Documents,
externally operated and interlocked with the cubicle door. There shall be provision for
C
padlocking in the OFF position.

(b) 1 no. starter, comprising one of the following types, as indicated on the Project
ar
Drawings:
(i) direct on line
at
(ii) star/delta
Q
(iii) close transition star/delta

(iv) reduced voltage “soft start”
(v) VFD control as per part 5
(c) 1 no. motor protection relay, as specified in Part 3
(d) 1 no. set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary indication
and control sequence
(e) 1 no. set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals for remote controls and
indications.
(f) 1 no. set of terminals for remote lock-off stop push buttons
(g) 1 no. control circuit transformer, where applicable
(h) 1 no. anti-condensation heater

(i) 1 no. set of power factor correction capacitors with separate fuses for all drives above
11 kW, to give a power factor of not less than 0.85.
(j) Thermistor relays where applicable
(k) Bearing Vibration/temperature relays where applicable.
(l) Pump protection relays for submersible pumps>2.2kW (moisture within the oil
chamber, moisture within the cable connection box, mechanical seal failure,
temperature rise of the hydraulic driven end bearing, loss of oil from the oil chamber/if
available).
14
4 The components of the starter shall be type tested and ASTA certified to achieve Type 2 co-
ordination in accordance with IEC 947.
20
5 The following equipment shall be mounted on the door of the starter cubicle, or as otherwise
indicated in the Project Drawings or Project Documentation.
s
(a) 1 no. Ammeter with selector switch for Motors with P<10 KW , and 3 no. A meters for
rd
motors with P>10 KW,, 96 X 96, with 240° scale fitted with suppressed 6xFLC scale to
read motor running and starting current, with an adjustable red pointer to indicate full
da
load current. The scale range shall be such that normal full load current gives
approximately 60% full scale deflection. an
(b) 3 no. pilot lamps to indicate “SUPPLY ON” () and 1 no lamp to indicate “MOTOR
RUNNING” (Green) and “MOTOR STOP (White)”
St
(c) 1 no. pilot lamp to indicate “MOTOR FAILED” (Amber)
(d) “X” no pilot alarm indication lamps (a separate lamp for each motor fault conditions)
n
(e) 1 no. “Hand/OFF/AUTO” Selector switch

io
(f) 1 set “Start/Stop” push button

ct
(g) 1 no. externally operated overload reset push button

tru
(h) 1 no. motor heater and cubicle heater humidistat controlled “OFF/AUTO” control
switch, .
s
(i) 1 no. electronic hour counter reading to 99999 hours with analogue display, memory
on
and battery backup with reset button

(j) lamp test push button
C
(k) 1 duty label

ar
(l) All motors shall have local emergency stop push buttons on MCC and near the motor.
For small motors, 2.2KW & lower, local isolator shall be enough. For submersible
at
pumps emergency stop shall be near the junction box on wet well floor.
Q
6 All starters shall contain a totally enclosed dust proof timer, or the operation will be controlled
by a timer in the automatic section, which shall prevent pump(s) starting after a power failure
until after a pre-set time has elapsed. The timer(s) or contacts shall be adjustable in the
range 50 to 200 percent of the anticipated maximum delay which shall be taken as twice the
total time required for all pumps to start and run steadily having been started consecutively.
The timer(s) or contacts shall be set to give individual sequential start after a power failure
with no drive starting until its predecessor has reached full steady running.
4.2.2 DOL Starters
1 DOL starters shall consist of a TP contactor for switching direct on line in accordance with BS
EN 60947-4-1 and fitted with auxiliary contacts.
2 Contactors shall be selected for category AC-3 duty.
4.2.3 Star Delta Starters
1 Star-delta starters shall be provided with contactors as for DOL starters, arranged in such a
manner to ensure the star contactor opens before the delta contactor closes.
2 The period of running in star and the transition time shall be controlled by adjustable solid
state type timers.
3 For closed transition type star-delta starters, further requirements shall be wire wound or
pressed sheet resistor banks of sufficient thermal rating to allow three (3) consecutive starts
14
of 30 seconds period followed by a 15 minutes rest and another 30 seconds starting period.
They shall also be of sufficient thermal rating to allow 10 starts per hour in line with the pump
20
and starter specification unless otherwise specified. Resistance values shall be chosen to
give a high starting current with low transient current. A thermal cut out shall be provided for
transient resistance banks. Starter cubicles incorporating resistor banks shall be well
ventilated and vermin proof with ventilation louvres.
s
rd
4.2.4 Reduced Voltage “Soft Starters”
da
1 Solid-state reduced voltage motor starters shall be closed transition, shunt duty type with
isolation contactor and bypass contactor. When the motor reaches full speed, the bypass
an
contactor bypasses the soft starter power section. The solid-state power section shall consist
of six silicon controlled rectifiers (two per phase connected back to back, in reverse parallel
St
configuration) to provide soft start. The starters shall conform to the latest IEC Standards.
2 The starters shall use the current limit method of starting with the current adjustable between
n
150 percent and 425 percent of full load current of the motor. At turn-on, the control ramps up
io
to the current limit in approximately 1 second and maintains that current until the motor
comes up to full speed. If a problem exists and the motor fails to reach rated speed within a
ct
predetermined period of time, the control will shutdown. The starter shall provide a smooth,
stepless acceleration and deceleration of the load from start to full speed and from full speed
tru
to stop. The starter shall be equipped with metal oxide varistor type surge suppressers
across the SCR to protect against voltage transients and resistor/capacitor scrubber
s
networks to protect against false firing of the SCR. Each SCR heat sink shall have a
temperature sensor that shall shut the starter down in the event of an over temperature
on
condition. When a starter failure occurs, the actual problem shall be indicated by an LED on
the control panel front.
C
3 There shall be a overcurrent protective device, which shall provide over current protection
ar
and main disconnect function for the control unit. The position of the operating handle shall
indicate “ON” or “OFF” position of the protective device and include provision for padlocking
at
in the “OFF” position. This protective device shall be equipped with a shunt trip and shall trip
when there is a SCR or plant power failure. Motor space heaters shall be energised when the
Q
motor is not running.
4 The reduced voltage starters shall be equipped with micro-processor controlled motor
protection relays to control, monitor and protect the motors. The relay shall monitor three
phase current and voltage and make trip and alarm decisions based on pre-programmed
motor current and voltage conditions. Control functions shall include start detection, starter
transition, incomplete sequence and number of starts per hour. The relay shall monitor and
display load current of each phase, percent of full load current of each phase and running
time. The relay shall protect the motor against time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent,
underload, phase unbalance, earth fault, phase loss and phase reversal.
5 The manufacturer shall supply certified test results to confirm that the controller has been
tested to substantiate designs according to applicable standards. The tests shall verify not
only the performance of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of the
enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, the unit shall be factory tested in
accordance with applicable standards.
6 Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having tested for noise immunity
on both input and output power connections.
7 The softstarter shall be supplied factory configured ready to commission, without requiring
any parametering or reconfiguration at site.
14
8 The softstarter shall have the following protective feature as minimum:-
(a) over temperature
20
(b) overload
(c) jam
s
rd
(d) stall
(e) phase Loss
da
(f) phase reversal an
(g) shorted SCR
9 The softstarter shall have the following control feature as minimum:-

St
10 kick start 0-85% locked rotor torque – 0 to 2 seconds

n
11 ramp start 0-85% locked rotor torque – 1 to 60 seconds

io
12 current limit start 0-85% locked rotor current – 1 to 60 S

ct
tru
13 soft stop 0 to 60 seconds
14 The softstarter shall be provided with high speed fuses as recommended.

s
on
4.3 INSTALLATION
C
1 The Contractor shall submit details of proposed equipment and method of installation to the
Engineer and QGEWC for approval prior to commencement of installation work.
ar
2 Provide all the motor control equipment installations, wiring installations and tests, including
at
connections and interconnections for the electrical controls as indicated, specified and
required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces shown on the
Q
Drawings. The starter can be installed in a separate cubicle for MCC or can be an item in the
Distribution Board, as per the Project Documentation. The installation procedures as
applicable for MCC and DB shall also in general applicable for motor starter items.
3 Equipment shall be installed level and securely attached to the cubicle frames. The sections
shall be joined together with bolts, nuts and washers to form a complete unit assembly. Floor
standing equipment shall be installed on concrete plinths as shown on the Drawings.
4.3.2 Earth Bonding
1 Each Medium Voltage/MCC switchgear panel or section shall be individually connected (at
both end of the panel earthing bar) to two separate earthing pits trough the main earth bar
located in the electrical or cable basement rooms. The earthing cable size shall be provided
using a professional international recognized cable size design software subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
2 Medium Voltage /MCC switchgear panel earthing conductor to earthing bar and earthing pit
is to be sized for maximum earth fault current for 5 seconds with final conductor temperature
not exceeding 160 °C or sized not less than 20 mm² per 100 kVA of transformer rating, and
with a minimum of 95 mm².
14
3 Each panel section shall be cross bonded to adjacent panel section earthing terminal.
20
END OF PART
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 05: Low Voltage Variable Speed Controllers
5 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS (VFD)(,1000 V) ........ 2
5.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

5.1.1 Description 2
5.1.2 Standards 3
5.1.4 Warranty 4
5.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 4
5.2.1 Ratings 4
14
5.2.2 Design Characteristics 5
5.2.3 Control System 6
20
5.2.4 Controller Keypad 6
5.2.5 Communications Interface 7
s
5.2.6 Fault Detection 7
rd
5.2.7 Protection Features 7
5.2.8 Emergency Stop Control 8
da
5.2.9 Drive Enclosures an 8
5.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 8
5.3.1 Documentation 8
St
5.3.3 Training 9
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
5 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS

(VFD)(,1000 V)
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Description
1 Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be of the solid state, static, low harmonic design
voltage source type, using minimum 32 bits microprocessor or the latest available, digital sine
wave approximation Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) type. VFD’s shall be suitable for the
14
particular application, controlling mainly pumps with variable torque characteristics. The drive
manufacturer shall have a proven operation for the propose drive (and active harmonic filter/if
provided), in sewage treatment plant or sewage pumping stations(or similar applications-
20
subject of the Engineer’s approval) for more than 10 years.
2 The VFD and associated control equipment shall be housed within a cubicle forming part of
s
the relevant Factory Built Assembly. A stand alone VFD panel shall be provided for VFD
rd
above 75 kW. A stand-alone control panel may however be provided depending on the
design, if the application requires special ventilation arrangements, or due to space
da
constrains within the FBA cubicles. Detailed technical proposals shall be submitted for the
Engineer’s review and approval. an
3 The VFD shall be of a proven design that provides high pump efficiency, high availability,
minimum maintenance, substantial energy reduction and longer bearing and seal life at
St
reduced speeds.
4 The VFD shall control the speed by employing advanced torque control techniques and auto
n
tuning that measure and set all constant and critical parameters of the motor automatically.
io
ct
5 The VFD cubicle to be considered as a starter with the only addition of VFD with display unit
and keypad and therefore shall comply with the requirements as described for starters and
tru
FBA’s in QCS.
6 The Contractor shall provide a properly matched pump - motor - drive system for the specific
s
duty operating in conjunction with VFD considering load - torque characteristics, KW rating,
on
efficiency, thermal capacity, power factor improvement etc.

C
7 The driving motor speed shall be variable between maximum speed at full load and at any
intermediate speed down to a tenth of full load speed by means of a variable frequency from
the VFD. The VFD shall provide a constant torque availability at any speed with a starting
ar
torque of 1.5 times full load torque at maximum speed. The VFD shall be capable of
supplying the motor continuously at any frequency.
at
Q
8 The VFD shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers or semi-
controlled bridge consisting of diodes-thyristors or transistors combination or 6-pulse/12-
pulse converter (whichever satisfy regulations pertaining to reduced harmonics distortion) or
the latest available technology.
9 A DC link choke-smoothing reactor shall be included to limit fault throughput.
10 The thyristors/transistors shall be chosen to have a rating of 2.5 times the normal peak
working voltage. Voltage peak transients for every thyristor/transstors shall be suppressed by
a capacitor/resistance network and excessively high rates of change of voltage (dv/dt) shall
be limited by a "snubber" network. Voltage spikes, which may be detrimental to any solid
state component or relay, shall be suppressed by suitable networks.
11 The thyristors/transistors shall be capable of maintaining continuously 10 per cent in excess

of the current imposed by the maximum load conditions. Thyristors/transistors shall be
protected against current overloads caused by malfunction of components or circuitry within
the inverter or external loads. Overcurrent protection and rate of current rise (di/dt) in the
thyristors shall be controlled by electronic current limiting devices, which shall cause trip
current circuits to operate.
12 Thyristor heat sinks shall be provided with thermostats, which shall effect tripping in the event
of excessive temperatures occurring.
13 The printed circuit boards shall confirm to BS 4584 or other approved equivalent standard
and connections by multi-way sockets suitably treated to avoid high resistances being formed
14
between the plug and socket.
14 Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided complete with a hygrostat type switch with
20
reasonable setting range (50-100%), which operates when the preset value of %RH is
exceeded above dew point and have OFF/AUTO control on the cubicle front door. The heater
shall not be in operation when the VFD is functioning.
s
rd
da
percent loads for the duration of at least 3 hours under each load condition. If drives don’t
extra cost.
an
16 The VFD shall be selected based on the following as the main advantages:-
St
(a) User friendly allowing the operator to configure the VFD at site with ease.
n
(b) Uniform motor running at all speeds.

io
(c) Power factor close to unity regardless of the speed of the motor.
ct
(d) High overall system efficiency

tru
(e) No increase of noise in the motor.
17 The VFD shall be arranged to prevent nuisance tripping due to failure of supply for a short
s
duration (transient disturbances).

on
18 The following indication LED lamps with labels as per the relevant QSC Section 21, shall be
provided on the VFD door.
C
(a) Ventilation fan failure.

ar
(b) VFD General fault.

at
(c) Run/Stop.
Q
(d) Local/Remote.
5.1.2 Standards
1 The drive shall conform to the requirements of IEC 146.
2 The drive shall comply with EMC requirements such as EC directive 89/336/EEC.
3 The drive shall conform to the guidelines outlined in the Electricity Association, London,
Engineering Recommendation G.5/-4 regarding harmonic distortion. The level of harmonic
distortion shall not exceed 5 %.
4 The Contractor shall carry out a harmonic assessment for the project and provide whatever
corrective measures are necessary to ensure that the installations harmonic distortion does
not cause deviations of the voltage characteristics other than those allowed by European
Standard EN 5016 – Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public distribution
systems. The Contractor shall obtain QGEWC approval of the assessment and the
corrective measures proposed. The Contractor shall also provide cross-referenced
confirmations from the machine/motor suppliers and the control gear/soft starter or VSD
manufacturers that the equipment they are supplying is totally mutually compatible.
5 Total Harmonic distortion (THD) shall be limited to lowest level under 5% as per G5/4 in
order not to create stresses and resultant problems for the plant’s distribution systems. It may
therefore be necessary to provide active type a harmonic filter including automatic 100%
14
stand-by active harmonic filter to achieve the required limits as set by QGEWC and/or
IEEE519.
20
1 The suppliers manufacturing facility shall be certified to the ISO - 9001 series of standards
s
from the International Standards Organisation.
rd
2 Type test reports shall be provided including internal test reports for the proposed drive as
da
per IEC/BS standards.
an
5.1.4 Warranty
St
1 The drive shall be warranted for a minimum of five years from the date of commissioning by
the manufacturer. The warranty letter shall be provided direct form the Drive manufacturer in
ASHGHAL –PWA name.
n
io
5.2 PRODUCTS
ct
5.2.1 Ratings
tru
1 The VFD shall convert 415 V or 690 V - 3 Phase - 50 Hz, power to an adjustable voltage and
frequency for controlling the speed of the pump. The output voltage shall vary proportionally
s
with the output frequency to maintain a constant volts/hertz value up to a nominal frequency.
on
Above nominal frequency, the output voltage shall remain constant.
2 The incoming line power factor shall range between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over the entire
C
operating speed range.

ar
3 The drive shall be capable of being stored at a temperature between -0 °C and 70 °C.
at
4 The drive shall be capable of operating in ambient temperature between 0 °C and 50 °C

continuously with a relative humidity of up to 95 % (non-condensing).
Q
5 The drive shall be capable of operating at altitudes up to 200 metres above sea level.
6 The drive shall be capable of operating at a minimum efficiency of 95% at full load and full
speed.
7 The rating of the drive unit must be sufficient for the continuous maximum rating of the motor
and not its running load.
8 The modulating control scheme shall closely approximate actual sine wave current
throughout the speed range of the drive.
9 The frequency resolution of the VFD shall be 0.01Hz.

10 The VFD shall not be sensitive to line notching from other VFD operating nearby.
11 The VFD shall be capable of passing through a momentary power outage of 3 cycles without
causing the drive to trip.
12 The VFD shall have an adjustable IR compensation (voltage boost) control capable of
providing 100% starting torque from the motor. The control shall be adjustable and provide
the additional voltage only at the frequency range required starting the motor.
13 Upon restoration of power following a power loss, if the VFD status is healthy, the VFD shall
be capable of re-starting upon receiving a start signal from the main processor.
14
14 The VFD shall continuously monitor its output current and frequency. Should the drive be
operating in current limit or below 10 Hz for 10 seconds (stall condition), the VFD will shut
20
down. The VFD shall allow site configuration of the parameters to match the application
requirements.
15 The VFD shall have the capability to avoid up to five critical operating ranges. The critical
s
operating ranges (skip frequencies) shall have selectable bandwidth, configurable via the
rd
operator interface.
da
16 The VFD shall be capable of operating with the output open circuited.
an
17 The VFD shall be capable of regenerating power from the motor to the DC bus for controlled
deceleration. The maximum deceleration rate shall be determined by the losses in the drive
system. The deceleration rate shall be constant and independent of motor speed.
St
18 The VFD Drive shall be designed to operate in all four quadrants.

n
io
5.2.2 Design Characteristics

ct
1 The VSD shall have a fixed and alternatively variable V/f curve characteristic suitable for the
required application.
tru
2 The VSD shall be capable of varying the motor speed from a maximum speed at full load and
s
at any intermediate speed down to 10% full load speed.

on
3 The drive shall be designed to be selectable for variable or constant torque. When selected
for constant torque, the drive shall supply 150% of rated current for up to one minute. When
C
selected for variable torque the drive shall supply 115% of rated current for up to one minute.
ar
4 The VSD shall employ a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter system with insulated gate
bi-polar transistors (IGBT) to minimise audible motor noise and increase overall
at
performance.
Q
5 The drive shall be designed to have an adjustable PWM carrier frequency with a minimum
range from 2k Hz to 8k Hz to minimise audible motor noise.
6 The drive shall be optimised for 4k Hz switching frequency at 44 kW (60 HP) or less and 2 K
Hz at 55 kW (75 HP) and larger.
7 The drive must be capable of switching on to a motor already rotating in either direction.
8 The starting arrangement must include a ramp speed control, to achieve starting currents not
exceeding normal full load current.
9 The VFD shall be provided with a full load isolation and disconnecting device as per IEC
relevant standard for the safety of Convertors.
5.2.3 Control System
1 The VFD shall have self-diagnostic features on power-up to validate memory, analogue
reference, communication link, dynamic breaking if any, and control power etc.
2 The VFD design shall include SCR heatsink construction for heat transfer
3 The VFD shall include semiconductor metal oxide varistors (MOVs) or other approved
equivalent method to the approval of the Engineer for protection against voltage surges.
4 Other built-in features of the VFD shall be PID, auto start, multiple pump control, reverse run
protection and restart after instantaneous power failure.
14
5 The VFD shall self configure to the main operating voltage and frequency.
20
6 Upon power up, the VFD shall first check availability of connected motor and then update its
memory by storing the new data, compare the data, auto tune by optimizing the operating
s
characteristics and run the motor.
rd
7 The VFD shall be factory configured and preset requiring minimal site adjustment during
da
commissioning.
8 The VFD output frequency shall be controllable between 0 – 120 Hz.

an
9 An AC pre-settable fault current limiting facility shall be provided to ensure that when a
St
setting is exceeded voltage and frequency are automatically controlled.
10 The VFD shall facilitate field adjustment of the following parameters as minimum:-
n
(a) The motor acceleration 0-600 seconds

io
(b) The motor deceleration 0-600 seconds

ct
(c) The voltage to frequency ratio boost in proportion to load torque

tru
(d) Compensation for motor slip from 0-5 per cent with varying load torque
(e) Minimum frequency set control
s
(f) Maximum frequency set control

on
(g) Presentable current limit facility

C
11 The VFD memory shall retain and record, run and fault status with a minimum of 8 last fault
conditions.
ar
12 The Contractor shall furnish details of specific installation and cable lengths to the
manufacturer of the VFD and obtain in writing, the recommended size, type and specification
at
of power and control cables used between the VFD and the motor.
Q
13 The VFD cubicle shall be provided with additional control and accessories if any are deemed
necessary to meet the operating logic as described in the particular requirement.
recommended by the manufacturer in order to avoid damage to the VFD or Motor.
5.2.4 Controller Keypad
1 The VFD shall be provided with a unit mounted but detachable LCD display unit, provided
with a three metre length of cable, suitable for mounting on the cubicle door. The VFD shall
allow the program stored in one drive to be copied to another drive by using the display unit
and supplied software. Interconnecting cables and associated accessories together with a
user manual must accompany the VFD.
2 All parameters shall be password protected to prevent tampering and unauthorised changes.
5.2.5 Communications Interface
1 The drive shall incorporate an RS 485 serial communications interface to allow full drive
control, programming, monitoring and diagnostics, including access to history record to
SCADA control station.
2 The VFD shall be provided with communication interface and facility to integrate the
operation of the system. The facility employing communication protocols e.g. profibus,
modbus etc. shall be compatible with other system equipments such as the PLC, RTU etc.
14
3 The Contractor shall provide a suitably sized programming device (laptop) complete with all
necessary connection cables, software and licences for configuration and maintenance of the
VFD’s.
20
5.2.6 Fault Detection
s
1 The drive shall keep a record of the last ten trips, plus a 100 sample history record of up to
rd
ten pre-defined parameters to enable fast diagnosis and minimum down time. Automatic
printout of history record to a serial printer shall be an available feature.
da
2 The VFD shall have a programmable fold back function that will sense a controller/motor
an
overload condition and fold back the frequency to avoid a fault condition.
St
3 A dedicated microprocessor based electronic motor protection system to be provided for the
protection of the motor.
n
4 The VFD shall have UL listed solid state I²t protection and class 10 or equivalent overload
io
protection as per BSEN 60947 meeting Type 2 co-ordination. Semiconductor fuses providing
the required protection may be permitted to use as approved by the Engineer
ct
5 The VFD shall be protected against short circuit between output phases and ground, analog
tru
outputs and logic circuit.

s
5.2.7 Protection Features

on
1 The drive shall incorporate the following protective functions:

C
(a) active limiting of fundamental current by frequency fold back on acceleration loads and
frequency hold on decelerating loads
ar
(b) overcurrent protection

(c) short circuit protection
at
(d) fast acting supply fuses

Q
(e) DC intermediate bus undervoltage

(f) DC intermediate bus overvoltage
(g) power section overtemperature
(h) earth fault protection without damage
(i) power section faults.
2 The drive shall be protected against supply-phase loss and mains discontinuity.
3 The drive shall have a selectable auto-restart after trip.
4 The drive shall be designed to shut down with no component failure in the event of any of the
above fault conditions arising.
5.2.8 Emergency Stop Control
1 The drive shall incorporate facilities to allow the connection of an Emergency Stop Push-
button to ensure effective direct stopping of the drive if dangerous situations arise. The
means provided should include direct connection to an air-break device e.g. a contactor,
arranged such that its opening on-load:
(a) does not inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the variable speed controller
(b) does not produce additional safety hazards
(c) does not cause damage to the controller.
2 Such contactors shall be to BS EN 60947-1 with utilisation category AC-3.
14
5.2.9 Drive Enclosures
20
1 Drive enclosures shall generally be fabricated in accordance with the requirements for motor
control centres specified in Part 2.
s
2 The drive enclosure shall have a protection rating of IP 31 minimum to BS EN 60947-1.
rd
da
3 Where necessary, forced cooling shall be provided incorporating a visual indication on the
front of the cubicle door in the event of a cooling system failure.
an
4 Ventilation grills shall be fitted with sand trap filters. 100% spare filters shall be provided.
St
5 Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with a thermostat and have OFF/AUTO control
on the cubicle front door. The heater shall not be in operation when the inverter is
functioning.
n
io
5.3 INSTALLATION
ct
5.3.1 Documentation
tru
1 The following documentation shall be provided:

s
(a) load de-rating (with tender)

on
(b) harmonic distortion (with tender)

(c) circuit diagrams
C
(d) maintenance instructions

(e) fault diagnosis
ar
(f) parts list with part numbers

at
(g) commissioning instructions

Q
(h) general arrangements drawings

2 A recommended spares list for two years continuous operation shall be submitted at the time
of tender. Where multiple, identical units are being supplied a rationalised list, i.e. not a
summation of individual drives, requirements, should be produced.
5.3.2 Commissioning
1 The manufacturer of the drive system shall have a factory trained service representative
residing in the Qatar for commissioning, programming and to provide training and after sales
service.
2 The representative shall be trained in the installation, maintenance and trouble-shooting of

the equipment specified and shall assist the Contractor to set-up and commission the
variable speed motor drives and controls.
3 System validation tests shall be performed on all VSD’s.
4 The integrated site test on the VFD, motor and all other associated devices shall be
conducted to verify the input and output current, voltage, frequency, power factor,
acceleration and deceleration rate etc. in accordance with the operating characteristics as
5 Test VFD at different operating conditions by adjusting parameters (25, 50, 75 and 100%).
Record the performance and verify.
6 The power system shall be tested for harmonics, line notching and for RFI/EMI in cable
circuits and in the air.
14
7 Tests shall be performed during normal plant operation and during operation with the
20
emergency generator.
8 The test results so obtained shall be used to calculate the Total Harmonic Distortion (%THD)
and compare the same with IEEE 519 and QGEWC regulation.
s
rd
9 The manufacturer's engineer or their trained and qualified engineer working full time with the
local supplier shall conduct all tests on site.
da
10 Upon completion of site tests a duly signed report listing all tests and checks, together with all
an
supporting documents and drawings where applicable, shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review. The Owner’s representative shall be invited to witness the tests.
St
11 Submit all test reports, drawings and supporting documents to the Engineer and QGEWC
and obtain written approval from both prior to the system being accepted by the Owner.
n
io
5.3.3 Training
ct
1 The AC drive manufacturer shall provide an on site training program for the operating
personnel. This program shall provide operating and instruction manuals, training in
tru
equipment operation, and troubleshooting of the AC drive. The training program shall include,
but not be limited to:
s
(a) Instruction on the basic theory of pulse width modulation control

on
(b) Instruction on the layout of the variable frequency controller indicating the location
and purpose of each component
C
(c) instruction on troubleshooting problems related to controller

ar
(d) installation and removal of printed circuit boards

(e) actions to take under failure of controller
at
(f) necessary cleaning of component parts.

Q
END OF PART
Part 06: Cables and Small Wiring
6 CABLES AND SMALL WIRING ..................................................................... 2
6.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

6.1.1 Scope 2
6.1.2 References 2
6.1.4 Submissions 4
6.1.5 Products Delivery, Storage and Handling 4
6.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 4
14
6.2.1 Performance Requirements for Environmental Conditions 4
6.2.2 Cables 4
20
6.2.3 Sundries 9
6.2.4 Jointing 11 kV, L.V. and Pilot Cables 11
s
6.3 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 12
rd
6.3.1 General 12
da
6.3.2 Cable Trays 17
6.3.3 Spacing Between Cables 17
an
6.3.4 Trench Depth 18
6.3.5 Cable tiles 18
St
6.3.6 Removal of Existing Cables 18

6.3.7 Ducts 19
n
6.3.8 Quarry Scalping 19

io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
6 CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the general requirements for power cables and small wiring systems. It
shall be read in conjunction with other parts of the Project Documentation.
2 This particular requirement is to be read in conjunction with Specification for Underground

Cables in PVC-u Ducts, plus Section 21 Part 30 Duct Bank and Manholes refers (but not
14
limited to).
20
This Section
s
Part 7 Conduits
rd
Part 8 Trunking
da
Part 9 Cable Trays
Part 23 Testing
an
6.1.2 References
St
1 Cables and wires shall comply with the following standards or updated/revised amended
versions as appropriate:
n
BS 1442......................Galvanized mild steel wire for armouring cables

io
BS 2484......................Straight concrete clay ware covers

ct
BS 2897......................Aluminium strip armour for cables

tru
BS 3506......................Unplasticised PVC pipe for industrial purposes

BS 4066......................(IEC 332) Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
s
BS 4660......................Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-u) pipes and plastic fittings of

on
nominal
sizes 110 and 160 for below ground gravity drainage and
C
sewerage
BS 5308......................Instrumentation cables.
ar
BS 5467......................(IEC 502) Cables with thermosetting Insulation for electricity supply for
at
voltages of up to and including 600/1000 V and 19000/30000 V

BS 6004......................(IEC 227) PVC insulated cables (non-armoured) for electrical power
Q
BS 6007......................Rubber insulated cables for electric power and lighting

BS 6207......................(IEC 245) Mineral insulated cables.
BS 6234......................Polythene insulation and sheath for cables.
BS 6346......................PVC insulated cables for electrical supply.
BS 6360......................(IEC 228) Copper conductors for cables.
BS 6500......................(IEC 227) Insulated flexible cords.
BS 6622......................(IEC 502) Cables with extruded cross linked polyethylene Insulation,
for rated voltage 3800/6000 V up to 19000/30000 V
BS 6746......................PVC Insulation and sheath of electric cables
BS 6746C ...................Colour chart for insulation and sheath of electric cables
BS 6899......................Rubber insulation and sheath of electric cables

BS 7671......................Requirements for electrical installations
QGWEC Latest regulation
BS EN 29453..............Soft solder alloys-chemical composition and forms
ISO 9000 ....................Quality management and assurance standards
14
Cable terminations shall comply with the following specifications:
BS 1858......................Bitumen based compounds for electrical purposes
20
BS 4579......................Performance of mechanical and compression Joints in electric cable
and wire connectors
s
BS 6121......................Mechanical cable glands for elastomer and plastic Insulated cables
rd
BS 6910......................Cold pour resin compound and heat shrink cable joints in the voltage
da
range up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC
IEC 60364 Low voltage electrical installations
an
St
1 The Contractor shall determine the correct size of cables to be used for the equipment
selected, based on current rating and voltage drop, as relevant, after taking into
n
consideration:
io
(a) type of cable and wire

ct
(b) ambient conditions

tru
(c) method of installation

s
(d) the disposition of each cable relative to other cables

on
(e) fault power level

(f) protective device ratings
C
(g) motor circuit voltage drop during starting.

ar
2 Voltage drop and current ratings shall be calculated according to QGEWC Regulations or
BS 7671 , IEC 60364 and IEE regulation, whichever is more stringent.
at
Q
3 All cables and wires shall be suitable for installation and continuous service in the ambient
conditions described in Part 1, and shall be manufactured to ISO 9000 or equivalent.
4 Approximate cable route lengths and equipment power ratings indicated on the Project
Drawings shall be for calculating cable sizes for tendering purposes. The Contractor shall
determine exact cable lengths from site measurements and calculate cable size from the
power ratings of the actual equipment being proposed. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any increase in costs or design work associated with proposed equipment which has
different electrical characteristics than the equipment on which the design was based.
5 Cables from manufacturer whose product have been in satisfactory use in similar services in
the state of Qatar for not less than 5 years shall be used only. Certificate of origin shall be
submitted with the offer.
6.1.4 Submissions
1 Shop Drawings and Product Data:
(a) submit full technical details including cable sizing calculations(Cable loading, voltage
drop, thermal limit verification of cable under fault condition , overloading capability,
protective devices ratings, motor voltage drop during starting, as a minimum) for each
method of installation used on site, performed with an approved professional
international recognized licensed software (Subject of Engineer’s approval), and
catalogueinformation of each type of cable or wire proposed for the Engineer’s
approval before ordering
(b) submit copy of test certificates from the manufacturer or an independent testing
14
authority confirming that cables comply with the Specifications
(c) submit exact route of the cable runs and relevant Sections in the shop
20
drawings,including fixing details, termination details etc.
6.1.5 Products Delivery, Storage and Handling
s
rd
1 Reference Part 1.
da
2 Each drum length of cable shall be allotted a distinct and separate reference number. This
number shall appear on the test certificates covering the respective length of cable and shall
also be clearly marked on the cable drum.
an
3 The Contractor shall advise the Engineer upon delivery to site of each drum length, quoting
St
the reference number. The test certificates shall be handed to the Engineer for examination
and approval.
n
4 All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer’s seals, labels or other proof of
io
origin intact. These labels and seals shall not be removed until the cable is required for use
and shall be retained for inspection by the Engineer.
ct
tru
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for the off-loading and handling of the cables on site, and
shall ensure that cables are delivered to site on drums and properly protected against
mechanical damage. Where lengths are cut from cables, the open cable ends shall be
s
sealed.
on
6.2 PRODUCTS
C
6.2.1 Performance Requirements for Environmental Conditions

ar
1 The Contractor shall be aware of the need to supply and install all wire and cables for this
at
Contract which are most suitable for the special environmental conditions prevailing in Qatar.
Q
2 All conductors shall have good fatigue resistance and not be subject to breaks due to nicks
or cuts when terminating.
6.2.2 Cables
1 Unless otherwise specified, cables and wires of the following specified voltage ratings shall
be used as indicated.
(a) 6350/11000 V rated cables : 11kV ring and radial circuit
(b) 600/1000 V rated cables : Main and sub-main distribution panels, motor
control centres, circuits serving process
equipment
(c) 450/750 V rated cables : Final sub-circuit supplies for lighting, socket
outlets, etc.
(d) 300/500 V rated cables : Instrumentation
(e) 250 V rated cables : Extra low voltage wiring, communication circuits
where the maximum voltage is 50 V.
(f) Special screened and : Music/paging systems, Cable and TV system

cable twisted pair conductors circuits
2 General:
14
(a) conductors shall be high conductivity copper, to BS 6360 (IEC 228) unless otherwise
indicated
20
(b) copper conductors shall be stranded
(c) signal control cables shall have solid conductors
s
(d) flexible cords shall have fine stranded conductors
rd
(e) conductor sizes shall be metric. Conductors with cross sectional areas smaller than
da
those specified will not be accepted
(f) insulation for each conductor shall be colour coded or otherwise identified as required
an
by the Regulations. Colour coding shall be maintained throughout the installation
(g) the current carrying capacity of conductors has been determined in accordance with
St
the specified Regulations, the specified type of insulation and the expected conditions
of installation
n
(h) all cables shall be as far as practicable, of one manufacturer only. All cables shall
io
comply with the relevant IEC/BS.

ct
3 600/1000 V rated PVC Insulated armoured cables.

tru
(a) PVC/SWA/PVC cable: 600/1000 V Grade, to BS 6346
(b) conductor: Annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
s
approved manner
on
(c) armour: Single layer of galvanised steel wires for multicore cables
(d) insulation: Colour coded to BS 6746C
C
(e) PVC for sheath and insulation to BS 6746

ar
(f) cables shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armour and ensuring a
at
high earth continuity.

Q
4 PVC Insulated PVC Sheathed (PVC/PVC) Cable.
(a) to BS 6346, 600/1000V Grade, or to BS 6004, 300/500 V Grade

(b) flat twin and three core cable shall be to BS 6004 and incorporate an earth conductor
placed between the red and black cores for two core cable and between the yellow
and blue cores for three core cable
(c) conductor: annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
approved manner
(d) insulation: Colour coded to BS 6746C
(e) PVC for sheath and insulation : to BS 6746
5 Single core PVC Insulated Wires:

(a) (cable shall be to BS 6004, rated 450/750 V, with high conductivity copper
conductors and PVC compound insulation. Colour coding shall be in accordance with
table 51 A of BS 7671
(b) wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splice shall be made except
within outlet and junction boxes. A separate neutral wire shall be provided for each
circuit. Wires shall be left sufficiently long enough (minimum 150 mm) to permit
making final connections.
6 Mineral Insulated Cable:
(a) to BS EN 60702 : Part 1, rated 600/1000 V
14
(b) cable shall comprise of a pressure packed magnesium oxide insulation contained
within a continuous soft ductile copper sheath and copper conductors embedded in
20
the dielectric in standard formation
(c) cable termination kit shall comprise of conductor insulation of neoprene sleeving
retained by cone shaped beads beneath a fibre sealing disc. Each conductor shall be
s
identified with regard to phase etc., by means of sleeving placed over the neoprene
rd
insulation
da
(d) cable seals shall comprise of screw-in-pot type seals, with brass ring glands designed
to accommodate the pot seal. an
7 Terminals:
2
(a) for cable up to 6 mm : two screw pinching type
St
2
(b) for cable over 6 mm : grip lug type cable sockets
n
(c) brass saddles: purpose made, two fixing screw type.

io
8 Heat Resistant and High Temperature cable:

ct
(a) to BS 6500, or BS 6004 300/500 V grade, designated EPR (ethylene polypropylene

tru
rubber) insulated HOFR sheathed, 85 °C or EPR insulated OFR sheathed, 60 °C.

Conductor(s) shall be flexible class 5 tinned copper to BS 6360. Insulation shall be
type GP.1 to BS 6899. Outer sheath shall be HOFR (heat, oil, fume resistant) or
s
OFR (oil and fume resistant) sheath type RS3 to BS 6899 and flame retardant to
on
BS 4066 Part 1, temperature rating 60 ° or 85 °C
(b) high temperature cable shall be to BS 6500 or BS 6007, designated 300/500 V grade
C
silicone insulated glass braided, 180 °C. Conductors shall be flexible class 5 tinned
ar
copper to BS 6360. Insulation shall be silicone rubber type EI 2 to BS 6899. Outer

sheath shall be treated glass fibre braid, temperature rating 180 °C.
at
9 Flexible Cable:
Q
(a) to BS 6007, or BS 6500, rated in accordance with manufacturer’s tables

(b) flexible cables subject to excessive heat shall be insulated as (8) above, (a) or (b) as
per the Project Documentation requirement.
10 600/1000V rated XLPE Insulated Cable
(a) to BS 5467, 600/1000V grade, designated XLPE/SWA/PVC for armoured multicore

cable, and XPLE/PVC for unarmoured cable
(b) conductors : plain annealed copper to BS 6360
(c) cable shall comprise of plain copper, stranded circular conductors insulated with an
adequate thickness of extruded cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)
(d) conductors shall be laid up together and warmed circular with suitable performed
fillers and warnings, bound with polythene terephthalate (PTP) tape and covered with
an extruded PVC sheath, minimum 1.4 mm thick for multicore cable
(e) armoured multicore cable shall have steel wire armouring and extruded sheath of
black PVC
(f) armoured single core cable shall have aluminium wire armouring and extruded sheath
of black PVC
(g) outer sheath of single core cables shall be at least 2.5 mm thick
(h) conductor screen : non-metallic comprising either semi-conducting tape or a layer of

extruded semi-conducting material
14
(i) prevent void formation in insulation by careful control of its passage through
temperature graded water baths
20
(j) cable shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armour and ensuring high earth
s
continuity.
rd
11 6350/11000V Cable
da
(a) cable shall be armoured type, rated 6350/11000 Volts, and shall comply with
BS 6622. Single core cable shall be designated 11 kV XLPE/AWA/PVC. Multi-core
an
cable shall be designated 11 kV XLPE/SWA/PVC
(b) conductors shall be stranded copper complying with BS 6360, covered with a semi-
St
conducting screen extruded on to the conductors
(c) insulation shall be extruded cross linked polyethylene suitable for continuous
n
operation at 90 °C, able to accept a final temperature of 250 °C in the event of a short
io
circuit, and covered with a screen consisting of an extruded semi-conducting layer

and a copper tape layer
ct
(d) armoured cables shall have a secure bedding, over the core or core assembly, for
tru
the armour. For single core cable, the bedding shall consist of a PVC sheath. For
multi-core cable, the bedding shall consist of non-hygroscopic fillers
s
(e) single core cable shall have aluminium wire armour. Multi-core cables shall have
galvanised steel wire armour. Cable shall be covered with a red coloured PVC
on
sheath
C
(f) electrical design stress at any point in the insulation shall not exceed 3 kV per mm
12 Instrumentation Cables - Analogue Signals:

ar
(a) to BS 5308 part 2, type 2,300-500 V

at
(b) single copper conductor 1/0.8 mm

Q
(c) polyethylene insulation

(d) individual screen of aluminium backed polyester tape with tinned copper stranded
drain wire
(e) collective screen of aluminium backed polyester tape with tinned copper stranded
drain wire
(f) extruded PVC bedding
(g) galvanised steel wire armour
(h) PVC outer sheath, gray
(i) core identification as BS 5308 Part 2.
13 Instrumentation Cables - Digital Signals:
(a) to BS 5308 part 2, type 2 300-500 V

(b) single copper conductor 1/0.8 mm
(c) polyethylene insulation
(d) collective screen of aluminium backed polyester tape with tinned copper stranded
drain wire
(e) extruded PVC bedding
(f) galvanised steel wire armour
14
(g) PVC outer sheath, Gary
(h) Core identification as BS 5308 Part 2.
20
14 Pilot cables shall comply with following requirements:
(a) Pilot cables shall be PVC insulated multi core cables to be used for:
s
rd
(i) Standard pilot wires protection schemes
(ii) Telecommunication purpose.
da
(b) Conductors shall be stranded copper, plain annealed and in accordance with BS 6360.
an
(c) Core insulation shall be PVC complying with requirements of BS 6746. It shall be
applied by an extrusion process and shall form a compact, homogenous body of
uniform thickness. Insulation thickness shall be in compliance with BS 6346.
St
(d) Core identification shall be by one of the following:

n
(i) Number printed on the core insulation

io
(ii) Colour, 4mm cores having colours Red, Blue and Black.
ct
(e) Bedding shall be compliance with BS 6346.

(f) The cables shall have a single layer of galvanised steel wire armour of diameter
tru
1.6mm in accordance with BS 6346.

(g) The oversheath shall be of black PVC in compliance with BS 6746 Type 1 compound.
s
It shall have a minimum thickness of 1.7mm and shall be in general compliance with
on
BS 6346.
C
15 Source Tests on Cables
(a) Provide test certificates against each drum and /or cable length. These shall include:-
ar
(i) high voltage D.C. insulation pressure test, between cores, each core to earth,
at
metallic sheath or armour as applicable.

Q
(ii) insulation resistance test.

(iii) core continuity and identification.
(iv) conductor resistance test.
16 Field Tests on Cables
(a) inform the Engineer prior to the testing of the cables and be responsible for liaising
with any other contractor to whose equipment the cables may be terminated to ensure
that all parties concerned are aware of the impending tests, to guarantee the safety of
personnel and that the isolation of any equipment has been completed. Any special
isolation or preparation required to be carried out before cable testing can be
completed, shall be carried out by the Contractor responsible for that equipment. All
tests shall be carried out by the Contractor and supervised by the Engineer.
(b) All cables shall be tested in accordance with the latest QGEWC requirements and the
relevant BS and IEE regulations for the class of cable. QGEWC shall be given the
opportunity to witness the testing of high voltage cables and these shall be tested in
accordance with their specific requirements.
(c) demonstrate correct phasing of cores in all cables throughout the works and test the
insulation of all cables, both between the cores and between the cores and earth,
during installation with a 500-volt insulation tester.
6.2.3 Sundries
1 Cable Jointing and Termination:
14
(a) joints in wires and cable shall be avoided wherever possible. Joints in flexible
cables and cords are not permitted
20
(b) joints and terminations of all power cables shall be made by skilled cable jointers
approved by the Engineer
(c) no reduction in the number of strands of a cable core shall be allowed at a cable joint
s
or termination
rd
(d) ferrules, compression connectors and bare portions of cable core resulting from a
da
jointing or terminating process shall be insulated with an approved type of insulating
tape or heat shrinkable tubing after completion of process. Such insulating tape or
heat shrinkable tubing shall have equal or better electrical and mechanical properties
an
than those of the original insulation removed, and shall be adhered to the cores etc.
securely and permanently. The final thickness shall be in smooth contour throughout
St
the whole length
(e) every compression joint shall be of a type which has been the subject of a test
n
certificate as described in BS 4579. When a compression joint is made, the

appropriate tools specified by the manufacturer of the joint connectors shall be used.
io
(f) a circuit protective conductor having adequate cross sectional area and of same
ct
material as the phase conductors shall be installed and connected to maintain the
tru
effectiveness of the earth continuity across every cable joint

(g) all cable jointing and termination shall be witnessed by the Engineer
s
(h) sufficient spare cable shall be allowed to remake the joint or termination
on
(i) above ground cable joints and terminations shall be accessible

(j) cable cores shall pass through glands or termination boxes directly to equipment
C
terminals, without crosses if practicable.

ar
2 Joints
at
(a) straight through joints for copper conductors: Where permitted by the Engineer,
conductors shall be jointed by approved type compression connectors using the
Q
appropriate tools and connectors

(b) joints shall be made core-to-core.
3 Joints Boxes and Termination Boxes
(a) malleable cast iron boxes for joints in all power cables shall be compound filled and of
adequate size. The boxes shall be fitted with suitable armouring clamps and glands.
The armouring of the cables shall be terminated at the armouring clamps and the
inner sheath shall pass through the gland. Self amalgamating tapes shall be applied
to give fully screening insulation reinstatement where the insulation is screened
(b) the box and compound shall be at the correct temperature before the compound is
poured to allow total adhesion between the compound and the box. The compound
shall then be allowed to cool and topped up before the box is closed. No air locks
shall be formed within the box
(c) with the consent of the Engineer, plastic shells fitted with suitably sized armour bond
and filled with an approved type of cold pouring encapsulating compound to BS 6910
may be used as an alternative to the compound filled cast iron joint boxes for jointing
PVC-insulated power cables. In such cases, the complete jointing kit, including
plastic shell, compound, insulating tape etc. shall be from the same proprietary
manufacturer who is specialised in manufacturing products for this purpose. The
jointing methods and procedures, as laid down by the manufacturer, shall be followed
in strict accordance
(d) MICC mains cable: joints shall be suitably sized galvanised malleable iron adaptable
box with glands and fixed base mechanical clamping connectors of approved design.
For external use the jointing box shall be enclosed in a second galvanised box with
glands, filled with encapsulating compound
14
4 Cable Glands
20
(a) cable glands shall be used for terminating cables to switch gear, switch boards, motor
control centres, motors and other equipment
s
(b) they shall be brass compression glands and comply with the relevant part of BS 6121,
rd
except for MICC cables, which shall comply with BS 6207 Part 2.
(c) glands for armoured or screened cables shall have suitable clamps
da
(d) external compression glands shall have close fitting PVC shrouds
an
(e) earthing for armouring and metallic sheaths: suitable brass or copper clamps, and
copper strip conductor in accordance with QGEWC requirements, and not less than
2.5 sq. mm
St
(f) cables forming part of a LAN or structured cable system shall be terminated to floor
plates or wall sockets compatible with the media interface connector specified for the
n
particular network being used.

io
5 Cable Sockets:
ct
(a) shall be correct size for type of cable

tru
(b) shall be sweating type, or an approved crimping type used with an approved crimping
tool
s
on
(c) sweating sockets for conductors 70 sq. mm. and over shall be machined cast brass.
6 Fire Barriers:
C
(a) shall be purpose made, comprising a rigid fixed frame with adjustable seals and a
ar
suitable clamping device

(b) in fire compartment separation walls and floors shall be same standard of fire
at
resistance as wall or floor.

Q
7 Cable Covers: shall be to BS 2484 and concrete covers exceeding 300 mm wide shall be
reinforced.
8 Pipe Ducts : shall be PVC or as indicated.
9 Solder: an alloy of lead and tin to BS EN 29453 grade F or H, unless otherwise

recommended by cable manufacturer.
10 Cable Sealing Compounds: shall be tropical grade to BS 1858 or BS 6910 and approved by
cable manufacturer, of an oil-resisting compound where the difference in level between cable
ends exceeds 6 m.
11 Cleats: shall be an approved claw type cast aluminium, gunmetal, plastic or brass of
approved type, two bolt fixing for cables greater than 50 mm diameter.
12 Cable Markers:
(a) shall be precast concrete, minimum size 300 x 300 mm x 100 mm deep
(b) the markers shall be engraved “HV CABLE”, “ELECTRIC CABLE”, “ELV CABLE”,
“EARTH PIT” or “CABLE JOINT”, as applicable
(c) cable marker construction details and engravings shall be approved by QGEWC.
13 Cable Transits
(a) cable transits shall have a stainless steel frame which shall be cast into or bolted to the
structural concrete.
14
(b) the insert blocks shall be proofed against fire, explosion, water, rodents and gas.
(c) the design shall be such that at a later date cables can be added or removed with
20
minimal disturbance to the remaining cables.
(d) the whole cable transit assembly shall be of an approved proprietary modular system
which shall be certified by a recognised International Testing Authority.
s
rd
(e) full details of proposed cable transits shall be submitted for the approval of the
Engineer.
da
6.2.4 Jointing 11 kV, L.V. and Pilot Cables an
1 General
(a) All jointing shall be carried out to instructions of QGEWC and the Engineer and only by
St
approved Jointers. All jointing shall be carried out in accordance with the QGEWC
Safety Rules.
n
(b) All connections to lead sheaths shall be plumbed.

io
2 11 kV Cables
ct
(a) Terminations - These shall generally be of the heat shrinkable type using compression
tru
connectors although occasionally compound filled terminations shall be required.

Generally crossed cores shall be avoided.
s
(b) Straight Joints - Intermediate joints shall be joined in the easiest way avoiding crossed
on
cores.
(c) Phasing joints - Phasing shall be in accordance with the instructions of QGEWC and
C
the Engineer to obtain correct phasing. The joints shall be of the bituminous filled type
using sweated ferrules.
ar
3 Pilot Cables - These shall be jointed in accordance with instructions of QGEWC and the
Engineer. The joints shall be resin filled type using compression connectors for straight joints
at
and mechanical glands for terminations.

Q
4 600/1000 Volt Cables
(a) All jointing shall be on a colour basis such that:

(i) Core 1: Red phase
(ii) Core 2: Yellow phase
(iii) Core 3: Blue phase
(iv) Core 4: Neutral
(b) For terminations heat shrinkable techniques and compression connectors shall be
used.
(c) For straight joints heat shrinkable techniques of joints using bituminous compound or
resin shall be used at the discretion of QGEWC and the Engineer.
(d) For tee or branch joints bituminous compound or resin shall be at the discretion of
QGEWC and Engineer. Mechanical or sweated connectors shall be used as decided
by QGEWC and the Engineer.
6.3 INSTALLATION
6.3.1 General
1 Installing cables:
(a) pull cable into position by hand, where possible using an adequate number of
operative roller guides suitably positioned along cable length
14
(b) obtain approval of pulling cables by winch or similar appliance
(c) when pulling by winch or the like, fit a suitable tension gauge into the haulage line
20
between winch and cable. Pulling tension shall not exceed the limit recommended by
the cable manufacturer
s
(d) do not allow cable to twist or rotate about its longitudinal axis
rd
(e) lay 3 phase groups of single core cables in trefoil formation. If this is not possible
obtain instructions
da
(f) install cables to allow any one cable to be subsequently removed without disturbing
the remainder
an
(g) underground cable horizontal separation shall be a minimum of 150 mm
St
(h) damaged cables shall be removed, unless the Engineer agrees to a repair.
(i) all cables shall be neatly run in all situations. Where two or more cables are to be
n
installed, cable tray must be provided.

io
(j) where power cables are surface run on the external faces of structures or above ground
level they shall be installed on cable tray. They shall be protected from radiation of the
ct
sun by means of purpose made sunshades, which shall be of an approved design,

tru
securely fixed and fully ventilated.

(k) mechanical protection by cable tray covers shall be provided for all cable trays above
s
ground/floor level to a height of 1000mm.

on
(l) when more than one cable is to be terminated at particular items of equipment special
care should be taken to ensure that all cables to that equipment are routed from a
C
common direction and each is terminated in an orderly and symmetrical fashion. Each
and every cable shall be permanently identified at each end by its cable number as noted
within the schedules. The identification label shall be of adequate size and style to a
ar
pattern approved by the Engineer and shall be securely fixed to its relative cable.
at
(m) identification labels shall also be fixed on cables at each and every entry and exit point of
buried ducts, exits and entry to any structure and in such other positions as are
Q
necessary to identify and trace the route of any site cable. The use of punch type
adhesive labels (Dymo-tape) will not be permitted.
(n) where cables enter or leave structures or panel plinths, the ducts including spare ducts
shall be sealed at the points of entry or exit. Caulking shall be carried out with an
approved asbestos compound and followed by not less than 40mm of epoxy resin
two-mix cold waterproof compound or a weak sand/cement mixture as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for temporarily sealing all cable ducts
into structures during the installation stage to prevent accidental flooding of structures.
(o) during caulking care should be taken to ensure that the serving and/or armouring of any
cable is not damaged. Any damaged cables shall be replaced entirely.
(p) all cables entering or leaving hazardous areas (e.g. wet well), air conditioned areas or
areas protected by a fixed fire fighting installation shall do so via approved proprietary
manufactured cable transits. Cables entering or leaving structures or passing between
rooms of the same classification may be sealed by alternative means subject to the
agreement of the Engineer.
(q) cables shall be free from kinks and the whole installation shall present a neat
appearance.
(r) ties of PVC, nylon, plastic or similar material will not be permitted under any
circumstances.
(s) protection of cables against possible mechanical damage shall be provided wherever
seen to be necessary by the Engineer. All cables are to be run with particular regard to
14
neatness. Multiple runs are to be arranged so that cables entering or leaving the run do
so in a logical order.
20
(t) all power cables shall be terminated with palm type compression terminals of the correct
type and size.
s
(u) special terminals shall be provided where necessary. Standard terminals which have
rd
palms/holes which are oversized for the application will not be acceptable. Standard
terminals which are drilled out to a larger size, reducing the area of the palm will not be
da
acceptable.
(v) removal of strands or shaving of conductors to enable them to be terminated at
an
terminals which are not designed for the size of cable necessary will not be permitted
at any point.
St
(w) pneumatic crimping machines shall be employed with correctly sized dies. Hand
crimping shall not be used.
n
2 Bending Radius: as large as possible and cable shall not to bend to a radius less than that
specified in the relevant British Standard, QGEWC regulations or manufacturer’s
io
recommendation, whichever is largest.

ct
3 Underground Cables in PVC-u Ducts:

tru
(a) cables shall be installed in ducts where there is hard standing or vehicular passage.
Ducts where there is vehicular passage or landscaped area shall be concrete encased
s
on
(b) cable duct size shall be as specified in the Drawings, to BS 3506 Class B or BS 4660.
(c) However the minimum duct wall thickness shall be as per the following:
C
ar
DUCT SIZE DUCT WALL THICKNESS

(mm) (mm)
at
75 3.2
Q
100 3.4
150 3.6
200 4.2
(d) run cables at least 300 mm clear of other services, whether the latter run parallel or
transversely to cable trench. use pulling compound, or lubricant to avoid excessive
stress on the cable, if required
(e) run cables below intersecting piped services, unless the cable would be at a depth
exceeding 2 m, in which case seek instructions
(f) ducts shall not be filled with cables to more than 60 % of their capacity
(g) nylon draw cords shall always be left in ducts

(h) cable duct pits shall be provided at each change in direction and in any case at
distances not exceeding 30 m
(i) ducts shall be suitably sealed with polyurethane foam or proprietary cable sealing
arrangements if specified
(j) empty ducts shall be plugged with removable plugs
(k) ducts shall have a minimum diameter of 100 mm.
4 Direct Buried Cables:
14
(a) the excavation and backfilling of cable trench work shall be carried out by the
Contractor.
20
(b) excavated spoil shall be removed from the route of the trench. There shall be no loose
stones or other debris on either side of the trench for a distance of 1000mm.
s
(c) the Contractor shall supply and lay the sand bedding, cables, sand blinding, cable
cover tiles and marking tape. He shall also supply and lay cable route marker posts
rd
after the backfilling and top soiling has been carried out.
da
(d) the sanding and laying of all cables shall satisfy the following requirements:
(i) cable depths shall be measured from the finished ground level unless otherwise
an
directed by the Engineer.
(ii) H.V. cables shall be laid at a depth of 1 meter.
St
(iii) L.V. cables shall be laid at a depth of 0.6 meter.

(iv) H.V. and L.V. cables may be run in the same trench but should be staggered.
n
however where necessary to pass through ductwork, cables shall be laid

io
vertically on top each other with the H.V. cables at the lowest level with a good
sand blinding forming the sand bedding for the L.V. cables.
ct
(v) before laying in cables the Contractor shall inspect the trench work to ensure
tru
that the trench bottom is of a smooth and firm contour and free from any sharp
materials or obstructions.
s
(vi) cable bedding within the trenches shall be formed by a 200-mm sand layer.
on
(vii) cables shall be laid with adequate separation and shall be “snaked” to avoid
tension during backfilling operations and subsequent settlement.
C
(viii) before sanding and backfilling, all laid cables shall be inspected by the Engineer,
and a further inspection following sanding and tiling shall be made by the
ar
Engineer before backfilling.

at
(ix) after cables have been laid, they shall be covered by a further 200-mm of sand,
which shall be well tamped around the cables. Mechanical punners shall not be
Q
used for this work.

(x) after sanding cable cover tiles shall be placed in position to overlap the cables
by a minimum of 50 mm either side of the cables as per Clause 6.3.5 of this
Section.
(xi) the Contractor shall carry out backfilling and shall ensure that cable cover tiles
are undisturbed and that large rocks, stones and the like (more than 20mm
diameter) are eliminated from backfill spoil.
(xii) after backfilling the Contractor shall reinstate to finished ground level. The
Contractor shall lay in position the necessary cable route markers at a maximum
of 10 meters apart and at entries to buildings and any change in direction.
(xiii) cables are to be spaced in accordance with QGEWC requirements i.e.
M.V./M.V. – 700mm, M.V./H.V. – 1000mm and H.V./H.V. – 1000mm.
(xiv) the Contractor shall provide cable route markers to the approval of the Engineer
and engraved “Electricity Cables”, or other suitable legend, with the appropriate
voltage.
5 Cables above Ground:
(a) protection shall be provided where mechanical damage is possible

(b) unarmoured cables shall be protected by conduit, ducting or trunking
(c) cables shall be protected from direct sunlight
(d) cable spacings and layouts shall be as table 4A of BS 7671
14
(e) cables shall be run at least 150 mm from other services.
6 Underground Cables in trenches
20
(a) in areas of hard standing cables may also be installed in concrete or brick cable
trenches with removable covers
s
(b) cables may be laid in a single layer on the trench floor, otherwise they shall be
rd
supported on the sides of the trench on cable tray by cleats or ladders
da
(c) cable spacings and layouts in the trenches shall be as table 4A of BS 7671
(d) other services shall not be run in cable trenches.
an
7 Cable Supports:
St
(a) cables shall be supported in accordance with the methods described in table 4A of
BS 7671. Other methods shall be approved by the Engineer
n
(b) cables shall be supported at regular intervals and at spacings a maximum of 400 mm
io
for cleats for horizontal runs and 550 mm for vertical runs
ct
(c) vertical cable runs exceeding 100 m shall incorporate tension releasing sections
tru
(d) structured cable management systems or ladders shall be of G.R.P or galvanised

steel cable supports shall be provided at 300 mm intervals
s
(e) MICC Cables:

on
(i) run on surface of walls ceilings. Where embedded, run in a PVC trough or
conduit
C
(ii) run cables in square symmetrical lines. Where single core cables are run in
groups, bend the sheaths at maximum 50 mm centres
ar
(iii) fix surface run cables with saddles at maximum 300 mm centres.
at
Q
8 Heat Resistant Cables:
(a) in areas where a constant ambient temperature exceeding 55C will occur, run all
final sub-circuits and distribution circuits in heat resistant cable
(b) make conversion from PVC cable to heat resistant cable with a fixed block
connector housed and fixed into a conduit box or equal, except where the conversion
of cable types emanate from a switch, ceiling rose or similar fixed connector
accessory.
9 Flexible Cables:
(a) flexible cable shall be kept to a minimum and concealed if possible

(b) mechanical retainment shall not depend on electrical connections.
10 Sealing Cables:
(a) seal both ends of cables immediately after tests

(b) seal MICC cables immediately after cutting to prevent hygroscopic action by the
dielectric. All cables shall give an infinity test when tested on a 1000 volt Megger
immediately, and 48 hours after sealing
(c) seal aluminium sheathed cables with a metal cap plumbed to the sheath
(d) seal plastic sheathed cables with a plastic cap embracing the wires and outer sheath
(e) mark cable ends in accordance with the relevant BS.
11 QGEWC will require to carry out inspections at the following stages:
14
(a) Completion of excavations
20
(b) Completion of bedding of trench prior to cable installation.
(c) Cable installation
s
(d) Completion of surround over cables and installation of cable tiles etc.
rd
(e) Upon completion of reinstatement.
da
12 The Contractor must not progress from one stage to the next of the above without the
approval of QGEWC and the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging
an
inspections by QGEWC to suit his programme of Works.
St
13 Cable Segregation
(a) Only conductors carrying signals of the same instrumentation signal category shall be
n
contained within any one multi-core cable.

io
(b) In each instrumentation signal category, a further segregation is required to ensure

that conductors forming part of an intrinsically safe circuit are contained within multi-
ct
core cables reserved solely for such circuits.

tru
(c) High integrity signals such as data transmission or critical shut down signals shall be
contained in separate cables.
s
(d) ICA/Telemetry cables sharing a cable tray, duct or route with power cables shall be
on
avoided. Power cables are defined as a.c. cables above 50 volts with a 10-amp rating.
Where this is not practicable, a minimum maintained separation between cables
should be provided in accordance with Table 6.1.
C
(e) Where the maximum current exceeds 100 amps or the voltage exceeds 650 volts, the
ar
minimum segregation shall be in accordance to Clause 6.3.3 of this Section.

(f) Where the length of an enforced parallel run between power and ICA/Telemetry cables
at
is greater than 500 meters, a progressive “pro-rata” increase in the segregation

distance shall apply.
Q
(g) The segregation distances shall be maintained by positive means and shall apply to
both above ground and below ground installations.
(h) Where a crossover between power and ICA/Telemetry cables is unavoidable the cable
shall be arranged to cross at right angles. The number of crossovers shall be kept to a
minimum.
(i) Where cable installations are of a restrictive nature such as entries into buildings,
panels' etc. relaxation of the minimum segregation distance requirement from a power
cable(s) is acceptable. The minimum segregation distance shall then be the distance,
determined by the length of the parallelism at the restrictive section of the installation.
(j) Where a manufacturer’s installation specification requires greater segregation than
detailed in Table 6.1 such as for data highway cables etc. the Contractor shall comply
with the manufacturer’s segregation specification.
(k) Cables of different categories shall not be installed in the same duct
(l) Public Telephone service (Telecom Provider) cables shall be installed in separate
ducts
Table 6.1
Minimum Segregation Distance for Cables
Minimum Segregation Distance

Requirement in mm
Distance over which parallelism exists between
14
Instrumentation Signal Classification
signal and power cables in metres Power cable
Category to BS 6739 or equivalent
20
Cat. 2 Cat. 3
Maximum current 10 amps 0 - <3 50 50
s
at any phase voltage up to 3 - <10 100 100
rd
250 volts a.c. or d.c. 10 - <25 100 150
25 - <100 150 200
da
100 - <250 200 250
250 - < 500 an 250 300
Maximum current 50 amps 0 - <3 100 150
at any phase voltage up to 3 - <10 150 200
St
650 volts a.c. 10 - <100 200 250
100 - <250 275 350
250 - < 500 350 450
n
Maximum current 100 0 - <3 175 250

io
amps at any phase voltage 3 - <10 200 300

ct
up to 650 volts a.c. 10 - <100 250 450

100 - <250 350 525
tru
250 - < 500 500 650

s
on
6.3.2 Cable Trays

C
1 Generally:
ar
(a) install cables on trays in a single layer, unless otherwise specified

at
(b) use purpose made straps or saddles to maintain cables in a neat regular disposition
(c) secure cables with load bearing cleats securely fixed to the tray, where trays do not
Q
directly support the cables

(d) space cleats, saddles and straps at maximum centres recommended in QGEWC
Regulations, as above, or by cable manufacturer
(e) cable trays and installation shall be in accordance with Part 9 of this section, QGEWC
regulations and BS 7671.
6.3.3 Spacing Between Cables
1 High Voltage Cables
(a) 11,000 volt cables shall be laid with a horizontal spacing of 750mm between centres
and a minimum distance of 150mm from trench wall.
(b) Pilot cables shall be laid with a horizontal spacing of 140mm from the associated main
cable in case of multiple cables trenches pilot cables shall be laid between the power
cables.
2 Low Voltage Cables - 1000 volt main cables shall be laid with a horizontal spacing of 600mm
between centres and with a minimum distance of 150m m from trench wall.
3 High Voltage and Low Voltage Cables in same trench - Where 11,000 volt and 1000 volt
cables are laid in the same trench the spacing between the 11,000 volt and 1,000 volt shall
be 750mm.
4 Reduction of Spacing - Any reduction from above spacing can only be permissible for lengths
14
of 10 m or less.
6.3.4 Trench Depth
20
1 High Voltage - For 11,000 volt cables the trench shall be 950mm deep.
s
2 Low Voltage
rd
(a) For 1,000 V main cables the trench shall be 850 mm deep
da
(b) For 1,000 V service cables the trench shall be 650mm deep.
an
3 Arrangements for Trenches with High Voltage and Low Voltage Cables - Where 11,000 volt
and 1,000 volt cables are to be laid along the same route a stepped trench shall be dug with
the 1,000 volt cables laid inside i.e away from the road.
St
6.3.5 Cable tiles

n
io
1 The Contractor shall provide and install:

ct
(a) Concrete cable tiles over all 66 kV cables. The cable tiles shall be of the size and form
shown on the drawings. Samples must be provided for approval by QGEWC and the
tru
Engineer and satisfy a test of impact strength in accordance with BS 2484: 1985.
(b) Cable tiles over all 11,000 volt cables and MV/LV instrumentation /Control Cables
s
manufactured from recycled polyethylene indicating cable voltage levels or similar

on
complying with the following requirements:

Minimum thickness : 12 mm
Length : 1m
C
Width : 24mm
2
Tensile : 8.40 N/mm
ar
(B S2782 Method 20C)

(c) The tiles shall be marked as specified. The cable tiles must be supplied complete with
at
any pins, pegs or other devices for jointing tiles together. Samples must be supplied to
Q
QGEWC and the Engineer for approval prior to use.
6.3.6 Removal of Existing Cables
1 The Contractor shall liaise directly with QGEWC regarding the removal of existing cables and
shall not, under any circumstances, commence removal of cables until QGEWC have verified
such apparatus as being redundant. Removal of cables shall only be carried out in the
presence of a QGEWC Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall arrange uplift of empty cable drums from QGEWC Stores and shall
return all recovered cables neatly coiled on the drums provided.
6.3.7 Ducts
1 Ducts are to be supplied by the Contractor. They shall be of the following type:
Material - High impact resistance PVC
Internal Diameter - 150 mm or 100 mm as specified
Minimum wall thickness - 3.6 mm (for 150 mm ducts) or
2.4 mm (for 100 mm ducts)
2 Samples shall be provided for approval by the Engineer prior to use.
6.3.8 Quarry Scalping
14
1 Shall comprise of quarried limestone materials having particle sizes varying from 5 mm down
to dust with a homogenous mixture of all particle sizes.
20
2 The materials shall have specific mechanical and thermal resistive qualities as defined
below:
s
(a) Thermal Resistivity - The material shall be subject to a 90 % compaction, using an
rd
amount of water equal to optimum moisture content. After subsequent drying, such
that the water content does not exceed 2% of the weight of the sample, the thermal
da
resistivity of the material shall not exceed 2.0 C M/Watt
(b) Mechanical Qualities - The scalping material shall have mechanical qualities that meet
an
the requirements of the QCS Roadworks Section.
St
END OF PART
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 07: Conduits and Conduit Boxes
7 CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES ............................................................. 2
7.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

7.1.2 References 2
7.1.3 Description 2
7.1.4 Submissions 3
7.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
7.2.1 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings 3
14
7.2.2 Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings 4
7.2.3 Flexible Conduit and Connections 6
20
7.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 6
s
7.3.1 Preparation 6
rd
7.3.2 Installation of Conduit 6
7.3.3 Installation of Flexible Conduit 9
da
7.3.4 Cleaning an 10
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
7 CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

7.1 GENERAL
1 The work of this section is integral with the whole of the Project Documentation and is not
2 Co-ordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this section.
14
This Section
20
s
7.1.2 References
rd
1 The following references are referred to in this Part:
da
BS EN 50086-1:1994 .Flexible steel conduits and adapters for the protection of electric cable.
an
BS 2782......................Method of testing plastics
BS 4568......................Steel conduits and fittings, metric units
St
BS 4607......................Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations rigid PVC
conduits and conduit fittings, metric units
n
BS EN 60423..............IEC 423-A, Conduit diameters and threads for conduit and fittings.
io
7.1.3 Description
ct
1 This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of all conduit works in
tru
accordance with the Project Documentation.
2 General:
s
on
(a) light and power circuits, fire alarm, telephone, signal and other low current system
wiring shall be drawn in conduits unless otherwise indicated
C
(b) conduit system shall generally be concealed and installed as indicated, unless
otherwise indicated
ar
(c) light and power circuits, fire alarm wiring, telephone wiring, signal wiring and low
current system wiring shall each be run in separate conduit and wire way
at
(d) cable insulated for two different categories of circuit shall be segregated
Q
(e) irrespective of service, conduit and fitting used shall be:

(i) where embedded: heavy gauge rigid PVC complying to BS 4607, BS 6053 and
BS 6099 Part 2, section 2.2
(ii) where surface mounted, exposed: galvanised steel conduit as per BS 4568
(iii) where installed above false ceilings and in voids: galvanised steel throughout
the circuit
(iv) where installed in flame proof and hazardous areas: galvanised steel
(v) from terminal box to machine: flexible steel conduit as per BS BS EN 50086-
1:1994.
7.1.4 Submissions
1 Samples:
(a) cut-away samples of all sizes of conduits, conduit boxes and fittings of each type
shall
be fixed to a board and submitted to the Engineer.
2 Product Data:
(a) at the time of submitting samples submit manufacturer’s details, catalogues and
copies of test certificates confirming that offered types comply with the
Specification.
14
3 Shop Drawings:
20
(a) submit drawings of proposed conduit layout and obtain approval before commencing
work.
s
7.2 PRODUCTS
rd
7.2.1 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings
da
1 Standards:
an
(a) Conduit and fittings shall comply with BS 4607: Part 1 and CEE Publication 26 or
revised/amended/updated standards. In addition, conduit and fittings shall comply
St
with this specification where requirements are more stringent

(b) Conduit diameters shall comply with QGEWC regulations.
n
2 Physical Properties:
io
ct
(a) conduit and fittings shall be:

(i) resistant to high temperatures
tru
(ii) non-hygroscopic
s
(iii) self-extinguishing
on
(iv) of adequate insulation resistance and electric strength

(v) inert to all liquid normally discharged from residential, commercial and
C
industrial premises
ar
(vi) suitable for installation, storage and transportation at temperature not

normally below -5 ° C. or above 85 ° C. and at these temperatures shall not:
at
 soften or suffer any structural degradation

 show signs of cracking, or deform so that cables cannot be easily drawn
Q
in or are likely to be damaged when drawing in, when bent, compressed

or exposed to extreme temperature
(vii) of adequate mechanical strength and thermal stability
(viii) suitably and indelibly marked and identified. Markings shall include nominal
size and be easily legible
(ix) Smooth inside and outside and free from burrs and sharp edges. Surfaces
and corners over which cables may be drawn shall be smooth and well
rounded.
3 Sizes of Conduit:
(a) (minimum 20 mm, internal diameter unless otherwise indicated

(b) where size is not indicated: select in accordance with the regulations and as proper
to
the number and size of conductors.
(c) The minimum conduit wall thickness shall be as per the following:
CONDUIT SIZE CONDUIT WALL THICKNESS

(mm) (mm)
20 1.8
25 1.9
14
32 2.3
20
38 2.5
50 3.1
s
rd
4 Fittings:
da
(a) conduit entries shall be designed to ensure a watertight joint.
an
5 Expansion fittings:
(a) type to be approved.

St
6 PVC Conduit Boxes:

n
(a) PVC Conduit Boxes can be used through PVC Conduit raceway system and shall
io
comply with BS 4607

ct
(b) metallic conduit boxes as specified elsewhere in this section can be used
alternatively
tru
if required for PVC conduit raceway system

(c) all boxes shall be provided with tapped brass inserts for fixing the screws
s
(d) all boxes for switches, sockets, outlets, etc., shall be rigid PVC or metallic type and
on
their dimensions shall be suitable for fixing the switches, sockets and other
accessories.
C
7.2.2 Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings

ar
1 Rigid Steel Conduit

at
(a) all metallic conduits shall comply with BS 4568 and of Class 4 rigid steel screwed
type having an interior and exterior zinc coating of uniform quality and
Q
appearance
throughout all surfaces
(b) conduits shall not be less than 20 mm diameter size, and shall be complete with all
necessary threaded fittings, couplings and connecting devices having
galvanised
equivalent finish
(c) conduits and fittings shall be manufactured specially for electric wiring purposes.
When manufactured by a continuous weld process, weld heads both inside
and
outside the tube shall be completely removed prior to galvanising
(d) all conduits and fittings shall be free from rust or other defects on delivery to the site
and shall be properly stored in covered racking so that it is protected from
mechanical
damage and damage by weather and water whilst stored on the site
(e) all conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wires using brass male bushes.
All such bushes shall be hexagon headed, heavy duty long threaded type
(f) all conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from material equal or
equivalent to that of the conduit with which the coupling is to be used, having
factory
installed packing ring and pressure ring to prevent entrance of moisture. All
coupling shall be equipped with earthing ring or earthing conductor
14
(g) all conduit runs shall be fixed using spacer bar pattern saddles giving not less than 3
mm clearance between the conduit and the surface to which it is fixed.
20
Saddles shall
have finish to match the conduit and saddle clips shall be secured to the bar
by
s
means of brass screws.
rd
2 Metallic Conduit Boxes:
da
(a) metallic conduit boxes shall be used throughout metallic conduit raceway systems,
and shall comply with, or be of demonstrated equivalent quality and
an
performance to
BS 4568 requirements. All boxes and covers shall be galvanised, zinc plated
or
St
rust-proof finish equivalent to conduit finish

(b) circular and/or rectangular boxes shall be used for pull boxes and terminating boxes,
n
according to size and number of conduits connected to box. Boxes shall be

io
either
malleable iron or heavy duty steel construction with welded joints and tapped
ct
holes to
receive metal threaded cover retaining screws. Self tapping screws will not be
tru
permitted
(c) all boxes, other than those to which a fitting or accessory is to be directly mounted
s
shall be fitted with covers screwed to the box by brass screws. Malleable iron
on
covers
shall be used with malleable iron boxes and heavy gauge steel covers shall be
C
used
with sheet steel boxes
ar
(d) all cover and accessory fixing provisions shall be so positioned that the fixing screws
lie completely clear of cable entering the box. All fixing screws shall be of
at
brass
all boxes installed in exterior locations, plant rooms, ducts, etc., shall be fitted with
Q
approved type gaskets to provide a waterproof seal between box and cover or
other
items fitted to the box
(e) all boxes provided as junction boxes where cable joints are specified or permitted,
shall be provided with fixed terminal blocks. Such boxes shall be of suitable
size to
contain the terminal block and sufficient cable to allow neat connections to be
made.
The terminal blocks shall be fixed to the box by brass screws and shall
comprise
brass conductor connectors, with brass clamping screws enclosed in porcelain
or
other heat resisting insulation material which will not distort or otherwise have
its
properties damaged by temperatures below the highest temperature at which
14
the
insulation of any cable connected to it is destroyed.
20
7.2.3 Flexible Conduit and Connections
1 Flexible Conduit:
s
rd
(a) to BS EN 50086-1:1994or updated standard, watertight, PVC sheathed, spiralled
stainless steel metal type and UV resistant plastic covered . The conduit shall be
da
terminated at boxes and equipment by means of approved stainless steel or
brass/bronze compression glands an
(b) to be of the unpacked type for normal atmospheric conditions and non-asbestos
packaged for damp situations. Adapters shall be of the solid type rust resistant
(Stainless steel/Brass/bronze).
St
(c) flexible conduit shall be used for the final connection of rigid conduit to the terminal
boxes of machines fitted with a means of drive adjustment and/or where vibrations is
n
likely to occur.
io
(d) flexible conduit for use outdoors shall be weatherproof and certified to be resistant to
ct
UV radiation.
tru
2 Flexible Connections:
(a) where connections to electrical machines are to be by multicore glands, the final
s
termination shall be by ring type universal glands and locknuts, and adequate
on
slack
cable in the form of a loop or spiral being left to allow for the movement of
motors
C
necessitated by belt retensioning, vibration, etc.

ar
7.3 INSTALLATION
at
7.3.1 Preparation
Q
1 Sets and Bends:
(a) conduits up to 32 mm diameter; form on site with an approved bending machine

using proper formers, guides, springs, etc., taking care not to deform conduit
(b) conduits over 32 mm diameter : use coupling fittings.
7.3.2 Installation of Conduit
1 General
(a) run conduit in square, symmetrical lines, parallel to or at right angles to walls and in
accordance with the accepted practice
(b) conduit system shall be mechanically continuous and watertight after installation. All
conduit system shall be arranged wherever possible to be self draining
(c) conduit runs between draw-in positions shall conform to QGEWC Regulations
regarding no. of bends and lengths of straight run
(d) installation shall permit easy drawing in of cables
(e) keep conduits at least 100 mm from pipes and other non-electrical services
(f) where conduit runs are to be concealed in the structure or are to pass through floor
slabs, the Contractor shall be responsible for marking the accurate positions
of all
chases and holes on site. The Contractor shall arrange the conduit routing to
14
make
maximum use of any preformed conduit holes and slots provided in structural
beams.
20
Conduit installation on shear walls shall be kept to a minimum. All routings
necessary
on shear walls shall be agreed with the Engineer before work is put in hand
s
rd
(g) install conduits so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation outlets.
(h) install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." or other national
da
standards or Codes of Practice to the approval of QGEWC.
(i) install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
an
(j) arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
St
(k) support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable
hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
n
(l) group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel
channel ; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
io
(m) fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section
ct
"Supporting Devices"
tru
(n) do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports
s
(o) do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

on
(p) arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

(q) route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
C
(r) route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
ar
(s) route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.

at
(t) maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.

(u) cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q
(v) bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

(w) join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe
nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to
entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
(x) use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to boxes and fittings.
(y) install no more than equivalent of two 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit
bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic
one-shot bender to fabricate and factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger
than 2-inch (50-mm) size.
(z) avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit
system.
(aa) provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit
crosses seismic , control and expansion joints.
(bb) provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
(cc) use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
(dd) provide supports for fittings independently of any false ceiling for sunk and concealed
conduit systems.
(ee) size conduits, draw-in boxes and junction boxes in accordance with regulations.
(ff) swab whole of the conduit system to remove any loose matter or dirt before cables
are pulled in.
14
(gg) where conduits connect to switch boxes draw-in boxes and the like the conduits must
have a machined faced socket screwed on to the end which when tightened is flush
with the outside of the box. The conduit is then to be secured to the apparatus by
20
means of a hexagon smooth bore brass bush screwed from the inside of the apparatus
into the conduit socket in order to make a sound and tight mechanical joint.
s
(hh) all horizontal runs shall be supported at no more than 900 mm. Vertical runs shall be
rd
supported at no more than 1200 mm. Where directional changes occur support shall
be provided at no more than 150 mm either side of the bend.
da
(ii) hot bending shall be carried out on all non-metallic conduits. A bending spring of the
correct size shall be used in all cases. The heat source shall be provided by a hot air
an
torch. When the conduit is in a pliable state it shall be bent around a suitable former
and held in position until the conduit has set. No other method will be approved.
St
(jj) couplers, slip type bends and spouted fittings shall be made using semi permanent
mastic sealing compounds. Expansion couplers shall be used in surface installations
where straight runs exceed 8 meters.
n
(kk) standard junction or adaptable boxes shall be provided at all junctions and at sharp
io
changes of direction in addition to any special positions where they are required on
ct
Site. Inspection couplers may be used in long runs to facilitate drawing in cables.
(ll) particular care must be taken to ensure that no water is allowed to enter conduit at
tru
any time and all conduits shall be arranged with adequate ventilation and drainage
where necessary as directed by the Engineer. Inaccessible junction boxes will not be
s
allowed.
on
(mm) only continuous lengths of buried conduit shall be installed between boxes, no joint
boxes being allowed in the floor screeds. Conduits crossing expansion joints shall be
C
fitted with couplings of approved manufacture.

(nn) the ends of conduits laid or set in formwork prior to concreting shall be temporarily
ar
sealed off with a coupler and a plug.

at
(oo) fixing to surfaces of walls shall be by means of spacer bar saddles securely fixed by
screws. Where conduits are concealed or laid in structural floors they shall be held
Q
in position with substantial fixings of make and pattern to be approved by the

Engineer.
(pp) adaptable boxes shall be manufactured from PVC as previously detailed for conduit
boxes and sized to provide sufficient space factor.
(qq) weatherproof boxes and accessories shall be used outdoors where agreed on Site by
the Engineer or where indicated in this Specification or on the Drawings.
(rr) conduit shall be installed such as to permit complete rewiring without the need to
remove false ceiling or carry out builders work.
(ss) no single conduit serving phase socket outlets lighting points and switches shall
contain more than one phase.
(tt) wiring shall be carried out on the looping-in system and no joints other than at
looping-in points will be allowed.
(uu) where the conduit system terminates at any equipment requiring a non-rigid
connection a flexible conduit shall be installed of the PVC or PVC sheathed metallic
type fully watertight with purpose made connection adapters.
(vv) each flexible connection shall include not less than 400mm length of flexible conduit
and a separate earth conductor shall be run within the conduit connected to the earth
terminals in the equipment and the fixed conduit run. The flexible conduit shall not
be used as an earth continuity conductor.
2 Runs in Reinforced Concrete:
(a) obtain approval for placing PVC conduits before pouring concrete
(b) run conduits in concrete slabs parallel to main reinforcing steel
14
(c) additional openings in finished slabs, where approved, shall be made by drilling, not
by breaking
20
(d) conduit boxes shall not be nailed to shuttering boards.
s
3 Horizontal or Cross Runs:
rd
(a) (to be avoided in partitions and side walls.
da
4 Surface Mounted Conduit (including conduit installed above false ceiling):
(a) fix with distance spacing saddles to allow conduits to be taken directly into
an
accessories without bends or sets.
St
5 Concealed Conduit:
(a) fix securely to prevent movement before casting of concrete and screeds, application
n
of plaster and the like

io
(b) spacing of clips shall be not greater than as follows:

ct
Conduit size Spacing

tru
(i) up to 25 mm 600 mm
s
(ii) 32-38 mm 900 mm

on
(iii) 50 mm 1000 mm
(c) Supports for exposed conduit shall be fixed at each side of bends.
C
6 Expansion Fittings:
ar
(a) fix in conduit wherever it crosses as expansion joint in the structure to which it is
fixed.
at
7 Terminations:
Q
(a) make with a flanged coupling, lead washer and hexagonal male brass bush, where
conduit runs terminate in cable trunking, distribution boards or any sheet metal
structure.
8 Conduit Boxes:
(a) fix at all outlet points.
7.3.3 Installation of Flexible Conduit
1 All conduits must be secured to outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinets by placing locknuts
on outside of box and locknuts and bushings on the inside of box.
2 Conduits connecting recessed fixtures and their adjacent junction boxes must be flexible
metallic conduit 20 mm minimum size and shall be of sufficient length to permit dropping of
the fixture below the ceiling and to gain access to the junction box.
3 Conduit to motors shall be terminated in the conduit fittings on the motors, the final
connection being made with liquid tight flexible conduit and suitable liquid tight connectors.
2
4 A green insulated 4 mm (minimum) tinned copper earth connection shall be made between
the solid conduit or cable sheath and the equipment, the copper cable being run inside the
flexible conduit. Couplings fitted to removable covers or non-metallic equipment etc., shall be
bonded to the earthing terminal of the equipment etc. Where changes to flexible conduits
occur, a watertight outlet box with threaded entries shall be inserted and the earth connection
14
made to an internal terminal. The cover screws shall not be used for earthing connections.
20
7.3.4 Cleaning
1 The conduit outlets when installed and before wiring shall be temporarily closed by means of
s
well fitting wooden plugs, and immediately before cables are drawn in, conduit systems shall
rd
be thoroughly swabbed out until they are dry and clean
da
END OF PART
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
QCS 2014 Section 21: Electrical works Page 1
Part 08: Trunking
8 TRUNKING .................................................................................................... 2
8.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

8.1.2 References 2
8.1.4 Submissions 2
8.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
8.2.1 Trunking 3
14
8.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 6
20
8.3.2 Cleaning and Adjustment 7
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 08: Trunking
8 TRUNKING
8.1 GENERAL
14
20
This Section
Part 1 General Provisions for Installation
s
rd
Part 9 Cable Trays
8.1.2 References
da
an
1 The following standards are referred to in this Section:
St
BS 729 ........................Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles

BS 3382 ......................Zinc on steel components
n
io
BS 4607 ......................Fittings and components of insulating materials

BS 4678 ......................Steel surface trunking
ct
BS 4678 ......................Cable trunking of insulating materials

tru
BS EN 10142 ..............Hot dip zinc coated sheet steel

s
on

C
1 The Contractor shall supply and install the complete trunking system as indicated on the
ar
Drawings and specified in this Section.

at
8.1.4 Submissions
Q
1 Samples: submit samples of trunking and accessories.
2 Product Data: at the time of submitting samples submit manufacturer’s details, catalogues
etc.
3 Shop Drawings: submit drawings showing route of trunking system and obtain approval
before commencing work.
Part 08: Trunking
8.2 PRODUCTS
8.2.1 Trunking
1 General:
(a) trunking, associated parts and accessories shall be fabricated from hot dipped
galvanised sheet steel not less than 16 SWG
(b) trunking shall be supplied in 3 m lengths or bigger, each length complete with lid,
coupler and coupler screws and shall provide adequate earth continuity throughout
14
the whole trunking run
(c) shall be complete with necessary fittings and accessories. All accessories and fixing
20
materials shall also be of galvanised sheet steel of not less than 1 mm thickness
(d) if specified in the Project Documentation, trunking, associated parts and accessories
s
shall be fabricated from high impact PVC-u material, having thickness not less than
rd
1.5 mm and shall be complete with necessary fittings and accessories made from the
similar material as for the trunking
da
(e) trunking shall not be smaller than the minimum size stated on the Drawings or
specified later and shall be so sized, if not specified, that a space factor of 35 % is not
an
exceeded. The Contractor shall check the minimum size of trunking specified is large
enough for his requirements without exceeding this space factor
St
(f) trunking and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely corrosive

environments shall be heavy duty GRP or 316 S31 grade stainless steel.
n
io
2 Trunking and Connectors:

ct
(a) shall be to BS 4678: Part 1, but thickness of metal for body and cover material
may not be less than those in Table 1. The PVC trunking system shall satisfy the
tru
requirement in Part 4 of BS 4678 providing smooth internal and external finishes

s
(b) metal thickness for trunking and connectors exceeding 150 x 150 mm external
on
dimensions shall be to approval and shall not be less than that specified in BS 4678
Part 1 for the largest trunking detailed
C
(c) finish for steel trunking:

(i) for internal use: Class 3 heavy protection internally and externally (e.g.
ar
galvanised steel to BS EN 10142; protection to BS 4678 : Part 1)

at
(ii) for external use: Class 3 protection

Q
(d) lids shall be clipped and fixed at regular intervals not exceeding 2 m on straight runs,
by quick release cam type fasteners. In PVC trunking installations the lids can be
slide-in type of proper lengths
(e) partitions shall be at least 1 mm thick, finished to same standard as trunking.
The means of fixing partitions shall prevent them being misplaced and shall not cause
corrosion or electrolytic action
(f) connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking. Trunking sections
shall have butt joints
Part 08: Trunking
(g) accessories for bends and tee-off shall be supplied from the same manufacturer and
provided with lids as necessary. Reduction type tee-offs shall be provided where
smaller size branch trunking is required.
3 Bonding links and fastenings:
(a) shall satisfy continuity conditions of BS 4678

(b) shall not cause corrosion
(c) separate protective conductor of size not less than 4 mm2 shall run in the PVC
trunking system.
14
4 Braided Copper Tape:
20
(a) shall be 15 x 2 mm minimum having a resistance from fixing to fixing equal to or less
than the links used in standard trunking joints.
s
5 Steel Screws and Fasteners:
rd
(a) shall have a zinc coating finish to BS 729 or BS 3382 : Part 2, or equivalent
da
(b) fixings used for securing or fitting shall not cause corrosion or electrolytic action.
Black screws are not acceptable
an
(c) brackets, mild steel angle or channel finished to same standard as trunking.
St
6 Vertical Trunking:
(a) shall have cable support units with insulated pins at centres not exceeding 3 meters.
n
io
7 Horizontal Trunking:
ct
(a) Sizes exceeding 100 x 50 mm shall have cable separators with insulated pins at
tru
maximum centres not exceeding 2 m.
8 Surface Metal Raceway

s
on
(a) the surface metal raceway assembly shall comprise of a metal base and cover to form
a raceway intended for surface mounting, except in very small sizes. The cover shall
C
be removable to allow wire installation after the raceway has been installed as a
complete system.
ar
(b) the surface metal raceway shall be constructed of sheet metal channel with fitted
cover.
at
(c) the minimum size of the surface metal raceway shall be 50 mm x 50 mm or as

Q
specified on the layout drawings.

(d) fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings as practical as possible shall be chosen from the
manufacturer's standard range of accessories.
(e) all accessories shall be complete with removable covers.
9 Surface Nonmetal Raceway
(a) the surface nonmetal raceway assembly shall comprise of a molded or extruded non-
metallic base and cover to form a raceway intended for surface mounting.
Part 08: Trunking
(b) the surface nonmetal raceway shall be constructed of heavy-duty rigid unplasticised
PVC channel with fitted cover. The material shall be self-extinguishing and shall be
unaffected by sunlight and/or water. The material shall be suitable for continuous
ambient temperatures of 650 C.
(c) the minimum size of the surface metal raceway shall be 50 mm x 50 mm or as
specified on the layout drawings.
(d) fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings as practical as possible shall be chosen from the
manufacturer's standard range of accessories.
(e) all accessories shall be complete with removable covers.
14
10 Multioutlet Assembly
20
(a) the multoutlet assembly shall comprise of surface metal raceway with receptacles.
Receptacle devices may be pre-wired in which case they are regularly spaced.
s
(b) the multoutlet assembly shall be constructed of sheet metal channel with fitted cover
rd
and/or with pre-wired receptacles where specified.
(c) the sizes of the multoutlet assembly shall be as indicated on the layout drawings.
da
(d) provide covers and accessories to accept convenience receptacles in conjunction with
an
the wiring devices.
(e) the spacing between the receptacle shall be 150, 300 or 450 mm or as
St
specified/indicated on the Drawings.
(f) the Colour of receptacle shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
n
(g) couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes, and connectors as practical as possible
io
shall be chosen from the manufacturer's standard range of accessories.

ct
11 Wireway
tru
(a) the wireway shall be Narrow sheet metal enclosure, rectangular in cross section with
s
hinged or removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires and cable and in
on
which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been installed as a complete
system.
C
(b) the wireway shall be general purpose, oiltight and dust-tight or rain-tight type as
specified and/or indicated on the drawings.
ar
(c) knockouts shall be as per manufacturer standard.

at
(d) the sizes of the wireways shall be as indicated on the drawings.

Q
(e) the wireways shall be provided with Screw cover and full gasketing.
(f) the fittings shall be lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side and be provided
with captive screws. Include drip shield where specified.
Part 08: Trunking
8.3 INSTALLATION
8.3.1 Installation
1 Fixing Trunking:
(a) trunking shall be properly aligned, and securely fixed at maximum 2 meters centres on
straight runs. At bends, angles and offsets fix with additional fixings at centres not
exceeding 150 mm on each side of the fitting
(b) only manufacturers bends, T-offsets and accessories shall be used. Site fabrication
14
shall not be permitted.
2 Settlement and Expansion Joints:
20
(a) make a trunking joint where trunking crosses such joints
s
(b) make connection through slotted holes allowing a 10 mm movement horizontally and
rd
vertically
(c) earth continuity link across joints shall be braided copper tape which is long enough to
da
allow for the maximum movement of trunking. Fold braid ends.
an
3 Fire Barriers:
(a) where specified, install non-combustible, non-metallic fire barriers

St
(i) where trunking passes through walls, floors and ceilings

n
(ii) at each floor level when trunking is installed in riser ducts.

io
4 Connections:
ct
(a) make connections to conduits, multiple boxes, switchgears, switchboards, motor

tru
control centres and distribution boards with flanged units.

s
5 Cable Retaining Straps:

on
(a) fix at not exceeding 1m centres.

C
6 Raceway and Wireway

ar
(a) install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

(b) use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces. Mount
at
plumb and level.

Q
(c) use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner
fittings.
(d) provide steel channel for supporting the wireways.
(e) close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings.
(f) earth and bond raceway and wireway as described under the "Earthing and Bonding"
Part of QCS.
(g) provide circuit cable clamps at no greater than 500 mm intervals for raceways installed
in vertical runs.
Part 08: Trunking
8.3.2 Cleaning and Adjustment
1 Making Good:
(a) make good cutting and damages of the steel trunking systems, remove burrs and
rough edges and corrosion and treat with a rust proofing agent, followed by an
application of zinc epoxy
(b) provide a coat of paint to match adjacent surface for PVC system
(c) provide the paint after application of the zinc epoxy for steel trunking system.
14
END OF PART
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 09: Cable Trays
9 CABLE TRAYS .............................................................................................. 2
9.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2

9.1.2 References 2
9.1.3 Description 2
9.1.5 Submissions 2
9.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling 2
14
9.2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 3
20
9.2.1 General 3
9.2.2 Materials 3
s
9.3 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 7
rd
da
9.3.2 Erection 8
9.3.3 Earthing 9
an
St
n
io
ct
s tru
on
C
ar
at
Q
9 CABLE TRAYS
9.1 GENERAL
2 Co-ordinate the work with all other services affecting the work of this section.
14
20
This Section
s
rd
da
9.1.2 References
an
BS 729 ........................Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles
St
n
9.1.3 Description
io
1 Provide all labour, materials, equipment, services and accessories necessary to furnish and
ct
install the work of this Section, complete and functional, as indicated in the Project
tru
Documentation and as specified herein.

s
on
1 Reference standards as detailed under Part 1 and this Part Clause 9.1.4.
C
9.1.5 Submissions
ar
1 Reference Part 1
at
9.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling

Q
1 Deliver, store and handle materials and products in a manner to prevent damage.
2 Reference Part 1
9.1.7 Co-ordination
1 The work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the work of other services.
9.2 PRODUCTS
9.2.1 General
1 The cable tray system shall be of one manufacturer and shall include factory-made trays, tray
fittings, connectors and necessary accessories and supports to form a complete cable
support system.
2 The cable tray system shall include the following factory-made tray elements:
(a) straight cable trays and ladders
14
(b) fittings as horizontal and vertical bends of various angles, crosses, tees, wyes,
reducers, vertical riser elements
20
(c) connectors
s
(d) all necessary fixing accessories.
rd
3 Manufacturer’s standard accessories shall be used and site fabrication shall not be
da
permitted.
4 Horizontal run of cables laid on cable tray and exposed to direct sunlight shall be provided
an
with covering at higher level to allow for ventilation. Cable tray shall be raised 15 cm from
finished floor level.
St
5 Cable trays shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS 7671, NFPA 70 - National

n
Electrical Code, U.S.A or other equivalent standard as applicable.

io
6 Cable trays specification and installation shall be in accordance with QGEWC regulations
ct
and IEE latest edition as applicable.

tru
7 The product selected and proposed shall include manufacturer's Instructions that Indicate
application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified
s
under regulatory requirements.

on
8 The contractor shall select the product only from manufacturer’s specializing in
C
manufacturing products specified in this Section, with a minimum five years documented
ar
conditions.
at
9 The contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination with related civil activities prior to the
selection of the equipment.
Q
10 The contractor shall clearly show locations of trays, service fittings, junction boxes, and
branch circuiting arrangements on the drawings.
9.2.2 Materials
1 The whole of the tray work, trays, fittings, supports shall be of mild steel hot dipped
galvanized after manufacture to BS 729. The thickness of the protective sheath on any
element shall not be less than 55 microns.
2 Cable trays shall be constructed from mild steel hot dip galvanized and of minimum thickness
of 1.5 mm.
3 Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins, etc., shall be mild steel cadmium plated.
4 Tray work shall have oval perforations. Ladder type trays shall be used for vertical runs as
5 All trays (straight and fittings) shall be welded construction and be a heavy duty returned
flanged, perforated type, unless specified otherwise. The minimum thickness of heavy duty
returned flanged cable trays shall be 1.5 mm.
6 Tray components shall be accurately rolled or formed to close tolerances and all edges
rounded. Flanges shall have full round smooth edges.
14
7 Ladder racks shall be of similar construction. The rungs shall be spaced at maximum
20
300 mm. The system shall allow for installing additional rungs and for replacement of rungs.
8 For all trays, flanges shall be a minimum of 50 mm deep, unless otherwise specified.
s
rd
9 Cable tray width and radius of curved sections shall be selected to suit the number of cables
as shown on drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.
da
10 Cable trays and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely corrosive environments
an
shall be heavy duty GRP or 316 S31 grade stainless steel.
St
11 Ladder Type Cable Tray
(a) definition: Two longitudinal side rails connected by individual cross members (rungs).
n
(b) description: NEMA VE 1, specified Class or other approved standard, ladder type tray.
io
(c) material: Steel or aluminium as specified.

ct
(d) finish: ASTM A 123 or other approved standard, hot dipped galvanised after
tru
fabrication for steel trays. Painted with specified colour epoxy or PVC coated as
specified. The material shall be self extinguishing and non-inflammable and shall be
s
unaffected by sunlight or water. It shall be suitable for continuous ambient temperature

on
of 65° C.
(e) inside Width: 150, 300, 450, 600, 750 or 900 mm as specified or indicated.
C
(f) inside Depth: 75, 100, 125, or 150 mm as specified or indicated.

ar
(g) straight Section Rung Spacing: 150, 225, 300 or 450 mm as specified or indicated.
at
(h) inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900 mm as specified or indicated.

Q
(i) provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.
(j) covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or raised
cover as specified.
(k) bond trays carrying LV cables to earth with 16 Sq. mm. PVC insulated copper single
core cable, 25x3 mm copper tape if carrying HV cables.
12 Trough Type cable Tray
(a) definition: Two longitudinal side rails connected by closely-spaced rungs or ventilated
bottoms.
(b) description: NEMA VE 1, specified Class or other approved standard, trough type tray.
(c) material: Steel, aluminium or heavy duty unplasticised PVC as specified.

of 65 degrees C.
(g) inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900 mm as specified or indicated.
14
(h) provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and earthing straps.
20
(i) covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or raised
cover as specified.
s
rd
13 Solid Bottom Type Cable Tray
da
(a) definition: Two longitudinal side rails connected by corrugated or reinforced solid
bottom. an
(b) description: NEMA VE 1, specified Class or other approved standard, solid bottom
cable tray.
St
(c) material: Steel, aluminium or heavy duty unplasticised PVC as specified.

n
io
ct

of 65 degrees C.
tru
s

on

C
ar
(i) covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or raised
at
cover as specified.
Q
14 Channel Type Cable Tray
(a) definition: Single piece formed into channel. Bottom may be solid or with ventilation
openings.
(b) description: NEMA VE 1, specified Class or other approved standard, solid bottom or
ventilated bottom type cable tray as specified.
(c) material: Steel, aluminum or heavy duty unplasticised PVC as specified.
of 65 degrees C.
(e) inside Width: 75 or 100 mm as specified or indicated.

(f) outside Depth: As specified or indicated.
(i) covers: Flanged, solid or ventilated cover as specified.
15 Fiberglass Ladder Type Cable Tray
(a) description: NEMA FG 1, specified Class or other approved standard, ladder type tray.
14
(b) material: Fiberglass.
20
(c) inside Width: 150, 300, 450, 600, 750 or 900 mm as specified or indicated.
(d) inside Depth: 75, 100, 125, or 150 mm as specified or indicated.
s
(e) straight Section Rung Spacing: 150, 225, 300 or 450 mm as specified or indicated.
rd
(f) inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900 mm as specified or indicated.
da
(g) provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
an
plates, blind ends, barrier strips, and connectors.
(h) covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or raised
St
cover as specified.
16 Fiberglass Trough Type Cable Tray

n
io
(a) description: NEMA FG 1, specified Class or other approved standard, trough type tray.
ct

tru
(d) inside Depth: 75, 100, 125 or 150 mm as specified or indicated.
s
(e) inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900 mm as specified or indicated.

on
(f) provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
C

(g) covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or raised
ar
cover as specified.
at
17 Fibreglass Solid Bottom Type Cable Tray

Q
(a) description: NEMA FG 1, specified Class or other approved standard, solid bottom
cable tray.
(d) inside Depth: 75, 100, 125 or 150 mm as specified or indicated.
plates, blind ends, barrier strips and connectors.
(g) covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or raised
cover as specified.
18 Fibreglass Channel Type Cable Tray
(a) description: NEMA FG 1, specified Class or other approved standard, solid bottom or
ventilated as specified, channel type cable tray.
(c) inside Width: 75 or 100 mm as specified or indicated.
(d) outside Depth: As specified or indicated.
14
20
plates, blind ends, barrier strips, and connectors.
s
(g) covers: Flanged, solid or ventilated cover as specified.
rd
19 Warning Signs
da
(a) engraved nameplates shall be provided and installed along the route of the cable tray:
13-mm black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with the following
an
wording:- “WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR
SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!”
St
9.3 INSTALLATION
n
9.3.1 Installation
io
ct
1 Drilling, machining or cutting shall not be carried out after application of protective coat,
unless previously agreed by the Engineer. If cutting or drilling is necessary, edges shall be
tru
cleaned up and painted with zinc based paint before erection.

s
2 Installation of vertical runs of tray along the line of vertical expansion joints in structure of the
on
facility shall not be allowed.

C
3 Cables shall be fixed to the trays by means of PVC covered saddles or straps secured with
brass or cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers.
ar
4 20 % spare capacity shall be maintained once all cables have been installed on trays.
at
Double banking of cables shall not be permitted. space between adjacent cables shall be not
less than the radius of the bigger cable.
Q
5 Trays shall not be smaller than the minimum size stated on the Drawings or
specified later and shall be so sized; if not specified, the Contractor shall calculate the size of
the tray and submit to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall check the minimum
size as specified is large enough for his requirements and provide 20% spare capacity for
future use.
6 Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1 or other approved standard and
local regulations as approved by the Engineer.
7 Install fibreglass cable tray in accordance with NEMA FG 1 or other approved standard and
local regulations as approved by the Engineer.
8 Support trays in conjunction with supporting devices as described under Section "Supporting
Devices". Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other
points to maintain spacing between supports of 1200 mm maximum.
9 Use expansion connectors where required.
10 Provide firestopping under provisions of relevant Section to sustain ratings when passing
cable tray through fire-rated elements.
11 Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of the Earthing and Bonding Part of QCS.
14
(a) provide continuity between tray components.
(b) use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminium contact surfaces before assembly.
20
(c) provide specified cross section copper equipment grounding conductor through entire
length of tray; bond to each component.
s
(d) connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic connectors.
rd
12 Where specified, install warning signs at 1500 mm centres along cable tray, located to be
da
visible.
an
13 Where specified, install warning signs at 1500 mm centres along cable tray, located to be
visible.
St
14 Plastic tie-wraps of any description shall not be used for fixing cables to cable tray.
n
15 Saddle and cleat cables in position as they are installed along the route. Cables should be
io
neatly dressed and crossing of cables should be avoided by good detailed design of cable
ct
routing.
tru
16 All cable tray changes in direction or level shall be made via sets and adequately sized
angles to provide a support to the cables.
s
on
17 Single core cables of the same circuit shall be laid and mounted in purpose made trefoil
cleats.
C
9.3.2 Erection
ar
1 Cable trays arranged one above the other shall have spacing in relation to their width not
at
exceeding a ratio of 1:2 with a minimum distance of 150 mm.

Q
2 Supports
Install fixings and supports:
(a) at 2 meter centres or as specified in project docutmentation
(b) 150 mm from bends, tees, intersections and risers
(c) as close as practicable to joints
(d) each side of expansion joints.
3 Supports shall be selected from the following types, to suit the site conditions:
(a) M12 steel threaded drop rods fixed to ceilings complete with GI channels or brackets
(b) wall support brackets
(c) cantilever arms
(d) steel channels.
4 The cable trays shall be fixed in accordance with site conditions and manufacturer’s
recommendations.
14
5 Join cable tray and accessories with hardware per manufacturer’s recommendations.
20
6 Avoid mid-span joints.
7 The Contractor shall submit, as required, all calculations relating to tray work and tray
s
supports demonstrating acceptable mechanical stresses and sag.
rd
8 Cable trays installed on roofs shall be supported using GI brackets or concrete blocks.
da
Removable cable tray cover shall be fitted.
an
9 Access shall be available at all times to remove or replace cables with a minimum of 400 mm
between trays and physical obstructions, A/C ductwork etc.
St
9.3.3 Earthing
n
1 Cable trays and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout
io
their length.
ct
2 The entire cable tray system shall be bonded and 12 mm x 2.5 mm tinned copper links shall
tru
be bolted across each joint in the system by means of bronze nut and bolts, complete with
flat and spring washers.
s
on
3 All cable trays shall be provided with earth continuity copper tape along the whole route of
cable trays which shall be bonded to the main earthing system of the facility. The earth
C
continuity copper tape shall be fixed on cable tray by means of PVC covered saddles or by
other means approved by the Engineer.
ar
END OF PART
at
Q
QCS 2014 Section 23: Fire Fighting and Fire Alarm Systems Page 1
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
1.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Scope 2
1.1.2 General 2
1.2 REGULATIONS ............................................................................................. 2
1.2.1 Electrical Installations 2
1.2.2 Civil Defence Department 2
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 01: General
1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
1 This Section specifies the requirements for fire fighting systems, fire alarm systems and fire
protection systems.
1.1.2 General
14
1 The Clauses in this Specification and all other information provided in the Project
20
Documentation shall be considered to be a minimum requirement for performance and
quality.
s
2 All electrical and electronic equipment shall be designed, manufactured, erected and tested
rd
to the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards.
1.2 REGULATIONS
da
an
1.2.1 Electrical Installations
St
1 All electrical installations shall comply with all the relevant provisions of the regulations of the
n
following:
io
2 Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation

ct
ru
3 Institution of Electrical Engineers.

st
1.2.2 Civil Defence Department

on
1 The entire fire alarm system, fire protection system and fire fighting system including all
materials, components, equipment and accessories and their installation shall conform to the
C
requirements of Civil Defence Department of the Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar. Particular
attention should be made with respect to the time required by the Civil Defence Department
ar
for approval of schematic and wiring diagrams, layout diagrams etc.

at
2 The fire alarm system contractor shall be registered with, and on the approved list of, the Civil
Q
Defence Department.
END OF PART
Part 02: Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS ................................................. 2

2.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Scope 2
2.1.2 References 2
2.1.3 Contractor‟s Responsibility 2
2.2 CABLING ....................................................................................................... 3
14
2.2.1 General 3
20
2.2.2 Cables 3
2.2.3 Insulation 3
s
2.3 CONTROL PANEL......................................................................................... 4
rd
2.3.1 General 4
da
2.3.2 Fabrication 4
2.4 BATTERIES AND CHARGING EQUIPMENT ................................................ 6
an
2.4.1 General 6
2.4.2 Batteries 6
St
2.4.3 Battery Chargers 6

n
2.5 DETECTORS ................................................................................................. 6

io
2.5.1 General 6
ct
2.5.2 Optical Smoke Detectors 7

ru
2.5.3 Combined Smoke and Heat Detectors 7

2.5.4 Heat Detectors 7
st
2.5.5 Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors 7

on
2.5.6 Infra-Red Flame Detectors 8

C
2.5.7 Remote Indicating Lights 8

2.6 ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 9
ar
2.6.1 Manual Fire Alarm Call Points 9

at
2.6.2 Alarm Bell 9

Q
2.6.3 Electronic Sounders 9

2.6.4 Alarm Lights 10
2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This part specifies the requirements for the material, installation, testing and commissioning
of fire alarm and detection systems for use within buildings. It covers all the system
components for efficient operation.
14
2.1.2 References
20
1 The following standards and references are referred to in this Part:
BS 5445 ......................Components of automatic fire detection systems
s
BS 5839 ......................Fire detection and alarm systems for building
rd
BS 5306 ......................Fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises
da
BS 6360 ......................Conductors in insulated cables and cords
2.1.3 Contractor’s Responsibility

an
1 The Contractor shall arrange for an approved sub-contractor, to supply, install, wire and
St
commission the complete manual/automatic fire alarm system comprising manual fire alarm
call points, alarm bells and sounders, smoke and heat detectors optical smoke detectors,
n
combined smoke and heat detectors, duct mounted smoke detectors, flame detectors, alarm
heights (xenon beacon), remote indicating lights‟ and control panels as indicated on the
io
drawings. The system shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the
ct
recommendations of BS 5839.
ru

st
1 The Contractor shall provide and install the system in accordance with the Project
on
Documentation, applicable codes and manufacturer‟s recommendations.

C
2 Fire alarm panels, repeater panels, detection components, alarm components, cables, other
materials and their installation shall be approved by Civil Defence Department, Ministry of
ar
Interior, State of Qatar.

at
3 The fire alarm system sub-contractor shall be registered with, and on the approved
Q
contractors list of the Civil Defence Department.
4 The fire alarm and automatic detection systems shall meet the requirements and comply with
the relevant British Standards and shall meet the requirements of National Fire Protection
Association.
5 The system shall be suitable for 240 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz power supply and be complete with
standby sealed lead acid gas-recombination type long life batteries and charger to provide a
24 V DC for detection and alarm system.
6 Where the installation extends beyond more than one building the system in each building
shall be self-contained with visual and audible alarms. A common fire alarm and common
fault signal from each system shall be displayed on the control room repeater panel.
1 Items and equipment specified in this part shall be provided by experienced and approved
manufacturers and contractors as designated in the Project Documentation or to the written
approval of the Engineer. All equipment shall be UL listed and shall be supplied from the
same manufacturer who has a minimum of 10 years experience in the active manufacturing
of fire alarm systems.
2.2 CABLING
2.2.1 General
14
2 2
1 The wiring size shall be not less than 1.5 mm for call/detector circuits and 2.5 mm for bell
20
and battery circuits. The system shall be of the two wire type.
2 Cabling in fire alarm detection systems shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 6883
s
and BS 5839.
rd
da
3 In enclosed work areas and accommodation areas, zero halogen type cables shall be used.
1 Cables shall be able to withstand the IEC 331 gas flame test, enhanced to 3 hours at 950
an
o
C.
St
4 Conductors shall be circular tinned wires complying with the relevant provisions of BS 6360,
Class 2.
n
io
5 The Contractor shall provide and install the system in accordance with Project
Documentation, applicable standards and manufacturer‟s recommendations. All wiring shall
ct
be in a conduit system which is separate from other building wiring. Junction boxes shall be
sprayed red and levelled “Fire Alarm”.
ru
st
2.2.2 Cables
on
1 Fire alarm cables shall be rated for 600/1000 V grade unless otherwise stated in the Project
Documentation.
C
2.2.3 Insulation
ar
1 Fire alarm system cables shall have the following type of insulation as specified in the Project
at
Documentation:
Q
(a) pressure packed magnesium oxide insulation

(b) a composite insulation of mica impregnated glass tape beneath an extruded layer of
ethylene propylene rubber (EPR)
(c) silicone rubber insulation.
2.3 CONTROL PANEL
2.3.1 General
1 The main fire alarm control panel shall be located in the main control room and shall be wall
mounted. The fire alarm system shall protect all risk areas within the premises by giving
warning of a fire condition when detected by an automatic detector or by the manual
operation of a break glass call point. The risk area shall be divided into zones and each zone
shall have its own fire indicator on the control unit. The control and indicating equipment,
power supply unit and repeater panels shall comply with the electro-magnetic compatibility
(EMC) test requirements described in BS 5839 and the Electronic Engineers Commission
14
(EEC) requirements for the EMC directive 89/336/EU and the subsequent amendment
92/31/EU.
20
2 A diagram shall be provided adjacent to the control panel showing the general layout of the
building and the fire zones. The diagram shall be engraved with black paint filling on a white
s
rd
ebonite sheet of thickness not less than 2 mm. The letter height shall be 5 mm. The diagram
shall be coloured to show the extent of the area covered by each fire zone. A different colour
da
shall be used for each zone.
3
an
Upon receipt of an alarm, the control units shall perform the following actions:
(a) illuminate fire zone detector

St
(b) activate alarm warning devices within the building

n
(c) operate internal fire sounder

io
(d) operate ancillary devices as appropriate

ct
4 Alarm warning devices shall be de-activated by operation of the „Silence Alarms‟ switch. The
ru
internal sounder will continue to operate and the fire indicators remain lit until the key switch
controlled push switch is operated. This should only be achieved if the alarm initiating device
st
is no longer in alarm.
on
5 Reset of the controller, after the fire incident has been investigated, will be achieved by
operation of the „Reset‟ switch.
C
6 The fire alarm panel shall comply with BS 5839 Part 4 and requirements herein and be
ar
suitable for installation of fire detection and alarm systems to BS 5839 Part 1.
at
2.3.2 Fabrication
Q
1 The panel shall be of the multi-zone, modular type and capable of extension. The number of
zones shall be related to the requirements of the individual buildings and shall be agreed with
the Engineer. As a minimum, the fire alarm panel is to be wall mounted and suitable for 6
zones with all modules installed.
2 A lockable smoked glass door shall protect the face of the panel from access by
unauthorised personnel.
3 The enclosures of panels shall be fabricated from sheet steel, minimum thickness 1.5 mm
and shall be provided with a hinged lockable door. Protection to at least IP54 shall be
provided.
4 Control panels shall as a minimum requirement be equipped with the following:
(a) mains supply on indicator

(b) DC supply faulty indicator
(c) alarm indicator for each zone
(d) alarm accept push-button to acknowledge fire alarm signals, silence external audible
alarms and energise an internal bleeper unit or sounder
(e) reset push-button to restore monitoring systems to the inactive condition
(f) integral sealed battery and trickle battery charger where appropriate
14
(g) alarm transmission facilities via the telephone alarm system (this facility shall be
20
provided for future use if not utilised under this Contract)
(h) termination for incoming and outgoing wiring systems
s
(i) voltage free normally closed circuits which shall open in the event of an alarm to
rd
shutdown ventilation and air conditioning equipment in the immediate vicinity of the
alarm
da
(j) suitable fault indication (both visual and audible)
an
(k) interfacing facility to connect to Civil Defence Department system
(l) interfacing facility to control elevator system
St
(m) interfacing facility to control air handling units (AHU) of the HVAC systems
n
(n) interfacing facility to control fire doors/dampers.

io
5 Alarm indicators shall be of the light emitting diode type. Indicators shall be provided in pairs
ct
for each function.

ru
6 Control panels shall continuously monitor all alarm circuits, including wiring and control
devices. When a fault monitoring circuit has been energised it shall not rest until the fault
st
condition is cleared.
on
7 The control panel shall include the following:

C
(a) power supply normal light (green LED)

ar
(b) power supply fault light (amber LED)

at
(c) battery charger fault light (amber LED)

(d) general evacuate push button
Q
(e) silence alarm push button

(f) reset push button
(g) common fire light (twin red LED)
8 Repeat facilities shall be available for common fire and fault conditions. In addition, two
normally open/normally closed (NO/NC) volt free auxiliary contacts each rated at 2.5 amps
(inductive) for 24 V DC and 240 V AC shall be available
9 Cable entries are to be made from knock-outs located on top and bottom of the fire alarm
panel.
10 The removal of any detector(s) shall not effect the performance of other detectors in the
system.
11 The sensitivity of any of the sensors shall be adjustable from the control panel.
2.4 BATTERIES AND CHARGING EQUIPMENT
2.4.1 General
1 The system shall be of the 24 V DC, monitored, open circuit type utilising transformed and
rectified mains voltage supply under all normal circumstances but with stand-by provision in
14
the form of rechargeable sealed lead-acid batteries.
20
2.4.2 Batteries
1 Batteries shall have a capacity capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition
s
for at least 24 hours and in the alarm state for at least 30 minutes without recharging unless
rd
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
da
2.4.3 Battery Chargers an
1 Battery chargers are to be of sufficient capacity to power the system whilst recharging a fully
discharged battery. The battery shall be fully charged within 8 hours.
St
2.5 DETECTORS
n
io
2.5.1 General
ct
1 Detectors shall conform to the relevant provisions of BS 5445 and be fully compatible with
ru
the system offered and shall comprise a fixed base which can be used with other types of
detector head.
st
2 The base shall have fixed non-corroding terminals and contain no electronic components.
on
3 The head shall comprise the sensing elements which shall be housed in a corrosion proof
C
enclosure which can be fixed to the base by a bayonet or plug-in twist-lock mechanism.
ar
4 The sensing elements shall be exposed to the atmosphere through a protective cover which
will allow free movement of air but provide a high degree a resistance to dust and insects. A
at
small drain hole shall be included to allow any condensation to drain.

Q
5 Integral LED‟s shall be provided which will confirm operation and also permit detector testing.
6 The removal of a detector from its base shall cause a fault signal to be indicated.
7 It shall be clearly stated on the head of the detector the type of element it contains or the
principle on which the detector operates.
8 All detectors shall operate at a nominal voltage of 24 V DC and shall exhibit long-term
stability and reliability under the prevailing conditions at the installation location.
2.5.2 Optical Smoke Detectors
1 The sensors shall utilise the light scattering principle. They shall employ a photoelectric cell
and light source so arranged that only light scattered by smoke particles falls on the
photoelectric cell.
2 The Optical smoke detector shall respond to the visible smoke produced by smouldering or
burning materials.
3 The detector shall be fully operational after initiation of an alarm without any maintenance.
14
2.5.3 Combined Smoke and Heat Detectors
20
1 Combine smoke and heat detector shall comprise of two chambers. One chamber containing
the photoelectric smoke detector and the other chamber shall contain the heat detector.
s
2 The smoke detector shall utilise a horizontal optical bench construction which houses the
rd
detector and the optical sensor. The detector shall be arranged for radial detection of forward
scattered light.
da
o o o
3 The heat detector shall operate at fixed temperatures set at 57 C, 71 C or 99 C to trigger
an
the alarm. The setting shall depend on the application and as specified in the Project
Documentation.
St
4 The detector shall be fully operational after initiation of an alarm without any maintenance.
n
2.5.4 Heat Detectors

io
ct
1 The detector shall be a combined unit including both fixed temperature element and rate of
rise temperature element.
ru
2 Each heat detector shall incorporate a dual thermal element which responds to either an
st
excessively high temperature or a rate of rise of temperature which is unacceptable.

on
3 The heat detector shall operate on the principle that one element is exposed to the
C
atmosphere whilst the other is contained in such a way that it is not so readily affected by
increasing temperature. At a certain rate of rise of temperature or at a pre-set fixed
ar
temperature, the imbalance between the two elements shall cause the detector to trigger.
at
4 The fixed element of the heat detector shall be the type that can be reset for renewed
detection. The detector shall be fully operational after initiation of an alarm without any
Q
maintenance
2.5.5 Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors
1 Duct smoke detectors shall be provided in the main return air duct adjacent to each air
handling unit (AHU).
2 They shall be of the duct mounted type and initiate alarm in case of a developing fire. These
shall be provided with two sampling tubes. The first, an inlet tube for intake of air from the
duct to the sensor assembly. The second, an exhaust tube to allow air to leave the assembly.
3 Duct smoke detectors shall be interlocked with the air handling unit motor and volt free
contact shall also be provided to raise an alarm on the main fire alarm panel. Installation of
duct mounted detectors shall be approved by the Air Conditioning Section of QGEWC.
2.5.6 Infra-Red Flame Detectors
1 The infra-red flame detectors shall be capable of detecting infra-red radiation produced by
flaming fires involving carbonaceous materials.
2 The infra-red flame detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council
Board (LPCB) and manufactured under the appropriate category by the Underwriters
14
Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “UL” mark.
20
2
3 The infra-red flame shall be able to detect a fuel fire of 0.1 m area from a distance of 30 m
for the following fuels:
s
(a) petrol
rd
(b) N-heptane
da
(c) kerosene
(d) diesel oil
an
(e) alcohol
St
(f) ethylene glycol
4 The infra-red flame detectors shall employ narrow band optical filters that block unwanted
n
radiation such as that emanating from the sun or tungsten filament lamps.
io
ct
5 The infra-red flame detectors shall be designed to be sensitive to modulation of the received
radiation in a small range of frequencies corresponding to the flicker of flames.
ru
6 The infra-red flame detectors shall be designed to have high resistance to contamination and
st
corrosion.
on
7 The electronic assembly of the infra-red flame detectors shall be encapsulated in high
C
resistivity epoxy resin.

ar
8 The infra-red flame smoke detectors shall include radio frequency interference (RFI)
screening and feed through connecting components to minimise the effect of radiated and
at
conducted electrical interference.

Q
9 The infra-red flame detector shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to
provide indication of alarm actuation.
2.5.7 Remote Indicating Lights
1 All fire detectors shall be provided with remote indicator facility. The remote indicator output
shall diode gated for protection against electrical interference generated along the remote
indicator wiring and to enable one remote indicator to be connected to a number of detectors.
The remote indicator shall be polarity independent and operate at constant brightness over
the range of 8-28 V.
2.6 ALARMS
2.6.1 Manual Fire Alarm Call Points
1 Manual fire alarm call points shall consist of a die cast plastic enclosure with a die cast plastic
cover locked in position with screws. The enclosure shall house a micro switch. The micro
switch plunger shall bear onto an inset break glass panel fixed into the cover. The call point
shall be arranged for surface or flush mounting as appropriate. The cover and the enclosure
shall be self coloured red. The words „BREAK GLASS FOR ALARM‟ shall be printed on the
frangible glass. A testing facility using a special key shall be provided to enable the call point
to be tested without breaking the glass and the frangible glass shall be covered with plastic
14
film to prevent injury when the glass is broken. The mounting height shall be 1400 mm above
finished floor level.
20
2 The switching unit contacts shall be gold or silver plated or on alloyed metal which will not
corrode when left unattended in a highly polluted environment. Contact blades and other
s
rd
metal parts of the switching unit shall also be constructed form plated or alloyed metal which
will not corrode when left unattended. Contacts shall be normally open or normally closed to
da
suit the alarm monitoring system. The voltage and current rating of the contacts shall be
marked within the enclosure. The items shall have approval and listing by the LPCB (Loss
an
Prevention Council Board).
3 The call point shall be suitable for direct connection into the wiring system, and shall comply
St
with the relevant provisions of BS 5839: Part 2.

n
4 The call point shall be resistant to the ingress of dust and water to IP55.
io
2.6.2 Alarm Bell

ct
ru
1 Red underdome indoor fire alarm bells shall be installed in locations complying with the
relevant provisions of BS 5839 and in locations as indicated in the Project Documentation.
st
Each bell shall be suitable for 24 V DC operation and shall be polarised. The output shall not
be less than 90 dBA at 1 m distance. 150 mm diameter underdome bells shall be used
on
indoors and 225 mm diameter underdome bells shall be used outdoors. Outdoor underdome
bell shall be to IP44.
C
2 Alarm bells shall be of the gong type. They shall be continuously rated and mounted 2200
ar
mm above finished floor level.

at
3 Bells shall be painted red and marked with the words “FIRE ALARM”.
Q
4 Each bell or sounder circuit shall have a separate fuse at the fire alarm control unit.
2.6.3 Electronic Sounders
1 Electronic Sounders shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 5389 and BS 5306 and
shall be suitable for 24 V DC use. These sounders shall be coloured red and be polarised,
suppressed and suitable for line monitoring. Electronic sounders are to have a low current
consumption of approximately 30 mA but have a minimum output of 100 dBA at 1 m.
2 The electronic sounder shall be capable of providing at least two distinct and different sounds
and be suitable for “on site” adjustments.
2.6.4 Alarm Lights
1 Visual flashing alarm lights shall be located above doors and openings as indicated in the
Project Documentation. They shall be of the xenon flashing type and suitable for 24 V DC.
The wording “Fire” shall be prominently displayed when this alarm is activated.
END OF PART
14
20
s
rd
da
an
St
n
io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
Part 03: Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System
3 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ....................................... 2
3.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................ 2

3.1.1 Scope 2
3.1.2 References and Compliance 2
3.1.3 General 2
3.2 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTORS....................................................................... 4
3.2.1 General 4
14
3.2.2 Optical Smoke Detectors 6
3.2.3 High Performance Optical Smoke Detectors 7
20
3.2.4 Beam Smoke Detectors 7
3.2.5 Aspirating Smoke Detectors 8
3.2.6 Heat Detectors 8
s
3.2.7 Linear heat detectors 9
rd
3.2.8 Infra-Red flame detectors 9
da
3.3 ENGINEERING ................................................................................................. 10
3.3.1 System Management Facilities 10
an
3.3.2 Technical specification 11
3.3.3 Cabling 12
St
3.3.4 Addressable Manual Call Points 12

3.3.5 Manual Pull Stations 13
n
3.4 MODULES ........................................................................................................ 13

io
3.4.1 Remote Indicator Module 13

ct
3.4.2 Conventional Detector Interface Module 13

ru
3.4.3 Addressable Relay Output Module 13

3.4.4 Addressable Contact Monitoring Module 14
st
3.4.5 Addressable Sounder Driver Module 14

on
3.4.6 Sounder Booster Module 14

3.4.7 Addressable Power Supply Module 14
3.4.8 Smoke Damper Module 15
C
3.4.9 Plant Interface Module 15

ar
3.5 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 16

at
3.5.1 Fire monitoring 16

3.5.2 Fault and Warning Monitoring 17
Q
3.5.3 Supervision and Fault Reporting 18

3.5.4 Alarm Output Functions 18
3.5.5 Voice Evacuation Systems 19
3.6 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................ 20
3.6.1 General 20
3.6.2 Installation of Detectors 20
3.6.3 Installation of Control Devices 20
3.6.4 Installation of Fire Controller Equipment 21
3 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

3.1 INTRODUCTION
3.1.1 Scope
1 This part specifies the requirements for the material, installation, testing and commissioning
of services for analogue addressable fire alarm systems for use within buildings.
2 Fire alarm panels, repeater panels, detection components, alarm components, cables, other
materials and their installation shall be approved by Civil Defence Department.
14
3 The fire alarm system contractor shall be registered with, and on the approved contractors
list of, the Civil Defence Department.
20
3.1.2 References and Compliance
s
rd
BS 5839...................... Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings:
da
BS 5445 ..................... Components of automatic fire detection systems: detectors
BS 5501...................... Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres
an
BS 7671...................... IEE Wiring regulations
St
2 Where applicable, the fire detection and alarm system and its installation shall comply with
the relevant standards, regulations, rules and recommendations of the following:
n
British Standards BS
io
National Fire Prevention Association NFPA

Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. UL
ct
Loss Prevention Council Board LPCB

ru
3 Where applicable, the fire detection and alarm system and its installation shall comply with
the relevant standards, regulations, rules and recommendations of the Civil Defence
st
Department, Ministry of the Interior, State of Qatar.

on
3.1.3 General
C
1 The control and indicating equipment shall form the central processing unit of the system. It
shall receive and analyse signals from fire sensors, providing audible and visual information
to the user. It shall also initiate automatic alarm response sequences and providing the
ar
means by which the user interacts with the system. The housing enclosure shall be
constructed to IP22 unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Project Documentation.
at
Q
2 The control and indicating equipment shall be modular in construction to allow for future
extension of the system.
3 The control and indicating equipment shall be easily configurable so as to meet the exact
detection zone and output mapping requirements of the building.
4 The control and indicating equipment shall be microprocessor based and operate under
multitasking software program. Operating programs and configuration data must be
contained in easily up-datable non-volatile memory (EPROM).
5 The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate a real-time clock to enable events to
be referenced against item and date. This clock shall be accurate to within 1 minute per year
under normal operating conditions.
6 It shall be possible for an engineer to perform configuration updates on site by plugging a

portable personal computer in to the control and indicating equipment. Configuration data
shall be retained in an electronic (disk) format.
7 The company responsible for the installation shall operate an approved document control
system for the retention of configuration data.
8 The control and indicating equipment shall meet the requirements of BS 5839 Part 4 and
shall be approved, together with associated ancillary equipment, by the Loss Prevention
Council Board (LPCB).
9 The control and indicating equipment shall comprise separate processors, cross-monitoring
14
each other‟s correct operation, for the major functions of the system. In particular, different
processors must be used for the main control function, the detection input and alarm output
functions, and the display and control function.
20
10 No more than 200 addressable input or output points shall be controlled by a single
processor.
s
rd
11 To ensure continuous stability of the system, the setting of the address code in each
addressable device shall be by either a DIL switch in the detector base or small card
da
technology in addition to the adjustment provision in the central control panel.
12
an
In the case of plug-in analogue addressable detectors, the address code shall be set in the
base to prevent unauthorised and potentially dangerous reconfiguration of the system.
St
13 The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate a key-switch with three positions
“Normal”, “Trapped Normal” and “Enable” to prevent unauthorised use of the manual
n
controls.
io
14 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of operating with any of the following
ct
types of automatic detection equipment:

ru
(a) conventional detectors

(b) two-state addressable detectors
st
(c) analogue addressable detectors

on
15 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of operating with intrinsically safe
C
conventional detectors and intrinsically safe analogue addressable detectors suitable for
installation in hazardous areas.
ar
16 Addressable input and output devices shall be connected to addressable loops capable of
accepting up to 99 devices for cable lengths not exceeding 1 km.
at
Q
17 The control and indicating equipment shall have a minimum capacity for operating 1 fully
loaded addressable loop. This shall be extendible up to a maximum capacity of 10
addressable loops.
18 Provision shall be made for each addressable loop to be sub-divided into different
geographical zones. The section of wiring corresponding to each zone circuit shall be
protected from faults in other sections by line isolator modules. It shall be possible to allocate
all 99 addressable devices on the loop to a single zone.
19 In order to facilitate re-configuration and system extension, the allocation of addresses to

devices shall be independent of their physical arrangement on the loops.
20 The control and indicating equipment shall have provision to drive and monitor up to 20
repeater panels providing a repeat of the indications on the control and indicating equipment
display and up to a further three (3) repeater panels also incorporating the full set of system
manual user controls.
21 The control and indicating equipment shall have provision to house the main power supply
unit and the batteries required to power a systems of up to sixteen (16) zones.
22 The control and indicating equipment shall have provision for the connection of external
power supplies, either local to the control and indicating equipment or distributed throughout
the system, to supply power in excess of that stated as above.
14
23 The control and indicating equipment shall have provision for the connection of an 80
character line printer, either locally via a parallel port or remotely via a serial port. The fire
alarm control panel shall be provided with a built-in printer, if specified in the Project
20
Documentation.
24 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of interfacing directly to an electronic
s
radio paging system.
rd
25 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of being interfaced with the similar
da
control and indicating equipment without locking up or being affected by feedback signals.
26
an
It shall be possible to connect a VDU monitor to the control and indicating equipment to
display the information that would otherwise appear on the printer referred to in Clause 3.1.3-
24.
St
27 The control and indicating equipment shall have the facility to enable an on board
n
communications module to be added to allow local area networking to other controllers.

io

ct
1 Items and equipment specified in this part shall be provided by experienced and approved
ru
manufacturers and contractors as designated in the Project Documentation or to the written

approval of the Engineer.
st
on
3.2 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTORS
3.2.1 General
C
1 The system may include, but not be limited to, the following types of automatic detectors,
ar
manual call points and line modules for direct connection to the system addressable loops:
at
(a) ionisation smoke detectors

Q
(b) optical smoke detectors

(c) high performance optical smoke detectors
(d) infra-red flame detectors
(e) heat detectors
(f) manual call points for indoor use
(g) (manual call points for outdoor use
(h) ionisation smoke detectors for hazardous areas
(i) optical smoke detector for hazardous areas
(j) infra-red flame detectors for hazardous areas
(k) conventional detector interface module
(l) addressable relay interface module

(m) addressable contact monitoring module
(n) addressable sounder driver module
(o) addressable voice alarm module
(p) addressable power supply module
(q) line isolator module
(r) special detector interface module
2 The system may include, but not be limited to, both an analogue addressable and a two state
14
addressable version of the following type of automatic fire detectors:
(a) ionisation smoke detectors
20
(b) optical smoke detectors
(c) high performance optical smoke detectors
s
(d) infrared flame detectors
rd
(e) manual call points for indoor use
da
(f) manual call point for outdoor use
an
(g) sounder booster module
(h) remote indicator module
St
3 The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by means of plug-in detector
bases.
n
4 The addressable base must incorporate all the circuitry required for communicating detector
io
status to the control and indicating equipment, including the address setting switch.
ct
5 Addressable detectors and modules must be able to transmit to the control and indicating
ru
equipment a pre-set and unique identifier to detect unauthorised changes in the system
configuration.
st
6 It shall be possible to program and adjust the sensitivity of any of the detectors in the system
on
from the central panel in addition to the local setting facilities. Removal of any detector shall
not affect the performance of other detectors in the system
C
7 It shall be possible to program for automatic adjustment of sensitivity settings of the detectors
ar
on time-zone features, if required, for different hours of the day, for different days of the
week, or for different months of the year.
at
8 The Contractor shall provide standard accessories for installing detectors in air ducts. This
Q
equipment shall be designed to accommodate the manufacturer‟s standard smoke detectors

and bases, both conventional and addressable. All such detectors to be installed in the air
duct system shall be approved by the Air Conditioning Section of QGEWC, Qatar.
9 It must be possible to connect and mix automatic detectors, manual call points and
addressable modules within the same zone sub-division of an addressable loop.
10 All types of automatic detectors, the plug-in bases and the line isolator shall be intrinsically
safe
11 The addressable contact monitoring module for connection of „simple apparatus‟ such as
conventional manual call points shall be intrinsically safe.
12 The intrinsically safe devices shall be designed to comply with the relevant provisions of BS
5501: Pt 7 and be certified by BASEEFA (British Approval Service for Electrical Equipment in
Flammable Atmosphere) to EEx i IIC T5.
13 It shall be possible to connect several circuits of intrinsically safe addressable devices to a

standard addressable loop via standard BASEEFA approved safety barriers from the loop as
spurs.
14 All equipment connected to the system addressable loops, either directly or via interfaces,
shall be proofed against electrical noise, high frequency pulses and electromagnetic
influences from other equipment.
14
15 Both the conventional and addressable detector base shall be capable of driving a separate
alarm LED indicator module.
20
3.2.2 Optical Smoke Detectors
s
1 The optical smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting visible combustion gases
emanating from fires.
rd
2 The optical smoke detectors shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 5445: Pt.7 (EN
da
54: Pt.7). an
3 The optical smoke detector shall have a sensitivity sufficient to be classified as „A‟ in BS
5445: Pt.9 (EN 54: Pt.9) test fires for TF2 and TF3.
St
4 The optical smoke detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council
Board (LPCB).
n
io
5 The optical smoke detectors shall employ the forward light scatter principle, using optical
components operating at a wavelength of approximately 4.35 nm.
ct
6 The design of the optical smoke detector sensing chamber shall be optimised to minimise the
ru
effect of dust deposits during a long period of operation.

st
7 The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate screens designed to prevent insects from
on
entering the sensing chamber.
8 The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate a fin structure designed to totally eliminate the
C
effect of very small insects such as thunder flies.

ar
9 The optical smoke detectors shall be designed to have high resistance to contamination and
corrosion.
at
10 The optical smoke detectors shall include RF1 screening and feed through connecting
Q
components to minimise the effect of radiated and conducted electrical interference.
11 The system may include, but not be limited to, the following versions of optical smoke
detectors as required to meet different applications:
(a) analogue addressable

(b) analogue addressable intrinsically safe
(c) two state addressable normal sensitivity
(d) conventional high sensitivity
(e) conventional normal sensitivity
(f) conventional normal sensitivity delayed response
(g) conventional low sensitivity

(h) conventional normal sensitivity intrinsically safe
12 The optical smoke detector shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to
3.2.3 High Performance Optical Smoke Detectors
1 In addition to the above :
2 The high performance optical smoke detectors shall have a sensitivity sufficient to be
classified as „B‟ or better in accordance with BS 5445: Part 9 (EN 54: Part 9) test fires TF2 to
14
TF5 inclusive and as „C‟ in test fire TF1.
20
3 The high performance optical detectors shall monitor and use rapid changes in temperature
to increase the normal sensitivity of the light scatter optical sensor to obtain an improved
response to fast burning fires.
s
rd
4 The high performance optical detectors shall not generate an alarm condition from a rate of
rise of temperature or absolute temperature alone.
da
3.2.4 Beam Smoke Detectors an
1 The beam smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting the presence of smoke in large
open type interiors.
St
2 The beam smoke detectors shall project a modulated infrared light beam from a transmitter
unit to a receiver unit. The received signal shall be analysed and, in the event of smoke being
n
present for a predetermined period an alarm condition be activated.

io
3 The detectors shall be capable of providing cover in open areas up to 100 m in length and up
ct
2
to 14 m wide, giving an effective protection area of up to 1400 m .
ru
4 The fire alarm output of the detectors shall be activated in the event of smoke reducing the
st
signal strength between 40% and 90% for a period of approximately 5 seconds.
on
5 In the event of a power failure at the transmitter unit or if the transmitted signal is reduced by
more than 90% for a period in excess of 1 second, then a fault alarm condition shall be
indicated. This condition shall inhibit the fire alarm until the signal is restored.
C
6 The receiver unit of the detectors shall be capable of performing an automatic reset,
ar
approximately 5 seconds after a fault is indicated, if the fault is no longer present.

at
7 The detectors shall include Automatic Gain Control (AGC) circuitry capable of providing
compensation for long-term degradation of signal strength caused by component ageing or
Q
build-up of dirt on the optical surfaces of the transmitter and receiver unit lenses.
8 The beam smoke detectors shall comply with the relevant provisions of either BS 5445: Part
5 (EN 54: Part 5) for detectors suitable for use in normal environments or BS 5445: Part 8
(EN 54: Part 8) for detectors designed for use in high ambient temperatures.
9 The beam smoke detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Presentation Council
Board (LPCB).
10 The receiver unit of the detectors shall incorporate an alarm/fault lamp, clearly visible from
the outside, to provide indication of both alarm and fault conditions.
3.2.5 Aspirating Smoke Detectors
1 The aspirating smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting the presence of smoke
particles in air samples drawn from several different locations.
2 The aspirating smoke detectors shall provide a continuous analogue profile of ambient air
conditions.
3 The detectors shall be capable of responding to a developing fire situation with multiple
staged alarms.
4 The fire alarm output of the detectors shall be programmable to allow sufficient time for
14
action to be taken, from a detailed investigation of the cause of the alarm to a full scale
evacuation.
20
5 The design of the detectors shall be such that they can be integrated with a fire alarm system
and guard against specific pieces of equipment, such as computers, equipment racks, power
s
boards and telecommunications switching racks, as well as entire rooms or floors.
rd
6 The detectors shall include a facility to allow sensitivity threshold adjustments to suit the
needs of particular environments.
da
2,
7 Each detector system shall be capable of monitoring an area up to 2,000 m using easy to
an
install PVC conduit.
St
(EN 54: Part 8) for detectors designed for use in high ambient temperatures.
n
io
9 The aspirating smoke detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council
Board.
ct
10 The detectors shall incorporate an LED indicator, clearly visible from the outside, to provide
ru
indication of alarm or fault condition.

st
3.2.6 Heat Detectors

on
1 The heat detectors shall be capable of detecting both rapid rise in temperature and fixed
absolute temperatures.
C
ar
(EN54: Part 8) for detectors designed for use in high ambient temperatures.
at
3 The heat detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council Board
Q
(LPCB).
4 The heat detector shall employ two heat sensing elements with different thermal
characteristics to provide a rate of rise dependent response.
5 The temperature sensing elements and circuitry of the heat detectors shall be coated with
epoxy resin to provide environmental protection.
6 The heat detectors shall include RF1 screening and feed through connecting components to
minimise the effect of radiated and conducted electrical interference.
7 The system may include, but not be limited to, the following versions of the heat detector as
required to meet different applications:
(a) analogue addressable

(b) analogue addressable intrinsically safe
(c) two state addressable grade 1
(d) conventional grade 1
(e) conventional grade 1 intrinsically safe
(f) conventional grade 3
(g) conventional grade 3 intrinsically safe
(h) conventional range 2 (98oC)
14
(i) conventional range 2 intrinsically safe
(j) conventional static 60oC (grade 2)
20
(k) conventional static 90oC
8 The heat detectors shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to provide
s
indication of alarm actuation.
rd
3.2.7 Linear heat detectors
da
1 The linear heat detectors shall be capable of detecting fire (or overheat) conditions in
confined or polluted areas.
an
2 The sensor capable of the linear heat detectors shall be unaffected by dust, moisture or
St
vibration and require little maintenance.

n
3 The detectors shall have a calibration switch mounted internally to set the alarm sensitivity
threshold.
io
ct
4 The detectors shall generate an alarm condition if the pre-determined alarm threshold is
exceeded.
ru
5 The detectors shall initiate a fault condition if the sensor cable has an open or short circuit
st
condition present.
on
6 The detectors, upon detecting a cable open or short circuit or fault, shall be capable of
signalling the condition to the main fire controller.
C
7 The linear heat detectors shall meet the requirements of either BS 5445: Part 5 (EN 54: Part
ar
5) for detectors suitable for normal environment or BS 5445: Part 8 (EN 54: Part 8) for
detectors designed for high ambient temperatures.
at
8 The linear heat detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council Board
Q
(LPCB).
9 The detectors shall be suitable for use in hazardous areas and have mechanical protection
for cables in areas where damage may occur.
10 The detectors shall incorporate red (fire) LED and yellow (fault) LED, clearly visible from the
outside, to provide indication of alarm and fault condition.
3.2.8 Infra-Red flame detectors
1 The infra-red flame detectors shall be capable of detecting infra-red radiation produced by
flaming fires involving carbonaceous materials.
2 The infra-red flame detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council
Board (LPCB) and manufactured under the appropriate category by the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “UL.” label.
2
3 The infra-red flame shall be able to detect a fuel fire of 0.1 m area from a distance of 30 m
for the following fuels:
(a) petrol
(b) N-heptane
(c) kerosene
(d) diesel Oil
14
(e) alcohol
20
(f) ethylene glycol
4 The infra-red flame detectors shall employ narrow band optical filters that block unwanted
radiation such as that emanating from the sun or tungsten filament lamps.
s
rd
5 The infra-red flame detectors shall be designed to be sensitive to modulation of the received
radiation in a small range of frequencies corresponding to the flicker of flames.
da
6 The infra-red flame detectors shall be designed to have high resistance to contamination and
an
corrosion.
St
7 The electronic assembly of the infra-red flame detectors shall be encapsulated in high
resistivity epoxy resin.
n
8 The infra-red flame smoke detectors shall include RFI screening and feed through
io
connecting components to minimise the effect of radiated and conducted electrical

interference.
ct
9 The system may include, but not be limited to, the following version of infra-red flame
ru
detectors to meet different applications:

st
(a) analogue addressable -intrinsically safe

(b) conventional -intrinsically safe
on
10 The intrinsically safe versions of the infra-red flame detectors shall be suitable for use with
safe area circuits.
C
11 The infra-red flame detector shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to
ar

at
3.3 ENGINEERING
Q
3.3.1 System Management Facilities
1 The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate the following system management
facilities:
(a) isolate/reconnect a particular addressable point

(b) isolate/reconnect a particular detector zone
(c) isolate/re-connect a particular sounder zone
(d) walk test of a selected zone to verify detectors and sounders
(e) view the number of alarms since power up
(f) view the number of software initialisation since power up
(g) view common alarm status

(h) view common fault status
(i) view common disabled status
(j) view zonal alarm status
(k) view zonal fault status
(l) view zonal isolated status
(m) view point address status
(n) print event log
14
(o) print points isolated
(p) print points in detector condition monitoring fault
20
(q) print point statuses
2 Access to the facilities described in clause above shall be restricted to authorised personnel
s
using coded password.
rd
3 The control and indicating equipment shall have an event log capable of storing up to the last
da
500 events that have occurred. It shall be possible to view the content of the log via an
alphanumeric display. Events shall be displayed in chronological order in any of the following
an
three options:
(a) newest event first

St
(b) oldest event first

(c) highest priority event first
n
io
4 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of isolating a group of selected
detectors in areas of the building where maintenance work is carried out via a suitable timer
ct
unit. The detectors shall be automatically reinstated after a predetermined time.

ru
5 The control and indicating equipment shall have a facility to enable the user to easily change
st
the time and date settings of the system real-time clock.

on
3.3.2 Technical specification
1 The enclosure used to house the control and indicating equipment, standard system power
C
supply and standard repeater panel shall not exceed the following overall dimensions unless
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation:
ar
Height: 400 mm
at
Width: 550 mm
Depth: 200 mm
Q
2 The control and indicating equipment shall be light in weight. The complete unit including
standard power supply unit and standard repeater unit shall not exceed 7 kg excluding the
weight of batteries unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
3 The control and indicating equipment shall operate on a mains power supply rated for 240 V
AC 10% @ 50Hz 4%
4 The control and indicating equipment, standard power supply unit and standard repeater unit
shall comply with the following environmental conditions unless otherwise stated elsewhere in
the Project Documentation:
(a) operating temperature range 0o C to 55oC

(b) storage temperature 0o C to 65oC
(c) relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing)

(d) IEC protection category IP22 minimum
5 The control and indicating equipment, standard power supply unit and standard repeater unit
shall comply with the EMC test requirements described in BS 5839 Pt.4 and the EEC
requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EU and subsequent amendment 92/31/EU.
6 All equipment, including the fire alarm components and the control panel, shall be UL listed
and shall be supplied from the same manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have a minimum
of 10 (ten) years active experience in the manufacturing of fire alarm systems.
3.3.3 Cabling
14
1 Unless specified elsewhere in the Project Documentation, the cabling and wiring used in the
20
fire alarm system shall comply with the provisions this Clause.
2 The cabling and wiring to be used in the system shall be fire resistant and approved to British
s
Standard and LPCB specifications for use in fire detection and alarm systems.
rd
3 Wiring used for driving devices requiring high currents (e.g. bells) shall limit the voltage drop
da
to less than 10% of the nominal operating voltage.
4 Cables used for the transmission of system data and alarm signals shall be in accordance
an
with the types recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
St
5 The ends of all cables shall be sealed by means of proprietary seals and associated glands.
No heat shall be applied to any seal or termination. Cable tails shall be insulated by means
of gland PVC sleeving anchored and sealed into the seal.
n
io
6 Where protection of the cable glands is required or terminations are on display, the glands
shall be enclosed in red coloured shrouds of the appropriate British Standard colour.
ct
ru
7 All cables to brick/concrete shall be securely fixed by means of copper saddles sheathed with
red PVC. These saddles shall be provided near bends and on strength runs at intervals no
st
greater than recommended in the British Standards or by the manufacturer.

on
8 Where multiple cables are to be attached to a wall or soffit, copper saddles shall enclose all
cables and shall be secured by means of suitable masonry plugs and two round head plated
wood screws.
C
9 Where multiple cables are to be attached to the top of horizontal trays they shall be neatly run
ar
and securely fixed at suitable intervals. Copper or plastic cable fixings shall be used.
at
3.3.4 Addressable Manual Call Points

Q
1 The addressable manual call points shall monitor and signal to the control and indicating
equipment the status of a switch operated by a „break glass‟ assembly.
2 The addressable call points shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 5839: Part 2.
3 The addressable call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb pressure and
not require a hammer.
4 The addressable call points shall be capable of being mounted in weather-proof affording
protection to IP65.
5 The addressable call points shall incorporate a mechanism to interrupt the normal
addressable loop scan to provide an alarm response within less than 1 second.
6 The addressable call points shall be field programmable to trigger either an alert or an
evacuate response from the control and indicating equipment.
7 The addressable call points shall be capable of being tested using a special „key‟ without the
need for shattering the glass.
8 The addressable call points shall provide an integral red LED to indicate activation.
3.3.5 Manual Pull Stations
1 The manual fire alarm pull stations shall monitor and signal to the control and indicating
equipment the status of a switch operated by manual pulling down of a handle or lever.
14
2 The stations shall be capable of operating by hand pull and does not require special
20
instrument.
3 The stations shall be capable of being mounted in weather-proof affording protection to IP65.
s
rd
4 The pull station shall incorporate a mechanism to interrupt the normal addressable loop scan
to provide an alarm response within less than 1 second.
da
5 The points shall be capable of being tested using a special „key‟ without actually initiating the
alarm signal.
an
6 A glass cover shall be provided to deter the accidental or malicious activation of the manual
St
call stations. After actuation, the cover can be replaced, and the system reset by use of a key
only.
n
3.4 MODULES
io
3.4.1 Remote Indicator Module

ct
ru
1 The remote indicator module shall provide a remote indication for any conventional or
analogue addressable detector that may be located in an enclosed or locked compartment.
st
2 The remote indicator module shall be driven directly from its associated local detector.
on
3 The connection to the remote indicator module shall be monitored for open and short-circuit.
C
3.4.2 Conventional Detector Interface Module

ar
1 The conventional detector interface module shall monitor and signal to the control and
indicating equipment the status of up to 20 conventional detectors and manual call points.
at
Q
2 The conventional detector interface module shall be capable of monitoring automatic detector
and manual call points from existing conventional systems.
3 The conventional detector interface module shall operate from a monitored 24 V AC power
supply.
4 The conventional detector interface module shall operate integral red LED indication when in
the alarm state.
3.4.3 Addressable Relay Output Module
1 The addressable relay output module shall provide a volt free changeover relay contact
operated by command from the control and indicating equipment.
2 The contacts of the addressable relay output module shall be rated for minimum of 1 Amp at
24 V DC.
3 The addressable relay output module shall monitor the relay coil open-circuit and transmit the
fault signal to the control and indicating equipment.
4 The addressable relay output module shall derive its operating power from the addressable
loop.
5 The addressable relay output module shall provide a red LED indication that the relay has
operated.
14
3.4.4 Addressable Contact Monitoring Module
20
1 The addressable contact monitoring module shall provide monitoring of the status of
switched input signals from either normally open or normally closed contacts.
s
2 The addressable contact monitoring module shall provide a red LED indication when the
contact has operated.
rd
da
3 The addressable contact monitor module shall derive its power directly from the addressable
loop. an
3.4.5 Addressable Sounder Driver Module
St
1 The addressable sounder driver module shall be capable of monitoring and driving a circuit of
alarm sounders.
n
2 The output of the addressable sounder driver module shall be rated at 500 mA.
io
3 The addressable sounder driver module shall be capable of operating the sounders in a
ct
pulsing or continuous mode as determined by the control and indicating equipment.

ru
4 The addressable sounder driver module shall provide the facility to monitor for failure of the
power supply for the sounders and transmit the necessary fault signal to the control and
st
indicating equipment.
on
5 The addressable sounder driver module shall provide a red LED indication that the sounder
circuit has been actuated.
C
3.4.6 Sounder Booster Module

ar
1 The sounder booster module shall be capable of monitoring and driving a heavy duty circuit
at
of sounders up to 15 Amps.
Q
2 The sounder booster module shall be capable of interfacing either to the common sounder
outputs of the control and indicating equipment or to the output of the addressable sounder
driver module.
3 The sounder booster module shall be designed to maintain the monitoring of the sounder
circuit and transmit a fault signal either via the addressable sounder driver module or directly
to the control and indicating equipment.
3.4.7 Addressable Power Supply Module
1 The addressable power supply module shall be capable of supplying up to 24 V DC. 3 Amps
of power to local sounder circuits and ancillary equipment.
2 The addressable power supply module shall derive its power from the 240 V AC mains
supply.
3 The addressable power supply module shall be able to contain and maintain in a charged
state a 24 V battery set of up to 15 Ah capacity.
4 The addressable module shall monitor the mains power supply and the battery and transmit a
fault signal as appropriate to the control and indicating equipment.
3.4.8 Smoke Damper Module
1 The smoke damper module shall provide the inputs and outputs required to monitor and
14
control a smoke damper.
20
2 The smoke damper module shall be fully addressable and provide one volt-free changeover
relay contact rated for 240 V AC @ 5 Amps.
s
3 A separate 24V DC supply shall be provided to operate the changeover relay.
rd
4 The changeover relay contact of the smoke damper module shall be monitored and
da
controlled by commands signalled from the fire alarm system control panel via the
addressable loop. an
5 The smoke damper module shall be capable of monitoring up to two external relay contacts.
St
6 The module shall derive its power directly from the addressable loop.
7 The outputs of the smoke damper module shall be capable of being controlled using a
n
keypad via the addressable loop.

io
8 The keypad shall be capable of forcing the relay outputs LOW, HIGH or AUTO. It shall also
ct
be capable of reading the status of the relay outputs.

ru
9 The smoke damper module shall have a red LED, clearly visible on the fascia panel of the
unit, to provide an indication of relay operation.
st
on
3.4.9 Plant Interface Module
1 The plant interface module shall provide inputs and outputs required to monitor and control
C
any plant and machinery.

ar
2 The plant interface module shall be fully addressable and provide multiple volt-free DPDT
changeover relay contacts rated for 240 V AC @ 5 Amps.
at
3 A separate 24 V dc supply shall be provided to operate the changeover relays.

Q
4 The changeover relay contacts of the plant interface module shall be monitored and
controlled by commands signalled from the fire alarm system control panel via the
addressable loop.
5 The module shall be capable of monitoring multiple external relay contacts.
6 The plant interface module shall derive its power directly from the addressable loop
7 The plant interface module shall be capable of being link-configured to provide 2 inputs/2
outputs, 4 inputs/4 outputs or 6 inputs/6 outputs as required and specified in the Project
Documentation.
8 The plant interface module shall have six consecutive addresses provided for configuration.
3.5 MONITORING
3.5.1 Fire monitoring
1 The control and indicating equipment shall monitor the status of all devices on the
addressable loops for fire, short-circuit fault, open-circuit fault, incorrect addressing,
unauthorised device removal or exchange, pre-alarm condition and contaminated detector
condition.
2 The control and indicating equipment shall monitor the status of all internal connection and
14
interfaces, including charger, battery and remote signalling functions.
20
3 The control and indicating equipment shall provide the following discrete visual indications:
(a) power on green LED indicator
s
(b) fire alarm dual red LED indicator
rd
(c) fault yellow LED indicator
da
(d) disabled/isolated yellow LED indicator
(e) fire zones red LED indicator per zone
an
4 In addition to the indications provided in Clause 3.5.1-3, the control and indicating equipment
shall also have an integral LCD alphanumeric back-lit display unit. In order that an easy
St
identification of different information is provided, the LCD display shall be arranged in the
following categories:
n
(a) event type

io
(b) zone message

ct
(c) addressable point message

ru
(d) circuit identifier point number/zone number of events in the system

st
5 The control and indicating equipment shall provide a set of push button controls to enable an
authorised operator to perform the following:
on
(a) evacuate - actuates ALL alarm sounders in the system

C
(b) silence - stop all currently actuated alarm sounders

(c) reset - return and control and indicating equipment to quiescent condition
ar
6 The control and indicating equipment shall provide a facility to manually check all the discrete
at
LED indicators. This shall be clearly marked LAMP TEST and be accessible at all time.
Q
7 The control and indicating equipment shall provide a simple to operate keypad to enable the
user to access the various built-in functions, and interact with the information displayed on
the LCD. For security reasons, the control and indicating equipment shall provide a customer
configurable password code facility in accordance with the relevant provisions of BS 5839 for
the following levels of access:
(a) user operator Access Level 3

(b) user engineer Access Level 1
(c) user manager Access Level 2
(d) civil defence engineer Access Level 3
(e) alarm company engineer Access Level 3
8 The control and indicating equipment shall provide facilities to drive visual indication LED
mimic displays for each of the following zonal status:
(a) alarm
(b) fault
(c) isolated
9 The control and indicating equipment shall provide facilities for signalling the following system
conditions to a remote (Central Station) and/or an on-site monitoring centre:
(a) alarm
14
(b) pre-alarm
(c) fault
20
(d) zone isolated
10 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring and controlling remote
s
site devices, such as door release unit and relays for the control of plants and dampers,
rd
directly from the addressable loops.
da
11 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring fire doors such that, in
the event of a fire alarm condition, an event is generated to warn of the failure of fire door to
close.
an
3.5.2 Fault and Warning Monitoring
St
1 The control and indicating equipment shall interrogate each addressable device at least once
every 5 seconds.
n
io
2 The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate fire decision algorithms specifically
adapted to the response characteristics of the analogue addressable detectors employed.
ct
ru
3 The algorithms shall perform a trend analysis of the signal received from the analogue
addressable detectors in order that non-fire events may be differentiated.
st
4 The control and indicating equipment shall be designed so that, each type of analogue
on
addressable detector, the overall responses time, including that for the sensor, the signal
transmission system and the fire decision algorithm, meets the requirement of the relevant
C
provisions of BS 5445 (EN 54).
5 The response time of the control and indicating equipment to two-state addressable
ar
detectors and conventional detectors shall not exceed 10 seconds.

at
6 The control and indicating equipment shall have a special scanning sequence so that
Q
designated manual call points provide alarm indication and warning within 1 second of
operation.
7 The control and indicating equipment shall have a facility to automatically adjust the
sensitivity of analogue detectors to a higher level for periods of time when the building is
unoccupied.
8 The control and indicating equipment shall have, as an optional software enhancement, the
ability to automatically adjust the alarm and pre-alarm threshold levels to compensate for
changes in detector sensitivity due to contamination over a period of time.
9 The control and indicating equipment shall have, as an optional software enhancement, the
ability to provide automatic warning that a detector has reached a level of contamination
which requires that it be replaced or serviced.
3.5.3 Supervision and Fault Reporting
1 The control and indicating equipment shall monitor all critical system components and
interconnections (internal and external). In the event of a failure occurring which prevents
correct operation of the alarm functions, a FAULT indicator will light and message shall be
given on the alphanumeric display within 100 seconds of occurrence.
2 The following faults shall be reported.
(a) loop short circuit

(b) loop open circuit
14
(c) un-configured device
(d) addressable device failure
20
(e) device not responding
(f) incorrectly configured device
s
(g) detector condition monitoring warning
rd
(h) conventional call point wiring open circuit
da
(i) conventional call point wiring short circuit
(j) conventional detector circuit wiring fault
an
(k) repeater/repeater LCD, remote printer failure
St
(l) power supply unit (PSU) fault
(m) charger fault
n
(n) battery fault

io
(o) battery critical

ct
(p) mains failure

ru
(q) auxiliary power supply unit (PSU) failure

st
(r) relay output stuck

(s) signalling fault
on
(t) sounder wiring open circuit

C
(u) sounder wiring short circuit

ar
3 To help rapid fault finding and repair, the control and indicating equipment shall provide text
messages to indicate the precise location of where a fault has occurred in the system.
at
4 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring and indicating the status
Q
of auxiliary units, such as a remote signalling transmitter. This shall be achieved using a
suitable addressable contact monitor module.
5 The control and indicating equipment shall have the facility to delay the generation of an
event to confirm operation of the monitored device. This shall be either 6 seconds for normal
non-fluctuating contacts, or 40 seconds for fluctuating contacts, e.g. sprinkler flow valve
switches.
3.5.4 Alarm Output Functions
1 The control and indicating equipment shall provide the necessary outputs to separately
operate two monitored circuits of common system sounders. Each output shall be capable of
driving a sounder load of up to 1 Amp.
2 The control and indicating equipment shall be able to monitor and control the integrity of
zonal sounder circuits via a suitable addressable module.
(a) The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of providing a two
stage alarm sounder facility that can be programmed, either on a zonal
basis or common system basis, to meet the requirements of the fire
authority. Three possible sound output signals shall be available as
follows:
(b) alert pulsed tone (1 second ON, 1 second OFF)
(c) evacuate continuous tone
(d) user definable tone for specialised events (e.g. boom alert).
14
3 The control and indicating equipment shall have the facility to change, on a per sounder zone
basis, the sound output dependent upon whether the source of alarm is:
20
(a) an automatic detector (e.g. smoke or heat)
s
(b) a manual call point
rd
(c) an evacuate command
da
(d) a non-fire event (e.g. plant alarm)
4 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of generating customer definable time
an
delay sequences to upgrade alarm sounder responses, without the need for external timers,
as follows:
St
(a) silent to alert

(b) alert to evacuate
n
(c) silent to user defined tone

io
5 The control and indicating equipment shall have the ability to delay the transmission to the
ct
Civil Defence Department of fire alarm signals from automatic detectors in pre-determined
ru
detection zones. The time delay shall be configurable up to a maximum time of 2 minutes.
st
6 The control and indicating equipment shall provide the facility to automatically inhibit the
delay function described in clause above when the building is unoccupied.
on
3.5.5 Voice Evacuation Systems

C
1 The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of operating addressable voice alarm
units and monitoring the integrity of the wiring connection to individual loudspeakers.
ar
2 The system shall include power supply unit, amplifier, tone generator, synthesisers, message
at
player, loudspeakers, cable and wiring system and other accessories required for
Q
independent operation.
3 The control and indicating equipment shall provide, additionally when specified in the Project
Documentation, an interface to drive the public address system of the building in accordance
with the relevant provisions of BS 5839: Pt.1. The system shall be arranged such that, in the
event of a failure of the public address system, back-up sounders are available to alert or
evacuate the relevant areas of the protected premises.
4 The fire alarm signal shall automatically activate the voice evacuation system and shall
broadcast a suitable evacuation call (either pre-recorded or synthesised) over the
loudspeaker system, independent of operator‟s action. At least one fire microphone should
normally be sited near to the control panel for manual call for evacuation. To avoid confusion,
the system should be so designed that both automatic call and operators call can not be
broadcast simultaneously.
3.6 INSTALLATION
3.6.1 General
1 Correct installation, combined with the use of high quality equipment, components and
cabling ensures that the fire detection and alarm system shall operate as designed and
provide many years of trouble free service.
2 The Contractor shall install the alarm system in accordance with the manufacturer‟s
documented installation instructions.
3 The Contractor shall provide all relevant installation documentation required for each
14
component of the system.
20
4 Installation of the system shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of BS 5839: Part
1 and BS 7671.
s
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct sitting of all equipment and components
rd
of the system in accordance with the Project Documentation.
da
6 All cabling and wiring shall be tested before they are connected to the fire controller and its
associated devices. The Contractor shall note that if the tests are carried out after the cables
and wires have been connected to the controller and its devices, components within the
an
controller and devices will be damaged by high voltages used during testing.
St
7 At detector and sounder locations, cables shall be terminated in approved black
enamelled/galvanized junction boxes. All other devices forming part of the system shall utilise
dedicated/custom back boxes.
n
io
3.6.2 Installation of Detectors

ct
1 All detectors (and bases) shall be installed in accordance with the relevant provisions of BS
ru
5839: Part 1, BS 7671 and the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer.
st
2 The number and type of detectors required to be installed shall be as detailed on the Project
Drawing. The location of each type of detector installed shall generally be as shown on the
on
Project Drawings but their final position shall be determined on site.
3 All detector bases shall be securely fixed to boxes and allow for easy fitting and removal of
C
detectors.
ar
4 Cable and wire entries to detector bases shall be fitted with grommets to prevent possible
damage to the insulation.
at
5 Cable and wire strain relief clamps shall be provided at all entries to detector bases.
Q
6 Cable entries of detector bases used in environments with abnormal atmospheric or

operating conditions shall be appropriately sealed to prevent ingress of dust, water moisture
or other such contaminants.
3.6.3 Installation of Control Devices
1 All control devices (e.g. call points, sounders, interface modules, etc.) shall be installed in
accordance with the relevant provisions of BS 5839: Part, BS 7671 and the installation
instructions provided by the manufacturer.
2 The location of control devices and associated modules to be installed shall generally be as
shown on the Project Drawings but their final position shall be determined on site.
3 The type of control device installed in each particular location shall be the type specified in
the Project Documents.
4 All control devices and associated modules shall be securely fixed, and if required, marked
with appropriate notices, warnings, signs as applicable.
5 Cable and wire entries to all control devices and associated modules shall be fitted with
grommets or glands so as to prevent possible damage to the insulation.
6 Cable entries of control devices and associated modules used in environments with
abnormal atmospheric or operating conditions shall be appropriately sealed to prevent
ingress of dust, water, moisture or other such contaminants.
14
3.6.4 Installation of Fire Controller Equipment
20
1 The fire controller equipment shall be installed in accordance with the relevant provisions of
BS 5839: Part 1, BS 7671 and the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer.
s
2 The installation location of the fire controller and its associated component parts shall
rd
generally be as shown on the Project Drawings but their final position shall be determined on
site.
da
3 The type of fire controller and its associated component parts installed shall be the type
an
specified in the Project Documentation.
St
4 The fire controller equipment shall be securely fixed, and if required, marked with appropriate
notices, warnings, signs as applicable.
n
5 Cable and wire entries to the fire controller and associated devices shall be fitted with
io
grommets or glands to prevent possible damage to the insulation.

ct
6 The fire alarm system mains power connections to the fire controller equipment shall be
accordance with the guidelines set out in the relevant British Standards and the installation
ru
instructions provided by the manufacturer.

st
7 The fire alarm system mains power isolating switch shall be coloured red and clearly labelled
“FIRE ALARM: DO NOT SWITCH OFF”.
on
8 Each circuit of the system shall be connected to the fire controller via associated fuse or
C
circuit breaker devices located within the fire controller unit.

ar
9 All cables from the fire controller equipment to the detection and alarm devices shall be
clearly labelled as part of the fire detection and alarm system.
at
Q
END OF PART
Part 04: Fire Fighting System
4 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM ........................................................................... 3
4.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................... 3
4.1.1 Scope 3
4.1.2 Codes and Standards 3
4.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS .............................................................................. 4
4.2.2 Sprinkler Heads 5
4.2.3 Sprinkler System Alarm Devices 5
14
4.2.4 Alarm Valve 5
4.2.5 Basic Trip and Retarding Chamber 5
20
4.2.6 Pressure Alarm Switches 6
4.2.7 Water Motor Alarms 6
s
4.2.8 Stop Valves 6
rd
4.2.9 Zoning Valve 6
4.2.10 Water Flow Detectors 6
da
4.2.11 Drain and Test Orifice an 6
4.3 WATER SUPPLY......................................................................................... 6
4.3.1 General 6
St
4.4 HOSE REELS AND HOSES ........................................................................ 7

n
4.4.1 General 7
io
4.4.2 Cabinets 7
4.4.3 Hose Reels with Semi-Rigid Hose 7
ct
4.4.4 Hose Systems with Lay-flat Hose 8

ru
4.5 FIRE HYDRANTS ........................................................................................ 9

st
4.5.1 General 9
on
4.5.2 High Pressure Dry Barrel Hydrant 9

4.5.3 Underground Fire Hydrants and Surface Box Frames and Covers 10
C
4.6 PIPES AND FITTINGS .............................................................................. 11

ar
4.6.1 General 11
4.6.2 Hangers Supports Anchors and Guide 12
at
4.7 PUMPS ...................................................................................................... 12

Q
4.7.1 General 12
4.7.2 Horizontal Fire Pumps 13
4.7.3 Construction 13
4.7.4 Fittings 13
4.7.5 Electric Motors 14
4.7.6 Compression Ignition Engine 14
4.7.7 Controller and Transfer Switch 14
4.7.8 Alarm Panel 14
4.7.9 Jockey Fire Pumps 14
4.7.10 Field Quality Control 15
4.8 WET RISERS ............................................................................................ 15

4.8.1 General 15
4.9 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ........................................................ 16
4.9.1 General 16
4.10 FIRE BLANKETS ....................................................................................... 17
4.10.1 General 17
4.11 FM 200 SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 17
14
4.11.1 System description 17
4.11.2 Equipment Instruction -Plates 17
20
4.11.3 Basic Pipes and Pipe fittings 17
4.11.4 Control Panel 18
4.11.5 Storage Cylinders 19
s
4.11.6 Discharge Valve 19
rd
4.11.7 Discharge Nozzles 19
da
4.11.8 Pressure Switch 19
4.11.9 Smoke Detectors 19 an
4.11.10 Graphic Annunciator 19
4.11.11 Battery Backup Power System 20
St
4.11.12 Alarm Horn/strobe Combination 20
4.11.13 Manual Pull Stations 20
4.11.14 Abort Switch 20
n
4.11.15 Automatic Fire Dampers 20

io
4.11.16 Basic Identification of Installation 20

ct
4.11.17 Installation of Pipes and Pipe Fittings 21

4.11.18 Pressure Test 21
ru
4.11.19 Flow and Compliance Test 21

st
4.11.20 Painting 22
4.11.21 CAPSULAR TYPE - FIRE EXTINGUISHING AND SUPPRESSION
on
SYSTEM for the MCC/MV panels 22

C
ar
at
Q
4 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This Part specifies the requirements for fire fighting systems.
2 Related Sections are as follows:

Section 21 Electrical Works
14
4.1.2 Codes and Standards
20
ANSI B16.1 ................Cast iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings
s
ANSI B16.5 ................Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
rd
da
ASTM A 47 .................Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 106 ...............Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
an
Service
ASTM A 135 ...............Specification for Electric-Resistant-Welded Steel pipe
St
ASTM A 183 ...............Specification for Carbon Steel track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 197 ...............Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron
n
ASTM A 234 ...............Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy for
io
Moderate and Elevated temperatures

ct
ASTM A 395 ...............Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for
Use at Elevated Temperatures
ru
ASTM A 536 ...............Ductile Iron Castings

st
on
BS 750........................Underground fire hydrants and surface box frames and covers

BS EN 1561 ...............Specification for grey iron castings
C
BS EN 1563 ...............Iron castings with spheroidal or nodular graphite

BS 5163 .....................Double flanged cast iron wedge gate valves for waterworks purposes
ar
BS 5423 .....................Portable fire extinguishers

at
BS 6575 .....................Fire blankets

Q
BS EN 671 .................Fixed fire fighting systems – Hose systems
NFPA 13 .....................Installation of Sprinkler Systems
2 In addition to the above, all aspects of the fire fighting system shall comply with applicable
national and international codes and standards including, but not limited to, those issued by
the following organisations:
(a) Civil Defence Department

(b) National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
(c) British Standards (BS)
(d) Loss prevention Council Board (LPCB)
4.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

1 Wet pipe sprinkler systems shall employ automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system
containing water and connected to a water supply. Each pipeline in the system shall be fully
pressurised, so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by a fire.
2 The system shall be designed that only those sprinklers that have been activated by heat will
discharge water.
3 The design of the sprinkler system indicated on the Project Drawings is indicative only and is
14
to be taken as general guide and not as final design unless specifically noted otherwise. The
final detail design (including manufacturer components) shall be fully developed by the
20
Contractor strictly in accordance with the requirements of the Civil Defence Department and
the rules for automatic sprinkler installations in accordance with the relevant provisions of
NFPA 13. The Contractor shall allow in his rates for components of sprinkler systems that
s
are required to meet requirements but are not shown on the Project Drawings.
rd
4 The fire fighting system shall be fed from a centralised fire water storage tank located inside
da
the building or the basement of the building unless otherwise indicated in the Project
Documentation. an
5 The sprinkler system for each building shall be complete with an automatic packaged fire
pumping station and valves, water motor alarm and gong, pressurised water main with
St
distribution pipework, range pipes, hangers and supports, sprinkler heads and a piped drain
system.
n
6 The sprinkler system shall be interconnected with the central fire alarm panel in order that
io
the alarm bells and zone valves in various locations can be actuated.
ct
7 The water motor alarm and gong should consist of a simple water turbine having the shaft
ru
connected to a rotary ball clapper mounted within a domed gong. The alarm system shall be
self-winding, adjustable recycling non-thermal type and equipped with signal retarding device
st
to prevent false alarms due to surges in the water system. Auxiliary pressure and flow
sensing devices shall be incorporated in the feed to the alarm gong to actuate the central fire
on
alarm panel.
8 A test valve shall be incorporated on a branch pipe from the alarm valve to allow operational
C
conditions to be simulated for test purposes. Water from the test valve shall be properly
drained.
ar
9 The distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 3.5 m. The maximum floor area to be
at
covered by a single sprinkler for different hazard class are as follows:

Q
2
(a) ordinary hazard = 12 m
2
(b) extra light hazard = 21 m
2
(c) extra high hazard = 9m
10 The distance from the walls to the end sprinklers on the branch lines shall not exceed half of
the allowable distance between sprinklers on the branch lines. The distance from the walls
to the end branch lines shall not exceed half the allowable distance between the branch
lines.
11 The allowable distance between sprinklers on the branch lines is determined by the actual
distance between the branch lines and the permissible protection area per sprinkler.
12 The Contractor shall install an adequate quantity of additional sprinkler heads of the correct
temperature rating. The number will depend on the size of the installation and number of
sprinkler heads likely to be opened. The following figures are the minimum number of
additional sprinkler heads that should be installed:
(a) for systems not exceeding 300 sprinklers, 6 spare heads shall be installed
(b) for systems exceeding 300 sprinklers but not exceeding 1000, 12 spare heads shall
be installed
(c) for systems exceeding 1000 sprinklers, 24 spare heads shall be installed.
13 All components for sprinkler system packages should be from one single manufacturer with
an approved local agent. The Contractor shall maintain a technical representative from the
14
manufacturer or the local agent on site for the duration of the Contract in order to supervise
the installation. This representative shall issue a certificate upon completion of the Project
20
stating that the complete system has been installed, tested and commissioned in accordance
with the Project Documentation, the requirements of the NFPA and the Civil Defence
Department.
s
rd
4.2.2 Sprinkler Heads
da
o
1 The glass bulb sprinkler heads should be of the upright pendant type and rated for 68 C.
They shall be arranged such that there is not interference with the discharge pattern and
an
they shall be positioned between 75 and 150 mm below ceilings.
2 The sprinklers and pipelines shall not be spaced too close together in order to prevent an
St
operating sprinkler from wetting, and thereby delaying the operation of, adjacent sprinklers.
3 In locations where sprinkler heads are liable to be operated or damaged by accidental blow,
n
they should be protected by stout metal guards. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
io
normal operation of the sprinkler head in the event of a fire is not impeded by such guards.
ct
4 Sprinklers in false ceilings areas shall be the concealed or recessed type. They shall be the
ru
two-piece design with closure and mounting plate which allows for easy installation and
removal.
st
5 Sprinklers in parking and hardware areas shall be the pendant or upright bulb type with a 12
on
o
mm diameter orifice and temperature rated to 68 C with a natural brass finishes and
sprinkler guard.
C
4.2.3 Sprinkler System Alarm Devices

ar
1 The system shall be provided with alarm devices consisting of, but not limited to, the items
at
described in the following clauses.

Q
4.2.4 Alarm Valve
1 Alarm valves shall be UL listed and FM approved. They shall be check type, with a rubber
faced clapper, designed for use in wet pipe systems for automatic actuation. The alarm valve
may be installed vertically or horizontally with inlet and outlet connection in accordance with
the relevant provisions of ANSI B 16.1.
4.2.5 Basic Trip and Retarding Chamber
1 Basic trip and retarding chamber shall be UL listed and FM approved. It shall be used in
order to prevent any false alarm that may be caused by small variation in pressure. The
chamber should consist of a by-pass check valve to permit slow as well as small transient
increases in water supply pressure to be passed through to the system and held at their
highest value, without opening of the water way clapper.
4.2.6 Pressure Alarm Switches
1 Pressure alarm switches shall be UL listed and FM approved. They shall be designed to
indicate a water discharge from automatic sprinkler and the start-up or shut down of auxiliary
fire protection system equipment. The one single pole double throw snap-action switch‟s
components shall be enclosed in an oil resistant IP 22 rated enclosure.
4.2.7 Water Motor Alarms
1 Water motor alarms shall be UL listed and FM approved. They shall be hydraulically
operated outdoor alarms, designed for use with fire protection system water flow detection
devices. They shall be suitable for mounting to any type of rigid wall and to consist of an
14
approved “Y” strainer for use in the alarm line utilising a high energy efficient, light weight,
impeller design which can produce a very high sound pressure level. The gong, gong mount,
20
and water motor casing shall be made with corrosion resistant aluminium alloy. The drive
shall be of the type that does not require lubrication.
s
4.2.8 Stop Valves
rd
1 Stop valves shall be UL listed and FM approved. They should be the gate valve type,
designed specifically for fire line applications, where a positive indication of the open or
da
closed position is necessary. The valve shall have flanged ends, an iron body and a working
pressure of 12 bar.
an
4.2.9 Zoning Valve
St
1 Zoning valves shall be UL listed and FM approved. They shall be gear operated butterfly
valves with internal or external monitor switch. They shall have a wafer or lug style body for
n
mounting between ANSI 125/150 flanges. They shall be rated for a 12 bar operating
io
pressure and have a cast iron body and an EPDM seat with bronze disc.
ct
4.2.10 Water Flow Detectors

ru
1 Water flow detectors shall be UL listed and FM approved and shall be designed for use with
wet pipe, automatic sprinkler systems. They shall utilise a vane type sensor to actuate two
st
(2) single pole double throw snap-action switches when water flows at a sustained rate of
on
17.5 litres or more. They shall be used where sectional water flow signals are required.
4.2.11 Drain and Test Orifice

C
1 The system shall incorporate a 30 mm drain and a 13 mm test orifice for flow control
ar
inspection testing and drainage of feed mains.

at
4.3 WATER SUPPLY

Q
4.3.1 General
1 Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Project Documentation, the water supply shall
consist of:
(a) electric motor driven fire pump with back-up

(b) diesel motor driven fire pump with back-up
2 The capacity of the reservoirs from which fire fighting systems draw water shall be as stated
in the Project Documentation.
4.4 HOSE REELS AND HOSES

4.4.1 General
1 Hose reels and hoses shall be installed in locations as stated in the Project Documentation
unless otherwise directed by the Civil Defence Department.
2 Fire hose reel assemblies shall be provided with full operational instructions for display on or
adjacent to the hose reel.
3 The supplier shall make available an installation and maintenance manual for the hose reel.
14
4 All hose systems shall be such that they can be operated efficiently by one person and that
such system shall have a long service life and will not need excessive maintenance.
20
5 Hose reels shall be marked with the following information:
s
(a) suppliers name or trademark, or both
rd
(b) year of manufacture
da
(c) maximum working pressure
(d) length and bore of hose an
(e) nozzle diameter (marked on the nozzle)
4.4.2 Cabinets
St
1 Cabinets shall be fitted with a door. The door shall open approximately 180 to allow the
n
hose to run at freely in any direction.

io
2 Cabinets shall have suitable ventilation openings.

ct
3 Cabinets shall be fitted with a lock if required by the Project Documentation. Lockable
ru
cabinets shall be fitted with an emergency opening device.

st
4 To provide access for inspection and maintenance, the cabinet shall be unlockable with a
on
key or a special opening device. Lockable cabinets shall have provision for a security seal to
be fitted.
C
4.4.3 Hose Reels with Semi-Rigid Hose

ar
1 Hose reels with semi-rigid hose shall generally comply with BS EN 671-1.
at
2 The nominal bore of the hose shall be 19 mm or 25 mm or 33 mm.

Q
3 The maximum length of the hose shall not exceed 30 m.
4 The reel shall rotate around a spindle. The reel shall consist of two wheel discs with a
maximum diameter not more than 800 mm, and inside segments or drum with a minimum
diameter not less than 200 mm for 19 mm and 25 mm hose and minimum diameter not less
than 280 mm for 33 mm hose. The discs shall be red in colour.
5 The hose shall terminate in a shut-off nozzle which shall give the following control settings:
(a) shut
(b) spray (sheet or conical) and/or jet.
6 Rotary operated nozzles shall be marked to show the direction of closing and opening.
Lever operated nozzles shall be marked to show the setting for:
(a) shut
(b) spray and/or jet.
7 A manual or automatic inlet stop valve shall be fitted to each hose reel.
8 Working, test and minimum burst pressure for hose reels shall be as given in Table 4.1,
unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation or agreed with the Engineer.
14
Table 4.1
Pressure for Hose Reels
20
Nominal Diameter Working Pressure Test Pressure Minimum Burst
Pressure
(mm) (bar) (bar)
(bar)
s
rd
19 12 18 30
25 12 18 30
da
33 7 an 10.5 17.5
9 Testing, performance and materials of hose reels with semi-rigid hose shall comply with the
relevant provisions of BS EN 671-1.
St
4.4.4 Hose Systems with Lay-flat Hose

n
1 Hose systems with lay-flat hose shall generally comply with BS EN 671-2.
io
2 The hose system shall be designed for mounting in one of the following forms:
ct
(a) in a wall recess with cover

ru
(b) in a cabinet in a wall recess

st
(c) in a cabinet for surface mounting

on
3 The hose support shall be one of the following types:

C
(a) Type 1: rotating reel

(b) Type 2: cradle with the hose double coiled
ar
(c) Type 3: hose basket with the hose flaked

at
4 With Type 1 hose supports, the reel shall rotate around a spindle so that the hose can be
Q
withdrawn freely. The inside drum shall have a minimum diameter of not less than 70 mm
and shall have a slit not less than 20 mm wide across the full diameter of the drum into which
the folded house is located.
5 Type 1 and 3 supports, if fixed to the cabinet, shall allow a swing to a position at 90 to the
plane of the back of the cabinet. The turning axis shall be vertical.
6 The hose shall be lay-flat, with a nominal bore of 52 mm, and shall not exceed 20 m in
length.
7 A coupling shall be used to connect the hose to the valve and to the shut-off nozzle. The
coupling shall be bound to the hose by means of an even pressure over the complete
perimeter of the hose against the coupling shank.
8 The hose shall terminate in a shut-off nozzle which shall give the following control settings:
(a) shut
(b) spray (sheet or conical) and/or jet.
9 Rotary operated nozzles shall be marked to show the direction of closing and opening.
Lever operated nozzles shall be marked to show the setting for:
(a) shut
(b) (spray and/or jet.
10 A manual inlet stop valve shall be fitted to the hose system. The valve shall be screw down
14
or other slow-opening type. The inlet and outlet of the valve shall form an angle of not less
than 90 and not more than 135
20
11 Hose assemblies shall be designed for the following pressures unless otherwise stated in the
project documentation or agreed with the Engineer:
s
(a) maximum working pressure shall be 12 bar
rd
(b) test pressure shall be 24 bar
da
(c) minimum burst pressure shall be 42 bar
12
an
Testing, performance and materials of hose systems with lay-flat hose shall comply with the
relevant provisions of BS EN 671-2.
St
4.5 FIRE HYDRANTS

n
4.5.1 General
io
1 Fire hydrants shall be installed in locations as stated in the Project Documentation unless
ct
otherwise directed by the Civil Defence Department.

ru
2 A certificate shall be obtained from the manufacturer stating that the fire hydrants to be
supplied are suitable for use in Qatar.
st
Fire hydrants shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s instructions.

on
4.5.2 High Pressure Dry Barrel Hydrant

C
1 High pressure dry barrel hydrants shall come complete with removable/replaceable nozzles
ar
and hydrant seat, top stop nut, easily repaired traffic section, nozzle section with 360°
rotation, main valve opening and bronze drain plug.
at
2 Working pressure of the hydrant shall be 14 bar and the testing pressure shall be 28 bar
Q
unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation or agreed with the Engineer.
3 The hydrant shall comply with ASNI/AWWA C502 and shall be UL listed and FM approved.
4 Materials for the hydrants shall be as follows:
(a) nozzle section, barrels, stand pipe flanges, breakable flange, base, main valve flange,
weather-shield operating nut and bonnet all shall be ductile iron
(b) main valve disc shall be ductile iron core and fully encapsulated in EPDM rubber
(c) caps shall be cast iron
(d) coating above ground shall be fusion bonded epoxy inside and out
(e) coating below ground shall be bitumen or fusion bonded epoxy
(f) nozzles, valve seat ring, drain ring, drain bushings and plugs, stem nut, stem bushing
and thrust nut shall be bronze
(g) stop nut, cap chain, bolts and nuts shall be zinc plated steel
(h) stem rod coupling, standpipe lock rings, nozzle lock screw, lock plate, lock plate screw
and spider bolt shall be stainless steel
(i) barrel gaskets and cap gaskets shall be nitrile rubber.
5 Each hydrant shall be clearly marked, either integrally with the stated components or on a
plate of durable material securely fixed to that component, as follows:
(a) the number of the standard to which the hydrant conforms and the date of the
14
standard
(b) the manufacturer‟s name or trade mark
20
(c) the identification number (the reference used by the manufacturer allowing
identification for the supply of spares, etc).
s
4.5.3 Underground Fire Hydrants and Surface Box Frames and Covers
rd
1 Underground fire hydrants and surface box frames and covers shall generally comply with
da
the requirements of BS 750.
2
an
Underground fire hydrants with wedge gate type or screw down type valves shall be suitable
for a maximum working pressure of 16 bar.
St
3 Fire hydrants shall be of the wedge gate type or screw-down type.

n
4 The wedge gate valve shall comply with the requirements of BS 5163 for PN 16 valves. The
io
associated duck foot bends shall be grey cast iron (CI) to BS EN 1561 Grade 250 or
spheroidal graphite cast iron (SG) to BS EN 1563.
ct
5 Materials and testing of underground fire hydraulic shall be to BS 750. Provision shall be
ru
made for a certificate to be made available which certifies that the hydrant has complied with
all testing requirements of BS 750.
st
on
6 Each screw-down type hydrant and each duck foot bend on a wedge gate type hydrant shall
be provided with a drain boss on the outlet side. It shall be located at the lowest practicable
point.
C
7 The hydrants shall have screwed outlets. The screwed outlet shall be provided with a cap to
ar
cover the outlet thread. It shall be securely attached to the hydrant by a chain or other
flexible device.
at
8 When fitted with a standard round thread outlet, the hydrant shall deliver not less than 2000
Q
litres/minute at a constant pressure of 1.7 bar at the inlet to the hydrant.
9 The hydrant operating spindle shall be provided with a cast iron cap complying with the
requirements of BS 5163. The cap shall be securely fixed to the spindle so that it remains
fixed in position during normal use.
10 Each hydrant valve, duckfoot bend and outlet shall be clearly marked, either integrally with
the stated components or on a plate of durable material securely fixed to that component, as
follows:
(a) on wedge gate type hydrant valves:

(i) in addition to the marking requirements of BS 5163, the direction of valve
opening on the gland or upper part of the hydrant.
(b) on duckfoot bends:

(i) the number of the standard to which the hydrant conforms (i.e. BS 750) and the
date of the standard
(ii) the material designation of the body, for grey cast iron „CI‟, or for spheroidal
graphite cast iron „SG‟
(c) on screw–down type hydrants:
date of the standard
(ii) the material designation of the body, for grey cast iron „CI‟, or for spheroidal
graphite cast iron „SG‟
14
(iii) the direction of valve opening on the gland or upper part of the hydrant
20
(iv) if loose valve mark „LV‟ or „‟Loose‟
(v) the manufacturer‟s name or trade mark
s
(vi) the identification number (the reference used by the manufacturer allowing
rd
identification for the supply of spares, etc)
(d) on screwed outlets:
da
an
date of the standard.
11 Class, type, manufacture, workmanship, coating and design features of surface box covers
St
and frames shall be in accordance with BS 750.
12 Surface box covers and frames shall be tested in accordance with the relevant provisions of
n
BS 750. Provision shall be made for a certificate to be made available which certifies that
io
samples from each production lot from which the delivery is made up comply with the
requirements of BS 750.
ct
Surface box covers shall be clearly marked by having the words “FIRE HYDRANT” in letters
ru
13
not less than 30 mm high, in English and Arabic, cast into the cover. The cover and frame
st
shall have clearly cast thereon the following;

on
(a) the number of the standard to which the hydrant conforms (i.e. BS 750)
(b) the date of the standard
C
(c) the grade of the cover and frame.

ar
4.6 PIPES AND FITTINGS

at
4.6.1 General
Q
1 Pipes shall be UL listed and FM approved. They shall be exterior galvanized steel to ASTM
A 135 with a working pressure of 14.5 bar. Couplings may be of the rolled groove type or
the mechanical locking type (push-on). Pipe end preparation for the mechanical locking type
couplings will be in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.
2 Fittings shall be UL listed and FM approved. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings
as manufactured by specialised manufacturers shall be used for all stand pipe systems.
(a) couplings shall be ductile iron to ASTM A 536, or malleable iron to ASTM A 47, with
o
chlorinated butyl gaskets suitable for an operating temperature of 95 C and heat
treated carbon steel bolts and nuts to ASTM A 183
(b) fittings shall be malleable iron to ASTM A 47 or ductile iron to ASTM A 536 with
grooved or shouldered ends
(c) flanges shall be malleable iron to ASTM A 47 or ductile iron to ASTM A 536, with a
hinged, two-piece design, suitable for opening and engaging the groves, and shall be
secured in position with a tight-fitting lock bolt. Cast iron flanges shall comply with
ANSI B.16.1 and steel flanges steel shall comply with ANSI B 16.5
(d) valves shall be grooved end design with encapsulated body and disc. Neck design
shall readily accommodate insulation. Valves shall have pressure assisted double seal
and be capable of 12 bar bubble tight shutoff. Butterfly valves shall be with gear
actuator.
4.6.2 Hangers Supports Anchors and Guide
1 The pipework shall be supported, anchored and guided in order to preclude failure or
14
deformation. The Contractor shall construct and install hangers, supports, anchors, guides
and accessories as necessary to the approval of the Engineer. Supports shall be designed to
20
support the weight of the pipe, the weight of fluid and the weight of pipe insulation.
2 Piping shall be securely fastened to the structure without over-stressing any portion of the
s
structure itself. Pipe supports, anchors and guides shall be secured to concrete by means of
rd
inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel fishplates embedded
in the concrete.
da
3 Hanger shall be arrange so as to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building
and supports.
an
4 Pipe hangers and supports shall be furnished complete with rods, bolts, lock, nuts, swivels
St
couplings, brackets and all other components and accessories to allow installation to freely
expand and contract.
n
5 Hangers spacing shall be such that the piping is installed without undue strains and stresses
io
and provision shall be made for expansion, contraction, structural settlement and water-
hammer.
ct
ru
6 Supports, clamps and hangers shall be made of galvanized steel, fixed with drilled plugs.
st
4.7 PUMPS
on
4.7.1 General
C
1 Furnish and install where shown on the drawings one LPCB listed fire pump package
composed of both electrical and compression ignition engine driven single stage or
ar
multistage centrifugal fire pump complete with motor, control, fittings, jockey pump and
speciality accessories necessary to complete the installation in every respect. The complete
at
installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of, and meet with the approval of,
the Civil Defence Department and any other authorities having jurisdiction. Centrifugal fire
Q
pumps shall have a horizontal shaft with electric motor drive. Jockey fire pumps shall have
electric motor drives.
2 Pumps serving water supply to fire fighting system are normally driven electrically with
backup by a compression ignition engine and should always be arranged to start
automatically in the event of system operation. In addition, arrangement for starting
manually should also be installed. It is important that the electricity supply should always be
maintained to the pumping set. It is therefore essential that the electrical connections be
such that a power supply is always available for the motor when the switches for the
distribution of electrical power throughout the building are cut. Any switches on the power
feed to the motor should be clearly labelled, “FIRE PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY -NOT TO BE
SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE”. Such switches should be of the locking type
and should be kept locked on. An indicator lamp should be provided to show continuously
that full power supply is available for the motor. Any fuses in the electricity sub-circuit should
be of the high rupturing capacity (HRC) type.
14
4.7.2 Horizontal Fire Pumps
20
1 Pumps shall be horizontal fire pumps as indicated, factory assembled and tested. The
capacity and electrical characteristics shall be as detailed elsewhere in the Project
Documentation.
s
rd
2 The pumps shall be capable of delivering not less than 150% of the rated flow at not less
than 65% the rated head.
da
3 Pumps shall be hydrostatically tested at the factory and run tested pump prior to shipment.
an
The hydrostatic test shall be at 150% of shut off head plus suction head but shall not less
than 1725 kPa.
St
4 The pump shall meet or exceed 75% efficiency at design point.

n
4.7.3 Construction
io
1 They shall have cast-iron pump casing with suction and discharge flanges machined to ANSI
ct
B16.1 dimensions, of size and pressure rating detailed in the Project Documentation with a
red paint finish.
ru
2 Each pump shall be capable of continuous operation without producing noise in excess of
st
hydraulic institute and OSHA guidelines.

on
3 Pump casing shall be close grain cast iron with a replaceable bronze case wear ring. The
pumps shall be of the back pull out design so that the rotating element can be removed from
C
the casing without disconnecting the suction or discharge piping. Full flange connections
shall be integrally cast with the volute. Pump impeller shall be of cast bronze material and
ar
shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Impeller diameter shall be trimmed for the
specified design conditions.
at
4 The pump shall be mounted on a heavy duty CI bearing frame.

Q
5 The shaft shall be of stainless steel Grade 316 S31 to BS 970 Part 1.
6 The pump bearing shall be of the permanently sealed type designed for an L10 life of at least
50,000 hours in accordance with BS 5512 and requiring no external lubrication.
7 The pump shall be connected to drive motor by a flexible coupling capable of withstanding all
torsional, radial and axial loads.
4.7.4 Fittings
1 The Contractor shall provide the following accessory fittings:
(a) eccentric tapered suction reducer

(b) concentric tapered discharge reducer

(c) hose valve test head
(d) hose valve with caps and chains.
(e) pumps casing relief valve
(f) ball drip valve
(g) suction and discharge pressure gauges
(h) mains relief valve
(i) strainer (waste cone)
14
4.7.5 Electric Motors
20
1 Electric motors for pumps shall be horizontal, foot mounted, ball bearing, induction motor
with open drip-proof enclosure. The motor shall be mounted on the same steel base as the
pump and connected to the pump with a flexible coupling. The coupling shall be protected by
s
a coupling guard. The pump and motor shaft shall be aligned prior to shipment. The pump
rd
motor current will not exceed the full load ampere rating under any conditions of pump load.
o
Pump motor shall be suitable for 415/3/50 and 2900 RPM, class “F” insulation, 50 C ambient
da
temperature indoor.
4.7.6 Compression Ignition Engine

an
1 1 Engine for fire pump shall be horizontal shaft, in-line, turbocharged, four stroke, liquid
St
cooled, compression ignition type. The motor shall be mounted on the same steel base as
the pump and connected to the pump with a flexible coupling. The coupling shall be
protected with a coupling guard. The required pump horsepower shall not exceed the rated
n
motor horsepower rating under any conditions of pump load. Accessories shall include 24V
io
dc starting batteries, charging system, dual starting contactors, fuel filters, canister type air
cleaner, fuel storage tank, cooling system heat exchangers, exhaust silencer and piping and
ct
engine control panel. Engine accessories shall be suitable for 240 V, single-phase, 50 Hz
ru
power supply.
st
4.7.7 Controller and Transfer Switch

on
1 The controller and transfer switch shall be LPCB listed and shall be the combined manual
and automatic, across the line type. Control equipment shall be furnished in a steel
mounted, drip proof enclosure with front operated circuit breaker and disconnect switch.
C
2 The circuit breaker shall be rated as approved for continued use.

ar
3 The pressure regulator shall have a range of 0 to 2070 kPa with pressure settings,
at
established at time of testing at the Site. An instantaneous recycling running period timer to
Q
prevent to frequent automatic starting of fire pump motor, set to keep the motor in operation
for 6 minutes on automatic start, shall be interwired with the pressure regulator.
4 The controller shall be capable of interrupting a short circuit current at least equal to the
short circuit current in the controller supply circuit.
4.7.8 Alarm Panel
1 An alarm panel with visible and audible signals for indication for FIRE PUMP CURRENT
FAILURE and PUMP OPERATING shall be installed and connected to the fire pump
controller.
4.7.9 Jockey Fire Pumps

1 Jockey pumps shall be factory assembled and tested with capacities and electrical
characteristics as detailed in the Project Documentation.
2 Jockey pumps shall be constructed from with cast iron diffusers and adapter with registered
fits to maintain axial alignment. They shall have bronze enclosed impellers, bronze casing
rings, bronze base bearing, steel clamp type shaft coupling and stainless steel shaft. The
impellers shall be pinned to the shaft to prevent reverse rotation damage and to maintain
proper inter-stage lateral setting. They shall incorporate threaded suction and discharge
connections, mechanical seals and a cast-iron pump base with drain plug. They shall have a
red paint finish.
3 The motor controller shall be LPCB listed and approved for fire pump service. Control shall
14
include a combination type starter with fused disconnect switch, thermal over-current
protection and a hand-off automatic selector switch in the enclosure. Control shall also
20
include an adjustable pressure switch with gauge cock.
4 The installation shall come complete with a brass cased pressure gauge with a 100 mm dial
on the discharge pipe near jockey pump.
s
rd
5 The installation shall come complete with a 20 mm relief valve on the discharge line of the
jockey pump to relieve excess pressure to floor drains.
da
6 The installation shall come complete with a controller sensing pipes, not less than 15 mm in
an
diameter with a 15 mm globe valve for testing mechanism of controller.
St
7 The installation shall come complete with a 85 mm diameter bronze check valves with 85
mm orifice in the clapper or ground-face unions with non-corrosive diaphragm with a 85 mm
orifice.
n
io
8 The jockey pumps and pump drives shall be installed on vibration isolators in accordance
with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.
ct
4.7.10 Field Quality Control

ru
1 Upon completion of installation the Contractor shall perform field acceptance tests to
st
demonstrate that the fire protection pumps comply with requirements of the Project
on
Documentation.
4.8 WET RISERS

C
4.8.1 General
ar
1 The wet riser installation shall incorporate an inlet box which shall be constructed from 1.5
at
mm thick galvanized sheet steel and shall be suitable for recessed mounting, with 3 mm
Q
thick x 40 mm wide architrave. The box shall be provided with a hinged, lockable door with a
central panel glazed with wired glass and having the words “ WET RISER INLET” in 50mm
high red letters on the inside face. The box shall be finished in baked enamel inside with
prime coat outside to the required colour, and shall be supplied by an approved manufacture
of fire equipment.
2 The wet riser installation shall incorporate inlet breaching which shall be horizontal or vertical
pattern with integral spring loaded non-return valve, drain valve and blank cap. Each inlet
shall incorporate a 65 mm diameter instantaneous male couplings. The body of the
breaching piece shall be fitted in 25 mm gunmetal gate valve for drain purposes, with a plug
and chain.
3 The wet riser installation shall incorporate landing valves which shall be a spindle valve
controlled breaching with a 50 mm diameter inlet and 65 mm diameter instantaneous female
outlet with blank cap. The chain valves shall be straight or oblique pattern as required, and
shall be fixed in the closed position. Each landing valve shall be provided with a 30 m long
by 65 mm diameter fire hose lined with coated woven synthetic fire hose as well as a diffuser
branch pipe nozzle. The valve, hose and nozzle shall be accommodated in a recessed box
supported on purpose made hangers and ready for immediate use. The box shall be
generally constructed as for the inlet breaching, but with the words “WET RISER OUTLET”
in 50 mm high red letters on the inside face of the glazing.
4 The top of each dry riser shall be fitted with a 25 mm automatic air release valve, brass
construction, with internal solid rubber ball.
14
4.9 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
20
4.9.1 General
s
1 Fire extinguishers shall conform with the relevant provisions of BS 5423.
rd
2 Fire extinguishers shall be colour coded according to their type. The colour shall be as
follows:
da
(a) red - water an
(b) cream - foam
(c) black - carbon dioxide
St
(d) blue - dry powder
(e) green - halon
n
3 The types of extinguishers that can be used on a fire is dependent upon the class of the fire.
io
The fire classes and the types of extinguishers that can be used on them is given in Table
4.1. Final selection of extinguisher type shall be in accordance with and to the approval of
ct
the Civil Defence Department.

ru
4 The capacity of fire extinguishers shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation.

Table 4.2
st
Fire Class and Extinguisher Type

on
Class Nature Example Extinguisher Type

A Carbonaceous Wood, paper, textiles Water
C
B Flammable Adhesives Dry powder

ar
liquids
Flammable liquid stores Dry powder or foam
at
Bitumen boilers, petrol or diesel Dry powder, foam,

Q
powdered equipment carbon dioxide or halon
Cooking range fires Dry powder, carbon,

dioxide or fire blanket
C Flammable gases Lpg, acetylene Carbon dioxide, dry
powder or halon
D Reactive metals Magnesium, sodium etc. Dry powder specially
developed for particular
metals
E Electrical Any material where there is a danger Carbon dioxide, dry
of live electricity powder or halon
4.10 FIRE BLANKETS

4.10.1 General
1 Fire blankets shall be manufactured from woven glass fabric coated on both sides with white
silicon rubber, fully tested in accordance with BS 6575.
2 The blankets shall be supplied in white container suitable for wall mounting. Fire blankets
shall be provided in the following standard sizes:
(a) 1000 x 1000 mm
14
(b) 1250 x 1250 mm
(c) 1500 x 1250 mm
20
(d) 1800 x 1250 mm
(e) 1800 x 1800 mm
s
4.11 FM 200 SYSTEM
rd
4.11.1 System description
da
1 The FM 200 system shall be sized to provide the required 5% concentration of agent in the
an
space protected. A piping arrangement and nozzle shall convey the agent from the cylinders
to the hazard and discharge the agent completely within 10 seconds. The piping and nozzles
St
shall be engineered for the specific flow rates required and calculations shall be supplied
with the system layout drawings for review and approval by the Engineer.
n
2 The system design shall incorporate the capability of fully testing all electrical detection,
io
discharge control, abort, power shutdown, air conditioning shutoff, fire damper, and door
closer circuits without discharge of the agent and without disconnecting the agent supply
ct
from the system.

ru
3 Installed systems shall be complete with all control wiring for detectors, alarms, door
releases, fire damper releases, abort stations, manual pull stations air conditioning and
st
computer equipment shutdown devices, voltage trips and circuit breakers. All wiring,
on
including control circuitry, shall consist of insulation copper conductors installed in metal
conduit. The FM 200 alarm and detection system wiring and devices shall conform to QCS
Section 23, Part 2, Fire Alarm and Detection Systems.
C
4.11.2 Equipment Instruction -Plates

ar
1 The Contractor shall provide engraved instruction plates detailing emergency procedures at
at
each system control panel and at each hazard area manual discharge station/abort switch
location. Permanent name plates shall be used in the control panel to identify control logic
Q
unit contacts and major circuits.
2 Etched aluminium warning signs shall be provided at all entrances and exits of the protected
area. Entrance sign shall read: "WARNING - DO NOT ENTER ROOM WHEN ALARM
SOUNDS, FM 200 BEING RELEASED.” Exit sign shall read: “WHEN ALARM SOUNDS,
VACATE AT ONCE, FM 200 BEING RELEASED.”
4.11.3 Basic Pipes and Pipe fittings
1 FM 200 manifold and piping shall conform to the relevant requirements of the latest codes
and standards.
2 Pipes shall be black or galvanized steel, schedule 40 for 150mm diameter and smaller,
complying with the relevant provisions of ASTM A 106.
3 Fittings shall be galvanized malleable iron 2070 kPa class complying with the relevant
provisions of ASTM A 197; ductile iron 2070 class complying with the relevant provisions of
ASTM A 395; or steel complying with the relevant provisions of ASTM A 234. For 20 mm
diameter or smaller pipe sizes, 1035 kPa class fittings are acceptable.
4.11.4 Control Panel
1 The detection and extinguishing components shall be one integrated panel. The power
source, for the system shall be two separately fused standard voltage circuits which will be
connected to the control panel., The panel out-put shall be 24 Volts DC with a battery
operated stand-by which will automatically take over and operate the system for 24 hours in
the event normal power is interrupted. When trouble of this kind or within the system occurs,
14
an audible signal as well as the indicating lights shall warn operating personnel. The fire
detection and control system shall be comprised of a solid state, low power information
20
processor and associated supervisory and interface circuitry. The system shall provide
adequate isolation from external wiring to assure against transient signals causing false
alarms. The system shall be optimised for use with graphic annunciation displays.
s
2 The unit shall include the following functions and logic sequence:
rd
(a) operation of all smoke detection circuits
da
(b) operation of all agent discharge circuit an
(c) operation of all audible (and visual) pre-alarm and alarm signals
(d) provide primary power (and control backup power) for entire system.
St
(e) provide interconnection to fire alarm and detection system and SCADA control station.
n
3 The unit shall include supervision of the following circuitry:

io
(a) input power status

ct
(b) manual pull station circuits

ru
(c) alarm circuits

st
(d) abort switch circuits

on
(e) detection circuits

(f) agent discharge circuits
C
(g) time delay circuits

ar
4 A set of contacts for connection to pre-action valve shall be provided.

at
5 Activation of one detector shall activate the general alarm. The alarm shall be a combined
horn and strobe (low pulse).
Q
6 Remote annunciation to the buildings security system, and illuminate LED light on graphic
annunciator
7 Activation of a cross-zoned detector in the same area shall:
(a) activation and annunciation of pre-discharge alarms. The alarm shall be combined
horn and strobe (fast pulse).
(b) energise a time delay mechanism which shall delay release for 30 seconds; the agent
shall be released at the end of this time interval unless a deadman - “Agent Hold”
(abort switch) is depressed; time delay to reset to 0 seconds when abort switch is
depressed, restarting the time delay when released
(c) Shut down the air-conditioning system and close its dampers.
8 Discharge of the agent shall shut down power to equipment within the protected area.
9 If a manual pull station is energised, the actions detailed in Paragraphs 5, 6, 7 and 8 shall
bypass the time delay and overriding abort switch.
4.11.5 Storage Cylinders
1 The FM 200 cylinders shall be constructed of high strength steel alloy conforming to
applicable specifications of the Civil Defence Department. All containers shall be mounted
securely in an upright position. Cylinders manifolded together shall be of the same size and
weight/capacity. Each cylinder in a multiple cylinder group connected to a manifold shall be
fitted with a flexible discharge hose and a manifold check valve. The check valve shall
14
prevent agent loss during discharge should a cylinder be disconnected from the manifold. A
mechanical method of actuation shall be provided at the cylinder location for local
20
emergency operation.
4.11.6 Discharge Valve
s
1 Operation of the valve shall be by means of differential pressure using the container
rd
pressure at the source. The force differential and a metallic spring shall act to hold the valve
closed prior to discharge and the force shall reverse upon actuation to open the valve. This
da
reversal shall be accomplished by means of venting the agent through an opening on the
container valve. The container valve shall be equipped with a pressure gauge for continuous
an
monitoring of the container pressure safety outlet to automatically relieve pressure build-up.
St
4.11.7 Discharge Nozzles
1 Discharge nozzles shall be one piece cast aluminium, have either a 180° or 360° flat fan-
n
shaped discharge pattern and range in orifice sizes from 3 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm

io
increments.
ct
4.11.8 Pressure Switch

ru
1 This pneumatically actuated switch shall be used to give positive identification of release of
the agent in the piping system.
st
on
2 The switch shall have one set of normally open and one set of normally closed contacts.
4.11.9 Smoke Detectors

C
1 Devices shall be UL listed and FM approved. The minimum contacts rating shall be one
ar
ampere for both standard voltage, single phase, 50 hertz, ±10% fluctuation.
at
4.11.10 Graphic Annunciator

Q
1 An engraved multi-layer acrylic graphic display showing walls, doors, windows, location of
control panel and location of all smoke detectors shall be provided. The number and location
of the displays shall be as stated elsewhere in the Project Documentation. Silk screen
graphics are not acceptable.
2 Panel colour shall be white with black lettering. Indicators shall be light emitting diodes
(LED) in red, yellow or green. All points shall be wired to a labelled terminal strip which is
plug compatible to the wiring harness for ease of installation. All graphics shall use a hide-
away hinge system that eliminates the need for metal frames and visible screw heads. Back
boxes shall be made of 1.5 mm thick steel.
4.11.11 Battery Backup Power System
1 Battery backup of the entire FM 200 system, including detection, alarm, actuation and
supervisory system is required. The backup system must be designed such that upon main
power failure, backup power automatically services the system with no delay or interruption
of any kind. The battery system must be capable of powering-the system for a period of-not
less than 24 hours in a normal standby condition, at the end of which time it shall be capable
of operating the entire system in a full alarm condition for period of not less than ten minutes.
The trouble horn and light shall be activated to indicate that the system is operating on a
battery power.
4.11.12 Alarm Horn/strobe Combination
14
1 The alarm horn shall operate on 24 volt polarised DC power to allow supervision of the
20
circuit wires.
2 The alarm horn shall have a minimum sound level of 98 decibels at 3 m.
s
3 A horn and strobe light shall operate simultaneously from one power supply with flash rate of
rd
1-3 flashes per second with peak light intensity of 800 candlepower.
da
4.11.13 Manual Pull Stations an
1 The manual pull station shall be provided for the release of the FM 200 in case of an
emergency.
St
2 The unit shall be contained within a metal body having a single pole switch. The unit shall
require double action operation.
n
io
4.11.14 Abort Switch

ct
1 The abort switch shall be used where investigation delay is desired between detection and
actuation of the system.
ru
2 This switch shall be a momentary contact "dead-man" type switch requiring constant
st
pressure to operate one set of normally open and one set of normally closed contacts on
on
each contact block. Clear operating instructions shall be provided at the abort switch.
4.11.15 Automatic Fire Dampers

C
1 Provide press sure trips for automatic fire dampers in air conditioning ductwork servicing
ar
hazard areas separated by fire walls. Activation of fire dampers shall occur upon activation of
FM 200 discharge. In case of motorised or electro thermal link dampers, pressure trips are
at
not required.
Q
4.11.16 Basic Identification of Installation
1 Piping System Identification : Bare and insulated piping shall be labelled in accordance with
a piping colour code. Lines above ceilings shall have utility name and directional flow arrows
stencilled in designated colour. Exposed piping in mechanical equipment room shall be
painted with their designated colour, flow arrow to be painted in contrasting colour. Spacing
of description and arrow to be 10 m.
2 Underground Piping Identification : Provide continuous underground type plastic marker,

located directly over buried line at 150 to 200 mm below finished grade.
3 Valve Identification : Provide valve tag on every valve in each piping system. Tag shall be
brass, 50mm in diameter with utility service and valve number embossed or stamped on it.
List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Mount valve schedule
frames and schedules in machine rooms.
4 Mechanical Equipment Identification : Provide engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic

equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each
operational device, including main control and operating valves and primary balancing
dampers.
5 Install fire protection signs on piping in accordance with requirements of the Civil Defence
Department.
14
4.11.17 Installation of Pipes and Pipe Fittings
20
1 The Contractor shall comply with requirements of codes and standards for installation of fire
protection piping materials. Install piping products where indicated, in accordance with
s
manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognised industry practices to
ensure that piping systems comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
rd
2 Co-ordinate with other work as necessary to interface components of fire protection piping
da
properly with other work. an
4.11.18 Pressure Test
St
1 After portions of the FM 200 Systems work are completed, the work shall be hydrostatically
tested in the presence be the Engineer. Five days advance notice of the tests shall be given
to the Owner. Furnish all pumps, gauges, instruments, test equipment and personnel
n
required for these tests and make all provisions for removal of test equipment.
io
2 Piping shall be tested individually by fire suppression zones, with plugs and/or caps in place
ct
of nozzles and agent storage containers as follows. A preliminary test of not more than 1500
kPa shall be applied to reveal possible major leaks. After this preliminary test, the pressure
ru
shall be raised to 2,000 kPa. If leaks are found, they shall be eliminated by tightening, repair
or replacement. On completion of any remedial work, hydrostatic tests shall be repeated until
st
no leakage occurs.
on
4.11.19 Flow and Compliance Test

C
1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate and schedule flow tests at a times agreed with the
Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer as to the time of flow and compliance
ar
tests a minimum of two weeks In advance of any such tests.

at
2 The Contractor shall provide all test equipment necessary to test and demonstrate that the
FM 200 Systems satisfactory complies with the Project Documentation requirements. The
Q
flow and compliance test report shall include recordings of the following data:
(a) verification of status; for each item of equipment, alarm signalling, and zone barrier
closure device prior to the test and at each stage of FM 200 Alarm, including abort and
reset to the manual mode
(b) discharge time; time period to complete discharge by means of digital timing devices
(c) concentration; use thermal conductivity recording gas analysers with a minimum of
three simultaneous recording points. Concentrations shall be recorded through entire
holding time
3 Complete data shall be recorded for each fire suppression zone per the following scenario
description:
(a) Conditions Normal; simulate an occupied facility, and verify status of device and
equipment, using test lights on valves in lieu of pressurised agent storage containers
(b) Stage I FM 200 Alarm; activate a random smoke detector by canned smoke or similar
agent and verify status of devices and equipment.
(c) Stage II FM 200 Alarm; activate another random smoke detector by canned smoke, or
similar agent; after alarm, activate abort mode and verify status of devices and
equipment
(d) Manual Mode; cancel the FM 200 timed release period logic by activated the key
operated reset, and verify status of devices and equipment.
(e) Stage III FM 200 Alarm; activate a manual discharge station and verify status of
14
devices and equipment.
(f) Conditions Normal; simulate an occupied facility and verify status of devices and
20
equipment with pressurised agent storage containers replacing the test lights on
valves.
(g) Stage IV FM 200 Alarm; activate random smoke detectors by canned smoke, or
s
similar agent, and allow the FM 200 timed release period logic to discharge the test
rd
gas; record times and concentrations.
da
4 If flow and compliance test indicates a fire suppression zone including related accessory
devices and equipment failed to function, or concentrations during holding period were not
an
satisfactory; reschedule another flow and compliance test to demonstrate satisfactory
performance after making corrections.
St
4.11.20 Painting
n
1 Priming: All shop-fabricated and factory-built equipment,: devices and apparatus not
galvanized, or protected by plating, or a baked enamel finish, shall be cleaned and given one
io
shop coat of paint primer. Any portions of shop coat damaged in delivery, during
ct
construction, or prior to finish painting, shall be re-coated.

ru
2 Finish Painting: Do not paint name plates, labels, placards, tags, stainless steel or plated
items, valve stems, motor shafts, levers, handles, trim strips, etc. Exposed and visible
st
piping, equipment devices and apparatus in FM 200 Systems shall be ANSI standard colour.
on
3 Identification: Stencil 40 mm high white enamel block type characters on all items of
equipment for identification purposes. Also, stencil a complete system of pipe identification
C
adjacent to each valve and branch-take-off, and at not over 15 m intervals along runs of
pipe, with flow arrows at each marking. Pipe identification shall be contrasting colour, either
ar
white or red, to the finish coating of the piping

at
4.11.21 CAPSULAR TYPE - FIRE EXTINGUISHING AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM for the
MCC/MV panels
Q
1 Supply and install an automatic fixed type fire extinguishing and suppression system using
clean agent (People safe gas - FM200 or NOVEC -123 or similar QCD approved) for all the
MCC/MV panels.
2 The automatic capsular type fire extinguishing system shall have the required UL (USA)/FM
/CE (Europe)/ or LPCB or CSIRO (Austr) and Qatar Civil Defence approvals.
3 The system shall consist in individual capsules installed in each column compartments.
4 The system shall be direct release–low pressure using suitable polymer tubing as fire
detection and fire extinguishing delivery system. The tubing shall rupture when exposed to
the flame at 100 Degree C.
5 A local indication shall be provided by means of a pressure gauge for each system. A remote
indication shall be provided for each system in the common alarm anunciator panel.
6 The system shall have a common anunciator panel installed in the same electrical room.
7 Common alarm from the capsular system common anunciator panel shall be transmitted to
SCADA to indicate that the gas has been released.
8 A lock-off system shall be provided for use when maintenance is carried out and suitable
warning notices shall be provided.
9 All control panels (such as but not limited to: MCC , MV panels, PFCC, synchronising DG
14
panels, stand-alone VFD‟s and Electronic Soft Starters panels) shall be provided with the
above mentioned automatically operated Capsular type fire extinguishing and suppression
20
system.
10 The system shall have successful operation installations in Qatar for a minimum 5 years in
s
substantial number of operational installations in similar applications.
rd
11 The manufacturer of the capsular type fire extinguishing system shall provide the design
da
installation and warranty of the complete capsular type fire extinguishing system.
12 Spares cylinders and components shall be provided in a quantity no less that 10% installed.
an
13 The system shall include permanent notices to warn the personnel of the presence of the
St
system and to provide instructions on its use and detailing the actions to be taken in an
emergency and after the fire has been extinguished.
n
14 The gas discharged shall disconnect the MCC main incomer, disconnect the AC and shall
io
initiate an alarm in SCADA control Room.

ct
15 The Contractor shall provide written confirmation from the MCC manufacturer of his approval
of the Extinguishing design and installation and confirmation that the installation does not
ru
contravene any of his MCC design requirements or certifications.

st
16 A discharge test shall be carried out on site and the Contractor shall provide all test
on
equipment and clean agent as necessary to carry out the site test.
C
ar
END OF PART
at
Q
Part 05: Testing and Commissioning
5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................................ 2

5.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
5.1.1 Scope of Work 2
5.1.2 References 2
5.1.3 Definitions 2
5.2 TESTING, START-UP AND COMMISIONING .............................................. 3
5.2.1 General 3
14
5.3 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 4
20
5.3.1 General 4
5.3.2 System Spare Parts 4
s
5.3.3 System Test Equipment 4
rd
5.4 TRAINING ...................................................................................................... 5
da
5.4.1 General 5
5.4.2 System Supervision Training 5
an
5.4.3 Other Staff Training 5
5.5 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................ 6
St
5.5.1 Record Drawings 6

n
5.5.2 Test Records 6

io
ct
ru
st
on
C
ar
at
Q
5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope of Work
1 This Part specifies the requirement for the testing and commissioning of fire alarm systems,
fire protection systems and fire fighting systems.
2 Related Sections are as follows:
14
Section 1 General
20
5.1.2 References
s
rd
BS 5839 ......................Fire detection and alarm systems in buildings
da
5.1.3 Definitions
an
1 Test: To determine quantitative performance of systems or components thereof.
St
2 Adjust: To regulate the specified rates, parameters at the terminal equipment.

n
io
3 Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system.

ct
4 Procedure: Standardised approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield

ru
reproducible results.
st
5 Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system.
on
6 Main: Pipe containing the system’s major fluid flow.

C
7 Sub-main: Pipe containing part of the system’s capacity and serving two or more branch
mains.
ar
8 Branch Main: Pipe serving two or more terminals.

at
Q
9 Branch: Pipe serving a single terminal.
1 The Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel and equipment required to commission
the various items of plant and equipment comprising the various systems included in the
Works.
2 Any specific requirements relating to the commissioning of each system shall be carried out
as detailed in the Project Documentation. All costs associated with providing the
requirements shall be included within the Contractor’s rates.
3 Both the installation and the commissioning activities shall be undertaken as a single
continuous operation. Upon completion of the installation activity, the Contractor shall test,
start-up, commission and hand over the system.
5.2 TESTING, START-UP AND COMMISIONING
5.2.1 General
1 The Engineer shall be present at the tests and be at liberty to participate in them. Such
participation shall not relive the Contractor of his responsibilities for carrying out the tests
satisfactorily.
14
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing all the components of the
20
system. Such components shall include, but not limited to, the following:
(a) detectors
s
rd
(b) call points
(c) alarms
da
(d) ancillary devices an
(e) fire controller equipment and associated devices
(f) auxiliary equipment
St
(g) operating and control software.

n
3 The fire controller and associated devices and modules shall be tested in accordance with
io
the guidelines set out in BS 5839: Pt 1 and the testing instructions provided by the
ct
manufacturer.
ru
4 The Contractor shall start up and operate the system for a trial period to ensure that it
operates correctly. The duration of the trial period shall be as stated in the Project
st
Documentation.
on
5 The Contractor shall test all performance of the completed system, including the software, to
ensure that it operates in accordance with the requirements of the Specification, all relevant
C
standards ad the manufacturer’s recommendations.

ar
6 The Contractor shall undertake an audibility test of the alarms. The duration and performance
at
assessment criteria shall be determined on-site by the Engineer unless otherwise stated in
the Project Documentation.
Q
7 The Contractor shall start-up the system, or parts thereof, and make the necessary
adjustments to ensure correct functioning.
8 The Contractor shall at his own expense carry out alterations to the system if the testing fails
to demonstrate the satisfactory nature of the system, or parts thereof.
9 The Engineer shall call for further tests when such alterations have been made and his
decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final. The cost of all such further
testing shall be at the Contractors own expense.
5.3 MAINTENANCE
5.3.1 General
1 The Contractor shall submit complete details of all materials and labour required to maintain
the system in correct working order. The Contractor shall also include details of the testing
procedures that need to be carried out and specify a maintenance schedule.
5.3.2 System Spare Parts
1 The Contractor shall provide a detailed list of the system spare parts that should be kept on-
14
site for maintenance of the system. The system spare parts which should be considered for
inclusion in the list include the following:
20
(a) heat detectors
s
(b) smoke detectors
rd
(c) flame detectors
da
(d) call points
(e) alarms
an
(f) beacons
St
(g) door retention units
(h) fuses
n
(i) circuit breakers.

io
2 The quantity of each of spare part kept on-site shall be sufficient to last for the duration of the
ct
maintenance period and in addition, for a further period of two (2) years unless otherwise
ru
stated elsewhere in the Project Documentation.

st
3 Details of the system spare parts that are to be kept on-site for maintenance of the system
on
shall be stated in the Operations and Maintenance Manual.
4 The Contractor shall guarantee the availability of all system spares for a period of not less
C
than ten (10) years.

ar
5.3.3 System Test Equipment

at
1 The Contractor shall provide a detailed list of system test equipment and consumables that
Q
should be kept on-site for maintenance of the system. The system test equipment and
consumables which should be considered for inclusion in the list include the following:
(a) detector head removal tool

(b) detector base skirt removal tool
(c) call point testing tool
(d) detector test smoke canister
(e) detector test adapter
(f) aerosol dispensing tube
(g) spare log book.
2 The quantity of each of spare part kept on-site
3 The quantity of each item of test equipment required and the quantity of each type of
consumables required shall be sufficient to last for the duration of the maintenance period
and in addition, for a further period of two (2) years unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the
Project Documentation.
4 Details of the system test equipment and consumables that are to be kept on-site for
maintenance of the system shall be stated in the Operations and Maintenance Manual
5 The Contractor shall guarantee the availability of all system test equipment and consumables
14
for a period of not less than ten (10) years.
20
5.4 TRAINING
5.4.1 General
s
rd
1 The Contractor shall provide details of the training required by personnel to operate and
da
maintain the fire detection and alarm system.
2 The Contractor shall provide two levels of training:

an
(a) system supervision training
St
(b) other staff training.

n
5.4.2 System Supervision Training

io
1 System supervision training shall include technical training sessions and on-site training
ct
given during installation and commissioning of the system.

ru
2 An experienced and competent engineer familiar with the fire system being installed shall
st
give system supervision training.

on
3 The scope of training provided shall depend on the type, size and complexity of the system.
C
4 The Contractor shall initially provided technical training in all aspects of the system. The
trainee shall then be given full instructions in the use, operation and maintenance of the
ar
system. This shall include instruction in the procedures to be followed in the event of fire and
false alarms, routine maintenance and testing procedures, and how to keep the Log Book.
at
5.4.3 Other Staff Training

Q
1 Other staff training shall include training sessions provided on-site after hand over of the
system.
2 An experienced and competent engineer familiar with the fire system installed shall give the
training sessions.
3 The scope of training provided shall include full operating instructions in the use of the fire
system. This shall include instruction in the procedures to be followed in the event of fire and
false alarms.
5.5 SUBMITTALS
5.5.1 Record Drawings
1 The Contractor shall submit record drawings of installed fire alarm systems, fire protection
systems, fire fighting systems including equipment data in accordance with the relevant
provisions of Section 1, General.
2 Notwithstanding the foregoing, the drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:
(a) arrangement drawings of each complete installation to a scale of not less than 1:50
14
(b) outline dimensioned drawings of each of the principal items of plant; each be
accompanied by a schedule with full particulars of fittings, instruments and
20
components
(c) sectional drawings of each of the major items of plant with parts named and
s
numbered to facilitate maintenance and overhauls; these drawings shall also show the
rd
type of fit and running clearance for fitted and running parts and with them shall be
included such detailed workshop drawings as may be necessary for the manufacture
da
of replacement components during the working lifetime of the plant
an
(d) electrical, hydraulic and operational diagrams as may be necessary.
5.5.2 Test Records

St
1 The format of recording tests shall be agreed with the Engineer. The Engineer shall be
n
present at the tests and be at liberty to participate in them.

io
2 The Contractor shall make all records during the test and on completion thereof, shall provide
ct
the Engineer with a Test Report.

ru
3 Test Reports shall be arranged and collated in a logical order. This data shall form a
st
permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting and
commissioning.
on
4 Test Records shall comply with the relevant provisions of Section 1, General.
C
END OF PART
ar
at
Q

Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Requirements

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Requirements

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QCS 2014 Section 09: Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Page 1

Part 01: General

1.2.6 Equipment Bases and Bedplates 16

1.2.8 Safety Guards 16

1.2.9 Drive Units 16

1.2.12 Electric Motors 18

1.2.13 Pressure Gauges 18

1.2.15 Painting and Protective Coatings 19

1.2.17 Metal Plating 19

1.1 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING .................................................... 20

1.2.20 Inspection During Installation 20

1.1.2 Related Works

1 The following standards or revised/updated versions are referred to in this Part:

BS 89,.........................(IEC 51) Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring

BS 142,.......................Electrical protection relays

BS 159,.......................High voltage busbars and connections

BS 162,.......................Electrical power switchgear and associated apparatus

BS 449,.......................The use of structural steel in building

BS EN 1561, .............(ISO 185) Flake graphite cast iron

BS 4142, ....................(ISO 1996/2/3) Method of rating industrial noise affecting mixed

BS EN ISO 9000, ......Quality management and quality assurance standards

BS EN 60439, ............Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies

BS EN 60947, ............Low voltage switchgear and control gear

BS EN 10084, ............Case hardening steels. Technical delivery conditions

BS ISO 10816, Part 1,

AWS D1.1, ................Steel structure welding code

List of „Approved Suppliers‟ prepared by the Public Works Authority

14 days after Contract

Programme (4) 7 days

60 days after Contract

Manufacturing programme 30 days before start of

Shipping and delivery

Material and (4)

30 days after approval

supporting justifications, with technical references.

4 Material and Product Data

(i) date of shipping, arrival at port and on site

unloading requirements shall be stated.

(i) approval of materials and equipment shall be based on latest manufacturer‟s

(ii) complete and detailed information of all materials and equipment to be

equipment, maintenance, access requirements and loadings due to equipment

schedules, cable schedules, loop diagrams, piping and instrumentation diagrams,

arrangement and installation of the works.

the Project Specification.

7 Testing and Commissioning Submittals

(i) description of temporary procedure facilities, including drawings and sketches

devices as required, types conforming to the approved procedure plans. All

pressures, head differentials, duration of runs, instrument readings, voltage

information, as applicable, and in accordance with approved test procedures

indication, data and time.

8 Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions - General

compartments and the remote controls

(d) detailed equipment description

(h) spare parts

operation on issue of the PCC.

(xii) parts lists shall be included for identification of replacement items

numbers relating to power circuit diagrams

networks, systems etc.

included in a box at the bottom right hand corner of each drawing.

1.1.5 Quality Standards

1.1.6 Manufacturer’s Experience

1.1.7 Factory Inspection

the Engineer or his representative.